_USER MANUAL

V E R S I O N 6 .3

be dynamic ®
OLGA®, OLGA® Online, DRILLBENCH®, MEPO®, IPOS®, edpm®, be dynamic®
and Academy of Petroleum Dynamics® are registered trademarks of SPT Group.

PVTsim is a registered trademark of Calsep.

OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1

Background ............................................................................................................................................ 2
OLGA 6 .................................................................................................................................................. 2
OLGA as a strategic tool ........................................................................................................................ 3
OLGA Model Basics .............................................................................................................................. 3
How to use in general ............................................................................................................................ 4
Threaded Execution ............................................................................................................................... 9
Applications.......................................................................................................................................... 10

Chapter 2 General Input Structure ......................................................................................................... 13

Simulation description .......................................................................................................................... 14

Simulation model ................................................................................................................................. 19
OPC Server.......................................................................................................................................... 22

Chapter 3 OLGA Models ........................................................................................................................ 23

Methods & Assumptions, Limitations and How to Use............................................................................ 23

2nd Order Scheme............................................................................................................................... 24

Blackoil ................................................................................................................................................. 28
Complex Fluid ...................................................................................................................................... 37
Newtonian fluid .................................................................................................................................... 38
Compositional Tracking ....................................................................................................................... 39
Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 46
Corrosion ............................................................................................................................................. 77
Drilling Fluid ......................................................................................................................................... 81
Elastic walls ......................................................................................................................................... 84
Hydrate Check ..................................................................................................................................... 87
Hydrate Kinetics ................................................................................................................................... 91
Inhibitor Tracking ................................................................................................................................. 93
Leak ..................................................................................................................................................... 95
Near-Wellbore ...................................................................................................................................... 97
Phase Split Node ................................................................................................................................. 99
Pig ...................................................................................................................................................... 101
Process Equipment ............................................................................................................................ 107
Single Component ............................................................................................................................. 145
Slug Tracking ..................................................................................................................................... 152
Slug Tuning ........................................................................................................................................ 157
Source ................................................................................................................................................ 158
Steady State Processor ..................................................................................................................... 163
SteamWater-HC................................................................................................................................. 165
Thermal Components ........................................................................................................................ 170
FEMTherm ......................................................................................................................................... 173
Bundle ................................................................................................................................................ 181
Line .................................................................................................................................................... 183
Thermal Computations ...................................................................................................................... 184
Phase changing materials ................................................................................................................. 186
Tracer Tracking .................................................................................................................................. 188
Transmitter ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Tuning ................................................................................................................................................ 191
Water ................................................................................................................................................. 192
Wax .................................................................................................................................................... 198

i
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL Table of Contents

Well .................................................................................................................................................... 204

Zone ................................................................................................................................................... 213
Restrictions and Limitations ............................................................................................................... 215

Chapter 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 221

Keyword Description.............................................................................................................................. 221

ANNULUS .......................................................................................................................................... 222

AMBIENTDATA ................................................................................................................................. 223
BLACKOILCOMPONENT .................................................................................................................. 229
BLACKOILFEED ................................................................................................................................ 230
BLACKOILOPTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 231
BRANCH ............................................................................................................................................ 232
CASE ................................................................................................................................................. 232
CHECKVALVE ................................................................................................................................... 233
COMPOPTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 234
COMPRESSOR ................................................................................................................................. 236
CONTROLLER .................................................................................................................................. 237
CORROSION ..................................................................................................................................... 269
DRILLINGFLUID ................................................................................................................................ 271
DTCONTROL (on caselevel) ............................................................................................................. 273
DTCONTROL (on flowpath level) ...................................................................................................... 273
FEED ................................................................................................................................................. 274
FILES ................................................................................................................................................. 274
FLOWPATH ....................................................................................................................................... 275
FLUID ................................................................................................................................................. 276
FLUIDBUNDLE .................................................................................................................................. 278
GEOMETRY ...................................................................................................................................... 280
HEATEXCHANGER .......................................................................................................................... 281
HEATTRANSFER .............................................................................................................................. 282
HYDRATECHECK ............................................................................................................................. 285
HYDRATEKINETICS ......................................................................................................................... 286
HYDRATECURVE ............................................................................................................................. 288
INITIALCONDITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 289
INTEGRATION .................................................................................................................................. 292
LEAK .................................................................................................................................................. 293
LOSS ................................................................................................................................................. 295
MATERIAL ......................................................................................................................................... 297
NEARWELLSOURCE ........................................................................................................................ 298
NODE ................................................................................................................................................. 299
OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................................... 305
OUTPUT ............................................................................................................................................ 307
OUTPUTDATA (on flowpath level) .................................................................................................... 308
PHASESPLITNODE .......................................................................................................................... 309
PIG ..................................................................................................................................................... 311
PIPE ................................................................................................................................................... 313
PLOT .................................................................................................................................................. 314
POSITION .......................................................................................................................................... 315
PROFILE............................................................................................................................................ 316
PROFILEDATA .................................................................................................................................. 317
PUMP ................................................................................................................................................. 318
RESTART .......................................................................................................................................... 322
SEPARATOR ..................................................................................................................................... 323
SERVERDATA................................................................................................................................... 326
SERVEROPTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 328
SHAPE ............................................................................................................................................... 329

ii
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL Table of Contents

SINGLEOPTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 330
SLUGTRACKING............................................................................................................................... 331
TABLE ................................................................................................................................................ 333
TIMESERIES ..................................................................................................................................... 334
TOOLJOINT ....................................................................................................................................... 336
TRANSMITTER ................................................................................................................................. 337
TRACERFEED................................................................................................................................... 338
TREND ............................................................................................................................................... 339
TRENDDATA ..................................................................................................................................... 340
TRENDDATA for BUNDLE ................................................................................................................ 341
TUNING ............................................................................................................................................. 342
VALVE ............................................................................................................................................... 344
ZONE ................................................................................................................................................. 346
WALL ................................................................................................................................................. 348
WATEROPTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 350
WAXDEPOSITION............................................................................................................................. 353
WELL ................................................................................................................................................. 357

Chapter 5 ............................................................................................................................................... 371

Data Files .............................................................................................................................................. 371

Compressor data file .......................................................................................................................... 372

Wax table file ..................................................................................................................................... 374
Hydrate curve definition file ............................................................................................................... 375
OLGA Rocx ........................................................................................................................................ 375
Fluid Properties File ........................................................................................................................... 375
Feed file for compositional tracking ................................................................................................... 375
PVT properties for non-existing phase .............................................................................................. 375
Pump Data Files ................................................................................................................................ 396

Chapter 6 ............................................................................................................................................... 401

References ............................................................................................................................................ 401

Referenced papers ............................................................................................................................ 402

Non-referenced papers ...................................................................................................................... 405

Appendix A ............................................................................................................................................ 407

Complete list of output variables .......................................................................................................... 407

Output variables ................................................................................................................................. 408

Boundary Variables............................................................................................................................ 409
Branch Variables................................................................................................................................ 413
Bundle Variables ................................................................................................................................ 415
Check valve Variables ....................................................................................................................... 415
Compositional Variables .................................................................................................................... 416
Compositional slugtracking Variables ................................................................................................ 420
Compressor Variables ....................................................................................................................... 421
Controller Variables ........................................................................................................................... 421
Corrosion Variables ........................................................................................................................... 422
Drilling Variables ................................................................................................................................ 423
Global Variables................................................................................................................................. 425
Heat exchanger Variables ................................................................................................................. 426
Hydrate kinetics Variables ................................................................................................................. 427
Pig Variables ...................................................................................................................................... 428
Pump Variables.................................................................................................................................. 429
Separator Variables ........................................................................................................................... 430

iii
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL Table of Contents

SlugTracking Variables ...................................................................................................................... 432

Source Variables................................................................................................................................ 437
SteamAndSingle Variables ................................................................................................................ 438
TracerTracking Variables ................................................................................................................... 439
Valve Variables .................................................................................................................................. 441
Volume Variables ............................................................................................................................... 442
Waxdeposition Variables ................................................................................................................... 446
Well Variables .................................................................................................................................... 448

Appendix B ............................................................................................................................................ 449

List of Units and Conversion Factors .................................................................................................... 449

iv
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 1

Introduction

1
 Background OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Background
OLGA is the industry standard tool for transient simulation of multiphase petroleum production. The
purpose of this manual is to assist the user in the preparation of the input data for an OLGA simulation.

In this manual you can find

• a general introduction to OLGA

• an overview of the required and the optional input to OLGA. It also describes in some detail
different simulation options such as wax deposition, corrosion etc.
• a detailed description of all input data and the required fluid property tables
• a description of the output

The sample cases presented with the installation of OLGA are intended to illustrate important program
options and typical simulation output.

OLGA comes in a basic version with a number of optional modules; FEMTherm, Multiphase Pumps,
Corrosion, Wells, Slug Tracking, Wax Deposition, Inhibitor Tracking, Compositional Tracking, Single
Component, Tuning, Hydrate Kinetics and Complex Fluid.

In addition there are a number of additional programs like the OLGA GUI and the FEMThermViewer for
preparation of input data and visualisation of results.

These optional modules and additional programs are available to the user according to the user's
licensing agreement with SPT Group.

OLGA 6

OLGA 6 is the latest version in a continuous development which was started by the Institute for Energy
Research (IFE) in 1980. The oil industry started using OLGA in 1984 when Statoil had supported its
development for 3 years. Data from the large scale flow loop at SINTEF, and later from the medium
scale loop at IFE, were essential for the development of the multiphase flow correlations and also for
the validation of OLGA. Oil companies have since then supported the development and provided field
data to help manage uncertainty, predominantly within the OLGA Verification and Improvement Project
(OVIP). OLGA has been commercially available since the SPT Group started marketing it in 1990.

OLGA is used for networks of wells, flowlines and pipelines and process equipment, covering the
production system from bottom hole into the production system. OLGA comes with a steady state pre-
processor included which is intended for calculating initial values to the transient simulations, but which
also is useful for traditional steady state parameter variations. However, the transient capabilities of
OLGA dramatically increase the range of applicability compared with steady state simulators.

2
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OLGA as a strategic tool

OLGA is applied for engineering throughout field life from conceptual studies to support of operations.
However the application has been extended to be an integral part of operator training simulators, used
for making operating procedures, training of operators and check out of control systems. Further, OLGA
is frequently embedded in on-line systems for monitoring of pipeline conditions and forecasting and
planning of operations.

OLGA OPC Server enables integration to other simulators and interfaces such as dynamic process
simulators (HYSYS, DYNSIM, UNISIM and INDISS). This allows for making integrated engineering
simulators and operator training simulators studying the process from bottom hole all the way through
the process facility in a single high fidelity model.

Note that the OLGA flow correlation has been implemented in all major steady state simulators
providing consistent results moving between different simulators.

OLGA Model Basics

OLGA is a three-fluid model, i.e. separate continuity equations are applied for the gas, for the oil (or
condensate) and water liquids and also for oil (or condensate) and water droplets. Gas is always
assumed to be lighter than oil and water in OLGA, but oil may be either lighter or heavier than water
[1].

These fluids may be coupled through interfacial mass transfer. Three momentum equations are used;
one for each of the continuous liquid phases (oil/condensate and water) and one for the combination of
gas with liquid droplets. The velocity of any liquid droplets entrained in the gas phase is given by a slip
relation. One mixture energy equation is applied; assuming that all phases are at the same temperature.
This yields seven conservation equations and one equation of state to be solved: the seven

3
 How to use in general OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

conservation equations are three for mass, three for momentum, and one for energy, while the equation
of state is for pressure.

Two basic flow regime classes are recognised; distributed and separated flow. The former comprises
bubble and slug flow [2] , the latter stratified and annular mist flow.
stratified flow

SEPARATED Stratified

(Annular

DISTRIBUTED Dispersed bubble flow

Slug

hydrodynamic slug flow

Figure A Flow patterns in horizontal flow

Transition between the regime classes is determined by the program on the basis of a minimum slip
concept combined with additional criteria.

To close the system of equations, fluid properties, boundary and initial conditions are required.

The equations are linearised and a sequential solution scheme is applied. The pressure and
temperature calculations are de-coupled i.e. current pressure is based on previous temperature.

The semi-implicit time integration implemented allows for relatively long time steps, orders of
magnitudes longer than those of an explicit method (which would be limited by the Courant Friedrich
Levy criterion based on the speed of sound).

The numerical error is corrected for over a period of time. The error manifests as an error in local fluid
volume (as compared to the relevant pipe volume).
[1] Note that the OLGA model has only been verified and tuned for fluids where oil is lighter than water.
[2] In standard OLGA a slug unit model is applied which calculates average liquid hold-up and pressure,
but which does not give any details about individual slugs. To follow individual slugs through the system
the slug tracking module must be applied.

How to use in general

Numerics
OLGA applies one global time-step for the time integration and there is an automatic time-step control
based on the limitation that a fluid particle should not spend less than one time-step on passing through
any numerical section length of a pipe (the Courant Friedrich Levy (CFL) criterion based on the fluid
velocity). The user controls the time integration by specifying simulation period in time, time-step

4
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

parameters such as initial time-step and maximum and minimum time-step values. The latter overrules
the automatic control. There is also an option for using the second-derivative of pressure as a time step
controlling criterion. Some functions in OLGA, e.g. slug-tracking, take control of the time-stepping in
order to ensure a successful simulation.

The spatial integration is performed on a user-defined grid. There are tools available to facilitate the
gridding. There are no formal limitations on the numerical section lengths, but it is considered good
practice to keep all neighbour section length ratios between 0.5 and 2:

0.5 ≤ Δxi/Δxi+1 ≤ 2 for all i

Additionally it is recommended that each pipe should have at least two sections.

Due to the numerical solution scheme, OLGA is particularly well suited for simulating rather slow mass
flow transients. This is important for the simulation of long transport lines and thermal calculations,
where typical simulation times in the range of hours to several days, and sometimes years, will require
long time steps, to obtain efficient use of the computer.

OLGA is also being used successfully for fast transients such as water hammer and pressure surges in
general. Certain precautions w.r.t. spatial grid and time-stepping may be needed in order to keep the
numerical error within acceptable limits.

Critical flow calculations are performed in the OLGA valve model, only. A valve with cross section equal
to the pipe should then be positioned on e.g. a pipe outlet if choked flow is expected.

The de-coupling of temperature from pressure would normally give a pressure wave propagation
velocity in gas which would be about 15% too low. However, a quasi implicit correction of temperature
reduces this error considerably.

Critical flow calculations are performed in the OLGA valve model, only. A valve with cross section equal
to the pipe should then be positioned on e.g. a pipe outlet if choked flow is expected.

Temperature
OLGA is particularly well suited for sophisticated thermal simulations. Since OLGA is one-dimensional
(calculates along the pipe axis) any 2 and 3-dimensional effects must be modelled explicitly. The basic
OLGA thermal model calculates the inner wall heat transfer coefficient. The built-in correlations are valid
for natural- and forced convection and also for the transition between them. Flow pattern is accounted
for. The user may specify pipe walls with material properties, including emissivity to account for
radiation, and must give the ambient properties, i.e. temperature and heat transfer coefficient. Based on
this the fluid temperature is calculated.

Special features like Annulus, Solid- and Fluid bundles make it possible to simulate very complex
structures of pipe-in-pipe and parallel pipes within structures of various solid materials. Taking into
account that temperature is calculated along the pipes
one obtains a combination of two-dimensional convective
heat transfer within 3-dimensional heat conducting
structures.

Solid bundle cross section of 4 vertical tubes within rock –

neighbour tubes are 2.5 m apart. The black "line" is a
temperature iso-line. One clearly sees how the area
between the tubes is subject to inter-tube heating.
Initial Conditions

5
How to use in general OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The requirement for initial conditions is a fundamental difference between a transient and a steady state
model, e.g. the results of a steady state calculation may serve as the initial condition (at t=0 ) for a
transient simulation.

With OLGA the user decides, and later specifies in the input, whether the simulation is to start from a
user defined condition (for instance a specific shut-in condition), or from a steady state multiphase
flowing situation calculated by the program. The steady state pre-processor in OLGA can be used to
provide good initial values for most production situations.

In addition, the user may specify the initial condition in detail, for example for a shut-in system, by
defining the initial values for pressures, temperatures, mass flow and gas fractions. Tools for
interpolation are available, for filling in the initial values in all numerical sections of the system.

Finally, the restart capability may be used to start a simulation from conditions saved during a previous
simulation.

Boundary Conditions
The boundary conditions define the interface between the simulated system and its surroundings and
they are crucial to the relevance to any type of simulations. For a network of pipelines and wells there
are several options available, but basically flow rate or pressure, in addition to temperature and gas-
liquid ratio must be specified at each flow path inlet and outlet boundary (at least one pressure must be
given).

The boundary conditions, e.g. a pressure, can be given as time series to model a certain transient
situation.

Moreover, the ambient temperature along the flow paths and ambient heat transfer coefficient (film heat
transfer resistance) must be specified and OLGA provides a number of options for this, including
water and air velocity profiles and seasonal variations of temperature.

Inflow from reservoirs to well-bores defines the most important boundary in a petroleum production
network. In addition to various well-inflow correlations and options OLGA comes with an implicit
coupling facility to the OLGA Rocx module which is a complete 3-D, 3-phase reservoir simulator.

Separators, pumps, compressors and valves, all with controllers, can be modelled to improve the
relevance of the outlet boundaries.

Fluid properties
The necessary fluid properties (gas/liquid mass fraction, densities, viscosities, enthalpies etc.) are
normally assumed to be functions of temperature and pressure only, and have to be supplied by the
user as tables in a special input file. Thus, the total composition of the multiphase mixture is assumed to
be constant both in time and space for a given part of the network. The user may specify different fluid
property tables for each flow path, but has to ensure that a realistic fluid composition has been used to
make a table for a flow path with a fluid mixture coming from two or more pipeline branches merging
upstream.

6
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Fluid 2
Fluid 3

Fluid 1

It is also possible to perform simulations using Compositional Tracking, where the basic information on
the chemical components is provided in a separate text file and then OLGA calculates the fluid
properties internally with PVT routines provided by Calsep A/S. This means that the total composition
may vary both in time and space, and that no special considerations are needed for the downstream
system.

Special models are also available for tracking hydrate inhibitors like MEG and methanol.

OLGA is generally able to handle multi component fluid systems, but there are some restrictions and
assumptions in the use of fluids. For a more detailed description, please see Limitations in the use of
fluid properties.

Rheology
The standard OLGA flow models assume a Newtonian rheology (viscosities are well defined fluid
characteristics).

Dispersions and non-Newtonian behavior are quite common in petroleum production and OLGA
provides several semi-empirical models to account for more complex rheologies. In some cases the
model takes care of the rheology with a minimum of user interference (e.g. for oil-water dispersions and
also for waxy oils). For other systems the user needs to specify the various parameters for such fluids to
describe e.g. Bingham or power law non-Newtonian behavior.

7
How to use in general OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Network
In OLGA the network comprises flow paths coupled with nodes which have a volume. General networks
with closed loops can then be modelled, see below. The flow paths have a user defined direction but the
flow is invariant to direction as such and any fluid phase may flow co-currently or counter-currently with
respect to the pre-defined direction at any time and position.

Pipe-bends are not accounted for as such (except for differences in static head). The user may apply
pressure loss coefficients at boundaries between numerical sections.

Equipment is positioned on the flow path – usually on a pipe-boundary. However, the separator in
OLGA is a network component similar to a node.

Controllers are specified as integral parts of the simulation model and they have their own
network formalism.

8
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Threaded Execution
Pipe sections belonging to the same branch may be updated in parallel. Suppose a branch has 100
sections, and that two threads are available to the OLGA engine: Section 1 and section 51 will be
updated simultaneously, then section 2 and section 52 are updated, and so on. Depending on the
computer hardware, this method can drastically reduce the time OLGA takes to advance one time-step.
Normally, you do not need to change the default settings of neither OLGA nor your operating system.
Parallel updating of segments is usually activated in the OLGA engine if your PC supports it.

Controlling the degree of parallelism

The Windows operating system decides how many threads will be used. If your PC is equipped with a
quad-core CPU, typically four threads will be simultaneously running to update four sections in parallel.
Is your CPU a single-core Intel Xeon processor with "hyper-threading" (HT), probably two engine
threads will be used. It is possible to overrule the choice of the operating system by setting the
environment variable OMP_NUM_THREADS; use Windows' Control Panel to do this. However, the
preferred way to change the degree of parallelisation is do so from the OLGA menu system. Setting the
value here takes precedence over the OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable.

A situation where you might want to reduce the number of threads, arise if you execute parametric
studies. Given that your license permits, it would be preferable to spend the CPU's cores on
simultaneous simulations, rather than on speeding up each simulation in the study. Another situation
could be when you don't want OLGA to consume all your computing power, e.g., if you want to write a
report while OLGA is working.

Most large cases will benefit from the parallelisation. Still, please note that some of your PC's cache
memory will be used for forking and joining the threads, and doing the necessary book-keeping. As a
consequence, special cases will run faster with a single engine thread.

Parallel speed-up
The parallelisation encompasses heat calculations in section walls, updating fluid properties and
flashing, and, most importantly, calls to the flow model which decides friction factors, liquid holdup and
the flow regime. If the flow model calculations dominate the overall simulation, the utilization of the
CPUs is most efficient.

Monitoring the OLGA process

The Task Manager can be used to check how OLGA loads your CPU. When the number of engine
threads equals the number of cores (or equals two on a single core HT-CPU) you should see the CPU
usage being clearly over fifty percent when OLGA is simulating.

In the Task Manager's list of processes it is possible to view the number of threads for each process.
With 1 engine thread, it uses a total of 5 threads in batch mode, and 8 threads while running under
control of the GUI. With 2 engine threads allowed, the task manager would display 6 threads for a batch
run and 9 threads for a GUI run; with 4 engine threads the total number of threads would be 8 and 11,
respectively.

9
 Applications OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Applications
When the resources become more scarce and complicated to get to careful design and optimisation of
the entire production system is vital for investments and revenues. The dimensions and layout of wells
and pipelines must be optimised for variable operational windows defined by changing reservoir
properties and limitations given by environment and processing facilities.

OLGA is being used for design and engineering, mapping of operational limits and to establish
operational procedures. OLGA is also used for safety analysis to assess the consequences of
equipment malfunctions and operational failures.

REFERENCES contain a list of papers describing the OLGA model and its applications.

Design and Engineering

OLGA is a powerful instrument for the design engineer when considering different concepts for
hydrocarbon production and transport - whether it is new developments or modifications of existing
installations.

OLGA should be used in the various design phases i.e. Conceptual, FEED and detailed design and the
following issues should be addressed:

• Design
o Sizes of tubing and pipes
o Insulation and coverage
o Inhibitors for hydrate / wax
o Liquid inventory management / pigging
o Slug mitigation
o Processing capacity (Integrated simulation)

• Focus on maximizing the production window during field life

o Initial
o Mid-life
o Tail

• Accuracy / Uncertainty management

o Input accuracy
o Parameter sensitivity

• Risk and Safety

Normally the engineering challenge becomes more severe when accounting for tail-end production with
reduced pressure, increasing water-cut and gas-oil ratio. This increase the slugging potential while fluid
temperature reduces which in turn increase the need for inhibitors and the operational window is
generally reduced.

Pressure
Operational
Water Cut Slugging window

Gas/Oil ratio Temperature

Inhibitors

10
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Operation
ƒ OLGA should be used to establish
o Operational procedures and limitations
o Emergency procedures
o Contingency plans

ƒ OLGA is also a very useful tool for operator training

o Training in flow assurance in general
o Practicing operational procedures
o Initial start up preparations

Some typical operational events suitable for OLGA simulations are discussed below.

Pipeline shut-down
If the flow in a pipeline for some reason has to be shut down, different procedures may be investigated.
The dynamics during the shut-down can be studied as well as the final conditions in the pipe. The liquid
content is of interest as well as the temperature evolution in the fluid at rest since the walls may cool the
fluid below a critical temperature where hydrates may start to form.

Pipeline blow-down
One of the primary strategies for hydrate prevention in case of a pipeline shut-down is to blow down.
The primary aim to reduce the pipeline pressure below the pressure where hydrates can form. The main
effects that can be studied are the liquid and gas rates during the blow-down, the time required and the
final pressure.

Pipeline start-up
The initial conditions of a pipeline to be started is either specified by the user or defined by a restart
from a shut-down case. The start-up simulation can determine the evolution of any accumulated liquid
slugs in the system. A start-up procedure is often sought whereby any terrain slugging is minimised or
altogether avoided. The slug tracking module is very useful in this regard.

In a network case a strategy for the start-up procedure of several merging flow lines could be
particularly important.

Change in production
Sometimes the production level or type of fluid will change during the lifetime of a reservoir. The
modification of the liquid properties due to the presence of water, is one of the important effects
accounted for in OLGA.

A controlled change in the production rate or an injection of another fluid is important cases to be
simulated. Of particular interest is the dynamics of network interactions e.g. how the transport line
operation is affected by flow rate changes in one of several merging flow lines.

Process equipment
Process equipment can be used to regulate or control the varying flow conditions in a multi-phase flow
line. This is of special interest in cases where slugging is to be avoided.

The process equipment simulated in OLGA includes critical- and sub-critical chokes with fixed or
controlled openings, check-valves, compressors with speed and anti- surge controllers, separators, heat
exchangers, pumps and mass sources and sinks.

11
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Pipeline pigging
OLGA can simulate the pigging of a pipeline. A user specified pig may be inserted in the pipeline in
OLGA at any time and place. Any liquid slugs that are created by the pig along the pipeline can be
followed in time. Of special interest is the determination of the size and velocity of a liquid slug leaving
the system ahead of a pig that has been inserted into a shut-down flowline.

Hydrate control
Hydrate prevention and control are important for flow assurance. Passive and active control strategies
can be investigated: Passive control is mainly achieved by proper insulation while there are several
options for active control which can be simulated with OLGA: Bundles, electrical heating, inhibition by
additives like MEG.

Wax deposition
In many production systems wax would tend to deposit on the pipe wall during production. The wax
deposition depends on the fluid composition and temperature. OLGA can model wax deposition as
function of time and location along the pipeline.

Tuning
Even if the OLGA models are sophisticated models made for conceptual studies and engineering will be
based on input and assumptions which are not 100% relevant for operations. Therefore OLGA is
equipped with a tuning module which can be used on-line and off-line to modify input parameters and
also critical model parameters to match field data.

Wells
- Flow stability e.g. permanent or temporary slugging, rate changes
- Artificial lift for production optimization
- Shut-in/start-up - water cut limit for natural flow
- Cross flow between layers under static conditions
- WAG injection
- Horizontal wells / Smart wells
- Well Clean-up and Kick-off
- Well Testing
- Well control and Work-over Solutions

Safety Analysis
Safety analysis is an important field of application of OLGA. OLGA is capable of describing propagation
of pressure fronts. For such cases the time step can be limited by the velocity of sound across the
shortest pipe section.

OLGA may be useful for safety analysis in the design phase of a pipeline project, such as the
positioning of valves, regulation equipment, measuring devices, etc. Critical ranges in pipe monitoring
equipment may be estimated and emergency procedures investigated.

Consequence analysis of possible accidents is another interesting application. The state of the pipeline
after a specified pipe rupture or after a failure in any process equipment can be determined using
OLGA.

Simulations with OLGA can also be of help when defining strategies for accident management, e.g. well
killing by fluid injection.

Finally it should be mentioned that the OLGA model is well suited for use with simulators designed for
particular pipelines and process systems. Apart from safety analysis and monitoring, such simulators
are powerful instruments in the training of operators.

12
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 2

General Input Structure

13
 Simulation description OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The OLGA simulator uses text files for describing the simulation model:

• .opi; generated and used by the OLGA GUI

• .inp; input format used by OLGA 5 and earlier versions
• .key; input format used by OLGA

The .key format has been introduced as the new input file format for the OLGA engine. The OLGA GUI
will automatically generate files in this format (with the extension .genkey). The .key format reflects the
network model described in the simulation model and should be the preferred format.

In addition to the simulation file, OLGA handles input in several other formats as described in Data files.

Simulation description
The input keywords are organised in Logical sections, with Case level at the top, followed by the
various network components and then the connections at the end.

Case level
Case level is defined as the global keywords specified outside of the network components and
connections. Case level keywords can be found in the CaseDefinition, Library, FA-models and Output
sections.

The following keywords must or can be defined at Case level:

• CaseDefinition; CASE, FILES, INTEGRATION, OPTIONS, DTCONTROL, RESTART

• Library; MATERIAL, WALL, SHAPE, TABLE, DRILLINGFLUID, HYDRATECURVE
• Compositional; COMPOPTIONS, FEED, BLACKOILOPTIONS, BLACKOILCOMPONENT,
BLACKOILFEED, SINGLEOPTIONS
• FA-models; CORROSION, FLUID, WATEROPTIONS, SLUGTRACKING, TUNING,
SLUGTUNING
• Output; OUTPUT, TREND, PROFILE, PLOT, OUTPUTDATA, TRENDDATA, PROFILEDATA
• Drilling; TOOLJOINT

CASE PROJECT="OLGA Manual", TITLE="Example case", AUTHOR="SPT Group AS"

INTEGRATION STARTTIME=0, ENDTIME=7200, DTSTART=0.1, MINDT=0.1, MAXDT=5
FILES PVTFILE=fluid.tab

MATERIAL LABEL=MAT-1, DENSITY=0.785E+04, CAPACITY=0.5E+03, CONDUCTIVITY=0.5E+02

WALL LABEL=WALL-1, THICKNESS=(0.9000E-02, 0.2E-01), MATERIAL=(MAT-1, MAT-1)

Network components
The network components are the major building blocks in the simulation network.

Each network component is enclosed within start (NETWORKCOMPONENT) and end

(ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT) tags as shown below. Each data group belonging to this network
component will be written within these tags.

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=FlowPath, TAG=FP_BRAN

...
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

The following network component keywords can be specified (see links for further details on each
component):

• FlowComponent;FLOWPATH, NODE

14
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

• ProcessEquipment;PHASESPLITNODE, SEPARATOR
• Controller;CONTROLLER
• ThermalComponent;ANNULUS, FLUIDBUNDLE, SOLIDBUNDLE

Flowpath
Piping
The flowpath can be divided into several pipes, which can have an inclination varying from the other
pipes in the flowpath. Each pipe can again be divided into sections as described above. All sections
defined within the same pipe must have the same diameter and inclination. Each pipe in the system can
also have a pipe wall consisting of layers of different materials.

The following keywords are used for Piping:

• BRANCH; Defines geometry and fluid labels.

• GEOMETRY; Defines starting point for flowpath.
• PIPE; Specifies end point or length and elevation of a pipe. Further discretization, diameter,
inner surface roughness, and wall name are specified.
• POSITION; Defines a named position for reference in other keywords.

BRANCH LABEL=BRAN-1, GEOMETRY=GEOM-1, FLUID=1

GEOMETRY LABEL=GEOM-1
PIPE LABEL=PIPE-1, DIAMETER=0.12, ROUGHNESS=0.28E-04, NSEGMENT=4, LENGTH=0.4E+03, ELEVATION=0,
WALL=WALL-1

Boundary&Initialconditions
For the solution of the flow equations, all relevant boundary conditions must be specified for all points in
the system where mass flow into or out of the system. Initial conditions at start up and parameters used
for calculating heat transfer must also be specified.

The following keywords are used for Boundary & Initial conditions:

• HEATTRANSFER; Definition of the heat transfer parameters.

• INITIALCONDITION; Defines initial values for flow, pressure, temperature and holdup.
INITIALCONDITIONS is not required when a steady state calculation is performed.
• NEARWELLSOURCE; Defines a near-wellbore source used together with OLGA Rocx.
• SOURCE; Defines a mass source with name, position, and data necessary for calculating the
mass flow into or out of the system. The source flow can be given by a time series or
determined by a controller.
• WELL; defines a well with name, position and flow characteristics.

HEATTRANSFER PIPE=ALL, HAMBIENT=6.5, TAMBIENT=6, HMININNERWALL=0.5E+03

SOURCE LABEL=SOUR-1-1, PIPE=1, SECTION=1, TIME=0, TEMPERATURE=62, GASFRACTION=-1,
TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=70 bara, DIAMETER=0.12, SOURCETYPE=PRESSUREDRIVEN

Process Equipment
In order to obtain a realistic simulation of a pipeline system, it is normally required to include some
process equipment in the simulation. OLGA supports a broad range of different types of process
equipment, as shown below.

It should be noted that the steady state preprocessor ignores the process equipment marked with (*) in
the list.

The following keywords are used for Process equipment:

15
 Simulation description OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

• CHECKVALVE (*); Defines name, position and allowed flow direction for a check valve.
• COMPRESSOR (*); Defines name, position and operating characteristics of a compressor.
• HEATEXCHANGER; Defines name, position and characteristic data for a heat exchanger.
• LOSS; Defines name, position and values for local pressure loss coefficients.
• LEAK; Defines the position of a leak in the system with leak area and back pressure. The leak
can also be connected to another flowpath to simulate gas lift etc.
• PUMP (*); Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump.
• TRANSMITTER (*); Defines a transmitter position.
• VALVE; Defines name, position and characteristic data for a choke or a valve.

VALVE LABEL=CHOKE-1-1, PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTIONBOUNDARY=4, DIAMETER=0.12, CD=0.7, TIME=0,

OPENING=1.0

Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.

The following keywords are used for Output:

• OUTPUT(DATA); Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
• PLOT; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the OLGA viewer file.
• PROFILE(DATA); Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile
plot file.
• TREND(DATA); Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot
file.

TRENDDATA PIPE=1, SECTION=1, VARIABLE=(PT bara, TM, HOLHL, HOLWT)

PROFILEDATA VARIABLE=(GT, GG, GL)

Node
Boundary&Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all node keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.

Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.

The following keywords are used for Output:

• OUTPUTDATA; Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_INLET

PARAMETERS LABEL=INLET, TYPE=CLOSED
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_OUTLET

PARAMETERS LABEL=OUTLET, GASFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=50 bara, TEMPERATURE=32, TIME=0,
TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, TYPE=PRESSURE, FLUID=1
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

16
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Phasesplitnode
Boundary&Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all phase split node keys. This keyword is hidden in
the GUI.

Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.

The following keywords are used for Output:

• OUTPUTDATA; Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

Separator
Boundary&Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all separator keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.

Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.

The following keywords are used for Output:

• OUTPUTDATA; Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

Controller
Boundary&Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all controller keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.

Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.

The following keywords are used for Output:

• OUTPUTDATA; Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=ManualController, TAG=SetPoint-1

PARAMETERS SETPOINT=(2:0.1,2:0.2,0.3), TIME=(0,2000,2010,4000,4010) s, STROKETIME=0.0,
MAXCHANGE=1.0
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

Annalus
Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all annulus keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.

17
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

AmbientConditions
• AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the Annulus ambient conditions.

AnnulusComponents
• COMPONENT; A component to place within the annulus definition.

Output
• PROFILEDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile plot
file.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

Fluidbundle
Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all fluid bundle keys. This keyword is hidden in the
GUI.

AmbientConditions
• AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the fluid bundle ambient conditions.

BundleComponents
• COMPONENT; A component to place within the fluid bundle definition.

Output
• PROFILEDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile plot
file.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

Solidbundle
Initialconditions
• PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all solid bundle keys. This keyword is hidden in the
GUI.

AmbientConditions
• AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the solid bundle ambient conditions.

BundleComponents
• COMPONENT; A component to place within the solid bundle definition.

Output
• PROFILEDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile plot
file.
• TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.

Connections
The CONNECTION keyword is used to couple network components, such as a node and a flowpath.

Each flowpath has an inlet and an outlet terminal that can be connected to a node terminal. Boundary
nodes (i.e. CLOSED, MASSFLOW, PRESSURE) has one terminal, while internal nodes has an arbitrary
number of terminals where flowpaths can be connected to.

18
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN INLET, NODE_INLET FLOWTERM_1)

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN OUTLET, NODE_OUTLET FLOWTERM_1)

Separator and PhaseSplitNode has special handling of terminals.

The CONNECTION keyword is also used for coupling signal components.

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN SOUR-1-1@INPSIG, SETPOINT-1 OUTSIG_1)

See also connecting the controllers for more information.

Example file
The keyword examples shown above can be combined to an OLGA .key file.

CASE PROJECT="OLGA Manual", TITLE="Example case", AUTHOR="SPT Group AS"

INTEGRATION STARTTIME=0, ENDTIME=7200, DTSTART=0.1, MINDT=0.1, MAXDT=5
FILES PVTFILE=fluid.tab

MATERIAL LABEL=MAT-1, DENSITY=0.785E+04, CAPACITY=0.5E+03, CONDUCTIVITY=0.5E+02

WALL LABEL=WALL-1, THICKNESS=(0.9000E-02, 0.2E-01), MATERIAL=(MAT-1, MAT-1)

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=FlowPath, TAG=FP_BRAN

BRANCH LABEL=BRAN-1, GEOMETRY=GEOM-1, FLUID=1
GEOMETRY LABEL=GEOM-1
PIPE LABEL=PIPE-1, DIAMETER=0.12, ROUGHNESS=0.28E-04, NSEGMENT=4, LENGTH=0.4E+03, ELEVATION=0,
WALL=WALL-1
HEATTRANSFER PIPE=ALL, HAMBIENT=6.5, TAMBIENT=6, HMININNERWALL=0.5E+03
SOURCE LABEL=SOUR-1-1, PIPE=1, SECTION=1, TIME=0, TEMPERATURE=62, GASFRACTION=-1,
TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=70 bara, DIAMETER=0.12, SOURCETYPE=PRESSUREDRIVEN
VALVE LABEL=CHOKE-1-1, PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTIONBOUNDARY=4, DIAMETER=0.12, CD=0.7, TIME=0,
OPENING=1.0
TRENDDATA PIPE=1, SECTION=1, VARIABLE=(PT bara, TM, HOLHL, HOLWT)
PROFILEDATA VARIABLE=(GT, GG, GL)
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_INLET

PARAMETERS LABEL=INLET, TYPE=CLOSED
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_OUTLET

PARAMETERS LABEL=OUTLET, GASFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=50 bara, TEMPERATURE=32, TIME=0,
TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, TYPE=PRESSURE, FLUID=1
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=ManualController, TAG=SetPoint-1

PARAMETERS SETPOINT=(2:0.1,2:0.2,0.3), TIME=(0,2000,2010,4000,4010) s, STROKETIME=0.0,
MAXCHANGE=1.0
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN INLET, NODE_INLET FLOWTERM_1)

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN OUTLET, NODE_OUTLET FLOWTERM_1)

CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN SOUR-1-1@INPSIG, SETPOINT-1 OUTSIG_1)

ENDCASE

Simulation model
An OLGA simulation is controlled by defining a set of data groups consisting of a keyword followed by a
list of keys with appropriate values. Each data group can be seen as either a simulation object,
information object, or administration object.

19
 Simulation model OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Logical sections

The different keywords are divided into logical sections:

· CaseDefinition; administration objects for simulation control
· Library; information objects referenced in one or more simulation objects
· Controller; controller simulation objects
· FlowComponent; network simulation objects
· Boundary&InitialConditions; simulation objects for flow in and out of flowpath
· ProcessEquipment; simulation objects for flow manipulation
· ThermalComponent; thermal simulation objects
· FA-models; administration objects for flow assurance models
· Compositional; administration and information objects for component tracking
· Output; administration objects for output generation
· Drilling; drilling simulation object
· OLGA Well; OLGA Well simulation object

Network model
A simulation model is then created by combining several simulation objects to form a simulation
network, where information objects can be used within the simulation objects and the administration
objects control various parts of the simulation. The simulation objects can again reference both
information and administration objects.

The network objects can be of the following types:

· Flowpath; the pipeline which the fluid mix flows through
· Node; a boundary condition or connection point for 2 or more flowpaths
· Separator; a special node model that can separate the fluid into single phases
· Controller; objects that perform supervision and automatic adjustments of other parts of the
simulation network
· Thermal; objects for ambient heat conditions

The simulation model can handle a network of diverging and converging flowpaths. Each flow path
consists of a sequence of pipes and each pipe is divided into sections (i.e. control volumes). These
sections correspond to the spatial mesh discretization in the numerical model. The staggered spatial
mesh applies flow variables (e.g. velocity, mass flow, flux) at section boundaries and volume variables
(e.g. pressure, temperature, mass, volume fractions) as average values in the middle of the section.

The figure below shows a flow path divided into 5 sections.

Each flowpath must start and end at a node, and there are currently three different kinds of nodes
available:
• Terminal; boundary node for specifying boundary conditions
• Internal; for coupling flowpaths (e.g. split or merge)
• Crossover; hybrid node for creating a closed-loop network

The figure below shows a simple simulation network consisting of three flowpaths and four nodes.

20
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The flowpath is the main component in the simulation network, and can also contain other simulation
objects (e.g. process equipment, not shown in the figure above).

It is also possible to describe the simulation model with a text file. See Input files for further descriptions.

21
 OPC Server OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OPC Server

If asked for in the OLGA model, OLGA will run a server for OPC Data Access. OPC Data Access (OPC
DA) is a specification for continuous communication of real-time data from a device to a receiving
process. In the case of the OGLA OPC Server, the device is always the simulation of the current OLGA
model, and the receiver could be a scheduler, a display or a simulator that implements a client for OPC
DA.

With the OPC Server, it is possible to interact with the running model. An OPC DA client connected to the
OLGA OPC Server, may read output from the running simulation, and may also write values to the
simulation. Through OPC, a process simulator or a user interface is allowed to connect to the OLGA
simulation, and manipulate valve openings, well pressures, the setpoint of a PID controller or the
massflow from a source. The OLGA OPC Server also has some special writeable items that serve as
commands. By toggling SaveSnap or Stop, OLGA loads a snap file (i.e., a restart file) or stops,
respectively.

One uses the SERVEROPTIONS keyword to set up the OPC Server. Output is specified with the
SERVERDATA keyword, which is very similar to TRENDDATA, and can be used with both trend and
profile output variables. Input can be configured for certain subkeys in the keywords NODE, SOURCE,
VALVE, WELL, and controllers; these subkeys form a set of parameters for the OLGA model being
simulated.

There are two modes for controlling OLGA's time-stepping: SIMULATOR and EXTERNAL. When the
OLGA OPC Server is in SIMULATOR mode, one sets a speed relative to the computer's clock (say, ten
times faster than real-time), and OLGA slows down its time-stepping process to try and keep this speed.
When in EXTERNAL mode however, OLGA reads a time from the OPC Server, and steps forward until it
reaches that time. The client updates the time on the server, and so the client takes control over the time-
stepping.

OPC DA relies on DCOM security, which can be difficult. A good understanding of DCOM security may be
necessary to set up communication between a server at one computer and a client at another computer.
Since OLGA owns the OPC Server, and removes it when it stops, it is not possible to set specific DCOM
security for the OLGA OPC Server -- one has to rely on the general, default settings. It is usually quite
easy to establish the connection when server and client are run on the same computer, by the same user,
and both server and client are run as administrator.

For further reference see the document OLGA OPC Server Guide, found with the OLGA documentation.

22
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 3

OLGA Models

Methods & Assumptions,

Limitations and How to Use

23
 2nd Order Scheme OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

2nd Order Scheme

Mass equations can be solved with two different schemes in OLGA. The default is a 1st order scheme
(upwind implicit) and the alternative is a 2nd order TVD scheme.

The 1st order scheme is more robust and should be the preferred choice in most situations.

The 2nd order scheme has less numerical diffusion and therefore keeps holdup fronts better.

When to use
The 2nd order scheme for mass equations is to be used when it is important to track relatively sharp
holdup fronts. Examples are:

1. Oil-Water fronts
2. Inhibitor fronts
3. Gas-Oil fronts

Methods and assumptions

The 2nd order method used for the mass equations is a combination of different numerical schemes in
order to get a stable method which satisfies the TVD (Total Variation Diminishing) condition. For smooth
gradients the method is 2nd order while for non-smooth flow (shocks) the method reduces to 1st order
upstream. The smoothness of the data is measured on the control volume boundary like this

Where m is the mass and θ is the measure of smoothness. If θ < 0 the method reduces to first order
upstream and if θ > 0 the method uses 2nd order methods. In the 2nd order region the numerical
scheme is determined based on a 2nd order limiter. In OLGA the limiter known as the van Leer limiter is
chosen.

Simulation differences between the 1st order and 2nd order schemes

24
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure 2 Profile plot of an oil–water front showing the differences between the two schemes. The
number of sections in the pipeline are 50, 100 and 500, respectively.

Figure 3 Profile plots of a gas–oil front. The number of sections in the pipeline are 50, 100, 200, 500
and 1000, respectively.

Figure 4 Trend plot showing the hold-up at the top of a riser. The number of sections in the riser are
15, 30 and 60, respectively.

25
2nd Order Scheme OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

26
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure 5 The figures show profile plots of an oil–water front. Inside the area filled with water, there are
three areas containing MEG.

Limitations

The 1st order scheme diffusive behavior reduces unphysical numerical instabilities in the simulation if
they occur. For simulations where instabilities are observed it is not recommended to use the 2nd order
scheme. For such problems the 2nd order will only make matters worse because it enhances the
numerical oscillations.

Since the 2nd order method is only implemented for the mass transport equations the final result from
the equation set will not converge to 2nd order accuracy. The improvement in the result will also differ
depending on which physical phenomena which are of interest. For example simulations where
pressure waves or temperature waves are of interest the improvement from the 2nd order method will
be small. For simulations where propagation of holdup fronts is of interest the improvement can be
significant.

The 2nd order method only works if the CFL criterion is fulfilled. This means that it is not possible to
violate CFL criterion by increasing MINDT when the 2nd order options is set.

How to use
The 2nd order scheme for the mass equations is activated by setting MASSEQSCHEME=2NDORDER
in the OPTIONS keyword.

27
 Blackoil OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Blackoil
Blackoil modelling allows one to make a compositional model with a minimum of input. Compared to
compositional tracking, the blackoil module is faster in terms of CPU cycles, and it treats shut-in cases
more accurately than does the standard PVT table option.

The module makes it possible to perform calculations with a minimum of information about the
production fluids. Details about the fluid composition are not required for a blackoil simulation; specific
gravity of gas and oil and the gas–oil ratio (GOR) at standard conditions are the only necessary data. If
water is present, also the specific gravity of water must be input. Note that no fluid table is needed.

A blackoil feed can consist of one gas, one oil and one water component. The gas component consists
of hydrocarbon gas, and optionally H2S, CO2 and N2 components. It is possible to specify more than one
blackoil feed, and for such a mixture each component of each feed is tracked, cf. the example network
in Figure A below. Inside the OLGA engine, the blackoil module uses the framework of the
compositional tracking module to track the components through the pipelines.

Water properties are calculated by the standard OLGA routines. The physical properties of gas and oil
are calculated from correlations belonging to a specific blackoil model – the user has a choice between
four different blackoil correlations. To find the properties at a position in a pipe, the correlations use the
pressure and the temperature, as well as the specific gravities of gas, oil and water, and the GOR, at
that position. In the case of multiple feeds, the specific gravities and the GOR are mixture values. The
mixture is the average taken over the constituting blackoils weighted by volume at standard conditions.

average of Feed1, Feed2, Feed3

Feed2

Feed1 Feed3

Figure A: Network case with several blackoil fluids (feeds) specified. Each component is tracked
through the network. The fluid properties are calculated based on the fluid mixture.

When to use
Due to the limited amount of input, the blackoil module can be a good choice when little is know about
the production fluids. For instance, during planning or design one may use specific gravities and a GOR
typical of the geographical area. Later when production is established, one may insert the actual values,
and possibly make use of the module’s tuning mechanism to further improve the match between
observations and the predictions made by OLGA.

As mentioned above, the blackoil module is related to the compositional tracking module, and may be
preferred as the computationally faster alternative. This is due to the fact that blackoil models are
intrinsically crude, and cannot provide the detailed analyses of compositional tracking. It is however
possible to include the effects of MEG in the density calculations by specifying a larger specific gravity
for water. This method should also be used if salts are present.
Methods and assumptions

28
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The following three assumptions are made for the blackoil module:

1. An oil component cannot exist as gas in the gas phase. As a consequence, the module is not
suited for studying gas condensate systems. However, this assumption does not exclude the
dispersion of oil and water, the existence of water/oil droplets in the gas or gas bubbles in the
liquids.
2. Gas can dissolve in oil.
3. Gas cannot dissolve in the water phase, and water cannot exist as steam in the gas phase.
(This assumption may change in a future version of OLGA.)

Blackoil Correlations

To calculate the solution gas-oil ratio RSGO and the bubble point pressure Pb, four different correlations
are available in OLGA. They are based on fluids from different areas, and have recommendation for use
as mentioned in Table 1. The default correlation is Lasater.

Table 1: Blackoil correlations and their recommended usage.

Standing /28/ API < 15 Based on fluids from California

Lasater /27/ API > 15 Based on fluids from Canada, U.S. and
South America
Vazquez & Beggs /29/ API > 15 Similar as Lasater
Glasø /30/ API > 15 Based on fluids from the North Sea

These correlations can be used to calculate the bubble-point pressure, Pb, for a given GOR or an
equilibrium value of RSGO (< GOR) at any pressure below Pb. If measured values for GOR and the
bubble point Pb(Tb) are available, it is recommended to tune the correlations for RSGO(P,T) and Pb(T).
In the following, the four sets of correlations are presented with their tuning coefficients.

Lasater Correlation
The basis for the Lasater correlation is the following relationships:

/ (a)

with

, and (b)

/ 1.32755 · 10 / (c)

For the purpose of calculating the RSGO, the above equations are inverted with GOR replaced by
RSGO, and Pb replaced with the actual pressure P. That is, find yg from Equation (c) with P instead of
Pb, and invert Equation (c) to get RSGO, viz.:

1.32755 · 10 ⁄ / 1 (d)

Please note that if P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.

In these equations we have that

API = 141.5 / γo - 131.5
yg = mole fraction of gas
γg = specific gravity of gas

29
Blackoil OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

γo = specific gravity of oil

Mo = effective molecular weight of tank oil
GOR = gas-oil ratio
f1(yg) = tabulated function of yg
f2(API) = tabulated function of API
CPb = tuning coefficient (default = 1)
CRSGO = tuning coefficient (default = 1)

Pressure must be given with a unit of psia, temperature in 0R (degrees Rankine), and GOR and RSGO
in scf/STBO.

Standing Correlation
The bubble-point pressure at a given GOR is given by

18.2 1.4 (e)

where

⁄ . . .
10 (f)

Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation.

To calculate RSGO, replace Pb with the actual pressure P, and replace GOR with RSGO, and invert
Equation (f) to obtain

⁄18.2 . . .
1.4 10 (g)

If the pressure is above the bubble-point pressure, then RSGO = GOR.

With the Standing correlation, pressure is measured in psia, and temperature is measured in 0F.

Vazques & Beggs Correlation

For API < 30:

⁄ . ⁄ .
27.64 10 , and (h)

⁄27.64 . . /
10 (i)

For API > 30:

. ⁄ .
56.06 ⁄ 10 , and (j)

⁄56.06 . . /
10 (k)

If P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.

Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation. Units for pressure and temperature are
psia and 0R, respectively.

Glasø Correlations

30
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

For known GOR, the bubble-point pressure is given implicitly by

⁄ 1.7669 1.7447 0.30218 , and (l)

⁄ . . ⁄ .
(m)

Substitute RSGO for GOR and P for Pb to obtain

. . . . ⁄ . .
⁄ 10 (n)

If P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.

Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation. Units for pressure and temperature are
psia and 0F, respectively.

Oil and Gas Density

The oil density depends on pressure, temperature and the amount of gas dissolved in oil. At pressures
below the bubble-point the procedure is as follows.

First, the oil volume formation factor BO is calculated, see /28/,

.
0.9759 1.2 · 10 (o)

where

⁄ .
1.25 (p)

Now, the oil density is calculated as

62.4 0.0136 / (q)

The density at the bubble-point, ρob, is given by the above equations with RSGO = GOR. At pressures
above the bubble-point, the compressibility is taken into account, and the density is calculated by

exp (r)

co is the isothermal compressibility of undersaturated oil.

10 1433 5 17.2 1180 12.6 / (s)

Units for Equations (o) to (s): Temperature is given in 0F, pressures in psia. BO is given in bbl/STB.

The basis for calculating the gas density is the compressibility equation of state, viz.:

pV = znRT. (t)

When other variables have units of psia, ft3, lbm, moles and 0R, the gas constant R has the value 10.72.
Now, the gas volume formation factor, BG, can be expressed as

0.0283 / (u)

The gas density is obtained from

31
 Blackoil OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

/ (v)

where ρgsc = 0.0764 γg. (The value 0.0764 is the density of air at standard conditions expressed as
lbm/ft3). γg denotes specific gravity of gas at standard conditions.

The gas compressibility z expresses the deviation of the real gas volume from the ideal gas behaviour.
The assumption that real gas mixtures will have the same z-factor for the same values of
pseudoreduced pressure Ppr and temperature Tpr, is used to determine the value of z. An algebraic
relationship, cf. /28/, has been developed, and this relates z to Ppr and Tpr. The implicit set of equations
that emerges, requires an iterative solution procedure. In order for OLGA to save CPU CYCLES, THE
Z-VALUES HAVE BEEN PRE-COMPUTED, AND TABULATED AS A FUNCTION OF PPR AND TPR.

Values for Tpr and Ppr are found from the pseudocritical temperature Tpc and the pseudocritical pressure
Ppc:

Ppr = P/Ppc and Tpr = T/Tpc. (w)

Empirical equations exist for Ppc and Tpc, /28/, and we use them:

756.8 13.1 3.6 , and (x)

169.2 349.5 74 (y)

As already mentioned, the units are psia and 0R.

The presence of CO2 and H2S is accounted for by correcting the pseudocritical values Ppc and Tpc.
Nitrogen, N2, is assumed to have no significant effect on the z-factor. The corrected values become

Tpc’ = Tpc - ε, and (z)

Ppc’ = Ppc Tpc’ / (Tpc + B(1-B) ε), (aa)

where

A = yCO2 + yH2S, B = yH2S (yCO2 and yH2S are mole-fractions), (ab)

ε = 120 (A0.9 - A1.6) + 15 (B0.5 - B4.0). (ac)

Oil and Gas Viscosity

Dead oil viscosity is calculated using the following equation:

1 1.8653 0.025086 0.5644log (ad)

Now, the live oil viscosity μo is found by modifying the dead oil viscosity according to the gas dissolved
in the oil, i.e.,

(ae)

where

. .
10.715 100 5.44 150 (af)

Note that Covisc is a tuning coefficient; its default value is 1.

32
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

If the pressure is above the bubble pressure Pb, the above expression corresponds to the viscosity at
the bubble point μob, where RSGO = GOR. For these pressures the viscosity is modified, viz.:

⁄ .
2.6 exp 11.5 8.98 (ag)

Units: Pressures are measured in psia, temperatures in 0F, viscosities in cp and RSGO in scf/STB.

The gas viscosity is calculated, according to /27/, from the correlation

/10000 (ah)

with
A = (9.379 + 0.016Ma)T1.5 / (209.2 + 19.26Ma + T ) (ai)
B = 3.448 + 986.4 / T + 0.01009Ma (aj)
C = 2.447 - 0.2224B (ak)
Ma = 29γg (Ma is the apparent molecular weight) (al)

Units: ρg given in g/cm3; T in 0R; μg in cp.

Liquid viscosity is calculated as for the standard pvt table option with oil viscosity as above.

Surface Tension

The expression for the gas-oil surface tension needs to be simple without the information about the
fluid composition. Given values of API, T (0R) and P (psia), we can use

39.2 1 ⁄148 0.0438 68 (am)

for dead oil, and then correct the value for saturated oil at saturation pressure:

exp 2.3 ⁄3000 (an)

For undersaturated oil, the corresponding saturation pressure for P(T,RS) is used. The unit of a surface
tension σ is dynes/cm (1 dyne/cm = 0.001 N/m).

The expression used for the gas-water surface tension is

84.5 0.1068 exp 0.0002 (ao)

For oil-water surface tension empirical data are scarce, and a preliminary relation is used:

exp (ap)

with default coefficients A1 = 30.0, A2 = 0.0 and A3 = 0.0.

The above correlations are based on data from /31/ and /33/.

Thermodynamic Properties of Blackoil

33
 Blackoil OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Specific Heat of Gas

The specific heat or heat capacity of gas cpg will be tabulated as a function of temperature and specific
gravity of gas. The data are taken from /31/, Figure 4-49. It is assumed that the specific heat of a gas
mixture corresponds to the specific heat of a pure gas with the same specific gravity.

Specific Heat of Oil

The specific heat of oil, cpl, can be calculated using the following equation, cf. /32/:

2.96 1.34 0.0062 0.00234 (aq)

where

γo = specific gravity of oil

T = temperature in 0C

The unit of cpl is kJ/kg0C.

ENTHALPY OF GAS

The enthalpy of gas, Hg is calculated from the equation

⁄ (ar)

The term (dH/dP)T can be expressed as -(RT2/P)*(dz/dT)P .

From tabulated values for cpg and z, a table for Hg can be generated; 00C and 1 bara is used as the zero
point. The compressibility factor z is tabulated as a function of Tpr and Ppr. Thus the term (dH/dP)TdP in
Equation (ar) can be expressed in terms of Tpr and Ppr:

⁄ ⁄ (as)

Enthalpy of Oil

The enthalpy of oil Ho is calculated directly by integrating cpo from zero to the actual temperature.
Modifications of Ho at elevated pressures are ignored.

ENTHALPY OF GAS DISSOLVED IN OIL

The latent heat for gas dissolved in oil ΔHgo will be used to calculate the enthalpy of liquefied gas Hgo.
We have

Hgo = Hg - ΔHgo (at)

The term ΔHgo can be approximated by a simple correlation from /32/. First, the latent heat is estimated
at 1 bara.

ΔHgosc = 4.19 Tabp (8.75 + 4.57 log(Tabp)) / M, (au)

where Tabp is the atmospheric boiling point measured in K. The unit of the latent heat thus becomes
kJ/kg.

34
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Second, the latent heat is extrapolated for pressures above 1 bara, according to

ΔHgo = ΔHgosc - 1.7 (P - 1) (av)

Tabp is tabulated as a function of oil specific gravity and molecular weight, cf. /32/, see Table 2 below.

Table 2: Tabp as a function of specific gravity of oil and molecular weight.

Atmospheric boiling point, Tabp (0C)
M 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Spec
grav. Tabp
0.6 27 42 60 79 104 128 146 165 190 205
0.9 66 93 116 132 165 202 222 252 274 294

Thermal conductivity
Data for the thermal conductivity of gas as a function of M and T is plotted in /31/. A function has been
developed that gives a reasonable approximation to these data, and this function is used by OLGA.

Little data are available for oil, and so a simple linear function is used, viz.:

(aw)

The default values for the coefficients are:

0.1385 ⁄ , and 0.5 · 10 / (ax)

Blackoil Tuning

It is possible to tune the correlations for gas dissolved in oil RSGO, bubble pressure Pb and oil viscosity
to measured data.

Tuning of the correlations use data for a single fluid or a mixture. If there are several blackoil feeds (e.g.,
a network case), one must either tune to one of the fluids or to a mixture of the fluids. If the
measurements are from a separator, the data available will typically be for the mixture. Please note that
the tuned correlations are used for the whole network. See the description of the correlations for how
the tuned parameters enter the calculations.

Tuning is specified through the BLACKOILOPTIONS keyword.

Converting to mass flow rate

When converting the volume flow rate at the standard conditions to the mass flow rate, the densities of
gas, oil, and water that are used are taken from the corresponding blackoil components as given in
BLACKOILCOMPONENT. When converting the in-situ mass flow rates to the volumetric flow rate at the
standard conditions, the densities at the standard conditions are calculated from the blackoil
correlations. The density from the blackoil correlations does not give the same density as the input.
Therefore, the standard volumetric flow rates that are calculated by flashing the in-situ mass flow rate to
the standard conditions differ from the standard volumetric flow rates given in the input. The difference
is however within the uncertainty of the blackoil correlations.

Limitations

35
 Blackoil OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The blackoil module has the same limitations to its usability that the compositional tracking module.

How to use
Set the following keywords to use the blackoil module:

• OPTIONS to set COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL

• BLACKOILOPTIONS to set GORMODEL (optional)
• BLACKOILCOMPONENT to set the properties of the gas, oil and/or water components
• BLACKOILFEED to combine the gas/oil/water blackoil components into feeds, and specify GOR
and WATERCUT.
• NODE/SOURCE/WELL to set flow rates or volume fractions of the feeds to enter the pipeline
system
• The steady state pre-processor may be used with the blackoil module. If one chooses to start
from INITIALCONDITIONS, the initial volume fractions for the feeds must be given.

36
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Complex Fluid
Complex fluids are liquids with high viscosity, yield stress, or liquids exhibiting shear thinning. Such
properties might arise in waxy oil or emulsions which often exhibit shear thinning and high viscosity,
whereas a slurry of hydrate crystals in oil may have a yield stress depending on the particle
concentration. Hydrate is a snow like substance formed by water and natural gas that might occur in
hydrocarbon transport lines at ambient temperatures well above the normal freezing point of water at
elevated pressure. Fluids that demonstrate both shear thinning and a yield stress, e.g., gelled waxy
crude, can only be approximated using complex fluid models.

The presence of yield stress or shear thinning in the liquid might result in a decreasing pressure drop
with increasing production rates up to a certain point where the pressure drop is at a minimum, even for
horizontal pipes. For production rates below this minimum, unstable operation might occur depending
on the boundary conditions of the transport line. These instabilities can interact with other, more well
known, multiphase flow phenomena such as terrain slugging and give rise to a wider range of unstable
operational conditions. The purpose of the complex fluid model is to predict such behavior.

When to use
The complex fluid module should be used whenever a fluid exhibits significant deviation from Newtonian
behavior, either by shear thinning (e.g., heavy oils) or influence of yield stress (e.g., waxy oils). For
Newtonian liquids, the module should be used when modeling fluids with viscosity above 50 cP and it
has been tested up to 1000 cP.

License requirements
The Complex Fluid Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The complex fluid model utilizes the Bingham model for fluids exhibiting yield stress, while the Power
law is used for shear thinning fluids. As opposed to the complex viscosity model, the complex fluid
model includes numerous modifications to the physical models for both separated and distributed flow
taking into account the non-Newtonian behavior of the fluids. Non-Newtonian behavior can be modeled
for the liquid hydrocarbon phase, the water phase or both. The Newtonian option is included to capture
the peculiarities of higher viscosity liquids.

Bingham plastic model

τ = τ 0 + μργ& (a)

where

τ 0 = yield stress
μρ = plastic viscosity
γ& = shear rate

Power law model

τ = Kγ& n (b)

where

K = consistency factor

37
 Newtonian fluid OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Newtonian fluid

τ = μ γ& (c)

where

μ = viscosity

When running standard OLGA, i.e., without slug tracking activated, the use of complex fluid yields an
important improvement since the slug flow model includes the effects of the above rheologies and at the
same time as it covers the range of Reynolds numbers from laminar to turbulent flow. This affects the
bubble front velocity, and, consequently, the liquid accumulation. Furthermore, it yields a better model of
the liquid flowing below the slug bubble as well as a better prediction of the slug fraction. Using this as
basis for pressure drop predictions is a major difference from the complex viscosity model, which is very
important for more viscous liquids.

For stratified flow, the wall friction calculations should yield better results than when using an equivalent
viscosity.

How to use
The Complex Fluid module is activated in the FLUID keyword by setting the key
TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID. The fluid viscosity model to be used is determined by the keys CFLUML and
CFLUMW for the liquid hydrocarbon phase and water phase, respectively. Except for the default
Newtonian modeling, fluid viscosity can be modeled using either the Bingham model or the power law
model.

The parameters of the viscosity models can be given in two ways. If the key FULL=YES, the fluid
viscosity parameters (yield stresses/power exponents) are read from the fluid property file as functions
of pressure and temperature. If, on the other hand, FULL=NO, the yield stresses YIELDSRL and
YIELDSTW or power exponents POWEXPL and POWEXPW have to be given if the liquid hydrocarbon
or water viscosity model is set to BINGHAM or POWERLAW respectively. For both options, the viscosity
given in the fluid file is interpreted as the plastic viscosity for Bingham fluids and as the consistency
factor for Power law fluids.

38
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compositional Tracking
The compositional tracking model combines the powerful multiphase capabilities in OLGA with
customised calculations for fluid properties and mass transfer. Part of this module is a software package
developed by Calsep.

With the compositional tracking model, every single fluid component is accounted for throughout the
calculation, enabling simulation of scenarios such as start-up and blowdown with a high level of detail
and accuracy.

When to use
It is important to acknowledge that the extra level of detail given by compositional tracking compared to
table-based approach is CPU-intensive and will increase the simulation time. Note that a higher number
of components will also increase the simulation time. Standard OLGA will in many cases, such as for
single pipeline flow and networks where the fluids in the pipelines are similar, give satisfactorily accurate
results.

Typical cases where compositional effects may have influence are:

• Networks with different fluids

• Changes in composition at boundaries
• Blowdown
• Gas injection / gas lift
• Start-up
• Shut-in and restart

License requirements
The Compositional Tracking Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The standard OLGA model uses a fluid table with material properties calculated for a predefined
composition, and this composition is assumed to be constant throughout the whole simulation. Different
compositions can be used for each branch in a system, but with compositions that are constant with
time.

In reality the composition may vary along the pipeline due to slip effects (velocity differences between
phases), interphasial mass transfer, merging network with different fluids, elevated geometry, and
changes in fluid composition at the inlet. In the Compositional Tracking model the mass equations are
solved for each component (e.g. H2O, C1, C14-C22) in each phase (e.g. gas, liquid droplets, bulk
hydrocarbon liquid and bulk water). Thus, the model will keep track of the changes in composition in
both time and space, and will ensure a more accurate fluid description compared to using the standard
OLGA model.

Instead of using a fluid file with pre-calculated material properties, a so-called feed file must be
generated (by PVTsim) and given as input to OLGA. The feed file contains information about the feeds
(fluid composition used in a source or well and as boundary or initial conditions) that the user wants to
use in the simulation, and about the components comprising the feeds. In addition, the user may define
additional feeds through the FEED keyword. These feeds may only contain a set of the components
defined in the feed file. It is not possible to define additional components outside the feed file.

39
 Compositional Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PVT package
The material properties of the fluid along the pipeline will be calculated continuously during the
simulation, based upon the current conditions (i.e. local pressure, temperature and composition). These
calculations are part of a PVT package delivered by Calsep.

This PVT package uses functions that are similar to the ones used by PVTsim, although they are
optimised for increased computational speed. PVTsim must also be used to characterize the fluid and
generate the feed file to be used as input to the model.

Moreover, the molar fractions and their derivatives with respect to the current conditions at phase
equilibrium are also delivered by the package. Based on these results, the mass transfer between the
phases needed for the mixture to be at equilibrium is calculated.

Physical limits for the temperature and pressure used in the PVT calculations are introduced and can
not be changed by the user (as it can with fluid tables). The temperature range is from -200 to 500 C
and the pressure range is from 0.05 to 1000 bara. If the temperature or pressure goes out of range, they
are reset to the upper or lower limits. These reset values are used in the PVT calculations only and are
not fed back to the overall calculations of temperature and pressure.

The phase equilibrium calculations in PVTsim are based on either the Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK) or
the Peng-Robinson (PR) equation of state (EOS) [Soave (1972) and Peng and Robinson (1976)]. The
fluid data in the feed file are based on one of these equations, with or without the Peneloux volume
correction [Peneloux et al. (1982)], and the same EOS will be adopted in the OLGA simulation.

Limitations
Maximum number of components allowed in a feed file is 30. Except for this, there are no special
limitations associated with the Compositional Tracking model.

However, as described, be aware of the additional CPU-intensive calculations that are performed.

Other considerations

Steady state pre-processor

A compositional steady state pre-processor is implemented in OLGA.

Process equipment
The system can include process equipment such as critical and sub-critical chokes, compressors with
controllers, check valves, valves, separators, heat exchangers, pumps, and controlled mass sources
and sinks.

Combination with other models

The compositional tracking model can not be combined with other compositional models such as
inhibitor tracking, blackoil or wax.

Flow model
The descriptions of the flow regimes, friction factors and wetted perimeters etc in the compositional
tracking model are as in the standard OLGA model.

Restart
The Compositional Tracking model is available with full restart functionality. However, it is not possible
to switch from or to the compositional model in a restart case.

40
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use
Input
In order to use the Compositional Tracking model, follow the steps below;

Step 1:
Use PVTsim to characterize the fluids to the same pseudo components and generate the feed file with
all the necessary compositional data for the fluid.

The ”Plus” and ”No-plus” fluid types only require mole or weight fractions, mole weights and liquid
densities. For the ”Plus” fluid, PVTsim will generate pseudo-components based on the last (plus)
component.

The ”Characterized” fluid type is used when the fluid characterization has been performed in another
PVT tool, and requires all fluid properties such as critical temperature, accentric factor, etc.

Choose ”Interfaces” from the Main Menu in PVTsim, and then choose ”Compositional Tracking”. In this
window the feed file that is an input to the Compositional Tracking module is generated. The feeds
defined in the feed file will then be available as feeds in OLGA, with the name specified in the Well
column in the Fluid box in PVTsim as feed name.

Step 2:
Prepare the OLGA input using the following keywords;

• OPTIONS; COMPOSITIONAL set to ON.

• FILE; FEEDFILE to specify the feed file name.
• FEED; to define additional feeds and their composition (use components from the feed file)
• COMPOPTIONS; to define calculation options to be used by the PVT routines.
• INITIALCONDITIONS; to specify initial feeds.
• SOURCE; to specify feeds and feed flows in the mass source.
• WELL; to specify feeds in the well stream.
• NODE; to specify feeds and feed flows in mass flow and pressure nodes.

Step 3:
Specify output variables for detailed plotting of simulation information.

• OUTPUTDATA to print compositional information to output file (*.out).

• TRENDDATA to print compositional variables to trend file (*.tpl).
• PROFILEDATA to print compositional variables to profile file (*.ppl).
• PLOTDATA to print compositional variables to OLGA Viewer file (*.plt).

Plot data for individual components can be specified with the addition of the
COMPONENTS=(<component names>) key to each plotting keyword. If COMPONENTS is not
specified, it will be plotted for all components for the specified variable.

Note: Output variables for rates at standard conditions (e.g. QGST) are CPU demanding since a flash
must be performed, and should be used with care for Compositional Tracking simulations.

Special considerations
In the keyword COMPOPTIONS the user should evaluate what flash algorithm to use, what kind of
viscosity correlation to use, if any of the fluid components should be assigned delay constants, and if
needed specify the density limit for the dense phase region. The user can also choose to use the default
values, in which case none of these parameters have to be specified.

41
 Compositional Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Flash algorithms (key FLASHTYPE)

The FLASHTYPE key specifies the flash algorithm to be used.

• FLASHTYPE = TWOPHASEFLASH treats water as an inert component. Hydrate inhibitors such

as MeOH and glycols in the water phase will also be inert. A two-phase flash is carried out for
the hydrocarbon components. There will not be any aqueous components in the hydrocarbon
phases and no hydrocarbon components in the water phase. Classical mixing rule is used for all
component pairs for the two-phase flash calculation.

This is the only option allowed when performing simulations with fluids consisting purely of non-
aqueous components. It may also be used with fluids containing aqueous components when
high simulation speed is wanted, provided the amount of free water is believed to have little
impact on the conclusions. It should not be used if:

• Hydrate control is important and MeOH or another component more volatile than H2O
is used as inhibitor.
• Tracking of hydrocarbons and inorganic gasses dissolved in the aqueous phase is
important.
• Tracking of aqueous components dissolved in a hydrocarbon liquid phase or a dense
gas phase is important.

• FLASHTYPE = SIMPLETHREEPHASE means that the water components are treated as an

inert phase initially. A two-phase flash is performed for the hydrocarbon components. Then
aqueous components are added to the hydrocarbon phases, and hydrocarbon components and
inorganic gasses are added to the aqueous phase until the fugacity is the same for all the
phases. Classical mixing rule is used for all component pairs throughout the calculation. This
approach involves two simplifications relative to full three phase flash

• The change in phase equilibrium due to dissolution of components in a phase is not

taken into account, i.e. the result is not rigorous equilibrium but approximated
equilibrium.
• A simplified model for the solubility of hydrocarbon components and inorganic gasses in
the aqueous phase and vice versa is used.

This is the default option when at least one aqueous component is defined in the feed file, and
is expected to provide accurate results for most simulations involving fluids consisting of both
hydrocarbons and aqueous components. Full three phase flash is recommended for rigorous
simulations if

• Hydrate control is important and MeOH or another component more volatile than H2O
is used as inhibitor.
• Tracking of hydrocarbons and inorganic gasses dissolved in the aqueous phase is
important.
• Tracking of aqueous components dissolved in a hydrocarbon liquid phase or a dense
gas phase is important.

Note that simplified three phase is the recommend option for performing screening/approximate
simulations where high accuracy may not be required even in the aforementioned cases. This is
due to the full three phase option being significantly slower than the simplified three phase
option.

• FLASHTYPE = FULLTHREEPHASE means that a full three-phase flash is performed for the
total composition. The fugacity of all the components in all the phases is the same. All the
phases are in rigorous equilibrium, i.e. any component can dissolve in any phase. Classical

42
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

mixing rule is used for component pairs not involving aqueous components while the Huron-
Vidal mixing rule is used for all component pairs involving aqueous components.

This option is significantly slower than the simplified three phase flash option. It is
recommended as an option to make a final check of whether the accuracy obtained using the
simplified three phase flash is adequate for the given case. Full three phase flash is also
recommended if

• Hydrate control is important and MeOH or another component more volatile than H2O
is used as inhibitor.
• Tracking of hydrocarbons and inorganic gasses dissolved in the aqueous phase is
important.
• Tracking of aqueous components dissolved in a hydrocarbon liquid phase or a dense
gas phase is important.

Note that simplified three phase is the recommend option for performing screening/approximate
simulations where high accuracy may not be required even in the aforementioned cases. This is
due to the full three phase option being significantly slower than the simplified three phase
option.

This is the only option allowed when performing simulations with fluids containing salts.

Viscosity correlations (key VISCOSITYCORR)

The VISCOSITYCORR key can be used to specify the viscosity calculations.

The viscosity calculations can be based on the corresponding states principle (CSP) or the Lohrenz-
Bray-Clark (LBC) correlation (1964). If the fluid has been tuned to one of the correlations in PVTsim, it is
not possible to choose a different correlation in OLGA Compositional tracking module (an error will be
given if the other correlation is chosen). The default viscosity correlation is CSP.

When using CSP the PVT code executes 2-3 times slower than when LBC is used. Since 10-90% of the
calculation time in an OLGA simulation is spent in the PVT code, the cost of using CSP instead of LBC
may vary a lot.

However, the LBC model is not reliable as a predictive model. The following steps should therefore be
taken when using LBC:

• Tune LBC to experimental or simulated CSP viscosity data in PVTSim.

• Check if tuned oil viscosity data match reasonably well with the experimental data. If a good
match cannot be obtained, use the CSP viscosity model in OLGA Compositional Tracking
module (a mismatch is more likely for heavy oils).
• Substantial tuning of the a-coefficients in the LBC-model can affect the gas viscosity. Evaluate
gas viscosity before and after tuning if the a-coefficients are changed considerably.

In case the CSP viscosity model is chosen, it is still recommended to tune to experimental viscosity data
if available. The predictive capability of the CSP model is within 10% up to viscosities of approximately 1
cP. For higher viscosities the capability is more uncertain.

It is further recommended to consider if oil viscosities at temperatures below approximately 20-40 C are
influenced by precipitated wax. The CSP and LBC viscosity models cannot account for the influence of
precipitated wax, nor the non-Newtonian effects associated with the precipitation. The CSP and LBC
models may still be forced to follow the apparent oil viscosities. Since the Compositional Tracking
module does not account for wax precipitation/ deposition, viscosities will follow the apparent oil
viscosity.

43
 Compositional Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Dense phase specification (key DENSITYLIMIT)

The DENSITYLIMIT key specifies the limit for the dense phase region density.

In the dense phase region (see Figure A below), there are no good criteria to distinguish gas from oil,
and the "chosen" phase does not affect the fluid properties for simulations with Compositional Tracking.
This can be a problem especially for INITIALCONDITIONS where a user specifies e.g. voidfraction=0
for an entire branch, but gets an error saying that this is not valid input since there is no liquid for parts
of the branch. The user then has to specify voidfraction pipe-wise, which can be a lot of work. Also,
PVTsim might predict another phase than Compositional Tracking since a different and more time
demanding approach is used, which adds to the confusion.

Figure A. Dense phase region.

In the dense phase region, a fluid with higher density than the given DENSITYLIMIT value is defined as
liquid and a fluid with lower density is defined as gas. If the user gets an error saying there is no gas for
this branch the DENSITYLIMIT should be increased.

The DENSITYLIMIT should preferably be set equal to the density found in PVTsim when performing a
flash at the critical point. If not specified, internal routines will be used to decide phase (which may
cause instabilities when crossing bubble/dew point).

Note: The use of DENSITYLIMIT can also reduce oscillations, such as for cases with decreasing
pressure where different sections cross from the dense phase region to the two phase region on each
side of the critical temperature.

Delay constants (keys TCONDENSATE/TVAPORIZATION)

The keys TCONDENSATE and TVAPORIZATION are non-equilibrium delay constants for the mass
transfer from liquid phase to gas phase and vice versa. The keys can be introduced for each
component, and the equilibrium state reached in the flash calculations will be delayed. The default is no
delay.

44
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

In the non-equilibrium model the convective mass transfer terms are calculated according to:

, ⁄
,
1 , (a)

where u is the superficial velocity of the mixture flowing into the section calculated for the equilibrium
conditions at the section and ΔZ is the section length. is the convective mass transfer term
calculated by the equilibrium model for component fc. TDELAY,fc is the non-equilibrium delay factor for
component fc, which has the dimension seconds. The user must specify the value of this factor, and
separate values can be given for vaporization (TVAPORIZATION) and condensation
(TCONDENSATION).

The local non-equilibrium mass transfer term is derived from the following equation:

, ,
, , ,
(b)
,

where ,
is the local mass transfer term calculated by the equilibrium model and , is the
delay factor for component fc for condensation or vaporization dependent on the sign of the equilibrium
mass transfer term.

This yields:

,
, ,
, ,
(c)
,
,
, ,
,

Output
The keywords OUTPUTDATA, TRENDDATA, PROFILEDATA and PLOTDATA in the input file specify
the data collection from the simulation.

The output file (*.out), trend file (*.tpl), profile file (*.ppl) and plot file (*.plt) can be used to show detailed
compositional information:

• Mass flow rate for each component in each phase (oil droplets, oil film, total oil phase, water
droplets, water film, total water phase, and gas)
• Mass rate of flashing for each component to gas phase, oil phase and water phase
• Specific mass for each component in each phase
• Mole fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase
• Equilibrium mole fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase
• Mass fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase
• Equilibrium mass fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase
• Total mole fraction (all phases) for each component
• Total mass in branch for each component

The output file shows information textually and is structured for easy reading. The trend file and profile
file are ASCII files that can be plotted graphically in the OLGA GUI. The plot file is a binary file that is
viewed in a separate plotting tool called the OLGA Viewer. Due to the binary format, which reduces the
file size, this form of data collection can use a shorter plotting interval and is useful for detailed analysis.

45
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Controller
Controllers is in OLGA terms a network component labeled “signal component” which mean that they
can communicate with other network components by sending and receiving signals. Other network
components may be other signal components or flow components (i.e. a branch). Controllers are typical
signal components but also other types of network components may be signal components.
All controllers have one common key; LABEL, which are used to identify the controller.

There are 13 different types of controllers:

• Algebraic Controller
• ASC Controller
• Cascade Controller
• ESD Controller
• Manual Controller
• Override Controller
• PID Controller
• PSV Controller
• Scaler Controller
• Selector Controller
• STD Controller
• Switch Controller
• Table Controller

Both analog and digital controllers can be simulated in OLGA (see Analog vs. digital controllers for
further details). A controller can be set to one of five different modes operation either by using time
series in the MODE sub-key or hooking a defined controller up to the MODE terminal (see Controller
modes for further details). In addition to implementing the possibility to switch the controller mode, the
current version of OLGA also implements the possibility to “activate” and “deactivate” the controllers by
hooking an external controller up to the ACTIVATE terminal (see controller activation/deactivation for
further details). The controller output is constrained; see constraining the controller output for further
details. In the most advanced usage of the OLGA controllers utilizes the possibilities of interconnecting
controllers by the use of terminals. A description to the different terminals is given in controller details.

Analog vs. digital controllers

For all the controller types, the digital controller option can be selected by using the key SAMPLETIME.
The difference between analogue and digital sampling in an OLGA simulation is as follows:

The analogue controller collects input and gives a corresponding output at each simulation time step.
The MAXCHANGE sub-key specifies the maximum allowed change in controller output from one time
step to the next. The default value is 0.2. The automatic integration time step mechanism ensures that
the relative change in the output signal of the controller from one time step to the next will never exceed
MAXCHANGE.

The digital controller collects input and generates a corresponding output at time points separated by
time intervals given in sub-key SAMPLETIME. There may be one or more OLGA integration time steps
in between each sample time point. The automatic time step control assures that a simulation time point
always agree with a sample time point (to the accuracy specified in the MAXCHANGE sub-key). The
output signal from the controller is kept constant during the sample time interval.

46
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Controller mode
A controller in OLGA can be set in one of the five different modes:

Automatic; in MODE = AUTOMATIC, the controller behaves according to the controller function as
specified for the different controller types. For those controllers that make use of setpoint the
value in MODE = AUTOMATIC is taken from the SETPOINT key.

Manual; in MODE = MANUAL, the controller function is bypassed and the controller output is set
according to the time series definition of key MANUALOUTPUT.

External signal; in MODE = EXTERNALSIGNAL, the controller function is bypassed and the controller
output is set according to the external controller connected to the SIGNAL terminal.

External setpoint; the controller MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT is similar to MODE = AUTOMATIC

except that the setpoint is taken the controller connected to the SETPOINT terminal.

Freeze; in MODE = FREEZE, the controller function is bypassed and the controller output is kept
constant (equal to the previous output value).

The controller MODE can be manipulated either by time series or by another controller. To manipulate
the mode of a controller by time series, specify the sequence in the MODE sub-key. The predefined
literals:

AUTOMATIC value 1
MANUAL value 2
EXTERNALSIGNAL value 3
EXTERNALSETPOINT value 4
FREEZE value 5

are used when specifying the MODE through MODE sub-key in the GUI and input file. The MODE sub-
key is interpreted together with the TIME sub-key.
When using the terminal to change the mode of a controller one need to connect an external controller
to the MODE terminal. E.g. to manipulate the mode of controller A by a controller labeled A.MODE
connect controller A.MODE to the MODE terminal of controller A. The mode of controller A id the
dependent on the output value of A.MODE

A.MODE < 1.5 gives AUTOMATIC

1.5 <= A.MODE < 2.5 gives MANUAL
2.5 <= A.MODE < 3.5 gives EXTERNALSIGNAL
3.5 <= A.MODE < 4.5 gives EXTERNALSETPOINT
4.5 <= A.MODE gives FREEZE

All controllers except “Table” and “Scaler” have MODE implemented. The definition on MODE through
the use of the MODE terminal overrules the definition of MODE given by the MODE sub-key.

Controller activation/deactivation
In addition to implementing the possibility to switch the controller mode, the current version of OLGA
also implements the possibility to “activate” and “deactivate” the controllers by hooking an external
controller up to the ACTIVATE terminal.

A controller A might be deactivated and activated by connecting an external controller A.ACTIVATE to

the ACTIVATE terminal of controller A. Then controller A is active if the output of A.ACTIVATE is greater
or equal to 0.5. When a controller is “deactivated” (A.ACTIVATE < 0.5) the controller function is
bypassed and the controller output is kept constant (equal to the previous output value). When a

47
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

controller is activated the output is calculated according to the controller function and any specification
of MODE.

The deactivation of controllers takes precedence over controller function and mode. For further details
see the description of the controller details

Constraining the controller output

The controller output is constrained in two steps. First controller output is checked against signal
constrains; secondly the controller output is checked against rate of change constraints.
The signal constraints are specified in the keys MAXSIGNAL and MINSIGNAL. If the controller output is
greater or equal to MAXSIGNAL then the output signal is set equal to MAXSIGNAL and the
SAUTRATED output is set equal to 1.0 to signal “high saturation”. If the controller output is less or
equal to MINSIGNAL then the output is set equal to MINSIGNAL and the SATURATED output is set
equal to -1.0 to signal “low saturation”.
If the rate of change in the controller output violates the OPENINGTIME (or STROKETIME) the
controller output is set equal to the maximum allowed output satisfying the rate of change constraint and
the RATELIMITED variable is set equal 1.0 to signal a “high rate of change saturation”. If the rate of
change in the controller output violates the CLOSINGTIME (or STROKETIME) the controller output is
set equal to the minimum allowed output satisfying the rate of change constraint and the RATELIMITED
variable is set equal -1.0 to signal a “low rate of change saturation”.

Controller details
Figure A below shows a block diagram of how different inputs and outputs relate to different part of the
controller implementation.

Figure A: Overall block diagram for controller implementation.

48
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

In Figure A (previous page) and Figure B below:

inputs in terms of sub-keys are given in boxes framed by an orange line,

inputs given through terminals are given in boxes framed by a green line and
internal calculation boxes are framed by a black line and gray background color.

The larger block “Controller function + Controller mode” in Figure A, implements

the controller functionality given by the controller type,
the controller modes and
the controller activation deactivation.
Output A from the “Controller function + Controller mode” block represents the unconstrained output.
The unconstrained output is checked against sub-keys MAX/MINSIGNAL and forms the constrained
output B. Finally, output B is checked against rate of change constrains (OPENINGTIME and
CLOSINGTIME) to form the final constrained output CONTR. Note, the additional outputs SATURATED
and RATELIMITED. These are used to signal saturation and rate of change limitation to other
controllers.

Figure B: Implementation of controller modes and activation/deactivation mechanisms.

Figure B shows the implementation of modes and activation/deactivation mechanisms. Depending on

the controller type the controller function block may or may not need the setpoint sub-key. Controller
type PID is an example of a controller type that makes use of the setpoint sub-key, whereas controller
type OVERRIDE does not use the setpoint sub-key. The controller function block may also use
additional terminals and sub-keys not shown in Figure B. If mode is AUTOMATIC (mode value one) the
setpoint is taken from the sub-keys and if mode is EXTERNALSETPOINT (mode value four) the setpoint
is connected to the setpoint terminal. This is illustrated by the upper left switch in Figure B.
The lower left switch in the figure determines how MODE is set. This switch cannot be changed during
runtime. If a controller is connected to the MODE terminal, it is value obtained through the terminal that
determines the mode of the controller irrespective of what is set in the MODE sub-key. If no controller is
connected to the MODE terminal then it is MODE sub-key that determines the mode of the controller.

49
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

- If MODE is AUTOMATIC or EXTERNALSETPOINT then the output of the controller function

(CF) block is routed through the larger switch in the figure (position one or four at the input of
the switch) and the corresponding setpoint is connected to the controller function.
- If MODE is MANUAL the manual output signal is routed through the switch (position two at the
input of the switch).
- When the MODE is EXTERNALSIGNAL the SIGNAL TERMINAL is connected to the output of
the switch (position three at the input of the switch).
- When MODE is FREEZE the lower memory block is connected to the output of the switch
(position five at the input of the switch). The memory blocks hold the previous output value.
Thus the output is frozen (kept constant).

The activation/deactivation mechanism is illustrated by the switch with two inputs and memory block on
the right in the figure.

- If the controller is activated (ACTIVATE = true, or value greater or equal to 0.5) the activate
switch is in position two connecting the controller to the output A.
- If the controller is deactivated (ACTIVATE = false, or value less than 0.5) then the activate
switch is in position one connecting the output A to the previous value, thus the output is frozen
(kept constant).

Controller Terminals
Most of the controller types will have the following input terminals:
MODE – used to set the mode of a controller
SIGNAL – used to override the output of the controller when MODE = EXTERNALSIGNAL
SETPOINT – used to override the setpoint key when MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT, e.g.
cascaded controllers
ACTIVATE – used to activate deactivate the controller function

All controllers will have the following output terminal:

OUTSIG_1..N – used to connect the controller output to another input signal terminal

In the controller output terminal OUTSIG a number of output variables are available. The variable
transmitted is set-up (specified) in the signal connection.
See controller details for further information.

Actuator time of controlled device

There are no restrictions on the rate of change of the output from the controller algorithms. The output
from the controller frequently changes faster than the device is capable of following. This situation is
taken care of by passing all output from the controllers through an actuator filter that computes a 'real'
output (as observed by the devices) according to the rule:

U U
U, U , (d)
,
or
U U
U, U , (e)
,

where
tact,open is the actuator time when increasing U
tact,close is the actuator time when decreasing U
Δt is the time step
Uold is previous output signal from the controller

50
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

U is output signal from the controller

Umax is the maximum output signal from the controller
Umin is the minimum output signal from the controller

The actuator time is specified as stroke time or the time required to open/close. The user specifies
minimum and maximum controller output signal, Umin and Umax. These two parameters determine the
operating range of the controller. Normally the operating range is from 0 to 1, i.e., an output of 0 from a
controller operating on a valve means that the valve is closed, whereas an output of 1 means that the
valve is fully open.

Connecting the controllers

All the controllers have a set of input and output signal terminals. The output terminals (OUTSIG) can be
distributed to several receiving terminals. When connecting output signals the first available terminal will
be named OUTSIG_1. The next terminal will be named OUTSIG_2 etc. In general it is written
OUTSIG_1..N, to show that the terminal OUTSIG can be connected an arbitrary number of times.

It is required that some of the input terminals are connected. The required input is different for the
different types of controllers. Connecting the output terminals is optional.

The controller output can be connected to process equipment (Valve, Pump etc.). The controller input is
connected to output from another controller, a transmitter or some process equipment.

Example: PID pressure control

The PID controller has the following terminals:

MEASRD (Required input)
SETPOINT (Optional input)
OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

The input terminal MEASRD is required, while the input terminal SETPOINT is optional. The PID
controller has internal setpoint given as key input. But the user can connect an external setpoint to the
controller. In order to use the external setpoint the SETPOINTMODE must be set to EXTERNAL.
(1)
PT PC
(2)

Figure A: Pressure control example

In Figure A the measured pressure is taken from a transmitter (PT). The controller (PC) output is
connected to the valve opening.

Connection (1):
TRANSMITTER OUTSIG_1 → CONTROLLER MEASRD
A variable and unit must be defined for the output from the transmitter.
Ex. ”PT bara”

Connection (2):
CONTROLLER OUTSIG_1 → VALVE INPSIG

Controller Setpoint

51
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Most controllers take a setpoint as input. The setpoint can be connected as an input terminal or given as a
time series. If it is given as a time series the keywords SETPOINT and TIME must be given.

Figure B shows how the controller setpoint is changed for the following SETPOINT/TIME input:

SETPOINT = (0, 1, 0.5)

TIME = (0, 1, 2)

Note that the setpoint change in a step wise manner.

SETPOINT

0
0 1 2 3
TIME
Figure B: Setpoint vs. time

Controller measured variable

Most controllers take an input signal in terms of a measured variable, see terminal MEASRD and/or
terminal INPSIG. The measured variable can be delayed by specifying the DELAY key on the controllers
(avaiable on most controllers). If the DELAY key is set to 10 seconds, the measured variable is delayed 10
seconds before it is taken into account in the control algorithm.

52
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Algebraic controller
The algebraic controller is used to combine input signals to form algebraic equations and logical
expressions. The algebraic controller issues a control signal to a device (e.g. a valve) or as an input
signal to other controllers.

When to use
Use to change a variable in a process unit (e.g. Valve, Pump) or an input to another controller according
to an algebraic function or a logical expression.

Ex. Make the valve opening dependent on more then one signal and an algebraic expression.
Ex. Make the valve opening dependent on a logical expression.
Ex. Activate deactivate controllers according to a logical expression.
Ex. Non-linear transformation a measured signal to a controller.

Methods and assumptions

The algebraic controller takes a number of input signals and combine these according to the specified
VARIABLEFUNCTION key.

The computed output signal is affected by maximum, minimum constraints and by rate of change
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time), see Constraining the controller output and Actuator
time of controlled device.

How to use
Connect the required input signal(s) to the INPSIG_1..N terminal(s). Specify the operators to act on the
input signal(s) in the VARIABLEFUNCTION key. Connect the controller output signal OUTSIG_1..N to a
device variable.

The figure below shows how multiple controller blocks can be combined in one algebraic controller.

53
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ASC controller
The main purpose of the ASC unit, is to prevent a compressor from operating to the left of the Surge
Line in a compressor performance map, see Figure A: Compressor characteristic diagram, Figure B:
Recirculation loop and Figure A: Anti Surge Controller.

When to use
Use to control the recycle flow for compressors, and to avoid compressor surge.

Methods and assumptions

An ASC should be able to open the recirculation valve very fast to prevent a dangerous surge condition.
This can be achieved by choosing a high amplification factor for the ASC and selecting a recycle valve
with a short stroke time. But the ASC must also be capable of managing a situation where the
compressor inlet or discharge is closed. The high amplification factor could give excessive
compensation, which would cause the recirculation valve to hunt between open and closed position and
aggravate the surge due to pressure and flow pulsation. Therefore it is necessary to have a controller
that can operate on a non-linear control algorithm. In essence, the controller shall apply one level of
amplification and integral action to a positive error input signal and a different level of amplification and
integral action to a negative error input signal. In this way the recycle valve can be opened rapidly while
an inertia is imposed when it is closed again.

The ASC unit uses a standard PID controller formula except that it allows for two different controller
amplifications (AMP1 and AMP2) that are necessary when operating on a non-linear control algorithm.
AMP1 is used when the deviation parameter (e) is negative (left of anti surge control-line in the
compressor performance map) and AMP2 when it is positive. The anti surge control-line is the setpoint
for the ASC unit and is calculated by multiplying the compressor surge flow at different RPM's with a
constant security factor specified by the user through the compressor input group, COMPRESSOR (i.e.
a security factor of 1.2 means that the set point for the ASC unit is 20% higher than the surge flow). The
surge flow at different RPM's, is specified in the compressor data file. The surge flow increases with
increasing RPM, which means that the setpoint for the ASC unit is not constant.

By using a large AMP1 and a (corresponding) small AMP2, the anti surge control valve is forced to a
rapid opening whereas the closing operation is more relaxed. Figure A shows the ASC application.

Figure A: Anti Surge Controller

The cascade controller uses the PID algorithm, see Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Algorithm. The
ASC controller has the same functionality as the PID controller, in addition to the functionality described
in this section. See PID Controller Methods and assumptions (Jump to: PID controller Methods and
assumptions).
How to use

54
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

See Connecting the controllers for an example on how to connect a controller.

Connect the compressor output (QGSURGE) to the ASC controller setpoint (SETPOINT). (Connect the
compressor OUTSIG to the ASC setpoint and specify QGSURGE as variable.) This is the volume flow
(default unit m3/s) at predicted surge multiplied with a security factor. The security factor is given in the
compressor SECURITYFACTOR key.

Put a transmitter at the same section boundary as the compressor. Connect the gas volume flow QG to
the ASC controller measurement terminal (MEASRD). Make sure QG and QGSURGE have the same
units. The MEASRD terminal must be connected.

Connect the ASC controller output to the Compressor ASCSIG input terminal.

Figure B shows the connection possibilities of the ASC controller.

MEASRD

SETPOINT OUTSIG_1..N

Figure B: ASC controller connection terminals

55
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Cascade controller
The purposes of a cascade control loop are:
1. To reduce the effects of some disturbances.
2. To improve the dynamic performance of the control loop.

To achieve this cascade control utilize multiple feedback loops.

When to use
Cascade control is used when there are disturbance associated with the manipulated variable, or when
the final control element exhibits nonlinear behaviour.

Examples of use are:

Level control in a separator. The separator holdup changes are slow compared to flow dynamics. See
Figure A: Cascade control.

Temperature control when two fluid flows are heat exchanged. The temperature dynamics are slow
compared to the flow dynamics.

Methods and assumptions

As illustrated below in Figure A a cascade control uses two (or more) controllers with the output of the
primary controller changing the setpoint of the secondary controller. The output of the secondary
controller regulates the control device, here the drain valve.

Figure A: Cascade control

The OLGA cascade controller will represent the inner loop. That is; the secondary controller shown in
Figure A. The cascade controller uses the PID algorithm, see Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID)
Algorithm. See also the PID Controller Methods and assumptions. The Cascade controller has the same
functionality as the PID controller, in addition to the functionality described in this section.

The cascade controller can be in normal or extended mode. The difference between the two is how the
setpoint of the secondary controller are determined.

For the normal cascade controller, the setpoint of the secondary controller is determined by the output
of the primary controller:

S = S min + C p (S max − S min ) (a)

Where
S the setpoint of the secondary controller

56
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Smin minimum setpoint

Smax maximum setpoint
Cp output from the primary controller

For the extended cascade controller, the setpoint is calculated differently:

⎛ 1 ⎞
S n = S n−1 + ⎜ C P − (C P,max + C P,min )⎟ PM − PS CΔt (b)
⎝ 2 ⎠
Where
tn
1
PM =
Tav n
∫ Pdt (c)
t −Tav .

C = C1 if |PM - Ps| > Cswitch (d)

C = C2 if |PM - Ps| ≤ Cswitch (e)

Sn setpoint of the secondary controller at the current time point

Sn-1 setpoint of the secondary controller at the previous time point
Cp output from primary controller
Cp,min minimum of output from primary controller
Cp,max maximum of controller output from primary controller
Ps setpoint of the primary controller
Δt numerical time step (tn - tn-1)
PM moving averaged of the primary controller variable P
Tav user defined (moving) averaging time period
C constant that can take two different values
C1 user defined constant
C2 user defined constant
Cswitch user defined constant

For the level control as illustrated above, suppose the separator pressure increases. The pressure drop
over the drain valve will be larger, so the liquid flow will increase. With a single level controller, the drain
flow rate will not be corrected until the increased drain flow decreases the liquid level. Thus the
separator pressure disturbs both the liquid level and the liquid drain rate.

With the cascade control loop, the flow controller (secondary controller) will immediately see the change
in the flow rate and correct the valve opening to return the drain flow rate to the setpoint set by the level
controller. Thus it gives a better control on the liquid level and a smoother liquid drain rate.

Limitations
Secondary loop process dynamics should be at least four times as fast as primary loop process
dynamics.

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for a example on how to connect a controller. The cascade control loop is
built as two separate PID controllers, where the output from the primary controller is used as a setpoint of
the secondary controller.

The cascade controller requires that the measurement terminal (MEASRD) and the setpoint terminal
(SETPOINT) are connected.

57
Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure B show the connection possibilities of the Cascade controller.

MEASRD

SETPOINT OUTSIG_1..N

Figure B: Cascade controller connection terminals

58
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ESD controller
Emergency-Shut-Down (ESD) logics are used to avoid damage on the process equipment and the
pipeline. An ESD controller closes, output goes from 1 to 0, when a measured process variable rises
above (or fall below) a safety limit.

When to use
Use to model safety control system.

Example of use:
Shutdown of a pump downstream a separator. If the liquid level in a separator becomes to low, gas might
flow in the pump feed. Gas in the feed might damage the pump.

Methods and assumptions

The controller will monitor one or more variables (normally pressure). As soon as any of the variables
becomes less than or greater than the setpoint value, depending on opening mode, a controller signal
activates a valve that will close within a certain time. If a reset value is specified, the ESD valve will open
again when all of the controlled variables become greater or less than the reset value.

The output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for an example on how to connect a controller.

Connect the measured value (e.g. a pressure). The MEASRD terminal must be connected.

The ESD output is typically connected to some process equipment or a pressure driven source/leak.

Set the setpoint where the controller should close. If the controller should automatically open, enter a reset
value.

Include sufficient hysteresis for the reset value compared to the setpoint value. In this way a situation where
the ESD output oscillates will be avoided. That is; a situation where the ESD closes in one time step, opens
the next, closes again in the next etc.

Figure A show the connection possibilities of the ESD controller.

MEASRD_1..N

SETPOINT_1..N OUTSIG_1..N

Figure A: ESD controller connection terminals

59
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Manual controller
The manual controller is used to simulate the actions of an operator. The manual controller issues a
control signal to a device (e.g. a valve).

When to use
Use to change the process unit (e.g. Valve, Pump) inputs manually.

Ex. Simulate a manual change in valve opening.

Ex. Simulate a manual ramp-up of a choke.
Ex. Simulate a starting leak from the pipeline.

Methods and assumptions

The manual controller takes a setpoint as an internally defined time series, or as an input signal. The
changes in setpoint will be applied immediately, that is; the setpoint will change in a step wise manner.

The input signal is filtered through with stroke time limitations. This can be avoided by setting a low
stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.

How to use
Give the required setpoint changes, and connect to a device variable.

The manual controller doesn’t require any of the signal terminals to be connect. Figure A shows the
connection possibilities of the manual controller.

SETPOINT OUTSIG_1..N

Figure A: Manual controller connection terminals

60
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Override controller
The Override controller acts as a minimum or maximum operator on its input. It can be configured to
select the lowest or highest value among several inputs.

When to use
When there are fewer variables to manipulate than there are variables to control. The controllers (or
measurements) of the controlled variables need to share the manipulated variables.

Methods and assumptions

The override controller can be a low select or high select operator. The override controller requires one
or more input signals. The input signals can come from any other output terminal. In low select mode
the minimum input signal is selected as the final output signal from the unit. A typical application of the
controller unit in a process module is shown in Figure A.

Figure A: Double PID controller used as a turbine speed controller

Here the output signal from two pressure controllers (PC) is connected as input to the override
controller. One of the pressure controllers is controlling the suction pressure before the first compressor
stage, and the other is controlling the pressure downstream of the second compressor stage. In normal
operation, the speed is controlled by the suction pressure controller, but in situations where the outlet
pressure approaches the maximum operating pressure, the speed is controlled by the high pressure
controller.

Figure B shows a typical application of the override controller (OC) with input signal from three
controllers in a process module. The override controller is in low select mode. The flow controller (FC) is
controlling the flow downstream of the control valve (choke) while the pressure controllers (PC) are
controlling the pressures upstream and downstream of the control valve. In normal operation, the valve
is controlled by the flow controller. In situations where the pressure downstream of the control valve
approaches the maximum operating pressure (set-point for downstream pressure controller), the valve
is controlled by the high-pressure controller. In situations where the pressure upstream of the control
valve approaches the minimum operating pressure (set-point for upstream pressure controller), the
valve is controlled by the low-pressure controller.

61
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OC FC

PC
PC

Figure B: Triple PID controller used as flow regulator

The output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for an example on how to connect a controller.

Select the mode of operation by setting SELECTIONMODE. Connect the signals the override controller
should operate on.

The Override controller require that at least one input terminal is connected.

Figure C shows the connection possibilities of the Override controller.

INPSIG_1..N OUTSIG_1..N

Figure C: Override controller connection terminals

62
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PID controller
The main function of a PID controller is to maintain process parameters within specified bounds by
controlling process equipment parameters like valve opening and compressor speed.

When to use
To stabilize a process variable, or to stabilize an entire pipeline.

To model actual control functionality used to stabilize pipe flow.

A typical application of the controller unit in a process module is to control a separator level (Figure A)
and it is then called a level controller. Input process parameter is liquid level in the separator and the
output signal from the controller is used to control the opening of a drain valve. The controller may
alternatively have flow, pressure etc. as input signal, and is then called a flow controller, a pressure
controller etc.

LC

Figure A: PID controller used as a level controller

Methods and assumptions

The PID controller uses the Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Algorithm, see below.

The PID controller limits the output with the stroke time of the connected device (e.g. Valve). See
Actuator time of controlled device.

The controller uses Anti-Windup. When the controller reaches maximum/minimum output (saturates) the
integral is kept to a proper value, so that the controller is ready to resume action, as soon as the control
error changes. The anti-windup used is a tracking/back calculation scheme.

Transfer between setpoint modes are made bumpless. When the setpoint mode change, the integral
term is corrected to remove a sudden jump in the controller output.

If the PID controller output is connected to a Selector or an Override controller it might become inactive.
See Selector and Override controllers. There are four different modes for the controller when it becomes
inactive. The Selector or Override controller will automatically set the PID controller in a active/inactive
state.

Actions taken when the controller becomes inactive (keyword INACTIVEMODESUBC):

• ONHOLD
Restore old values, everything is on hold.
• INTERLOCK
The PID controller get feedback on the output signal used (uused) from the connected controller (Selector
or Override). If the PID controller becomes inactive it will use uused to back calculate its integral error.
• DEFAULTINPUT

63
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compute output signal based on default input, given in key DEFAULTINPUT.

• NORMAL
No action for normal mode.

Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Algorithm

A PID algorithm may be mathematically formulated as:

⎛ 1 t de ⎞
u = K c ⎜⎜ e +
⎝ τi ∫ edt + τ
0
d
⎟ + bias
dt ⎟⎠
(a)

e = (x − xstp ) (b)

where:
x = input process parameter (pressure, level, etc.)
= time constant
u = output signal from controller
t = time
bias = initial value

Subscripts:
stp = set point (or reference point)
i = integral
d = derivative
0 = time at start of simulation

The amplification factor Kc is a dimensioned quantity. If the option with normalised amplification factor is
used, the program will calculate Kc using the range given with the following expression:

input amplificat ion factor

K = (c)
c NORMRANGE

For non-linear controllers, KC, , can be given in tabular form as a function of the error signal e. An
error is then given as a vector (keyword input). The PID parameters keys for KC, and must be
specified as vectors with the same dimension as . The controller parameters are found by linear
interpolation in the actual controller error, e. The non-linear controller option is activated when the PID
parameters are given as vectors, and not as single values.

By using this general formula, simpler controllers as P and PI controllers can be defined by giving
proper values to the time constants in the PID formula. The table below shows time constants for
simpler controllers.

Table 1: Time constants for P, PI and PD controllers

Time constants
P controller 0.0 109
PI controller 0.0 < 108
PD controller > 0.0 109

This controller formula is frequently referred to as a standard PID controller in the manual.

64
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for an example on how to connect the PID controller.

The PID controller requires that a measurement value is connected to the controller. (Signal terminal
MEASRD). The setpoint must be given in the key SETPOINT, or connected to the SETPOINT input
terminal.

Figure B shows the connection possibilities of the PID controller.

MEASRD

SETPOINT OUTSIG_1..N

Figure B: PID controller connection terminals

PID controller example

Three parameters are at our disposal for tuning a PID controller, Kc, td and ti. However, for petroleum
applications td is rarely used (td = 0), since there is usually quite a lot of noise on the input process signal.
This results in rapid oscillations in the derivative of the signal, and if the derivative term in the controller
equation were included this would result in oscillations in the controller output, which is not desirable.

We have the following relation between the symbols used in this description and the OLGA input variables
in the CONTROLLER keyword:

Kc = AMPLIFICATION
td = DERIVATIVECONST
ti = INTEGRALCONST
bias = BIAS
x = VARIABLE
xstp = SETPOINT

Note that the stroke-time of the controller valve (defined through STROKETIME) does not directly influence
the controller output as discussed here. However, the opening and closing speed of the controller valve is
limited by the stroke-time. That is, if the stroke-time is given as 100 s the opening of the valve will at
maximum change by 1% per second.
Level control
A typical application of a level controller is shown in the Figure A: PID controller used as a level controller.
The change in the liquid volume fraction in the vessel (b) is given by

dβ Qin − Qout
= (a)
dt V
where Qin [m3/s] is the liquid volume flow into the vessel, Qout [m3/s] is the liquid volume flow out of the
vessel and V [m3] is the volume of the vessel. The flow out of the vessel can be written

65
Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Qout = Qmaxu (b)

where Qmax is the maximum flow when the controller is fully open.

For the current case, the error (e) is defined as liquid volume fraction minus the volume fraction at the
setpoint, and the derivative time constant is set to zero. Taking the time derivative of the above two
equations with the use of the control equation (Jump to: Equation a in the following differential equation is
obtained

d 2β Q K dβ Qmax K c
= − max c − β + f (t ) (c)
dt 2
V dt Vτ i

Where f(t) is a disturbance that the control system should compensate for. Casting it into the standard form

d 2β dβ
τ 2
p + 2ζτ p + β = f (t ) (d)
dt dt
we get the time constant of the control loop

Vτ i
τp = (e)
Qmax K c

and the damping coefficient

Qmax K cτ i
ζ = 0.5 (f)
V
Kc must be positive for tp and z to be real numbers. The figure below shows the performance of control loop
for different damping constants for a step disturbance at t = 0 (f(t) has a step increase). This could for
instance be that the setpoint of the level control is changed.

66
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Response of level to a level controller

Response

ζ = 0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
1
setpoint

0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Time, (t/τp)

Figure C: Response of level control to step disturbance.

From this figure, one can see that a damping coefficient from 0.5-0.7 will give satisfactory results for level
control. Therefore, one may use the following procedure to select the parameters for level control:

1. Size the drain valve so that it can deliver Qmax = two times the normal drain rate for the pressure
difference between separator pressure and backpressure of the drain valve.
2. Set Kc < 2 and choose ti (the integral time constant) to make the damping coefficient between 0.5
and 0.7.

Flow control
Assuming constant upstream and downstream pressure over the valve, the flow rate can be written as:

F = Fmax u (g)

where:
F = flow rate (mass or volumetric flow rate)
Fmax = max flow rate through the fully open valve at the given pressure drop
u = output signal from controller

Taking the time derivative of the above equation and using the control equation we obtain

dF ⎛ dF 1 ⎞
= Fmax K c ⎜ + F ⎟ + f (t ) (h)
dt ⎝ dt τ i ⎠
or

(1 − Fmax K c ) dF − Fmax K c F = f (t ) (i)

dt τi

For the solution to be stable, Kc must be negative. The time constant of the solution is

( Fmax K c − 1)τ i
τp = (j)
Fmax K c

67
Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure D shows the response of the flow to a step change in for example setpoint (f(t) has a step
increase).

Response flow to a step change for flow controller

1.2

0.8
response

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time (t/τp)

Figure D: Response of flow control to step disturbance.

The shorter the time constant, the faster the response goes to the setpoint. One could use the following
procedures to select the controller parameters for flow control.

1. Estimate the upstream and downstream pressure over the control valve at the design flow rate. If
the pressure difference is less than e.g. 0.2 bar, adjust the upstream or downstream pressure so
that the difference is at least 0.2 bar. This is considered a convenient pressure drop over a valve
being used for flow control.
2. Size the valve so that it can deliver maximum flow rate = 2 times the designed value for the same
pressure drop over the valve.
A
3. Set Kc = with A ranging from 1 to 10.
Fmax
4. τp can be selected from the above chart, depending on how fast you want the flow rate to reach
e.g. 90% of the set point. When τp has been chosen τi is found from the definition of τp.
5. By choosing a different A, the same τp can be obtained for a different τi.

68
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PSV controller
A Pressure-Safety-Valve (PSV) typically opens fast when the pressure rises above a defined value.
When the valve is opened the pressure is relieved. The safety valves are included to avoid damage on
the process equipment and the pipeline.

The PSV controller and a valve (or source) simulates the behaviour of the Pressure-Safety-Valve.

When to use
Use to model pressure safety valves. Use together with a valve or pressure driven source.

Methods and assumptions

The controller will compare one or more input variables (normally pressure) with a setpoint. If any one of
the variable values becomes higher than or less than the setpoint, the controller will open a selected
PSV-valve. This could be the valve defined as a source valve. If all of the variables become greater or
lower than the reset value, this valve is closed again.

The output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for a example on how to connect a controller.

Connect the measured value (e.g. a pressure). The MEASRD terminal must be connected.

Connect the PSV controller output to valves, pressure driven sources or leaks.

Set the setpoint where the controller should open. If the controller should automatically close, enter a reset
value.

Include sufficient hysteresis for the reset value compared to the setpoint value, to avoid a situation where
the PSV output oscillates. That is; a situation where it opens in one time step, closes the next, opens again
in the next etc.

Change the default OPENMODE to BELOW if the controller should open when the measurement falls
below the setpoint.

Figure A shows the connection possibilities of the PSV controller.

MEASRD_1..N

SETPOINT_1..N OUTSIG_1..N

Figure A: PSV controller connection terminals

69
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Scaler controller
The scaler controller is used to scale input signals linearly from an input range to an output range. The
scaler controller issues a control signal to a device (e.g. a valve) or as an input signal to other
controllers.

When to use
Use to scale a variable in a process unit (e.g. Valve, Pump) or an input to another controller.

Ex. Scale controller ouptput signal from range 0 - 100% to input valve signal range 0 - 1. Includ a scaler
controller between main controller and valev
Ex. Scale signal from transmitter range to controller input range. Include a scaler controller between
transmitter and main controller.
Ex. Limit transmitter signal to stay in configured range.

Methods and assumptions

The scaler controller scales the input signal linearly from the input range (LOWLIMIT to HIGHLIMIT) to
the ouput range (MINSIGNAL to MAXSIGNAL).

u = (MAXSIGNAL-MINSIGNAL) / (HIGHLIMIT - LOWLIMIT) * (y - LOWLIMIT) + MINSIGNAL

where
y - measured variable
u - unconstrained output

The computed output signal is affected by maximum, minimum constraints and by rate of change
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time),
see Constraining the controller output and Actuator time of controlled device.

How to use
Connect the required input signal to the MEASRD terminal. Specify input range and the output range by
setting LOWLIMIT, HIGHLIMIT and MINSIGNAL, MAXSIGNAL keys. Connect the controller output
signal OUTSIG_1..N to a device variable.

The figure below shows transformation of input to output through a scaler controller C.

70
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Selector controller
A SELECTOR controller is a controller that uses two sub-controllers that are selected based on the
value of selected variables relative to low and high limits of these variables. The controller operates as a
kind of hysteresis controller, selecting the signal from one of the sub-controllers, and using this sub-
controller until the low (or high) variable limit is reached. Then the controller selects another sub-
controller, and keeps it until the high (or low) variable limit is reached.

When to use
When there are fewer variables to manipulate than there are variables to control. The controllers (or
measurements) of the controlled variables need to share the manipulated variables.

Methods and assumptions

The controller algorithm is best described by an example:

Figure A shows a system consisting of a pipeline with a separator. The separator has liquid and gas
valves attached to it, in addition to an emergency liquid drain valve. In addition there is a separator inlet
valve having a fixed opening. Upstream of the separator, at some distance from it, is a gamma
densitometer used for measuring the local liquid volume fraction.

Gamma
densitometer

HOLC

LC

Figure A: Separator using SELECTOR controller to control the liquid outlet valve.

We want to control the separator level by controlling the liquid level in the separator with a level PID
controller. As long as the liquid level is below a given value we want the controller to act slowly /
moderately fast. If a liquid slug arrives we want the level control on the separator liquid outlet to be
faster to prevent the level from increasing to very high levels. This means that for normal operation we
have a moderately fast PID level controller, and for transient operation (when a slug arrives) we have a
fast PID operation.

In addition, a gamma densitometer is placed at some distance from the separator inlet. When the time
averaged signal from the meter reaches a certain limit, a slug is expected to arrive. We also want this to
trigger a faster operation of the separator liquid valve.

71
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Our control structure for the separator liquid outlet valve will then be:

Normal operation:
1. Slow separator liquid level controller used to control the liquid outlet valve.
2. If the separator liquid level reaches a given high level, or the time averaged gamma
densitometer signal becomes higher than a given limit, the fast separator liquid outlet valve
controller takes over.

Transient operation:

1. The fast liquid valve controller that is controlled by the separator liquid level is acting.
2. If the separator liquid level drops below a given low limit, the slow / normal separator liquid level
controller starts controlling the liquid outlet valve. The operation is back to normal.

There is no restriction on the number of variables that can be used for switching between the sub-
controllers. The variables and their low and high limits are given as input to OLGA.

If the sub-controllers are PID controllers the integral term of the non-acting controller can be saved
(interlocked), reset to zero, or still be integrated. This will be determined in the input to the OLGA sub-
controllers by the user.

How to use
See Connecting the controllers for an example on how to connect a controller.

Connect one or more limit signals (HIGHLIMITSIG/LOWLIMITSIG).

Define the controller used at start of simulation (keyword INITIALCONTROLLER).

Define the limits where the Selector controller changes its output (LOWLIMIT, HIGHLIMIT).

Connect the controller used below LOWLIMIT (SUBCONLOW), and the controller used above HIGHLIMIT
(SUBCONHIGH).

Figure B show the connection possibilities of the Selector controller.

SUBCONLOW

SUBCONHIGH

OUTSIG_1..N

HIGHLIMITSIG_1..N

LOWLIMITSIG_1..N

Figure B: Selector controller connection terminals

72
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

STD Controller
The controller converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.

When to use
Use to control a volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.

Methods and assumptions

The controller converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.
Fluid properties are calculated from the given fluid table (FLUID), or composition (FEEDNAME) at
standard conditions. Standard conditions; pressure = 1 atm and temperature = 60 °F (~15.5 °C).
If neither of GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT are given, the fluid table/composition phase
distribution at standard conditions will be used to calculate the overall mass flow rate.

Limitations
Standard conditions, pressure = 1 atm and temperature = 60 °F (~15.5 °C), must be included in the fluid
table.

How to use
To convert from mass flow at to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions:
Set correct phase in PHASE key. Specify the fluid in the FLUID or FEEDNAME keys. Specify
the wanted GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT, and the volumetric flow rate at
standard conditions will be calculated.
Connect the STDController output terminal OUTSIG to an PID controller MEASRD terminal.

73
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Switch controller
The main purpose of the switch controller is to switch between alternative inputs values. The output of
the controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or SETPOINT terminal if
MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT.

When to use
Use to select between alternative inputs to controllers or valves.

Ex. Alternative inputs to valves.

Ex. Alternative measured signals to controllers.

Methods and assumptions

The output of the switch controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or
SETPOINT terminal if MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT.

SP < 1.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_1

1.5 <= SP < 2.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_2

2.5 <= SP < 3.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_3

(N-0.5) <= SP unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_N

Where N is the number of connected input terminals INPSIG_1..N

The computed output signal is affected by maximum, minimum constraints and by rate of change
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time), see Constraining the controller output and Actuator
time of controlled device.

How to use
Connect the required input signal(s) to the INPSIG_1..N terminal(s). Specify the SETPOINT key or
connect the SETPOINT terminal. Connect the controller output signal OUTSIG_1..N to a device
variable.

The figure above shows how INPSIG_1..4 is connected to OUTSIG.

74
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Table controller
The table controller makes it possible to tabulate a relation between the controller input and the
controller output.

When to use
Use to define a non-linear relation for a process variable.

Methods and assumptions

A table controller uses the input variables as lookup variable, x, in a table, u = f(x). The controller output
is u.

It is possible to use nested tables, that is; u = f(g(x)). This is done in the table definition, where one
table can reference another. The result from interpolating one table is used to interpolate in another.

Limitations
The table controller is limited to one variable. It is only possible to calculate u = f(x1), and not u = f(x1,x2)
etc.

How to use
Define a table, with XVARIABLE and YVARIABLE set to NOTGIVEN. Reference the table in the
controller definition.

Make the input signal available (from e.g. a transmitter) with the correct units, and connect to the
controller. The table controller requires that the input signal (INPSIG) terminal is connected.

Figure B shows the connection possibilities of the table controller.

INPSIG OUTSIG_1..N

Figure B: Table controller connection terminals

75
 Controller OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Transmitter

When to use
The transmitters are used together with the controllers.

Methods and assumptions

The transmitter creates a trend object and update the signal terminal every time step. That implies that
every variable available for trending is available from a transmitter.

The signal is converted to user specified units. If no unit is given, the default unit is used.

One transmitter can measure and transmit an arbitrary number of variables (from a single position).

Limitations
The transmitters can only be connected to the flow path. For process equipment (Valve, Pump etc.)
variables, connected the equipment directly.

How to use
The transmitter is positioned on the flow path, using pipe and section/section boundary or absolute position.
It is possible to use one transmitter to for both PT (volume variable) and UL (boundary variable).

Make the connection between the transmitter, and the receiving signal terminal. Use the Connections view
to set variable name and unit.

After making a connection from the transmitter (ex. OUTSIG_1), a new terminal will be made available (ex.
OUTSIG_2). One transmitter can measure and transmit an arbitrary number of variables (from a single
position).

76
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Corrosion
The purpose is to calculate standard uniform CO2 corrosion and Top Of Line (TOL) CO2 corrosion.

When to use
CO2 corrosion should be expected whenever CO2 and water is present.
License requirements
The Corrosion Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The basic chemical reactions in CO2 corrosion are:

CO2 + H 2 O ⇔ H 2 CO3 (a)

which dissociates in two steps:

H 2 CO3 ⇔ H + + HCO3− (b)

HCO3− ⇔ H + + CO32− (c)

In CO2 corrosion when the concentrations of Fe2+ and CO32- ions exceed the solubility limit, they
combine to form solid iron carbonate films according to:

Fe2+ + CO32− ⇒ FeCO3 (solid) (d)

These films can be more or less protective for further corrosion.

Currently, three CO2 corrosion models; the NORSOK model , the de Waard 95 model and the IFE top-
of-line corrosion model have been implemented in the OLGA three-phase flow model /5/, /8/, /18/. The
de Waard 93 corrosion model was included in earlier versions, but has now been replaced with the top-
of-line corrosion model. Corrosion dominated by H2S is at present not covered by the corrosion module.

The NORSOK and de Waard 95 models are both regarded as conservative models as they include only
limited effects of protective corrosion films. Protective corrosion films can form especially at high
temperature (above 60 °C) and at high pH (above pH 5.5). The corrosion rate will increase with
temperature for both models up to a limiting temperature where formation of protective corrosion films
are predicted. Both models are tuned to a large set of experimental data, but the NORSOK model takes
somewhat larger account for protective corrosion films at high temperature and high pH than the de
Waard 95 model, as more recent high temperature data also have been used.

The NORSOK model gives the corrosion rate as function of pH, temperature, CO2 partial pressure and
wall shear stress:

CR = f(pH, T) * g(T) * h(PCO2, τ) (e)

The de Waard 95 model gives the corrosion rate according to the following formula:

CR = (1 / (1 / Vr + 1 / Vm)) * Fscale (f)

77
 Corrosion OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where Vr is the maximum corrosion rate based on the limiting reaction rate given as a function of
temperature, CO2 partial pressure and pH:

Vr = f(T, pH, PCO2), (g)

Vm is the maximum corrosion rate based on the limiting mass transfer rate given as a function of CO2
partial pressure, liquid flow velocity and hydraulic diameter:

Vm = C * PCO2 * UL0.8 * DH0.2, (h)

and the scale protection factor Fscale is a function of temperature and CO2 partial pressure:

Fscale = g(T, PCO2) (i)

In the IFE top-of-line corrosion model the top-of-line corrosion rate is limited by the amount of iron that
can be dissolved in the condensed water:

CR = a * Rcond * CFe * (b - T) (j)

where Rcond is the water condensation rate calculated by OLGA and the solubility of iron in the
condensing water CFe is a function of CO2 partial pressure and temperature:

CFe = f(T, PCO2) (k)

The flow field at each section along the pipeline/network is used to calculate the corrosion rate.

How to use
For Top Of Line (TOL) corrosion the water condensation rate is needed. This is not available when
using the Black oil model. When using the PVT table option it is only available for a three phase table
and when specifying:

• FLASHMODEL = WATER in OPTIONS.

When using compositional tracking (COMPOSITIONAL=ON IN OPTIONS). TOL can only be used when
specifying:

• FLASHTYPE= FULLTHREEPHASE or SIMPLETHREEPHASE in COMPOPTIONS.

The NORSOK and de Waard models can be used for all PVT calculation options (Black oil, PVT table
and Compositional Tracking).

The input parameters for the corrosion models are specified in the keyword statement CORROSION.
Input parameters for each branch of the network are as follows:

• CO2 mole % in the gas (key: CO2FRACTION)

• Bicarbonate concentration in the water phase (BICARBONATE)
• Total ionic strength in the water (IONICSTRENGTH)
• Inhibitor efficiency (INHIBITOREFF)
• Glycol concentration in the aqueous phase (GLYCOLFRACTION)
• The water cut limit where water droplets in oil will wet the wall (WCWET). If the water cut is
higher than this value, the water droplets will wet the wall, even if no continuous water film is
present. The default value is 30 %. This parameter is only used for the water wetting test in the
corrosion module. It has no influence on the flow conditions.
• An option for calculating pH based on saturated iron carbonate concentration in water (PHSAT)
• Maximum CO2 partial pressure in single phase liquid flow (PCO2MAX)

78
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

• Bubble point pressure , from which the CO2 partial pressure for single phase liquid flow will be
calculated (PTMAX)

Currently, the bicarbonate, glycol concentrations, ionic strength and water wetting limit are given as
constants for a given branch. The glycol concentration can either be set manually or be determined by
the MEG tracking function if available to the user. If the manual option is used, the glycol concentration
is constant through the whole pipeline. If the MEG tracking option is used, the glycol concentration will
be diluted in accordance with water condensation rates.

The water chemistry has a significant influence on the calculated corrosion rates. Experience in CO2
corrosion evaluation is therefore important to prepare input and evaluate simulation results properly.

For both the NORSOK and the de Waard 95 models the pH value in the bulk water phase is calculated
as a function of CO2 partial pressure, temperature, bicarbonate content and ionic strength by the
formulas given in the NORSOK model. The input parameters BICARBONATE and PHSAT can be used
to choose between different water chemistry conditions when calculating the pH value:
• Condensed water without corrosion products: BICARBONATE = 0, PHSAT = OFF
• Condensed water saturated with corrosion products: BICARBONATE = 0, PHSAT = ON
• Water with specified bicarbonate content (e.g. formation water): BICARBONATE > 0, PHSAT =
OFF

The pH calculation is based on the CO2 partial pressure calculated as the CO2 mole % in the gas phase
multiplied by the total pressure. For a situation with no free gas phase the CO2 content will be constant
for pressures above the bubble point pressure. The user must then manually supply the bubble point
pressure (PTMAX), which may be found by running OLGA. The maximum CO2 partial pressure is then
calculated by the code for all pressures higher than PTMAX: CO2FRACTION * PTMAX. This is done
even though free gas is present; the code only checks if the pressure is above PTMAX or not.
Alternatively, the user may set the maximum CO2 partial pressure directly, (PCO2MAX). If no free gas
exists in the pipeline at all, PTMAX or PCO2MAX can be found from measurements or calculations in a
separator or in a pipeline further downstream where a free gas phase exists.

In the de Waard 95 model, corrosion reduction due to protective films is not accounted for when
formation water is present. For ionic strengths larger than 0.2 M, formation water is assumed and there
will be no corrosion reduction due to scaling. For ionic strengths lower than 0.2 M, condensed water
conditions are assumed, and the scaling reduction factor is then dependent on the CO2 partial pressure
and temperature.

The presence of glycol will reduce the corrosion rate. The same glycol reduction factor is used for both
the NORSOK and the de Waard 95 models. The effect of corrosion inhibitors can be specified through
the key INHIBITOREFFICIENCY.

Parameters calculated by the three phase flow model OLGA, which are used by the corrosion models,
are pressure (plot variable PT), temperature (TM), water velocity or mixture water/oil velocity, wall shear
stresses in water or alternatively liquid mixture (boundary variables TAUWWT, TAUWL), water volume
fraction (BEWT), oil film volume fraction (BEHL) and the near-wall water cut (WCWALL, which is given
as a fraction). WCWALL is defined to be 1.0 if there is any continuous water film at the wall. If water is
present only as droplets in the oil film, WCWALL is equal to the liquid film water cut. The liquid film
water cut can be expressed as USLWT/(USLWT+USLHL) where USLWT is the superficial velocity of
water in the liquid film, and USLHL is the superficial velocity of oil in the liquid film.

The water wetting conditions are determined as follows:

First, the water-oil flow regime is determined by the flow model. There are mainly two flow regime
conditions of concern for the corrosion model:

79
 Corrosion OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1. A continuous water film exists (WCWALL = 1.0). A continuous water film may be a result of
stratification, or due to a water cut above the flow model's water-oil inversion point. The water-
oil inversion point has a default value of 0.5 (water cut = 50%), but may be changed through the
keyword WATEROPTIONS, INVERSIONWATERFRAC. The OLGA code has been verified with
0.5 as inversion point. Please note that changing this value might change the flow predictions
significantly.
2. Water only existing as droplets in a continuous oil film. For such cases, the water cut must be
below the flow model's inversion point (0.0 < WCWALL < INVERSIONWATERFRAC < 1.0)

This flow information is sent to the corrosion module where tests are performed to determine if water
wetting occurs:

Condition 1 will always give water wetting of the wall.

Condition 2 will give water wetting if the water cut (and WCWALL converted to %) is above the water
wetting limit, WCWET, given in the CORROSION keyword (default value 30 %).

For slug flow (output variable ID = 3), both conditions might be occurring intermittently, i.e. a passing
slug bubble might be in condition 1, while the liquid slug might be in condition 2 or vice versa. Such
cases are treated as full water wetting (condition 1).

To sum up, the case of no water wetting can only occur in condition 2 when the liquid film water cut (and
WCWALL in %) is less than the water wetting limit (WCWET). In that case, zero corrosion rate follows.
Full water wetting will always occur if WCWALL (in %) is larger than or equal to WCWET.

In addition, the corrosion rates assuming full water wetting are always calculated.

Limitations
The corrosion models are not valid if pH > 6.5 or if T > 150° C. In cases where corrosion control by pH
stabilisation is applied, the pH value might exceed the upper pH limit of the corrosion models. The
implemented corrosion models are not suitable for such cases. The corrosion models should not be
used for CO2 partial pressures above 10 bar. In addition, the NORSOK model is presently not valid for
pH < 3.5 or T < 20° C. The user must ensure that these limits are not exceeded. The top-of-line
corrosion model does not account for increased corrosion due to presence of acetic acid in the gas,
which can increase the solubility of iron in the condensed water and hence the top-of-line corrosion rate.
If the gas contains acetic acid this should be evaluated separately.

The CO2 corrosion models are not valid when the ratio between CO2 and H2S partial pressure (or the
ratio between CO2 and H2S molar fraction in the gas phase) is lower than 20. The models should not be
used when the H2S partial pressure is higher than 100 mbar. For partial pressures ratios of CO2 and
H2S between 20 and 500, the models will give an upper bound for the corrosion rate, but may be
conservative since iron sulphide films may be formed.

80
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Drilling Fluid

Drilling fluids were originally developed to describe the different inert fluids that are used in drilling
operations. For example, muds of different densities can be pumped into the well during the drilling
operation. In underbalanced drilling Nitrogen gas (N2) can be used as lift gas to create the underbalanced
operation. Common to these fluids is that they remain in a single phase during the entire operation
envelope. In OLGA these fluids therefore belongs to a predetermined phase. OLGA then tracks the
amounts of the different drilling fluids in the gas, oil and water phases along the pipeline and calculates
the phase densities and viscosities by assuming ideal mixing together with the production fluid. As these
inert fluids were first developed for drilling operations, they were named drilling fluids. The production
engineering simulators were quick to make use of the drilling fluids to simulate dead (stabilized) oil
circulation in deep water oil production loops. In well applications drilling fluids are used to simulate well
clean-up, well work over and initial start-up of well after completion. In on-line and engineering simulators
drilling fluids are also used to simulate MEG distribution systems.

In OLGA it is possible to combine drilling fluids and MEG tracking, MEG is tracked as a separate
component. It is assumed that a defined drilling fluid is completely miscible with the specified
predetermined phase to and immiscible with the fluids in the other phases. Therefore this option is
suitable for displacement of different fluids of low volatility.

When to use
The drilling fluids can be used when it is desired to track one or more fluids of low volatility (in addition to
the production fluid) simulating one fluid displacing another. In drilling applications the inert fluids can be
oil and water based mud and nitrogen for gas lift in underbalanced drilling. In well operation drilling fluid
is useful for simulating gas-lift of wells, well clean-up, well work over and initial start-up of well after
completion. Typical examples from flow assurance engineering are dead (stabilized) oil circulation in
deep water production loops, gas lift of deep water risers and simulating MEG distribution networks for
gas condensate production systems.

License requirements
Drilling and its associates are parts of the Wells Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

There are two methods for determining the physical properties of the drilling fluids: Interpolation in PVT
tables or use of built-in correlations. Only one method can be used in a single case.

The masses of the individual drilling fluids are tracked along the flow paths. The physical properties of
the drilling fluids and process fluid mixture are calculated based on the assumption of ideal mixture. The
solubility of the drilling fluid into other phases than the miscible phase is neglected. The drilling fluids do
not affect the phase behavior/envelope of the process fluids.

Interpolation in the PVT tables

When using the PVT tables the drilling fluid properties like densities and viscosity is tabulated as a
function of pressure and temperature. The non-Newtonian behavior is accounted for through the
apparent viscosity for flow calculations.

Built in correlations
When the built-in correlations are used, the code uses the following sixteen fictitious components to
keep track the amount of mixing of different drilling fluids:

81
 Drilling Fluid OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Component Component Description

ID name
1 HC Hydrocarbon mixture
2 H2O Aqueous mixture
3 MEG Hydrate inhibitor
4 GDENMIN Min gas density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
5 GDENMAX Max gas density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
6 GVISMIN Min gas viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
7 GVISMAX Max gas viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
8 ODENMIN Min oil density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
9 ODENMAX Max oil density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
10 OVISMIN Min oil viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
11 OVISMAX Max oil viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
12 WDENMIN Min water density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
13 WDENMAX Max water density tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
14 WVISMIN Min water viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
15 WVISMAX Max water viscosity tracer for drilling fluid (WATER/OIL)
16 CUTTING Cuttings

How to use

In order to invoke the Drilling Fluids, the key DRILLING in the OPTIONS keyword must be set to ON, e.g.
CaseDefiniton OPTIONS DRILLING = ON. Once the DRILLING option has been turned on, it cannot be
turned off in a subsequent restart from a RESTART file.

Drilling fluids are defined on Library level through use of the DRILLINGFLUID keyword. The drilling fluid
type must be set to gas, oil or water, e.g. TYPE = GASMUD, OILMUD or WATERMUD. The drilling fluid
type determines which phase the drilling fluid enters.

Interpolation in the PVT tables

The drilling fluid properties can be identified through a fluid property table in the *.tab file, use the
FLUIDTABLE key to refer to the *.tab file that contains the drilling fluid properties. The fluid properties
table referred must contain all liquid properties normally present in a *.tab file. A drilling fluid FLUIDTABLE
is normally generated using PVTsim. But the generated PVTSim tables cannot be used directly they need
to be converted using the Mud Property Table application available in the tools menu. Alternatively the
Fluid Definition Tool available through the Wells GUI can be used.

Built in correlations
The built in correlations for drilling fluid density and viscosity can be specified using the keys,
MAXDENSITY, MINDENSITY, MAXVISCOSITY, and MINVISCOSITY. These keys denote the drilling
fluid density and viscosity at standard conditions. Based on these standard properties, the density and
viscosity at in-situ temperatures and pressures are calculated by correlations. Units of conversions of
these drilling fluid properties are supported, so a valid density unit (such as LB/FT3) or viscosity unit
(such as CP) must follow the density and viscosity specifications.

Boundary conditions using drilling fluid

Drilling fluids can be injected into the models using either sources or boundary specifications, e.g.
SOURCE or NODE keywords. In sources drilling fluid inflow must be specified in mass units, generally
kg/s. Time series of mass inflow rates are allowed. Normally GASFRACTION and
TOTALWATERFRACTION must be set to zero so the MASSFLOW specified refers to drilling fluid mass

82
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

flow. In addition, the drilling fluid used must be identified by label, along with its density and viscosity.
This label, density, and viscosity must be consistent with the label and the density, viscosity ranges
specified in the DRILLINGFLUIDS keyword.
It is also possible to push drilling fluid into the model through a pressure boundary, e.g. NODE keyword.
The drilling fluid used must be identified by label in the NODE keyword. The drilling fluid label, density
and viscosity in the must be consistent with the label and density, viscosity ranges specified in the
DRILLINGFLUID keyword.

Output variables
A number of drilling mud variables can be plotted as either TREND or PROFILE variables. A
comprehensive list can be found on Drilling output variables.
Additional information

In addition the keywords below are useful:

· ANNULUS to specify the annulus configuration (thermal interactions)
· POSITION to specify initial bit position and leak-to positions
· LEAK to specify TOPOSITION (useful for simulating well unloading valves)

83
 Elastic walls OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Elastic walls
The purpose of the elastic wall option is to account for radial pipe flexibility in simulations involving
pressure surges due to sudden changes in liquid velocity. This pressure increase, commonly known as
water hammer, can be significantly reduced if the pipe is allowed to expand. The expansion will also
reduce the propagation speed of pressure waves.

The magnitude of influence from the wall flexibility can be measured by the ratio of the fluid
compressibility, κfluid, and wall flexibility, κwall. If κwall/κfluid << 1, the effect of wall flexibility can safely be
assumed to be small. However, if κwall/κfluid > 0.2, the simulation results based on rigid walls may be very
conservative. The following figure illustrate the effect when the compressibility ratio is approximately 0.5.
The case is a water filled 5 km horizontal pipe, with a diameter of 20.8 cm and a 9 mm thick steel wall.
The fluid is flowing with a velocity of 4 m/s before a near instantaneous closing of a valve is performed 6
seconds into the simulation. To monitor the water hammer, the pressure in the section upstream of the
valve is plotted. The simulation is performed both with and without flexible walls (red and black curve
respectively) .

Figure A: Pressure in section upstream of a near instantaneously closing valve.

The effect of the flexible pipe is most pronounced in the instantaneous change in pressure that occurs 6
seconds into the simulation. This is the actual water hammer that will be discussed subsequently. After
the initial hammer, a period of packing can be observed. In this phase, the flexible wall behaves much in
the same manner as the rigid wall. However, it should be observed that the packing phase is prolonged
and the total pressure increase due to packing is actually higher in the case with flexible walls.

Theoretical comparisons

84
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

In a perfectly rigid pipe, the theoretical hammer pressure is usually derived from the Joukowsky
equation:

ΔHmax = Δc a / g (a)

where

H - head in meters
a - speed of propagation of the disturbance (speed of sound)
g - acceleration of gravity
Δc - change in velocity
In terms of the pressure, this equation becomes:

ΔPmax = Δc a ρ (b)

where ΔP is the change in pressure and ρ is the fluid density

For slow closing valve action the following equation is often used.

ΔP = 0.07 v L / t (c)

where ΔP is the change in pressure given in psi, v is the fluid velocity [ft/s], L is the pipeline length [ft]
and t is the valve closing time [s]. This relation assumes incompressible fluid and tends towards infinity
at small t.

Given that the valve closing time is small enough, simulated results in OLGA without elastic walls will be
comparable to the Jukowski equation. It should be noted that the total pressure increase in the pipeline
computed by OLGA may be higher than the maximum theoretical water hammer. This is because the
momentum of the upstream fluid will continue to pack the pipeline after the valve is fully closed. For
longer closing times, effects such as packing of pipeline before the valve is fully closed may give rise to
an additional increase in pressure that is not accunted for in either Equation (b) or Equation (c).

When to use
The elastic wall option should be used when sudden changes in pressure is to be expected and the fluid
is near incompressible. These cases may include liquid dominated systems with sudden changes in
valve opening, start up or shut down of pumps or jumps in source mass rates. In situations with liquid
shut-in, the elastic wall option can also be used to dampen the effect of volume error induced pressure
changes.

Methods and assumptions

The solution of the full fluid-structure interaction would entail solving an additional elliptic partial
differential equation on a far smaller time scale than required by the isolated fluid flow problem.
However, by introducing some assumptions, the equations can be decoupled and significantly
simplified. In the derivation of the equations used by OLGA we will make the following assumptions:

1. Linear elastic materials

2. Small deformations of pipe wall (change in diameter << diameter)
3. Uniform radial expansion (neglecting section end effects and interaction)
4. No dynamic effects of pipe wall (no wall inertia)

It is up to the User's discretion to verify that these assumptions are valid when using the elastic wall
option in OLGA.

85
 Elastic walls OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

When simulating flexible pipes, OLGA accounts for both changes in flow area and more importantly, the
effect the flexibility has on the overall compressibility of the pipe-fluid system. In the pressure evolution
equation solved by OLGA, this amounts to using a modified compressibility, κeff:

(a)

where κfluid is the compressibility integrated over all phases:

∑ (b)

and κwall is the change in relative pipe area, A, for a unit change in internal pressure:

(c)

The pressure equation is also modified to account for the modified area. If the initial assumptions hold,
the effect on the flow will be marginal but its inclusion is mandated by the need for a consistent
calculation of the volume error. The updated area is calculated as follows:

1 (d)

where R0 is the given radius of the pipe and ε(P) is relative change in radius, dependent on the internal
pressure, P, and external pressure, Po:

(e)

When OLGA is used to calculate the flexibility of the pipe, the thick wall equation is used:

∑ E ln (f)

where i is the wall layer index and Ri is the inner radius of wall layer i. Using Equations (c) and (f) along
with assumption 3, we get:

2 (g)

If κ is specified in the input to OLGA, Equation (g) is used to compute an equivalent value for γ, which will
then be used in Equations (d) and (e).

The external pressure, Po, is taken to be the pressure in each OLGA section when the simulation starts
(after steady state preprocessor or initial conditions). This will lead to an initially undeformed state. In
order to get consistent results in restart, given that the elastic properties may change, the deformations in
the previous run are automatically converted by OLGA to an initial (constant) strain:

(h)

εinitial is the initial relative change in radius, given by the deformation in the previous run. Thus, a wall may
be deformed, but not flexible, in a restart run even if flexible walls are turned off.

86
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use

The elastic wall option is activated at a global level with the key OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = ON/OFF. If
OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = OFF, all walls are treated as inflexible (infinitely rigid). However, if this key
is set to ON, individual WALLS are treated as flexible/inflexible depending on the value of the key
WALL.ELASTIC = ON/OFF. If OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = ON, the Young's modulus of elasticity will be
a required key for materials (MATERIAL.EMOD).

There are two methods available for the elastic properties of a wall (when WALL.ELASTIC = ON)

1. Default option: Let OLGA compute the flexibility of the wall based on the radius of the pipe and
material properties of the wall layers. If this option is used, OLGA will omit any wall layer that has
a material with a Young's modulus less than WALL.ERATIOMIN times the Young's modulus of
the inner adjacent wall layer. All subsequent wall layers will also be excluded. This is because the
thickness of the wall is assumed to be unchanged and the wall flexibility can be significantly
underpredicted if the contribution from a very rigid wall layer, placed outside a very flexible wall
layer, is included (see Figure A).
2. User given flexibility: The wall flexibility may be specified with the key WALL.KAPPA. This option
is particularly useful when the equation used by OLGA is not valid. This may apply when the wall
is stiffened with braces, surrounded by soil or encased by a flexible medium. This may also apply
if a significant part of the wall rigidity can be attributed to axial stresses or other 2nd order effects.

Elastic wall properties may be changed in restart runs.

Figure A: Insulated pipe. If the stiffness of the steel protective casing is included, the wall flexibility will be
very conservative.

Hydrate Check

87
 Hydrate Check OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

This module is used to get information on possible formation of hydrates. The user can specify hydrate
formation curves for each flowpath that should be investigated.

When to use
HydrateCheck should be used when there is a risk of reaching the temperature/pressure region where
water can form hydrates.

Methods and assumptions

The program does the following:

1. For a given pressure and inhibitor concentration in a section, the temperature below where
hydrate may form is determined from the hydrate formation curve. The difference between the
hydrate formation temperature and the fluid temperature is then calculated, i.e. the volume
variable DTHYD is updated.

2 For a given pressure and inhibitor concentration in a section, the pressure above where hydrate
may form is determined from the hydrate formation curve. The difference between the fluid
pressure and the hydrate formation pressure is then calculated, i.e. the volume variable
DPHYD is updated.

3. The positions and the values of the maximum temperature and pressure differences for hydrate
formation are calculated, i.e. the branch variables MDPHYD, MDPPOS, MDTHYD and MDTPOS
are updated.

Interpolation and extrapolation of the hydrate curves:

An imaginary square is formed to define the limits of the hydrate curve(s).

When hydrate curves for different inhibitor concentrations (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF) are used, the
four sides are the highest/lowest temperature and highest/lowest pressure of the hydrate curves. All
hydrate curves are extrapolated so they reach two of the square sides as illustrated in the figure below
for INHIBCONC = 0%, INHIBCONC = 20% and INHIBCONC = 40%.

For HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON the highest/lowest pressure is defined by the hydrate curve for the
inhibitor concentration of 0%, while the highest/lowest temperature depends on the actual inhibitor
concentration (Hammerschmidt).

88
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure AHydrate curve square with different pressure/temperature conditions. Condition 1 and 2 has an
inhibitor concentration of 40%, while Condition 3 has 0%.

When OLGA computes DPHYD and DTHYD it uses the inhibitor concentration and the pressure and
temperature in the section. See Condition 1 in the figure above.

If the Hammerschmidt equation is used (HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON), the hydrate temperature is

calculated based on the actual inhibitor concentration.

If HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF it is checked whether the inhibitor concentration in a section is within the
range given by the hydrate curves. If it is above the highest inhibitor concentration, the hydrate curve for
the highest inhibitor concentration is used. If is below the lowest inhibitor concentration, the hydrate
curve for the lowest inhibitor concentration is used. If the inhibitor concentration in the section is
between two hydrate curves, OLGA interpolates the two hydrate curves to generate a new hydrate
curve for the inhibitor concentration in the section.

When DPHYD is computed, the temperature in the section is used to find the hydrate pressure for the
given inhibitor concentration. If the temperature in the section is inside the square and no match is
found, the highest hydrate pressure is used if the temperature is to the right of the hydrate curve
(Condition 2) and the lowest is used if it is to the left (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF only; hydrate pressure
always defined within the square with ON). If the temperature in the section is to the right of the square
(Condition 3) the highest pressure in the square is used as the hydrate pressure. When the temperature
in the section is to the left of the square the lowest pressure in the square is used as the hydrate
pressure.

When DTHYD is computed, the pressure in the section is used to find the hydrate temperature for the
given inhibitor concentration. If the pressure in the section is inside the square and no match is found,
the highest hydrate temperature is used if the pressure is above the hydrate curve (Condition 3) and the
lowest is used if it is below (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF only; hydrate temperature always defined within

89
 Hydrate Check OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

the square with ON). If the pressure in the section is above the square (Condition 2) the highest
temperature in the square is used as the hydrate temperature. When the pressure in the section is
below the square the lowest temperature in the square is used as the hydrate temperature.

It should be noted that if the section pressure is above the highest pressure in the square the reported
DPHYD will always be a positive value that indicates hydrate formation. This can be misleading,
especially if the section temperature also is higher than the highest temperature in the square, in which
case DTHYD < 0 and the section temperature in reality may be far above the hydrate formation
temperature, see Condition 4.

To remove this source of error all hydrate curves should include both the minimum and maximum
pressure in the pipeline. That is, the hydrate curves in Figure A are not well defined for conditions 2, 3
and 4 (especially the hydrate curve for 0%). Also, it is recommended to always include the hydrate
curve for an inhibitor concentration of 0% to avoid underestimating the hydration formation temperature.

Using DEBUG = ON in OPTIONS, a warning is given the first time the fluid temperature is above or
below the maximum temperature in the ”hydrate curve” square to alert the user. This goes for pressure
above/below the square and inhibitor concentrations above/below the given values, as well.

Limitations
For Compositional Tracking, the INHIBITOR must be defined in the FEEDFILE before it can be selected
in the HYDRATECURVE.

The Hammerschmidt equation (used when HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON) is only valid for inhibitor
concentrations below 70%. The inhibitor concentration can be verified by plotting e.g. MEGMFR.

How to use
Define the hydrate formation curves with the HYDRATECURVE keyword in the Library section.

In each flowpath, use the HYDRATECHECK keyword to specify a list of hydrate curves to apply. Each
HYDRATECURVE specified in a flowpath must have a unique inhibitor concentration (INHIBCONC).

The hydrate formation curve can be specified either with keys PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE, or from
an ASCII file where the hydrate formation curve is given.

The effect of an inhibitor on the hydrate formation temperature can be calculated. This requires the
Inhibitor tracking module or the Compositional tracking module with an inhibitor defined in the FEEDFILE.
Note that changes in the composition (except the specified inhibitor) do not affect the hydrate curve
calculations.

This effect can be calculated in two ways:

1. HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF: One hydrate curve per inhibitor concentration (INHIBCONC)

must be given. OLGA will then interpolate between the curves defined in the
HYDRATECHECK. One HYDRATECURVE keyword must be defined for each curve
and concentration.
2. HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON: The Hammerschmidt equation (see ”The Inhibitor tracking
module” ) will be used based on the hydrate curve for no inhibitor. The equation is
valid for inhibitor concentrations between 0% and 70%.

90
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Hydrate Kinetics
The hydrate kinetics model (CSMHYK) allows for the prediction of where and approximately where
hydrate plugs will form in oil and gas pipelines. The current version of CSMHYK model (version 1) is
more suitable for systems with small mass and heat transfer resistances inside of the pipeline.

When to use
Include the hydrate kinetics if the pipeline temperature is close to the hydrate formation temperature. If
the temperature drops sufficiently below the hydrate equilibrium temperature hydrate will be nucleated.
The formation of hydrate will affect both the temperature of the pipeline and the pressure drop due to
increased viscosity of the hydrate-oil slurry relative to oil viscosity.
License requirements
The Hydrate Kinetics Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The hydrate kinetics module combines the hydrate kinetics and rheological model developed by
Colorado School of Mines with the flow equations of the OLGA model. The hydrate kinetics model
determines the amount of gas and water consumed by hydrate formation and the effective viscosity of
the hydrate particle laden oil phase. The flow model integrates the mass consumption rate to obtain the
amount of hydrate phase and uses the effective viscosity for the flow calculations.
Hydrate reaction
The model assumes that induction time of gas hydrate is instantaneous after sufficient sub-cooling
(SUBCOOLING). The default sub-cooling is 6.5°F. Therefore the nucleation is currently assumed
independent of any other thermodynamic properties except for the hydrate equilibrium temperature at
the given system pressure.

It is assumed that structure II hydrates are formed.

The hydrate formation reaction will by default react gas (methane) hydrocarbons with liquid water to
form hydrate particles (OILGUESTFRACTION=0 and GASGUESTFRACTION=1).

The HYDRATEKINETICS key GASGUESTFRACTION is the mass fraction of gas available for hydrate
formation to all the gas in a section, mg, i.e.,

(a)

The HYDRATEKINETICS key OILGUESTFRACTION is the mass fraction of oil available for hydrate
formation to all the oil in a section, m0.

The hydrate reaction rate is limited to the mass available to react. First the gas mass will react, then the
oil mass will react.
Flow model modifications
By default the hydrate particles will flow with the oil film. That is; the hydrate velocity will be the same as
for the oil film (COIL=1 and CWATER=0, denoted Co and Cw, respectively). But it is possible to relate
the hydrate velocity to both the oil and water velocity, uof and uwf, respectively, according to

(b)

An effective hydrate oil slurry viscosity, γhos, is calculated by the Colorado School of Mines code:

1 (c)

91
 Hydrate Kinetics OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

It is possible to force a drift flux relation between the gas velocity, ug, and the volume average liquid
velocity, ul by using the DRIFTFLUX, VELOCITYRATIO and DRIFTVELOCITY keys:

· (d)

It is also possible to increase the drag between gas and liquid by using the FOGEXPONENT key:

(e)

The FOGEXPONENT will reduce the velocity difference between gas and liquid when hydrate particles
are present.

By using the FULLDISPERSION key, no slip between oil film and water film is used in the simulation.

Limitations
The model is still in the research phase, and the initial emphasis has been on flowing liquid dominated
systems with excess of water and gas for hydrate formation. Future versions will likely also address gas
dominated systems and include a deposition mechanism. Special care should be taken when using the
model since the model has only been validated against limited data sets. Further, it is not designed for
shut-in and depressurization studies.

The hydrate particles are uniformly distributed in the oil phase. The hydrate equilibrium is pre-calculated
and the kinetic model developed for methane is adapted.

No deposition on wall is activated.

Immediate nucleation of the hydrate particles (no induction time).

How to use
The hydrate kinetics model is activated through the HYDRATEKINETICS keyword.
HYDRATEKINETICS keyword is a FlowPath FA-Model (Flow Assurance Model).

The HYDRATEKINETICS references a HYDRATCURVE that describe the hydrate equilibrium

temperature.

92
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Inhibitor Tracking
The Inhibitor tracking module allows for tracking of the contents of a hydrate inhibior in the pipeline. The
module allows the choice between three inhibitors; MEG (mono-ethylene glycol), MEOH (methanol) or
ETOH (ethanol).

When to use
An important application of this module within flow assurance, is using it to ensure that the amount of
hydrate inhibitor throughout the pipelines is sufficient to prevent the formation of hydrates. In the
standard three-phase model of OLGA, the pipeline may contain water and inhibitor, but information
regarding the inhibitor concentration along the line is not available.
License requirements
The Inhibitor Tracking Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

Although similar, there are some differences in the assumptions used for MEG vs MEOH/ETOH
tracking.

The following assumptions are made for MEG tracking:

• MEG is only present in the aqueous phase. Water will be in both gas and aqueous phase.
• The only properties of the aqueous phase affected by MEG are the viscosity, the density, and
the density’s derivatives.
• The water vapour content in the gas phase is adjusted by the mole fraction of MEG in the
aqueous phase.
• There is no diffusion of MEG in the aqueous phase.
• The inhibitor tracking module is not aware of any special physics the user may have activated,
and hence may not work properly in combination with e.g. Wax or Corrosion. However, it should
work with all the features of basic OLGA.
• The inhibitor tracking module must be used with a two-phase fluid table or with a three-phase
fluid table that has only H2O in the water phase.

The following assumptions are made for MEOH/ETOH tracking:

• MEOH/ETOH does not effect flashing between gas and oil. This flash is calculated based upon
the gas mass fraction from the PVT table.
• There is no hydrocarbon component dissolved in the water.
• The mole fraction of MEOH/ETOH in gas is equal to the vapor pressure divided by the system
pressure.
• The active coefficients of MEOH/ETOH and H2O from UNIFAC correlations are used to
calculate the chemical potentials of MEOH/ETOH and H2O in the aqueous phase.

The Inhibitor tracking module uses a fluid of three components, namely

1. HC Hydrocarbon in oil and gas phase

2. H2O Water, which can be in the gas and the aqueous phase.
3. Inhibitor (MEG, MEOH or ETOH).

At each time step the properties of the aqueous phase are calculated from the local pressure and
temperature, and also from the fluid composition in each section of the pipeline. The effects of the
inhibitor are included in the calculation of the density and viscosity of the aqueous phase. The method
of Grunberg and Nissan is used to calculate the viscosity of the inhibitor-water mixture, and the
Hankinson-Brobst-Thomson (HBT) technique yields an estimate of the liquid density. Descriptions and

93
 Inhibitor Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

formulae for the Grunberg and Nissan method and the HBT technique can be found in the open
literature, see /35/.

The effect of inhibitor can also be included in the calculation of the hydrate formation temperature. The
user can either specify a hydrate curve for each inhibitor concentration and let OLGA interpolate
between the values, or the Hammerschmidt formula for hydrate depression (/19/) can be used (the
equation is valid for inhibitor concentrations between 0% and 70%):

∆ (a)

∆ (b)

ΔT = Hydrate depression, oF
M = Molecular weight of inhibitor (MEG: 62.069 g/mol, MEOH:
32.042 g/mol, ETOH: 46.069 g/mol)
H = Hammerschmidt constant, default value is 2335 delta F
W = Weight per cent of the inhibitor in the liquid
TMEGCONC = Calculated hydrate temperature
TMEGCONC=0 = Hydrate temperature for no inhibitor

For the other properties of the aqueous phase, the effects of the inhibitor are neglected and pure water
properties from the three-phase fluid table or from OLGA are adopted.

Limitations
Inhibitor tracking is turned on through the COMPOSITIONAL keyword and cannot be used in
conjunction with the other modules available through this keyword (e.g. Blackoil or Compositional
Tracking). Furthermore, it cannot be used with Wax tracking. Please also see the list of assumptions in
Methods and assumptions.

How to use
With the Inhibitor tracking module, one can specify a hydrate inhibitor (one of MEG, MEOH, or ETOH) to
see the effect this will have on the formation of hydrates in the pipeline.

Specify the following keywords to use the Inhibitor tracking module:

• OPTIONS to set COMPOSITIONAL = MEG/MEOH/ETOH

• SOURCE to specify INHIBFRACTION in the mass source
• INITIALCONDITIONS to specify INHIBFRACTION at initial time (if STEADYSTATE = OFF in
OPTIONS)
• NODE to specify INHIBFRACTION at the boundary
• TRENDDATA/PROFILEDATA/OUTPUTDATA to print compositional variables for given
components
• HYDRATECURVE and HYDRATECHECK to calculate the effect on the hydrate formation
temperature

Note that either INHIBFRACTION or TOTALINHIBFRACTION can be given. The former is the mass
fraction of the inhibitor in the total aqueous phase; the latter is the mass fraction of the inhibitor in relation
to the total aqueous phase + water vapour.

94
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Leak
The leak is a negative mass source. It removes mass from the pipeline.
The leak can transport mass between two pipelines. The leak outlet must then be connected to another
pipeline.

When to use
Use to simulate leaks and pipe ruptures. It is also used for gas lift valve (GLV) modeling.

Methods and assumptions

A leak or a pipe rupture is described as a negative mass source (mass out of the pipeline). The leak
area can be controlled by the control system. Both sub-critical and critical flow is supported in OLGA.
For sub-critical leak flow, the flow rate is governed by the difference between the internal and the
external pressures, the conditions in the pipe and the leak area. For critical leak flow, the flow rate is
governed by the conditions in the pipe and the leak area only. The leak flow is always limited to critical
flow.

The leakage flow area is calculated from:

π 2
ALEAK = u s D LEAK , 0 ≤ u s ≤ 1
4
where us = controller signal ( 0 ≤ us ≤ 1).

The leak uses the valve model. See Choke Methods and assumptions.

It is possible to route the flow through the leak to any pipe section in any branch by using the subkey
TOPOSITION, in which case backflow is allowed.

A leak can also be used to simulate a gas lift valve (GLV).

Limitations
The leaks are not included in the steady state pre-processor.

Backflow is not allowed when the BACKPRESSURE key is used, that is, there will be no backflow if the
section pressure is lower than the given backpressure.
The leak uses the valve model. See valve limitations.

How to use
Position the leak. Leaks can be placed anywhere along the pipeline.
A LEAK has two main functionalities:

1) It can be used to model a valve or rupture where the mass out of the pipe is removed from
the simulated system, that is, the mass is lost to the surroundings (requires the key
BACKPRESSURE)
2) It can also be used to model interconnections in the model, where the mass out of one
section is transferred to mass into another section (requires the key TOPOSITION).
BACKPRESSURE cannot be defined in this case as the backpressure is equal to the pressure in
the section defined in TOPOSITION.

Backflow is not allowed for functionality 1, that is, there will be no backflow if the section pressure is
lower than the backpressure.

95
Leak OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

For functionality 2 backflow is not allowed if GASLIFTTABLES is used. GASLIFTTABLES defines the
gas lift valve (GLV) response curve. Backflow is allowed if CD/DIAMETER or TABLE/PHASE/CF is used
instead.

Note: GASLIFTTTABLES can also be used for functionality 1. See Gas Lift Valve (GLV) for information
about GLV’s.
If the flow through the leak is calculated using CD/DIAMETER or TABLE/PHASE/CF, the flow area of a
leak can be manipulated by a controller. Connect a controller to the leak input signal terminal INPSIG. If
no controller is connected to the leak, the entire flow area is used. See Valve How to use for details.

96
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Near-Wellbore
Conventional dynamic well flow models use steady-state IPRs (Inflow Performance Relationship) to
describe the influx of oil and gas from the reservoir, ignoring the transients in the near-wellbore area.
Furthermore, reservoir models use steady-state lift curves to represent the TPRs (Tubing Performance
Relationship), which ignores the wellbore flow dynamics. Neither the well models nor the reservoir
models can account for the dynamic wellbore/reservoir interactions.

In OLGA the IPR is described with the WELL keyword. With this model some transient phenomena in
the well are not accurately predicted while others are not predicted at all. To bridge this modeling gap,
the near-wellbore reservoir model Rocx has been developed and linked to OLGA.

When to use
This link should be used when transient phenomena in the wellbore/reservoir are studied. Typical
examples are:

• Well Shut-in/start-up
• Onset of instability
• Dynamic gas/water coning
• Well loading and back seepage
• Cross flow

License requirements
Near wellbore is part of the ROCX Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The reservoir model is considered as a plug-in to the OLGA model, and the integrated simulation is fully
controlled by OLGA. During the simulation, OLGA provides the wellbore pressure to the reservoir model
and the reservoir model calculates the flow rate of each phase at the interface. The flow rates can be
positive or negative depending on the flow directions corresponding to production and injection
respectively. In case of injection or back seepage, the phase mass fractions in the wellbore section that
the reservoir model interfaces to are converted to saturations in order to calculate the fractional injection
rate for each phase.

The near-wellbore reservoir model, Rocx, is capable of simulating three-phase Newtonian Darcy flow in
porous media. The flow equations are solved in three dimensions, giving saturations and pressures
varying in space and time as output in addition to the flow rate of each phase at the boundary.

The numerical coupling between OLGA and Rocx is implemented in an implicit scheme. The concept of
the implicit coupling here is that Rocx calculates a sensitivity coefficient for the production rate with
respect to the wellbore pressure at each time step and makes it available for OLGA. At the next time
step, OLGA uses this sensitivity coefficient to determine the new wellbore pressure. The sensitivity
coefficient is extracted from the Jacobian matrix of the reservoir model in the last iteration. The size of
the near-wellbore domain contributing to the rate-pressure sensitivity calculation is specified by the
coupling level that can be given as a simulation input.

The principle of the implicit coupling can be summarized as follows:

1. Assuming the models have been integrated up to time step n, the wellbore model begins
integration to time step n+1 by requesting the reservoir model to calculate the sensitivity
coefficients and , which are used in this relation:

(a)

97
 Near-Wellbore OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where PP is the pressure in the wellbore, MP is the mass flow rate for each phase and the
subscript p refers to a given phase, i.e. gas, oil or water.

2. The wellbore model uses the above relation as a boundary condition and solves for the
complete wellbore. The wellbore model has now completed time step n+1 and sends and
to the reservoir model.

3. The reservoir model completes its time step n+1 calculation by using the wellbore model
supplied boundary condition.

The sensitivity coefficient is calculated by

(b)

which can be analytically derived from the reservoir model equations. is simply given by

(c)

With this implicit coupling implementation, the integrated model can run simulations with relatively long
time steps while maintaining numerical stability.

Limitations
OLGA Rocx is not compatible with these fluid property models
o Compositional option
o Black oil option

Rocx uses the OLGA PVT table for looking up fluid properties. Currently, only the three-phase fixed
format OLGA PVT table can be used.

The steady-state pre-processor in OLGA can not be applied in the integrated simulation. The simulation
can be initialized by initial conditions or restart files. Rocx has its own restart file with the extension .rrs.

Other limitations on the Rocx reservoir simulator are given in the ”Rocx User Manual”.

How to use
Rocx is linked to OLGA through the NEARWELLSOURCE keyword.

Rocx supports both radial and rectangular grids. The numerical and physical kernel code is not affected
by the choice of grid. The flow and thermal equations of Rocx are solved fully implicitly, using the
Newton-Raphson iterative method at each time step.

Input data to Rocx are permeability and porosities of the porous medium, fluid transport properties, and
thermal properties of the rock and fluids. Necessary boundary and initial conditions must be given to
enable simulation. Like in OLGA, the boundary conditions of the reservoir model can also be specified
in time series. Rocx reserves the skin option for the situation when the inflow deviation from its ideal can
not be properly accounted for by the reservoir model itself, e.g. the perforation skin.

The simulation input information is stored in a keyword based text file. Standard industry file formats are
used for output. More details of the Rocx model can be found in the ”Rocx User Manual”.

98
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Phase Split Node

The phase split node is based upon the functionality of an INTERNAL NODE, but the phase fractions can
be specified in the outgoing branches. For a normal internal node the composition flowing out of each
terminal connected is equal to the total composition in the node itself, but for a phase split node there will
be different distributed phase flows through each of the outgoing branches according to the actual type of
terminal chosen. In a way the behaviour of the phase split node might be seen as a simple type of
network SEPARATOR where there are no level controls and no internal separator efficiencies included.

When to use
The phase split node is recommended to be used in a finger type separator and in nodes where the
in/over pipe connections where the phases tend to have an uneven split.

Methods and assumptions

The phase split node has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. It has six different types of terminals:
GAS, OIL, WATER, LIQUID, DRYGAS and MIXTURE.

Terminal = GAS - gas +droplets

Terminal = OIL - oil bulk
Terminal = WATER - water bulk
Terminal = LIQUID - oil and water bulk
Terminal = DRYGAS - gas only
Terminal = MIXTURE - all phases within the node itself(default)

When the volume fraction of the connected phase(s) is sufficiently low(0.01), the flow in the outgoing
branch will be as from an internal NODE.

Limitations
The phase split node is not intended for design purposes. It only distributes the phase fractions in the
outgoing branches according to the user defined type of terminals chosen:

• The phase split node is only treated as a simple volume tank with no internal separation
equipment
• There are no level controls and no separator efficiencies
• No heat exchange with the surroundings

How to use
Input

Connections to external pipelines

The following connections are defined:
· MIXTURE_1, … MIXTURE _N inlets and outlets
· GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets
· OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets
· WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets
· LIQUID_1, ... LIQUID_N outlets
· DRYGAS _1, … DRYGAS _N outlets

Internal volume
If the volume is not given, it will be default assigned a value by OLGA. In some cases it might be more
useful to give a larger value for the key VOLUME in order to get more stable node conditions during the
simulations.

99
Phase Split Node OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Output
All of the output variables specified under section “VOLUME VARIABLES” that are available for the
internal NODE are also available for the phase split node.

100
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Pig
A pig is a mechanical device which is inserted into a pipline that moves with the flow. Such devices can
be used for, e.g., inspection, internal cleaning, or pushing liquid out of the pipe. When running a pigging
operation, parameters of interest are

1. the pressure drop over a pig.

2. the rate and total volume of liquid pushed out of a pipeline ahead of a pig.
3. the liquid content of a pipeline before and after pigging.
4. the flow restriction caused by a pig.
5. the velocity of a pig.
6. the time for a pig to traverse a pipeline.
7. amount of wax dislodged from the wall.

When to use
The Pig keyword is used to simulate various pigging scenarios.

License requirements
Tracking of the liquid slug in front of a pig (TRACKSLUG=ON) is part of the Slugtracking Module that
requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

General
When running a pigging operation, it is optional whether or not the slug-tracking framework is to be
engaged in order to track the liquid slug in front of the pig. Cf. pig-tracking and plug in OLGA 5,
respectively. Contrary to OLGA 5, these two options use a unified scheme. This implies that differences
between two such simulations should only be attributed to effects associated with the differences
between explicitly treating liquid slugs or treating them in an average manner.
Explicit tracking of the liquid slug in front of the pig yields a more stable and accurate simulation that
properly accounts for the liquid build-up downstream of the pig. If the liquid slug is not explicitly tracked,
the liquid pushed through the pipe by a pig is only treated in an average fashion and no distinct build-up
of liquid is seen. When running such a simulation in OLGA 5, the interfacial friction boundary downstream
of the pig is infinite, resulting in equal gas and liquid velocities on the downstream section boundary. This
implies that the liquid film ahead of the pig is pushed through to the next control volume with no possibility
of liquid build-up. In the present model, this restriction has been eliminated, resulting in a more physical
description of the flow downstream from a pig. The improved physical model comes at the price of a
slightly less stable numerical scheme. As the model allows for liquid build-up in front of the pig, it also
runs at the risk of a hold-up approaching 1.0 as the pig approaches a section boundary. Since the hold-up
in front of the pig is an average hold-up between the pig and the downstream boundary, this output
variable will show large swings in connection to pigs crossing section boundaries. This is not a physical
result, but merely an artifact of averaged hold-ups not being able to capture the actual build-up of liquid.
Furthermore, as a consequence of the hold-up reaching 1.0 downstream the pig, there will be a larger
leakage due to the numerical scheme, which in turn results in a seemingly less efficient pig as compared
to the OLGA 5 plug model. It should be noted that in order to properly capture the physics, it is necessary
to explicitly track the liquid slug forming in front of the pig.

Friction forces and pigs

The friction forces acting on a pig are described in the following sections.

Static friction force

The static force between the pig and the pipe wall is denoted F0. For a static pig, this is the force that
needs to be overcome in order for the pig to start moving. Thus, a pig only starts moving if the pressure
difference over the pig yields a large enough force.

101
Pig OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Wall friction force

The wall friction force due to contact between the pig and the pipe wall is given by

max 0, | | · (a)
where
= static friction force [N]
F0
= wall friction factor [Ns/m]
Fw
= pig velocity [m/s]
Up

As the pig velocity, Up, increases, the wall friction force decreases due to less contact between the pig
and the pipe wall. This effect is approximated by the wall friction factor.

Viscous friction force — the frictional pig model

When a pig is moving, the flow of the fluid film around the pig results in a viscous friction force. This
force is calculated through

f UP f UP |UP | (b)
where
f = linear friction factor [Ns/m]
quadratic friction factor
f =
[Ns2/m2]
Up = pig velocity [m/s]

Leakage
There are two different types of leakage.

Pressure drop induced leakage

Due to the pressure drop over the pig, liquid can be pushed from behind the pig to in front of it. The
pressure drop induced volumetric flux is given by

∆
· ∆ (c)

where
cpl = leakage factor [-]
pressure drop over the pig
ΔPpig =
[Ns2/m2]
ρ = density [kg/m3]

Slip induced leakage (back leakage)

Due to slip between the pig and the fluid surrounding it, some fluid ahead of the pig will not be carried
along by it but rather leaks between the pig and the pipe wall. When the gap between the pig and pipe
wall is very narrow, the effects of gravity and the pressure gradient can be neglected when calculating
the flow of the fluid film that passes around the pig. Assuming laminar flow, the average film velocity
becomes

(d)
where
Up = pig velocity [m/s]

102
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Using this, the volumetric flow rate is then given by

(e)
where
inner pipe diameter
D =
[m]
outer diameter of pig
Dp =
[m]

By default, the gap between the pig and pipe wall is equals two times the pipe roughness. The user can
override this setting by specifying the pig diameter using the key DIAMETER.

The total volumetric leakage flow rate is split over the oil, water, and gas phases. For stratified flow, the
total leakage of gas, oil, and water is proportional to the hold-up each respective phase at that position.
For all other flow regimes, gas leakage is not allowed and the total leakage is split over water and oil in
proportion to the local water and oil hold-up, respectively.

Pig and Wax

Wax related friction forces
When there is a wax layer on the pipe walls, an additional friction, Fwbf, will occur due to the forces
required to break the wax layer off the wall. The wax layer breaking force is modeled as

1 Φ (c)

Where

C = wax breaking force coefficient [-]

τy = wax layer yield stress [Pa]
φ = wax porosity [-]
L = wax layer thickness [m]
d = inner pipe diameter [m]
η = pig wax removal efficiency [-]
Φ = pig form factor [-]

The wax breaking force coefficient, C, can be used to account for the effective shear surface orientation.
C=1 implies that the wax layer shear surface is normal to the wall whereas C=√2 can be interpreted as
an effective shear surface forming a 45° angle against the wall. The coefficient can also be used to tune
the yield stress if, e.g., wax layer yield stress measurements or estimates are available.

If the wax layer yield stress is determined internally, it is given by:

7.876 10 · 1 (d)

This equation is derived from the viscosity equation used in PVTSim 16 from Calsep.
In cases where the pig has no through-flow, a slurry or plug with high wax content is assumed to build
up in front of the pig. This will affect the rheological properties of the fluid near the pig. An estimate of
the friction effects caused by the interaction between the wax plug and the pipe wall is evaluated using
the following procedure:

103
Pig OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1. Find the wax plug friction length by searching along the pipeline for existing suspended wax
(bounded by the accumulated amount of wax stripped from the wall), accounting for the wax plug
porosity. The wax plug length depends on the pig leakage factor. If there is full flow through the
pig, the wax plug friction length is set to zero. If there is no leakage, the full length of the wax plug
is used. Interpolation is applied for any intermediate situations.

2. The wall shear stress for the wax plug is calculated by using standard correlations for Bingham
plastics /22/ and the PVTSim 16 version of the Pedersen/Rønningsen effective viscosity model.
The standard Bingham correlations are used to calculate the shear stress as a function of
average velocity. The internal effective viscosity model may be used to find the yield stress and
plastic viscosity for a given suspended wax fraction according to

· ·
· exp ·Φ (e)

where

oil viscosity with no consideration to the

μliq =
precipitated wax [Pa s]
Φwax = volume fraction of precipitated wax [-]
dνx/dy = shear rate [1/s]
D = 18.12
E = 405.1
F = 7.876 106

The plastic viscosity is found by setting the shear rate, dνx/dy=1000 1/s whereas the yield stress
is found through equation (d) above using the porosity of the wax plug in front of the pig instead
of the wax porosity. The yield stress and plastic viscosity are then used in the Bingham related
equations to calculate the friction forces acting on the pig and wax plug.

In the transition from non-Newtonian to Newtonian turbulent flow (Hedstrøm number between
1000 and 2000), splines are used in order to get a smooth transition between the friction factors
calculated using the Darby and Melson formula /22/ (applied for Hedstrøm number > 2000) and
Haaland’s formula /23/ (applied for Hedstrøm number < 1000).

Due to the upper bound on the effective viscosity, the wax plug shear stress is taken as the
maximum of the yield stress and the shear stress from the Bingham friction calculations.

3. The resulting frictional force is applied directly to the pig since the wax plug does not enter the
model explicitly but only as an "effective friction length."

Note, the standard scheme for wall friction is always applied regardless of the wax plug friction length.
The standard wall friction will, however, normally be insignificant as compared to the friction generated

104
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

by the "virtual" wax plug. Furthermore, the gravitational effects of a wax plug are assumed to be taken
into account by the standard scheme.

Wax mass transfer from wall due to pigging

When performing a pigging operation to remove wax from the pipe wall, an additional term is added to
the standard shear related wax transport term (solid wax mass transport between bulk and wall) for the
section where a pig is located. This mass transfer rate is given by

· · · ⁄ (f)

where Up is the pig velocity [m/s], mwxw is the average wax mass on the wall in the control volume
[kg/m3], A is the cross-sectional pipe area [m2], and η is the pig wax removal efficiency [-]. The mass
removed from the wall is added to the fluid downstream the pig.

Limitations
• The calculation of the volume of wax dislodged by a pig and the additional forces required to
push accumulated wax ahead of a pig is not available.

• It is not possible to simulate the melting of a hydrate plug since the pig mass is constant.

• It is not possible to simulate a pig traversing through a pipeline at the same time as slug
tracking is enabled.

How to use
General
A pig is added to the simulation by declaring the PIG keyword on the flow-path where it is to be inserted.

Launch and trap position of the pig

A pig is launched and trapped at the boundaries closest to the positions given by the keys
LAUNCHPOSITION and TRAPPOSITION, respectively. The trap position is optional, and if not
specified, the pig traverses through the flow-paths until it exits through a terminal node and is removed.

Routing — Pig in network

In a network with bifurcations, the pig will enter the flow-path having the largest volumetric flow unless
its routing is specified by the key ROUTING. N.B., when routing is given, the flow-path where the pig is
launched has to be included in the routing.

Leakage factor
The leakage factor, cpl, used in determining the volumetric flux of liquid from behind the pig to in front of
it can be specified in three different ways in order to override the default value:

1. Specify the leakage factor directly through the key LEAKAGEFACTOR.

2. Specify the relative leakage opening Aleak/Apipe through the key LEAKOPENING and evaluate
the leakage factor according to
√2
3. Using the pressure loss coefficient, Fpig, specified through the LEAKDPCOEFF key, the leakage
factor is given by

105
Pig OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The pressure loss coefficient can calibrate by letting fluid flow past a stationary pig.

Tracking the liquid slug

In order to track the liquid slug in front of a pig, set TRACKSLUG=ON.

Output
Pig specific plotting variables are found in the subgroup Pig of the group Basic. In addition, slug related
plotting variables (group SlugTracking or group Compositional, subgroup Slug) apply when the liquid
slug in front of a pig is tracked.

106
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Process Equipment
Check Valve
A check valve prevents the total flow from flowing in the wrong direction.

When to use
Use to model check valves, and to prevent the flow from flowing in an undesirable direction.

Methods and assumptions

The check valve closes if the total volume flow is in the wrong direction, e.g., there can be a negative flow
of liquid and positive flow of gas through the check valve. They remain closed until the pressure differ-
ence across them is sufficiently large to give flow in the desired direction.

Limitations
A check valve close if the total volume flow is in the wrong direction, but there can be a negative flow of
liquid and positive flow of gas through the check valve.

How to use
Position the check valve at any section boundary in the pipeline. If ABSPOSITION is used the check
valve will be moved to the closest section boundary.

Set the allowed flow direction in the DIRECTION key.

107
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compressor
A compressor is included to increase the pressure of the gas. The compressor is described by
compressor characteristics that give the pressure and temperature increase over the compressor as a
function of flow through the compressor and the rotational speed of the compressor. The compressor
characteristics also give information about the minimum inlet flow (surge flow) that the compressor can
operate on. If the inlet flow drops below the surge flow multiplied by a safety factor, a recirculation loop
around the compressor is opened. The recirculation loop secures stable conditions for the compressor.
A heat exchanger (cooler) can be included in the recirculation loop.

Methods and assumptions

The compressor is modelled as a flow-dependent and rotational-speed-dependent pressure jump and
energy source. Any recirculation around the compressor is treated by a source into the section
upstream of the compressor, and a sink out of the section downstream of the compressor, as OLGA
cannot handle recirculation directly.

The compressor characteristics and the surge volume flow are given in the form of tables. The
compressor surge volume flow is the lowest volume flow the compressor can operate on without
becoming unstable. Compressor data needed for the model are found by linear interpolation in the
compressor tables.

Pressure increase and derivatives of pressure increase are calculated from the pressure characteristics
and are used for setting new coefficients in the momentum equations. Temperature increase is
calculated from the temperature characteristics and is used for setting new coefficients in the energy
equation.

The compressor speed and the recirculation around the compressor are governed by the control
system. In addition, the compressor speed is limited by a user-specified range. The surge volume flow
calculated from the compressor tables is used together with an optional security factor to establish a set
point for the controller that controls the recirculation around the compressor.

It is assumed that during operation the control system keeps the compressor within the bounds of
validity of the characteristics.

Compressor pressure step evaluation

The compressor pressure characteristics give compressor pressure ratio as a function of reduced
rotational speed and reduced mass flow, Equation (a) below.

p2
π= = f (R, S ) (a)
p1

where
= (-) is the pressure ratio
p1 = (N/m2) is the inlet pressure
p2 = (N/m2) is the outlet pressure
G = (kg/s) is the mass flow

108
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

0.5
R = GΘ
(kg/s) is reduced inlet mass flow
δ
T1
Θ = (-) is normalized inlet temperature
288 K
p1
δ = (-) is normalized inlet pressure
1.013 ⋅ 105 Pa
r
S = (rpm) is reduced rotational speed
Θ 0.5
r = (rpm) is rotational speed

Figure A shows a typical compressor characteristic diagram.

Figure A: Compressor characteristic diagram

The pressure increase over the compressor is calculated from the compressor pressure characteristics.

For calculation of the operating point, the compressor speed is necessary. The speed is governed by
the control system and is limited by a user-specified range. The range is normally determined by the
speed range in the compressor tables.

r = (rmax - rmin) u + rmin (b)

where r is the compressor speed, and u is the signal from the control module. u is in the range from 0 to
1, where u equal to 1 means that the compressor speed is at its maximum.

Compressor temperature calculation

In order to calculate gas temperatures, the power supplied by the compressor, PWC, is added as an
enthalpy source to the enthalpy balance for the pipe section following a compressor boundary. The

109
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

temperature resulting from this balance is used for calculating fluid properties, while the compressor
outlet temperature is only used for informative purposes.

Polytropic compression is assumed. The enthalpy source due to the compressor is:

W
H c = PW c (c)
Δz
where W is the mass flux through the compressor and Dz is the section length of the section
downstream of the boundary where the compressor is located.

For an inlet at pressure p1 and a density of r1, the power required for compression to an outlet pressure
p2 is:

⎡ n −1
⎤
n ⎢⎛ p2 ⎞ n
1
PWc = p1 ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1⎥ (d)
⎢
ρ1 n − 1 ⎝ p1 ⎠ ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦

The relation between pressure ratio, temperature and the polytropic exponent n is:

n −1
T2 ⎛ p2 ⎞ n
=⎜ ⎟
T1 ⎜⎝ p1 ⎟⎠
(e)

The compressor temperature characteristics are also given in the form of tables, and the temperature
ratio is found by linear interpolation.

The polytropic factor (n-1)/n is calculated from pressure ratio and temperature ratio using Equation (f).

n − 1 ln(T2 T1 )
= (f)
n ln( p2 p1 )

Calculation of surge volume flow

The surge flow is in the form of tables, with reduced surge mass flow as a function of reduced
compressor speed, see Figure A. The surge volume flow is used together with an optional security
factor to establish a set point for the anti-surge controller (ASC) that controls the recirculation around the
compressor, preventing unstable compressor operation. Reduced surge mass flow as a function of
compressor speed is found by linear interpolation.

For a compressor located at boundary j the surge volume flow is calculated as follows:

0.5
⎛ Θ 0.5 ⎞ p j −1 ⎛ 288 ⎞
⎜⎜ G ⎟⎟ ⎜ ⎟
5 ⎜ ⎟
⎝ δ ⎠ surge 1.013 ⋅ 10 T
⎝ j −1 ⎠
Qsurge = (g)
ρ j −1

110
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Recirculation flow modelling

Recirculation flow around a compressor is modelled as a set of negative and positive sources, since
OLGA cannot handle recirculation directly. The flow is controlled by a choke with the choke opening
governed by the control system.

The recirculation is between two neighbouring sections with a compressor on the common boundary,
see Figure B. Only gas is allowed to flow in the recirculation loop. The recirculation flow is treated as a
source into the section volume ahead of the compressor boundary, and a source out of the section
volume after the compressor boundary.

Figure B: Recirculation loop

The pressure drop across the restriction is equal to the pressure difference between the sections
downstream and upstream of the compressor.

The recirculation flow is restricted by the critical pressure difference. If the pressure difference between
the section upstream and downstream of the compressor is higher than the critical value, the critical
value is used.

The pressure drop over the restriction is:

4
⎛ D ⎞ W2
Δp ch = 0.5C ⎜⎜ −2
⎟⎟ (h)
⎝ D0 ⎠ ρ g
d

Solving for W:
2
⎛D ⎞
W = ± (2 ρ g Δp ch )
0 .5
Cd ⎜ 0 ⎟ (i)
⎝ D ⎠

where the positive sign relates to a positive source, and the negative sign relates to a negative source.
W is the mass flux, ρg is the gas density in the section it is flowing out of (section after the compressor),
D is the diameter of the section with the source, and Do is the orifice diameter of the controlled choke.

For subcritical flow through the controlled choke the pressure difference between the section upstream
and downstream of the compressor is used in equation (i). For critical flow through the controlled choke,
the critical pressure difference is used for calculating the recirculation flow. Critical pressure difference is
based on single phase gas flow with constant specific heat ratio, g. Specific heat ratio of 1.3 is used.

γ
p ⎛ γ + 1 ⎞ γ −1
π crit = =⎜ ⎟ (j)
p crit ⎝ 2 ⎠
γ
⎡ ⎤
⎢ ⎛ 2 ⎞ −1 ⎥
γ
Δp ch ,crit = p − p crit = p 1 − ⎜⎜ ⎟
⎢ ⎝ γ + 1 ⎟⎠ ⎥
(k)
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦

where

111
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

⎛ cp ⎞
g is specific heat ratio ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ cv ⎠
pcrit is critical pressure ratio
p is the pressure in the section it is flowing out of
Dpch, crit is critical pressure difference

The energy leaving the section downstream of the compressor and entering the section upstream of the
compressor through the recirculation loop is calculated as follows.

Wrec, g
H rec, g = hg (l)
Δz
hg is the specific gas enthalpy in the compressor downstream volume, Wrec,g is the mass flux based on
the section area of the section with a source and Dz is the section length of the section with a source.

A heat exchanger may also be included in the recirculation loop. The aim of the heat exchanger is to
extract energy to obtain a desired heat exchanger outlet temperature. In this case, the temperature of
the recirculation source entering the section upstream of the compressor has to be specified. The heat
exchanger is modelled as an ideal heat loss.

The energy source entering the upstream section in a situation with a heat exchanger in the
recirculation loop is calculated as:

Wrec, g
H rec, g = (hg − Δhhex )
Δz (m)
Δhhex = hg − h sp
g

hgsp is specific gas enthalpy based on the desired heat exchanger outlet temperature and pressure in
the section where the source is entering. Δhhex is specific enthalpy decrease in the heat exchanger.
The energy extracted through the heat exchanger is limited by the heat exchanger capacity.

The orifice opening of the controlled choke is governed by the control system. The control module also
takes care of the stroke time of the controlled choke. The orifice opening is calculated as:

D0 = D0, max u 0.5 (n)

where u is the signal from the control module, and is in the range from 0 to 1. u equal to 1 means that
the controlled choke is fully open.

Limitations
Only gas flows in the recirculation loop. Critical flow calculations are based on single-phase gas flow
with a constant specific heat ratio of 1.3. If the pressure in the section upstream of the compressor
exceeds the pressure in the section downstream of it, the recirculation flow is set to zero.

The compressor may not be positioned at the first or last section boundary of the pipeline. In that
position, the controlled bypass is unrealisable since it is defined as going from the downstream section
to the upstream section.

112
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

It is recommended that a separator is located upstream of the compressor in order to avoid liquid flow
through it. Numerically, the compressor model works with liquid phase present but the results make no
sense.

How to use
To use a compressor, one needs to add a compressor and two controllers (speed controller and anti-
surge controller). There must be one compressor table for each compressor.

If the controllers are omitted the speed will be kept at minimum speed (MINRPM) and the recycle loop
will be closed.

Controlling rotational speed

Compressor minimum rpm, MINRPM, and maximum rpm, MAXRPM, are specified by the user. These
two parameters determine the operating range of the compressor and they must be within the rpm
range of the compressor tables. A controller can be used to regulate the speed within the operating
range. The speed is calculated by Equation (b) above. If the speed controller is omitted the controller
signal will be zero and the compressor will use its minimum speed.

Recycle loop
The anti-surge security factor, SECURITYFACTOR, determines the anti-surge control line. To protect
the compressor against surge conditions, always select a security factor > 1. A typical value for security
factor is from 1.1 to 1.3. A security factor of 1.2 means that the control valve in the recirculation loop
starts to open at a compressor inlet flow that is 20% higher than the surge flow specified in the
compressor tables.

The anti-surge controller (ASC) should be configured as a PI controller. The ASC is a kind of non-linear
controller that have two amplification factors, AMP1 and AMP2. AMP1 is used if the inlet flow to the
compressor is less than the surge flow, and AMP2 if the inlet is greater than the surge flow. Both AMP1
and AMP2 have to be negative, and the absolute value of AMP1 should be higher than the
corresponding absolute value of AMP2 in order to rapidly open the recycle valve and to impose an
inertia to close it again. A short stroke time for the recycle valve should also be selected. Select also the
controller initial output signal (BIAS), equal to zero. To send information from the compressor to the
ASC about surge flow, connect the OUTSIG_n out-signal from the compressor to the MEASRD input-
signal of the controller. Then select QGSURGE as the measured variable.

If the anti-surge controller is omitted the controller signal will be zero which will cause the recycle choke
to be closed, i.e. there will be no flow in the recycle loop.

To add a cooler to the recirculation loop, set COOLER=ON and also set the COOLCAPACITY.

113
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Gas Lift Valve

In the gas lift process, either continuous or intermittent, relatively high pressure gas is injected downhole
through a gas lift valve (GLV) into the production string to lift the fluid to the surface. The bottom hole
pressure after shut-in is often much higher than the bottom hole pressure at normal production
conditions. Several gas lift valves (unloading valves) are spaced along the depth of the well to lower the
compressor discharge pressure required during startup phase of gas lift after a shut-in operation.
Properly spaced and designed, these unloading valves should close one after the other from top to
bottom as the lift gas reaches the deeper valves. The unloading valve opens or closes depending on the
casing pressure and tubing pressure. The opening pressures are affected by downhole temperature as
the temperature changes the forces acting on the valve stem.

The characteristics of a GLV are usually given by several sets of curves with each curve shows the gas
injection rates at different production pressures at a constant injection pressure. The keyword TABLE
provides the channel for users to specify the GLV characteristics.

The keyword LEAK allows users to use the GLV characteristics and specify the lift gas injection position.

As many leaks can be given as the actual gas lift well configuration requires.

Combining the functions that are provided by the keywords TABLE, LEAK, and ANNULUS, it is possible
to simulate different gas lift configurations and various operations such as startup, shut-in, and steady-
state operation. Gas lift distribution systems and production networks of wells can be simulated with the
network capability of OLGA.

When to use
Whenever the gas-lifted well contains GLV of which the opening depends on the production and
injection pressure, the characteristics of the GLV should be used through the keyword TALBE in the
simulation model. Such a model can be used to:

• Dimension and space the unloading valves along the wellbore.

• Calculate compressor discharge pressure required to unload the well.
• Check the possibility of flow instability such as casing heading, density wave instability. The
GLV dynamics have major impact on the flow stability of gas lift systems.
• Trouble shoot problems such as interference of unloading valves during normal operation
(simultaneous gas injections through more than one GLV).
• Find various remedies to flow instability.

Methods and assumptions

A gas lift valve (GLV) is used to inject gas into the tubing from the annulus/casing. Typically more than
one GLV is placed after each other down the annulus. The intention is that the GLV closest to the
wellhead opens first, and as the tubing pressure decreases this GLV shall close and the next one open
(might already be open depending on the response curve). This cycle will be repeated till the injected
gas reaches the operating GLV (lowermost active GLV). Once the gas lift gas reaches the operating
GLV, gas is continuously injected through this GLV and stable production is optimised by regulating the
optimum amount of gas (injection gas rate). At constant injection pressure (casing pressure) all GLV’s
above the operating GLV should be closed. If the tubing pressure is increased for any reason (e.g.
choke back production at the wellhead, a big liquid slug coming from the productive formation, etc), this
may cause the opening of some GLV’s. This opening is the automatic response of the GLV’s to stabilise
the flow. The injection of gas will reduce the liquid head pressure in the tubing until the GLV’s are closed
again.

114
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure A shows an example of these “response curves” where tubing pressure is along the x axis,
standard volume gas rate along the y axis, and there is one curve for each casing pressure.

Figure A: Example of GLV Response Curves

The GLV is constructed to respond on both the casing pressure and tubing pressure, see Figure B. The
casing and tubing pressure work together to open the valve, while the gas (typically nitrogen) charged
dome works in the opposite direction. The curve for the casing pressure of 730 psig illustrates the
behaviour. For low tubing pressures the combined force is not enough to open the valve (Pt < 330 psig).
For tubing pressures above the “opening pressure” of 330 psig the valve starts to open; the “Throttling
region” from 330 to approximately 600 psig is where the valve goes from closed to fully open. For a
tubing pressure approaching the casing pressure the flow decreases as the differential pressure
decreases, and above 730 psig (Pt > Pc) there is no flow as there is a check valve that stops the flow
going from the tubing to the casing.

In the input to OLGA the terms “injection pressure” and “production pressure” is used instead of “casing
pressure” and “tubing pressure”, respectively, since the injection gas may be injected in the tubing
instead of the casing, and the well fluid flows up the casing. The intention of the GLV is to allow flow
from the injection to the production side, so using the terms injection/production makes the input more
general.

115
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure B: Sketch of typical casing (injection) pressure operated GLV (with gas charge)

The GLV in Figure B is characterized as an Injection or Casing Pressure Operated GLV since the
injection/casing pressure works on the large part of the bellows (AINJ) while the tubing pressure works
on the small part (APROD). The force balance for the point where the GLV starts to open is then:

PB = PINJ (1 − R) + PPROD ∗ R (a)

where R = ASEAT / ABELLOW. PINJ and PPROD switch places in the equation for a Production or Tubing
Pressure Operated GLV.

Calculation of flow from curves

The standard volume gas rate through the GLV is found by linear interpolation in the user-given
response curves (defined in LEAK/GASLIFTTABLES) using the calculated injection pressure (upstream
the GLV) and production pressure (downstream).

First, the code finds the two response curves with injection pressures that are closest (higher and lower)
the current injection pressure. One gas rate is found for each curve by interpolating using the current
production pressure, and then the resulting gas rate is found by interpolating between these two rates
using the current injection pressure. If the current injection pressure is below the lowest given injection
pressure, the curve for the lowest injection pressure is used directly and vice versa for injection pressure
above the highest given injection pressure. That is, no extrapolation for injection pressures.

Extrapolation is performed in the direction of decreasing production pressure to find the opening
production pressure, if not given (allowed with a negative extrapolated value, as would be the case for
the injection pressure of 790 psig in Figure A). It is required that the last point in a response curve (the
point with highest production pressure) has a gas rate of 0. It is possible to create a curve with only one
point for which this is not a requirement (a way to specify constant standard volume flow for all
production pressures below the injection pressure).

Associated liquid (in case of liquid on the injection side) through the GLV is calculated by setting the
total mass flux WTOT [kg/(m2s)] as:

116
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ρ mix
WTOT = WG (b)
ρG

where WG is the gas mass flux derived from the response curves, ρG is the gas density and ρmix the
volume averaged density. For each phase, P, (gas, oil, water, etc.) the mass flux through the GLV is:

· (c)

where xP is the mass fraction of the phase upstream the GLV (in the section where the GLV is placed).

Temperature effect
In the case of a gas charged dome (a GLV might have a spring instead) the pressure in the dome will
increase with increasing temperature as the gas is contained in the dome. This means that the required
force from the production and injection side to open the GLV also increases with increasing
temperature.

According to Winkler and Eads /20/ the increased pressure in a nitrogen charged dome/bellows (based
on reference temperature TREF of 60 F) is expressed like:

ΔPB = M (TB − TREF )

For nitrogen 60 F base pressures less than 1238 psia :

(d)
M = 0.00226 + 0.001934 PB + 3.054 ⋅ 10 −7 PB2
For nitrogen 60 F base pressures from 1238 to 3000 psia :
M = −0.267 + 0.002298 PB + 1.84 ⋅10 −7 PB2

where TB is the bellows temperature, and the pressures and temperature are given in psia and F. These
equations have been implemented in OLGA, but with a user given reference temperature. That is, it has
been assumed that the equations give reasonable results also for other reference temperatures than 60
F.

The bellows temperature will depend on the production temperature, injection temperature, flow
conditions, geometry of GLV, placement of GLV, etc. The user must give a parameter α where the
bellows temperature is a linear interpolation between the injection and production temperature:

TB = TPRODα + TINJ (1 − α ) (e)

From the force balance equation (a) we get the following expressions for the increase in required
production pressure to open the GLV (assuming constant injection pressure):

ΔPB ΔPB
Injection operated : ΔPPROD = , Production operated : ΔPPROD = (f)
R 1− R

where ΔPB is calculated in equations (d). This effect can be very significant. For a sufficiently high
temperature above the given reference temperature the GLV might never open: PPROD, open + ΔPPROD >
PINJ.

In OLGA this effect is included with a right-shift of all the response curves associated with the GLV. The
point with maximum gas rate (for each of the curves) is identified, and the points to the left of this

117
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

maximum point are shifted with the calculated ΔPPROD. The new response curve will then consist of the
adjusted left side of the curve, the original right side of the curve, and a new maximum point where they
cross each other.

This procedure is a simplification of how the response curves are affected in the dynamic region; only
the opening point is correctly calculated (except for the uncertainty in using equations (d) for a reference
temperature different from 60 F). E.g., the curve for a casing/injection pressure of 850 psig in Figure A
will not be affected by temperature with this procedure. This is not physically correct.

Limitations
The temperature effects on the opening/closing of a GLV are mainly uncertainties in using the GLV
characteristics. The average of the temperatures on the production and injection side is used as
temperature inside the valve body. In reality, the temperature distribution within the valve is more
complex because of interaction between the production string and the injection string, the expansion of
lift gas through the valve, and axial heat transfer along the pipes.

It is also assumed that the maximum flow rate point of the GLV performance curve corresponds to the
flow rate of a fully opened valve. For the curves which do not have the maximum point, the effects of
temperature on the closing of the valve are not considered.

How to use
Use the keyword TABLE to specify the curves of gas flow rate as a function of production pressure for
different injection pressures.

Use the keyword LEAK to specify the gas injection position and the name of the table the GLV
performance curves are given.

Use ANNULUS keyword to configure the injection and production strings.

118
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Heat Exchanger
A heat exchanger is included to raise or lower the temperature in the fluid. There are two different types
of heat exchangers in OLGA;’Setpoint Heat Exchanger’ and ’Controlled Heat Exchanger’. Both can be
configured to give practically the same results, but each is configured differently and this allows for
different usages.

When to use
When a heat exchanger is used in the anti-surge recirculation loop of a compressor, it is specified
through the keys of the COMPRESSOR keyword (keys COOLER and COOLCAPACITY). Otherwise,
use this HEATEXCHANGER keyword to create a heat exchanger.

Methods and assumptions

The setpoint heat exchanger is an idealised heat source/sink, and no description of the real heat
transfer process is included. It simply provides a way of specifying a temperature at the heat exchanger
outlet, consistent with the energy equation in OLGA. In the setpoint heat exchanger, a heat source/sink
is estimated that will give the specified fluid temperature for a particular section. More specifically, the
heat exchanged is equal to the enthalpy difference corresponding to the difference between the inlet
temperature and the specified outlet temperature of the heat exchanger.

The controlled heat exchanger has a simpler model. In the controlled heat exchanger, the effect of the
heat exchanger is determined by the controller system. The heat source/sink is not estimated as the
heat exchanger has no knowledge of any target temperature. The CONTROLLER for the heat
exchanger knows the current temperature and the target temperature and adjusts the effect of the heat
exchanger to obtain the target temperature.

Limitations
A heat exchanger can not be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.

How to use
To select between a setpoint heat exchanger and a controlled exchanger, simply set the TYPE.

To use a setpoint heat exchanger, specify the position, an outlet temperature and an upper limit of the
heat source, the capacity.

To use a controlled heat exchanger, specify the position and the capacity, but instead of setting the
outlet temperature, connect the heat exchanger to a controller. The controller will typically measure the
temperature at a specified position along the pipeline and compare the measured temperature to a
setpoint. Based on the difference between the setpoint and the measured temperature, the controller
will deliver a signal to the heat exchanger which determines how large a fraction of the heat exchanger’s
capacity will be applied. Different types of controllers can be used, making the input of a controlled heat
exchanger more flexible than that of the setpoint heat exchanger. For example, one can measure the
average temperature over several sections by using a Linear Combination Controller.

119
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Pump
The PUMP keyword is used to model specific pump types of common commercial interest.

Real commercial pumps may be classified into the following categories;

1. Rotodynamic pumps
2. Positive displacement (volume) pumps
3. Other types (jet pump, water hammer pump, etc).

OLGA currently offers four different pump models; the centrifugal pump and the simplified centrifugal
pump which belong to category 1 above, as well as the displacement pump and the pump battery which
belong to category 2 above.

No explicit OLGA models are yet implemented for the less-common types of specialized pumps listed in
category 3 above.

When to use
If the inlet pressure of a pipeline is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if we want to
increase the oil production, a pump can be installed to increase the flow rate in the pipeline.

License requirements

• The centrifugal and displacement pumps are part of the Multiphase Pump Module that requires a
separate license.
• The pump battery model is used for drilling applications, and is only available with the Wells
Module.
• The simplified centrifugal pump requires no additional license.

Methods and assumptions

Centrifugal pump
Theory and multiphase dynamics
For a generalized multiphase centrifugal pump, the pressure increase over the pump, DP, is dependent
on the flow rate Q, pump speed N, inlet gas volume fraction aI, and the pump inlet pressure PI:

ΔP = f (Q , N , α I , PI ) (a)

For the liquid (assuming incompressible), the specific work delivered from the pump into the fluid is:
(PO − PI )
Wl = (b)
ρl

where PO is the pump outlet pressure, PI the pump inlet pressure and ρl the liquid density. For a
compressible gas, and assuming a polytropic process, the work done by the pump is:
⎡ n −1
⎤
n PI ⎛ P
⎢⎜ O ⎟ ⎞ n
Wg = −1⎥ (c)
n − 1 ρ g ,I ⎢⎝ PI ⎠ ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦

Where n is the polytropic constant and ρg, I the gas density at pump inlet.

120
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The work input to the gas is equal to the increase in the gas enthalpy. When the gas is assumed to be
ideal Win can be written as:

⎡ n −1
⎤
k PI ⎢⎛ PO ⎞ n
Win = ⎜ ⎟ − 1 ⎥⎥ (d)
k − 1 ρ g , I ⎢⎝ PI ⎠
⎣⎢ ⎥⎦

The polytropic efficiency is defined as the ratio of the work done by the pump divided by the work input
to the gas. If the adiabatic constant k for the gas and the compressor efficiency ηp are given, the
polytropic constant n can be calculated.

For a two-phase mixture, the pump power to the fluid is weighted by mass fractions (αm = gas mass
fraction) as follows:

⎡ ⎛ n −1
⎞⎤
W = (1 − α m )Wl + α mWg = PI ⎢ (1 − α m )⎛
⎜⎜
PO ⎞
− 1⎟⎟ +
α m n ⎜ ⎛ P ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1⎟⎥
O
n ⎟
⎜ (e)
⎢ ρl ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎝ PI ⎠ ρ g n − 1 ⎜ ⎝ PI ⎠ ⎟⎥
⎝ ⎠⎦

With W calculated from the pump characteristics, Equation (e) can be solved for PO/PI. The relationship
between head H and specific work W is W = gH = ghHR, where HR is rated head and h is the head ratio.

For a two-phase mixture (except for very high gas fractions) an isothermal compression of the gas may
be assumed (i.e. n=1.0) to account for rapid vapor-phase heat loss to all of the associated liquid, the
pump impeller / case, and the surroundings. Assuming n = 1.0, equation (e) can then be rewritten by a
series expansion to:

⎡ (1 − α m )⎛ PO ⎞ α ⎛ P ⎞⎤
W = PI ⎢ ⎜⎜ − 1⎟⎟ + m ln⎜⎜ O ⎟⎟ ⎥ (f)
⎢⎣ ρ l ⎝ PI ⎠ ρ g , I ⎝ PI ⎠ ⎥⎦

Modeling in OLGA
OLGA's transient calculations for centrifugal pump performance utilize multi-dimensional interpolation
across four separate (default, or user-specified) quadrants of performance curves. Each quadrant is
defined in a specific normalized / homologous format (see Pump Data Table for Centrifugal Pumps for
an exact definition of all quadrant formats). Together, these four quadrant curve sets give OLGA
advanced capability to model all possible transient combinations of Positive and Negative Normalized
Speed Ratios and Flow Ratios (including transient backflows that often occur during pump startup and
shutdown, in combination with either weak forward impeller rotation or actual reverse impeller rotation).

However, most pump manufacturers do not publish performance curves directly in this normalized /
homologous format required by OLGA. Nor do they typically offer any curves at all for the operating
quadrant representing Positive Speed with Negative Flow (where the pump is transiently unable to
overcome external backpressure, typically during Startup/Speedup) or the operating quadrant
representing Negative Speed with Negative Flow (where the centrifugal impeller is physically rotating
backwards, either due to reverse power input or overwhelming external backpressure).

Instead, most manufacturers publish one Head versus Flowrate Curve (with Power or Torque overlaid)
for the case of Gas Volume Fraction (GVF) = ZERO, plus additional curves for increasing GVF's, up to a
"Degraded Performance Limit" (often GVF=60-70%, but variable by manufacturer and model).

121
Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

In order to incorporate such manufacturer curves into an OLGA pump model, the user must first convert
the manufacturer curves into homologous curves where the head and torque ratios (actual value to
rated value) are functions of the pump speed and flow rate ratios, as defined in Equations (g) below.

OLGA's special homologous centrifugal pump curves utilize the following non-dimensional variables:

122
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

H Q
h= - head ratio q= - flow ratio
HR QR

N TH
ω= - speed ratio β= - torque ratio (g)
NR TH R

where subscript R means rated value.

OLGA interpolates over four quadrants of homologous curve sets, all defined in terms of the above non-
dimensional variables. Each quadrant curve set includes:

• Single phase head HS

• Two phase head HT
• Single phase torque THS
• Two phase torque THT

The two-phase head HT and two-phase torque THT curves should be based on fully-degraded two-
phase conditions. The transfer from single-phase conditions to fully-degraded two-phase conditions is
described by a two-phase multiplier. The pump head H and hydraulic torque TH under two-phase
conditions are determined as:

H = HS (1 − HM (α ) ) + HT HM (α )

TH = THS (1 − TM (α ) ) + THT TM (α ) (h)

where HM(a) is the two-phase head multiplier, TM(a) is the two-phase torque multiplier and a the gas
volume fraction at the pump inlet. Each set of homologous curves consists of four curves. These are
defined in Table 1 and Table 2.

A complete default set of homologous curves is tabulated in the code (and also documented in an
external file that is linked to the example centrifugal pump in the pump.opi sample case installed with
OLGA). These built-in default centrifugal pump curves are based on experimental data, and are
representative for typical centrifugal pumps. However, users can change these data easily by specifying
their own experimental data through the pump data table. An example of a graphical presentation of the
tabulated pump characteristics is shown in Figure A. This figure shows the single phase homologous
head curves.

Because the homologous curves are dimensionless, one set of curves can be used to describe a variety
of different pumps (i.e., within a single OLGA model) by specifying the desired rated density, head,
torque, flow rate and speed for each pump.

In calculating the hydraulic torque, TH, the difference between actual fluid density and rated density
must be corrected as:

ρ
TH = β ⋅ TH R ⋅ (i)
ρR

Table 1: Dependence of Pump Head on Pump Speed and Flow Rate

Curves Range Independent Dependent variables

123
Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

variables
ω > 0, 1
1 q/ω h/ω2
q > 0, 1 h/q2
2 ω/q
q < 0, 1 h/q2
3 ω/q
ω < 0, 1
4 q/ω h/ω2

Table 2: Dependence of Pump Torque on Pump Speed and Flow Rate

Curves Range Independent Dependent variables

variables
ω > 0, 1
1 q/ω β/ω2
q > 0, 1
2 ω/q β/q2
q < 0, 1
3 ω/q β/q2
ω < 0, 1
4 q/ω β/ω2

2 2

HS1

HS3 h
2
ω
h
1 q2
q
ω
1

h q2 ω
q
or
h ω2

HS4
0 0
h h
2 q2
ω
q
ω ω
q

HS2
-1 -1
0 1
-1 q ω
or q
ω

Figure A: Single Phase Homologous head curves

The OLGA centrifugal pump model also includes embedded numerical models for typical recycle and
bypass lines, including user-specified orifices that may be linked to OLGA controllers. For more detail,
see the heading Recycle and bypass flow below.

For details of the energy balance across the OLGA Displacement Pump, see the heading Energy
balance below.

124
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Displacement pump
Theory and multiphase dynamics
For the displacement pump, the pump flow rate is the theoretical flow rate minus the backflow through
the pump. The theoretical flow rate is a function of the pump speed and the characteristics of the pump,
expressed through the specific flow rate. The backflow rate is a function of several parameters and is
tabulated in a backflow table. This can be summarized as follows:

Q = Q 0 − Qb
Q0 = Qspc N (j)

Qb = f ( N , ΔP , α I , PI , ν I )
where

Q0 - theoretical flow rate

Qb - back flow rate
Qspc - pump specific flow rate
N - pump speed
DP - pressure increase across the pump
aI - void fraction at the pump inlet
nl - liquid kinetic viscosity
PI - pressure at the pump inlet

Modeling in OLGA
For a given displacement pump, the specific flow rate Qspc is a constant. Qb is tabulated in the backflow
table as a function of N, DP, aI, nl and PI.
A default implementation of the backflow table is implemented in the displacement pump (and also
documented in an external file that is linked to the example displacement pump in the pump.opi sample
case installed with OLGA). Other backflow tables may be given by using the TABLE keyword.(See
Pump Data Table for Displacement Pumps.)

The OLGA displacement pump model also includes embedded numerical models for typical recycle and
bypass lines, including user-specified orifices that may be linked to OLGA controllers. For more detail,
see the heading Recycle and bypass flow below.

For details of the energy balance across the OLGA Centrifugal Pump, see the heading Energy balance
below.

Pump Battery
Accurate simulation of the pumps used for a standard drilling operation is important for the overall
estimation of the pump power needed as well as the volume of mud/water required during the operation.

Defining the total flow rates proportional to the rate of pump strokes simulates the battery of positive
displacement pumps.

We define the pump battery through a proportionality factor for the volume delivered at a certain pump
rate:

QP = PFAC ⋅ S PES (k)

where

QP = Volume delivered by the pump battery

PFAC = Pumping factor

125
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SPES = Strokes per time unit

The pump rate is normally controlled by the following set of controllers:

• Controller on the maximum hydraulic horsepower allowed

• Controller on the maximum pump rate
• Controller on the minimum pump rate
• Controller on the maximum pump pressure allowed

If any one of these controllers is set into action the pump rate is adjusted automatically. The number of
controllers can be extended above the number shown above and different variables (e.g. fluid rate,
inflow rate) can be used to control the pumps.

The total hydraulic horsepower, HHP, is calculated from the following definition:

Qinj ⋅ WHP
HHP =
2.81 (l)
where

Qinj = Pump injection rate of mud or water (bbl/min)

WHP = Pump injection pressure (bara)

Recycle and bypass flow

Recycle and bypass flows are only defined for centrifugal (not simplified) and displacement pumps. The
recycle flow, GR, is considered as the flow through a controlled choke. The flow is calculated with a
given pressure difference between the two sides of the choke, DPch, and the choke upstream
conditions. The choke upstream condition is taken from the pump downstream section (pump pressure
side). The choke flow can be regulated by a controller.

If the recycle flow is in subcritical condition, GR is calculated by:

1
G R = ( 2 ρΔPch ) 2 Cd Ach (m)

where Cd is the choke discharge coefficient and Ach the choke opening area.

If the mass flow through the choke exceeds the critical flow rate, critical flow conditions will be used. The
flow rate through a critical choke is governed by the choke upstream conditions and the choke
opening. No forward flow is allowed in the recycle loop.

The bypass flow, Gb, is controlled by a choke and calculated in the same way as for the recycle flow. If
the bypass flow line is opened, the fluid flows from the pump inlet to the pump outlet in the normal
pumping flow direction without going through the pump. Back flow is not allowed through the bypass
line.
Simplified centrifugal pump
Theory and multiphase dynamics
The simplified centrifugal pump in OLGA is intended for quick, approximate modeling. It models a
linearized approximation to the local behaviour of a real centrifugal pump, and is therefore only accurate
for use across small excursions from its specified local operational point (where the tangent to the real
nonlinear operating curve does not change significantly).

126
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

These simple algebraic expressions are used to calculate the pressure increase over this simplified
pump, as well as its pump efficiency:

ΔPo = ΔPr ( 1 + D1 ( N - Nr ) + D2 ( Q - Qr ) ) ( 1 - D3 α ) (n)

= ( 1 + E 1 ( N - N r ) + E 2 ( Q - Q r ) ) ( 1 - E3 α ) (o)

ΔP = ΔPo / (p)

where:
ΔPo = Pump pressure increase at rated density ( bar )
ΔP = Pump pressure increase ( bar )
N = Pump speed ( rpm )
Q = Flow rate ( m3/s )
α = Gas volume fraction
= Pump efficiency ( adiabatic )
= Specific density ( kg/m3 )
D1,2,3 = Input coefficients for pressure increase
E1,2,3 = Input coefficients for efficiency

Subscripts: r = rated

The power to the fluid is calculated in the following manner:

a. Inlet enthalpy (Hs) (J/kg) and entropy (Ss) are found from the fluid file. The enthalpy at discharge
pressure is found assuming isentropic conditions (Hiso). The actual enthalpy change is then
calculated by following formula:

( H iso − H s )
ΔH = (q)
η
b. Outlet enthalpy is calculated from:

Hd = Hs + ΔH (r)

c. The power input to the fluid is calculated from:

Wfluid = GT⋅ΔH (s)

where Wfluid is in W, and GT is the total mass flow in kg/s.

Total shaft power:

Wtot = Wfluid / η M (t)

Pump torque:

= Wtot /ω (u)

Pump hydraulic torque:

TH = Г ηM (v)

where

127
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ω = 2πN / 60, and ηM the pump mechanical efficiency.

Modeling in OLGA

Note that by setting the coefficients D1,2,3 and E1,2,3 = 0.0, a pump with a constant pressure increase will
be simulated. If the user wants to obtain a certain flow rate in a simple way, one can either iterate on the
input value for ∆Pr or assume some value for D1 and let a controller determine the necessary speed.

Energy balance
Centrifugal and Simplified Centrifugal pumps
The total power input to the fluid from any pump (including the OLGA centrifugal, displacement, and
simplified pumps described above) is:

THω
QPt = (w)
ηM

where TH is the pump hydraulic torque, w the pump speed and M the pump mechanical efficiency.
Displacement pump
For the displacement pump, the hydraulic torque, TH, may not be available, and it is therefore difficult to
calculate the term QPt. In this case, the total power input to the fluid is calculated by summing the
mechanical work on the fluid and the different losses as following:

The power used for mechanical work on the fluid, QPM, is calculated as:

QPM = Wl Ql ρl + Wg Qg ρg (x)

where,
Wl - specific work delivered from pump into liquid
Ql - liquid flow rate
rl - liquid density
Wg - specific work delivered from pump into gas
Qg - gas flow rate
rg - gas density

Mechanical friction loss:

a
⎛ N ⎞
QPmf = QPmf ,ref ⎜ ⎟ (y)
⎜N ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
Viscous friction loss:
b
⎛ N ⎞
QPvis = QPvis,ref ⎜ ⎟ (z)
⎜N ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
where,

a - experiment coefficient for mechanical friction loss

b - experiment coefficient for viscous friction loss
Nref - pump reference speed
QPmf,ref - mechanical friction loss at the pump reference speed
QPvis,ref - viscous loss at the pump reference speed

128
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Then, the total power input to the fluid is calculated as:

QPt = QPM + QPmf + QPvis (aa)

Limitations
The recycle flow and bypass flows around the OLGA centrifugal and displacement pumps are
considered as flows through controlled chokes. Each flow is calculated with the given pressure
difference between the two sides of the choke and the choke upstream conditions. The pipeline effect of
the recycle flowline and bypass flowline is not considered.

The recycle flow can only flow from the pump downstream section to the upstream section, and the
bypass flow can only flow from the pump upstream section to the downstream section. It is impossible to
insert any component in the recycle flowline or bypass flowline, because no pipeline is considered.

Pumps can not be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flow path.

How to use
General setup (all pump types)
1 Add the PUMP keyword to the desired flowpath
2 Specify pump location by one of ABSPOSITION (length), PIPE & SECTIONBOUNDARY, or
POSITION (an alias)
3 Choose a desired PUMPTYPE from the list below:

A. Simplified Centrifugal to roughly simulate multiphase transient dP and efficiency with only
three algebraic coefficients, as either constant or linearly sensitive to transient fluctuations in
speed, flowrate, and void fraction.

B. Centrifugal to more rigorously model the real nonlinear transient operation of a particular
multiphase centrifugal pump (including recycle and bypass). OLGA calculations are based on
either built-in nonlinear curves for a "typical" pump, or user input of special dimensionless
OLGA curves for a particular pump that must usually be derived from given dimensional
curves before OLGA entry.

C. Displacement to rigorously model the real nonlinear transient operation of a particular

multiphase positive displacement pump (including recycle and bypass). OLGA calculations
are based on either built-in nonlinear curves for a "typical" pump, or detailed manufacturer's
curves expressing that multiphase displacement pump's internal backflow rate as a 5-
dimensional tabular function of speed, dP, multiphase void fraction, inlet pressure, and liquid-
phase viscosity.

D. Pump Battery to simulate the special case of a battery of positive displacement liquid-phase
drilling mud pumps by specifying a proportionality constant relating operating speed to total
volumetric flowrate, subject to specified control limits for minimum and maximum flowrate, as
well as maximum hydraulic horsepower and outlet pressure.

NOTE: The related topic Pump - When to use documents the differing OLGA module license
requirements for each PUMPTYPE described above.

4 Choose any applicable means of controlling the pump speed, as described in detail at the bottom
of this section.

Simplified Centrifugal setup

129
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1 In addition to the General Setup above, you must specify DPRATED, FLOWRATED, SPEEDR, and
MAXSPEED. Allso override the (900 kg/m3) default of the required DENSITYR with your actual
rated liquid density, if significantly different.

2 You may also specify related sensitivity of pump DP to varying speed, flowrate, and void fraction via
the linear departure coefficients DCOEFF1 - DCOEFF3. NOTE: Without these optional user inputs,
the OLGA simplified centrifugal pump defaults to a constant DP = DPRATED regardless of any
transients.

3 You may also override the default (0.5) adiabatic efficiency by entering EFFRATED, then make that
efficiency sensitive to speed, flowrate, and void fraction if desired by also entering ECOEFF1 -
ECOEFF3. NOTE: Adiabatic efficiency of the Simplified Centrifugal Pump affects OLGA calculations
for fluid heating, hydraulic horsepower, total shaft horsepower and torque, through the relations
documented in Pump - Methods and assumptions.

4 If more accurate estimation of Total Shaft Power is also required, you may also override the default
(0.7) EFFIMECH.

Centrifugal setup
1 Like the Simplified Centrifugal Pump discussed above, the OLGA Centrifugal Pump also requires
DENSITYR (same 900 kg/m3 default, or specified), plus FLOWRATED, and SPEEDR.
2 However, OLGA's full Centrifugal Pump model also requires you to specify HEADRATED and
TORQR as a minimum, in order to scale the general transient response surface of either the built-in
default or user-specified Homologous Centrifugal Pump Curves to your actual pump.
3 You may optionally enter custom transient centrifugal pump performance curves to precisely
represent the exact transient response surface for your actual pump. However, note that most
manufacturers do not publish pump curves directly in this format, and it may also be difficult to
obtain degraded multiphase performance curves up to the maximum degraded Gas Volume
Fraction (GVF) for your particular hardware and application (often somewhere in the range of 30 -
70% vapor volume).For more specific information about the theoretical basis of these special OLGA
input requirements, consult Table 1, Table 2, and Figure A of the Pump - Methods and
Assumptions topic.
4 The OLGA Centrifugal Pump will run without any further inputs, already representing a much more
realistic transient modeling upgrade to the Simplified Centrifugal Pump model at only slightly greater
modeling cost in setup time and runtime.
5 This PUMPTYPE also includes additional provisions for simple "branch-less" Bypass and Recycle
modeling to further increase the realism of OLGA's transient responses for typical pump packages.
The setup procedures and modeling assumptions for these Built-in Bypass and Recycle features
are described in detail below.

Displacement setup
1 The OLGA Displacement Pump requires significantly different types of inputs than the Centrifugal or
Simplified Pumps. For example, none of DENSITYR, FLOWRATED, HEADRATED, SPEEDR, or
TORQR is used.
2 You must enter SPECAPACITY (the total specific volume displaced per revolution or displacement
cycle) as well as MAXSPEED. OLGA will then multiply these two inputs to determine the (gross)
theoretical volumetric flowrate displaced (before subtracting internal bypass).
3 The OLGA Displacement Pump will run without any further inputs, although equipment
manufacturers or others with detailed knowledge may wish to override the defaults for one or more
of ACOEFFICIENT, BCOEFFICIENT, MDISSIPATION, VDISSIPATION, etc in order to tune the
model very precisely.
4 You may optionally enter custom transient displacement pump backflow (performance) curves to
precisely represent the exact transient response surface for your actual pump. However, note that
the required input format is a complex 5-dimensional matrix of internal backflow rates as a function
of pump speed, head, void fraction, inlet pressure, and liquid viscosity - information normally only

130
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

available from the manufacturer's experts, perhaps even requiring new eperimental work on a
prototype pump for your particular fluid and operating conditions..For more specific information
about the theoretical basis of these special OLGA input requirements, consult the Displacement
Pump Theory topic in the Pump - Methods and Assumptions section.
5 Like the Centrifugal pump, this PUMPTYPE also supports additional provisions for simple "branch-
less" Bypass and Recycle modeling to further increase the realism of OLGA's transient responses
for typical pump packages. The setup procedures and modeling assumptions for these Built-in
Bypass and Recycle features are described in detail below.

Pump Battery setup

1 Setup of and use of the special Pump Battery model (for a battery of dtilling mud pumps) is
primarily described within the Pump Battery topic of the Pump - Methods and Assumptions
section.

2 Required inputs include MAXSPEED, MINCAPACITY, MAXCAPACITY, MAXPRESSURE, and

HPMAX. MINSPEED is optional.

3 These inputs are used to simulate simple limit controls on horsepower, flowrate, and pressure.

Optional Built-In Bypass and Recycle for Centrifugal and Displacement Pumps
To activate OLGA's simplified Bypass feature for any Centrifugal or Displacement Pump, specify
BYDIAMETER and connect a bypass controller of your choice. No other bypass inputs are offered or
required.

To activate OLGA's simplified Recycle feature for any Centrifugal or Displacement Pump, specify at
least RECDIAMETER and MAXRECYCLE, plus any non-default values for RECPHASE,
MINRECYCLE, and ACCECOEFF. Then connect a recycle controller of your choice.

Further details about the internal workings of these simplified Bypass and Recycle features are provided
in the following text, equations, and block flow diagrams.

A common multiphase transportation system with pump is shown in Figure B.

Figure B: Multiphase Transportation System with Pump

131
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Within OLGA, this system will be simplified as shown in Figure C. Note that in this implementation the
pump is abstracted into a volume-less element on the section boundary J between section J-1 and
section J. The recycle flow is out of section J and into Section J-1, and the bypass flow out of section J-
1 and into section J.

No-slip flow is assumed for all of gas, liquid, and droplets moving through section boundary J, as:

Ug = U d = U l = U

OLGA also permits the user to add a separate VALVE keyword at the same section boundary where a
centrifugal pump is located. The user may then close that optional OLGA Valve to block any possible
backflow transients (that may otherwise occur due to higher downstream pressure at any moment when
the centrifugal pump is shut down).

Figure C: Multiphase Transportation System modelled in OLGA

The centrifugal pump model requires a pump table with the characteristics of the pump. The
displacement pump model requires a backflow table. The pump manufacturers generally characterize
their pumps by pump operating characteristics. There is a default implementation of such tables in
OLGA. If other tables are needed they should be given with the TABLE keyword. Each of the
characteristics is assigned a label, which is referred to in the PUMP keyword.

The user can choose the recycle flow as gas only, liquid mixture, water only, or fluid mixture.

Controlling the pump speed

The following options are available for controlling the pump speed:

1. Pump speed regulated by controller (All pump models):

a. Controlled manually by specifying time and speed series in the controller definition.
b. Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by:

N = N min + u ( N max - N min ) (ab)

where Nmax is the maximum pump speed (defined by user), Nmin is the minimum pump
speed (defined by user) and u the signal from the controller.

132
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

2. Controlled by an override controller (Only for centrifugal and displacement pumps):

To adapt the pump to the production change (because the recycle flow is at upper or lower
limits), the pump speed will be changed automatically according to the required speed variation
(speed acceleration). The speed variation may be given in form of:

SPEED = SPEED ± A ⋅TIME

where A is a constant pump speed variation rate (acceleration). The speed variation will stop
once the recycle flow is within a defined range below MAXRECYCLE and above
MINRECYCLE.

3. If the maximum pump torque has been given by users (Only for centrifugal and displacement
pumps):

The effective pump torque is calculated from the total power input to the fluid, QPt :

60 QP t
TQ pump = [N m] (ac)
2πN
where QPt is the total power input to the fluid. If the pump shaft torque is over the limit the pump speed
is reduced, and a warning message will be given in the output file.

133
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Separator
The network separator is not intended to accurately model separation phenomena, but is meant to
include the influence of a separator on transient pipeline dynamics. The behaviour of the separator is
mainly based upon user given input for the separation efficiency (gas/liquid, oil/water), and set critical
levels for oil and water drainage.

When to use
It is recommended to use the separator model whenever a ”real” separator is present in the flow
network and the effect of the downstream flow pattern is of interest. If it is only interesting to look at the
upstream flow pattern, it sometimes is appropriate to replace the separator with an ordinary pipe with
large diameter to stabilize the boundary conditions and in that way avoid the needs for more complex
specification of outgoing pipes, valves and controllers linked up to the separator.

It can also be useful to employ a separator as a downstream boundary condition for controlling the
boundary pressure. This may reduce unwanted flow oscillations in the network compared to using a
constant pressure boundary condition.

Methods and assumptions

Separator type
The separator may be two-phase or three-phase and the geometry orientation is horizontal, vertical or
table specified.

Connections to external pipelines

The separator has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. Two phase separators must have connected at
least one inlet, one gas-outlet and one oil-outlet to pipes. Three phase separators must in addition also
have one water-outlet connected.

Valves/controllers
The separator has no internal valves and controllers, so they have to be specified on the outgoing
pipes.

Level control
The separator levels are controlled by the valves and controllers in the outlet pipes. For a three-phase
separator, the water level limit for when the water will be drained together with the oil can be specified in
the separator keys:

HHWATHOLDUP or
HHWATLEVEL

Separation efficiencies

a) Liquid carryover in gas outlet.

The gas-liquid separation efficiency is defined as one minus the volume fraction of the
liquid droplets in the gas outlet stream. By default, the gas-liquid separation efficiency
is equal to one, that is, no liquid carryover in the gas outlet. The user can, however,
specify a constant gas-liquid separation efficiency, effg by the key EFFICIENCY in the
keyword SEPARATOR. The liquid droplet volume fraction in the gas stream is then
equal to one minus the value assigned to EFFICIENCY.

For three phase flow the liquid droplet volume fraction is distributed to water and oil
droplet volume fractions according to the water and oil volume fractions in the settled
liquid in the separator.

134
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

To prevent instabilities in the separator when the liquid holdup becomes very large, it
is possible to specify two input keys, EFFLOW and EFFHIGH, to assure a continuous
transition from effg = EFFICIENCY to effg = 0.0. EFFLOW is the liquid volume fraction
when efficiency is being reduced and EFFHIGH is the liquid volume fraction when
efficiency becomes zero and the gas outlet is treated as a normal flow path. The gas-
liquid separation efficiency, effg is modified by the following set of rules:

The liquid volume fraction, αl ≤ EFFLOW:

(a)

αl > EFFLOW and αl < EFFHIGH:

(b)

αl ≥ EFFLOW:

0.0 (c)

b) Oil in water drain.

The oil volume fraction in the water drain is determined by the following relation for
separation efficiency:

K so
eff o = 1 − (d)
Trsp

where Kso is the time constant, OILTCONST, for separating oil from water and Trsp is
the residence time which is defined as the separator liquid volume / liquid volume flow
into the separator.

The oil volume fraction in the water drain is then 1 - eff0.

c) Water in oil drains.

The water volume fraction in the oil drains is determined by an equation similar to the
one above:

K sw
eff w = 1 − (e)
Trsp

where Ksw is the time constant, WATTCONST, for separating water from oil. If the
water level is above a certain limit, HHWATHOLDUP or HHWATLEVEL, the water
above this limit is assumed to be drained together with the oil and the separation
efficiency for separating water from oil is modified as follows:

⎛ K ⎞
eff w = ⎜1 − sw ⎟(1 − H of ) + (1 − eff o )H of (f)
⎜ T ⎟
⎝ rsp ⎠

where Hof is the ratio of the water layer height above the limit to the liquid height above
the same limit.

135
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The water volume fraction in the oil stream is then 1effw.

Heat transfer
The heat transfer, qtr into the separator or out from the separator is given by:

(g)

where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient, A is the surface area, Tsep is the separator temperature
and Tamb is the ambient temperature. If adiabatic temperature option is given for the total flow network,
U is set to zero for all separators in the network.

Limitations
The network separator is not intended for design purposes. It only simulates a predefined behaviour of
a ”real” separator.

• The separator is only treated as a simple volume tank with no internal separation equipment
• The separator efficiencies is user given
• No wall temperatures is calculated
• There are no time restrictions for calculation of the flash contributions. The total mass internally
is taken into account and treated as at equilibrium. Due to the internal geometry of the
separator, this might give incorrect results if the separator pressure or temperature suddenly
changes.

How to use

PC

Gas
Gas
Oil
Water
LC

Oil

LC

Water

Figure A An illustration of a three-phase separator

Input

Connections to external flow paths

For a two phase separator, the following connections are defined:
• INLET_1, …INLET_N inlets
• GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets (Use GAS_2 to model flare outlet)
• OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets(Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)

For a three phase separator, the following connections are defined:

136
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

• INLET_1, …INLET_N inlets

• GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets (Use GAS_2 to model flare outlet)
• OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets(Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)
• WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets(Use WATER_2 to model emergency outlet)

Initial conditions
• Key INITTEMPERATURE gives initial value for the separator temperature
• Key INITPRESSURE gives initial value for the separator pressure
• Key INITWATLEVEL gives initial value for the water level
• Key INITOILLEVEL gives initial value for the oil level

Geometry
There are two ways to specify the geometry of the separator. One method is to specify the separator
length, LENGTH and the separator diameter, DIAMETER. The surface area and volume is then
calculated by using the knowledge of the cylindrical form. The other method is to define a specific level
table LEVELTABLE, a set of user defined values giving the volume as a function of the level (height).
Using this method the surface area, SURFACEAREA also has to be given.

Separator valves/controllers
The separator has no internal valves and controllers. All valves must be defined on the outgoing pipes
and might be positioned at the first section boundary of the pipes. The controllers are connected to the
valves and must also be defined outside the separator. It is recommended that the water valve opening
is controlled by a water level controller, the oil valve opening is controlled by a oil level controller and the
gas valve opening is controlled by a separator pressure controller.

Output
Many of the plot variables specified under volume variable are available for the separator. In addition a
number of separator specific plot variables also are available:
• Mass flow rates for each mass field for each pipe connection
• Separator levels (oil, water)
• Separator efficiency

137
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Valve
The valve models the pressure drop for flow through chokes and valves.

When to use
Use to model orifices, chokes and different types of valves.

For high velocities in the pipeline, a fully open valve can be used to limit the flow to critical flow. Use a
choke with choke diameter equal to the pipeline diameter. Position the Valve at the last section
boundary of the pipe where the flow rate should be limited.

Methods and assumptions

The choke model uses mixture balance equations for mass, momentum and energy. Compression of
gas into the narrow throat is accounted for in the model. A circular-symmetric flow geometry and steady-
state over the choke is assumed. See Selmer-Olsen et al. for the full model description [34].

The choke model describes the effects of both subcritical and critical chokes. The choke opening may
be controlled by the control system, by a predefined time series, or be fixed. The choke has finite
opening and closing time (stroke time) specified by the user. A subcritical choke is represented through
its pressure drop as a function of flow rates and choke openings. The flow rate through a critical choke
is governed by the upstream conditions and the choke opening (choke flow area). The choke flow rate is
limited to critical flow.

Figure A: An illustration of a choke. Fluid is flowing from position 1 to position 2.

Choke model
The flow through the choke is assumed frictionless, homogeneous and adiabatic. The flowing phase
fractions are frozen at inlet conditions. Phase change occurs after the throat, and the fluid reaches
equilibrium in position 2.

The choke model in OLGA describe the pressure drop from upstream (position 1 in Figure A) to
downstream (position 2 in Figure A) an orifice or other constriction in the pipeline. The model include
pressure drop from position 1 to throat (position t in Figure A) and pressure recovery when the fluid
expands from the throat to position 2.

The pressure drop to throat — Bernoulli and continuity equation

Bernoulli Equation:

· (a)

where

um mixture velocity (m/s)

ρm momentum density (kg/m3)

138
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

P pressure (Pa)

Momentum density:
/ (b)

Flowing gas mass fraction:

(c)

where M is the overall mass flow through the choke and Mg is the gas flow through the choke.

Continuity equation:

· · / (d)

where A is the cross sectional area.

Recovery after throat — Momentum and continuity equation

Momentum equation:
· (e)

The overall pressure drop over the choke is found by combining equations (a) through (e).

Critical flow

The critical flow through the choke is found at the maximum of equation (a). Differentiating equation (a)
w.r.t. pressure and combining with equation (d) yields the following relation for the critical flow, MC,

·
(f)

The throat area, At, is corrected with the choke discharge coefficient, Cd, to find the minimum flow area.

Simplified fluid property calculations

The liquid properties are calculated in position 1 and treated as constant, while the gas is compressed/
expanded isentropically.

Gas density:

, · (g)

where γ is the isentropic gas expansion coefficient,

,
(h)
,

The reported throat temperature (TVALVE) is the gas temperature

139
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

· (i)

The liquid is assumed isothermal and the liquid throat temperature is therefore the same as the inlet
temperature.

Critical flow options

Two options are available when calculating the critical flow through a choke:
1. Frozen: No mass transfer, isentropic expansion of gas. (Homogeneous frozen critical flow
model)
2. Henry–Fauske: The Homogeneous frozen critical flow model corrected for mass transfer in the
throat [3].

If the Henry–Fauske model is used and entropy values are given in the fluid property tables file (with the
word ENTROPY in the heading of the fluid file), the entropy values in the fluid file will be used.
Otherwise, the entropy changes will be calculated from enthalpy, mass fraction and density by
integrating the following equation from the upstream conditions (position 1) to the throat conditions
(position 2):

2 2 2
∫ ds = ∫
1 1
1
T dh − ∫
1
V
T dp (j)

The integration is performed in two steps, from P1 to P2 at T1 and from T1 to T2 at P2.

Controlled choke
In the case of a controlled choke, the choke area, Ao, is varied according to the controller signal us :

Ao = us ⋅ Amax ; 0 ≤ us ≤ 1 (k)

where
π
Amax = Do2 (l)
4
Do is the choke diameter and Amax is the maximum choke area.

In the case of an uncontrolled choke, the choke flow area is varied according to the time tables of the
relative choke area, orel,

Ao =orel ⋅Amax; 0 ≤ orel ≤ 1 (m)

In the case of a fixed choke, the choke flow area is constant;

Ao = Amax (n)

Note that it is possible to simulate a choke without a controller; the choke area is then given by a time
series.

140
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Methods and assumptions

In the valve model the pressure drop and critical flow are calculated according to a valve sizing
equation. The valve model uses a table (keyword TABLE) that contains the valve sizing coefficients, Cv
or Cg, versus valve opening.

It is possible to give a table representing the valve sizing coefficients either for gas flow or for liquid flow.
It is not possible to give a table for two/three-phase flow. The sizing coefficients are tabulated as
functions of the relative valve opening. The liquid valve sizing coefficient can also be given as a function
of both relative valve opening and pressure drop over the valve.

Note: The input data for the valve sizing coefficients must be consistent with the units specified
together with the valve sizing equations below.

A valve can be located anywhere in a pipeline.

Liquid Valve sizing equation

If a liquid sizing table is given, the valve flow rate (even three-phase flow) will be calculated using the
choke model in OLGA. The liquid sizing table should be used for liquid flow, near incompressible gas
flow and two/three-phase flow.

The pressure drop through a valve is calculated as follows:

Liquid sizing equation:

∆
(o)

where

Q Flow rate (gallons/min.)

Cv Valve sizing coefficient (gal/min / psi 1/2)
G Specific gravity (-). Water = 1.
ΔP Pressure difference across the valve (psi)

OLGA converts Cv for liquid to the choke flow area, Ao, used in eq. (p). Equations (p) and (o) will
produce a relation between Cv and Ao. Setting CD=1.0, the choke area can be calculated. The pressure
drop and the critical flow rate are calculated using the choke model, regardless if the flow is gas, liquid,
or multiphase flow. The mixture density is used in the calculation.

Orifice equation:

1 ⎡⎛ A ⎤
2
⎞
ΔPorf = ⎢⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1⎥Wtot ∑ α iU i (p)
2 ⎢⎝ Ao ⋅ Cd ⎠ ⎥⎦
⎣ i

where

Cd Discharge coefficient
A Pipe flow area
Ao Choke (orifice) flow area
Wtot Total mass flux

141
 Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Ui Velocity of flow field i, (film velocity, droplet velocity etc.)

αi The volume fractions of flow field i
ΔPorf Pressure drop over the orifice

See Cv to area conversion for the details of the conversion from Cv to orifice area.

Gas valve sizing equation

If the MODEL key is set to HYDROVALVE, the gas sizing equation is used in the same manner as the
liquid valve sizing. Combining equations (p) and (q), a choke area can be calculated. The critical flow
will then be determined by the choke model.

If instead the model option GASSIZING (keyword MODEL) is used, the gas sizing equation will be used
for both subcritical and critical flow. The choke model will not be used.

Gas sizing equation:

⎡ 3417 ⎛ Δp ⎞ 0.5 ⎤
Q m = 1.06 ( ρ g p1 ) 0.5
C g sin ⎢ ⎜ ⎟ ⎥
⎢⎣ C f ⎝ p1 ⎠ ⎥⎦ deg
(q)

where
Qm Mass flow rate (lb/hr.)
ρg Gas density (lb/ft3)
p1 Upstream pressure (psi)
Cg Gas sizing coefficient (lb/hr / (psi × lb/ft3)1/2)
ΔP Pressure drop (psi)
Cf Coefficient ratio, Cg/Cv (-)

The critical flow rate is obtained by setting the sine-term equal to one. The upstream density is used in
the calculation.

Conversion between liquid valve sizing coefficient (Cv) and orifice area

The orifice equation for an incompressible fluid:

∆ · 1 · · ∑ 1 · · (a)
· ·

ρFluid Is the fluid density

Q Is the volumetric flow rate
αi Volumetric fraction of mass field i
Ui Velocity of mass field i
A Pipeline area
AOrifice Orifice area
Cd Orifice discharge coefficient
ΔPOrifice Orifice pressure drop

The valve sizing equation:

∆ ∆ ·
· · (b)

142
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Cv Valve sizing coefficient (gal/min/psi1/2)

Q Is the volumetric flow rate (gal)
ΔPSizing Sizing pressure drop (psi)
G Specific gravity (-)
ρRef Water density at 39ºF/4ºC and 1 atmosphere (998.840 kg/m3)
ρFluid Fluid density at reference conditions

Setting ΔPOrifice = ΔPSizing and solving for Cv or orifice area (AOrifice):

(c)
·
· ·

Above we have assumed that the orifice equation is given with the same units as the sizing equation.

Converting to SI units: CvSI = Cv · 7.59805…E-7 (m3/s/Pa1/2) (d)

Using SI units for the area, m, and inserting the reference water density we get the following equation:

· · 2.40132. . 5 2
(e)
1
2
· ·
1

Limitations
Friction and gravity forces are neglected in the choke model. See Selmer-Olsen et al. for limitations in
the choke model /34/.

When using the Henry-Fauske critical flow model (CRITFLOWMODEL = HENRYFAUSKE) make sure
the entropy is given in the thermo tables. Otherwise the entropy must be integrated from the enthalpy
and density data in the thermo tables. In some cases, this will slow down the simulation.

Further, it is not allowed to position a valve at the first section boundary in a flowpath next to a closed
node in OLGA 6. OLGA 5 does not have this restriction.

How to use
Position the valve. Valves can be inserted anywhere in the pipeline.

Choose which valve model to use from available information in data sheet etc. If no Cv/Gg is given, use
the choke model. The choke is used when the model option HYDROVALVE (keyword MODEL) is set. A
discharge coefficient, CD and maximum choke diameter must be defined for the choke. If the discharge
coefficient is unavailable, use the default value.

Consider using the CRITFLOWMODEL option HENRYFAUSKE for two/three-phase simulations with
flashing fluids. Otherwise use CRITFLOWMODEL = FROZEN.

If Cv data are available, use the model option HYDROVALVE, and specify the Cv vs. valve opening in a
table. The valve Cv can also be described as a function of valve pressure drop (DELTAP) and valve
opening.

If Cg data are available, use the model option GASSIZING (key MODEL). Specify the Cg vs. valve
opening in a table. It is also possible to use the HYDROVALVE (MODEL key) to simulate a gas valve.

143
Process Equipment OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

To control the valve flow in the choke, or the pressure drop over it, connect a controller to the input
signal terminal INPSIG. When connected, INPSIG will be used as the valve opening. Otherwise, the key
OPENING will set the valve opening. The given OPENING can be constant, or a function of time.

To limit the rate of change in valve position, set the valve stroke time. Set CLOSINGTIME/
OPENINGTIME or STROKETIME. Setting STROKETIME will give CLOSINGTIME = OPENINGTIME =
STROKETIME.

It is possible to tune both the choke and valve model. The input signal CVTUNINGSIG will scale the
choke CD, or the valve Cv/Cg.

144
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Single Component
The single component module allows for tracking of a single component, e.g., H2O or CO2, that crosses
the saturation line in time or space in a pipeline. Standard OLGA cannot deal with single component
systems if the saturation line is crossed due to the explicit coupling between volume balance and
energy balance equations and the lack of a two phase region (two phase envelope) for single
component systems.

In order to circumvent this limitation, time constants, or delays, are introduced in the
evaporation/condensation process. The difference between the saturation temperature and the fluid
temperature serves as a potential for phase mass transfer. Multiplying this temperature difference with a
certain heat or energy transfer coefficient yields an energy transfer rate that can be used to estimate the
mass transfer rate. An asymptotic approach to equilibrium occurs where the speed at which equilibrium
is reached is determined by the size of the energy transfer coefficient.

When to use
The single component module should be used for all single component fluids. Special options exist for
H2O and CO2, for which the fluid property calculations have been hard coded into OLGA. For other
single component fluids, it is necessary to specify input parameters to the fluid property calculations.

The numerics in standard OLGA have been designed for multi component hydrocarbon fluids. A
consequence of the chosen approach is that standard OLGA become unstable when simulating single
component fluids that cross the saturation line in time or space. The same can happen for multi
component fluids with very narrow phase envelopes, for example a fluid composed predominantly of
one component, but with a small amount of impurities. Since the behavior is very case dependent, it is
hard to give general guidelines on the exact amount of impurities required before standard OLGA can
be expected to yield reasonable results. One should, however, be careful when using standard OLGA to
simulate fluids consisting of 90% or more of one component. Besides the numerical issues, it is
important to make sure that the fluid property calculations are accurate for the particular fluid
composition to be simulated.

As implied by the name, the single component module can only be applied to pure single component
fluids. At present, OLGA is thus not able to simulate single component fluids with small amounts of
impurities.

License requirements
The Single Component Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The following assumptions are made in the single component model:
• the gas and liquid phases have the same temperature.
• the pressure of the gas and liquid phases is the same.
• if the fluid temperature is higher than the saturation temperature, flashing or boiling of liquid will
take place.
• if the fluid temperature is lower than the saturation temperature, condensation of vapor takes
place.

The inner pipe wall surface can be superheated or subcooled as compared to the saturation
temperature. Such situations might lead to surface boiling or surface condensation in cases where the
liquid or gas is in direct contact with the pipe wall. The resulting, additional, mass transfer term is not
explicitly included, but it can be accounted for by an enhanced heat transfer due to surface
boiling/condensation.

145
 Single Component OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Generation of gas and liquid properties

The equations used to calculate the H2O properties are taken from /38/. For CO2, the thermodynamic
equations are taken from /41/. The transport properties are calculated through the equations given in
/39/. For other components, the Soave–Redlich–Kwong (SRK) cubic equation of state (end of this
section) is used to calculate the saturation line and the physical properties of the vapor and liquid
phases. Temperature dependent volume translation is applied to improve the accuracy of phase
density. The transport properties are determined by the corresponding state method by Pedersen /39/.

The evaluation of the fluid property equations is time consuming, and, therefore, they are only evaluated
at the start of the simulation. The properties are evaluated at a grid of pressure/temperature values that
is limited by the minimum and maximum values of pressure and temperature given in the input. An
equidistant grid is used with a minimum of 50 and maximum of 100 grid points for both pressure and
temperature. During the simulation, linear interpolation is used to evaluate the properties in between
grid points.

Saturation line for a single component

The saturation line is determined by solving the equal fugacity of gas and liquid from the equation of
state (EOS). Below the critical point, determined by the critical pressure, PC and the critical temperature,
TC, the saturation pressure, Psat(T), and saturation temperature, Tsat(P), at a given grid point (P,T) are
determined from the saturation line. Above the critical point, the saturation line is extrapolated with the
slope of the saturation line at the critical point.

Liquid properties for a single component

For pressures below the critical pressure liquid properties are determined by the EOS in the liquid
region. In the gas region, the liquid properties are extrapolated from the saturation point — the enthalpy
equals the gas enthalpy minus the latent heat at the saturation temperature and the density is integrated
from the vapor saturation pressure to actual pressure using the compressibility at the saturation
temperature. All the other properties are from the saturation temperature.

For pressures above the critical pressure, liquid properties are calculated from the EOS.

Gas properties for a single component

For pressures below the critical pressure, the gas properties in the gas region are acquired from the
EOS.

In the liquid region and a pressure below the critical pressure, the gas properties are extrapolated from
the saturation line — the enthalpy equals the liquid enthalpy plus the latent heat at the saturation
temperature corresponding to the pressure and the density is acquired by linear interpolation between
the value at critical pressure and the saturation pressure. All other properties are taken at the saturation
temperature corresponding to the pressure. For pressures above the critical pressure, gas properties
are calculated based on the EOS. Using this procedure, the gas and liquid properties are continuous
across the fictitious gas-liquid (V–L) division line when the pressure is above the critical one.

At the critical point and its vicinity, the thermal capacity and density derivatives show extreme sensitivity
to temperature and pressure changes, even to the extent where discontinuities occur. Therefore, a
buffer zone is introduced near the critical temperature as shown below. Within this zone, the liquid
density derivative and thermal capacity are given the values calculated at a temperature, Tlow, less than
the saturation point. Similarly, for the vapor phase, the gas density derivative and the thermal capacity
are given the values calculated at a temperature, Thigh, above the saturation point.

146
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The buffer zone is bounded by the coordinates [Tlow, Psat(Tlow)], [Tlow, Pc], [Thigh, Pc], [Thigh, Psat(Thigh)].

Saturation line for H2O

Below the critical point, (PC,TC), the saturation pressure, Psat(T), and saturation temperature, T sat(P), at a
given grid point (P,T), are determined from the saturation line. Above the critical point, P C=221.2 bar and
TC=647.3 K, and up to T=676 K and P=250 bar, a straight line is used to divide the single-phase or
dense-phase region into gas and liquid. Above 676 K and 250 bar, the boundary line between region 2
and region 3 is used as the division between gas and liquid. The definition of the regions is found in
/38/.

Liquid properties for H2O

For pressures below 225 bar in region 1, the water properties equations found in /38/ are used for water
in the water region.

147
 Single Component OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

In the gas region, the properties for water are extrapolated from the saturation point — the enthalpy is
based on thermal capacity at the saturation temperature corresponding to a given pressure. The
density, on the other hand, is calculated using the density derivative w.r.t. pressure at the saturation
pressure corresponding to the given temperature. All the other properties are evaluated at the saturation
temperature.

For pressures above 225 bar, water properties are calculated based on equations for the different
regions specified in /38/.

The thermal capacity and enthalpy for water are singular near the critical point. To avoid numerical
problems in region 3, the water properties from region 1 are used instead of those for region 3 when the
pressure is below 225 bar. The same procedure is used for steam (gas).

Gas properties for H2O

For pressures below 225 bar, steam property equations for region 2 are used for gas in the gas region.

In the water region, the gas properties are extrapolated from the saturation point. Enthalpy is based on
thermal capacity at the saturation temperature corresponding to the given vapor pressure and the
density according to the density derivative w.r.t. pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to
the given temperature. All other properties are evaluated at the saturation temperature corresponding to
the vapor pressure.

For pressures above 225 bar, vapor properties are calculated based on equations for the different
regions.

Using this procedure, the vapor and water properties are continuous across the vapor-liquid (V–L)
division line when the pressure is above 225 bar.

Flashing/Condensation
The driving force for flashing of liquid or condensation of gas is the difference between the saturation
temperatures and the fluid temperature.

The effect of local boiling on a hot wall surface or condensation on a cold one are not explicitly included
in the mass balance of liquid and gas, but can be accounted for through an enhanced heat transfer at
the pipe wall.

The total energy available for generating gas or condensing it to obtain saturated conditions is

, (a)

where
mg = specific mass of gas [kg/m3]
ml = specific mass of liquid [kg/m3]
cpg = specific heat of gas [kJ/kgC]
cpl = specific heat of liquid [kJ/kgC]
h = heat transfer coefficient at inner wall surface [kJ/m2sC]
S = inner surface area per unit volume of pipe [1/m]
V = section volume [m3]
The total mass transfer to obtain saturated conditions is:

148
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

,
, (b)
, ,

where
hsat,g enthalpy of saturated gas [kJ/kg]
=
hsat,l enthalpy of saturated liquid [kJ/kg]
=

In order to reduce numerical problems, it is assumed that this mass transfer occurs over a time Tψ. This
yields the mass transfer rate

,
(c)

The mass transfer per time step must not be larger than the available component mass of the
diminishing phase.

The Soave–Redlich–Kwong (SRK) equation of state:

(d)

where

0.08664

0.42747

1 1

0.480 1.574 0.176

The SRK equation of state can be written on the form:

0 (e)

where

compressibility factor

149
Single Component OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The solution, Z, to the above equation is found by iteration. As initial guess, the pressure is given by the
Antoine equation except for CO2 where the Wagner equation is used. Coefficients for these equations
can be found in /40/.

The solution for Z can be adjusted by a volume tuning factor

(f)

according to

(g)

where XV1 and XV2 are given through the keys VOLX(1) and VOLX(2), respectively, and Pr = P/Pc.

The specific heat, CP, is calculated through the equation

(h)

where the coefficients, CPi, are given through the input by CPIC(i+1).

150
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use
The single component model is activated by setting the key COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE under the
OPTIONS keyword.

The time constants for condensation and boiling are specified by the keys TCONDENSATION and
TBOILING, respectively, under the keyword SINGLEOPTIONS. These keys are available as time series
if desired. Large values of the time constants will slow down the mass transfer leading to a fairly large
non-equilibrium. Small values will speed up the mass transfer and thereby reduce the thermal non-
equilibrium. Too small values might however cause instabilities which in turn can result in nonphysical
results.

The keyword SINGLEOPTIONS specifies options for COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE. COMPONENT can

have the values H2O, CO2, or OTHER. H2O is set by default. N.B., if COMPONENT=OTHER, it is
required to specify additional fluid properties such as
• viscosity tuning factor, VISX
• critical temperature, TC [C]
• critical pressure, PC [bara]
• acentric factor, OMEGA
• molecular weight, MW
• volume tuning factors, VOLX(2)
• coefficients in equation for specific heat, CPIC(5)

Also note that although it is possible to choose water as a component, all possible single components
will be treated similarly and as an "oil phase". This means that although the holdup in a single
component water simulation is 1 in a pipe, the HOLWT and HOLHL output from that pipe is 0 and 1
respectively. Similar behaviour is to be expected from other output-variables which has an option for
water.

For many different components values of these coefficients can be found in /40/.

The keys MINPRESSURE, MAXPRESSURE, MINTEMPERATURE and MAXTEMPERATURE in

SINGLEOPTIONS are used to generate a PVT tables for the single component properties, i.e., no
external PVT file is needed. 51 to 52 pressure and temperature points are used when generating the
tables and the griding is adjusted so that a grid point is close to the critical point. During the simulation,
linear interpolation between the grid points (P,T) is applied.

For boundaries, sources and wells, the gas fraction will be either gas or liquid, all depending on the
specified temperature as compared to the saturation temperature at the specified pressure. For sources
without any given pressure, the pressure of the source receiving position is used.

The output variables TSAT, TSV, PSAT, PVAP (see output variables description) are used to retrieve
the vapor data. TSV equals TM and PVAP equals PT for single component simulations (no partial
pressure since only a single component is considered). Other data can be obtained by specifying
compositional variables.

Under OPTIONS, the key WRITEPVTFILES = [NO]/YES controls whether the program will write the
single component properties that are being used to file or not. For YES, a tab file <inputfile>_pvt.tab
(fixed format) will be generated. Furthermore, the saturation line will be written to a file
<inputile>_pvt.env. Both these files can be visualized in the GUI.

151
 Slug Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Slug Tracking
In the standard OLGA model, physically sharp fronts in liquid hold-up are smeared out by the numerical
scheme, a phenomenon that is more pronounced in horizontal or near horizontal high velocity transient
flow cases. In situations where slug flow is identified by the flow model, hydrodynamic slugs are
accounted for only in an average manner that does not give any information about slugs, their
properties, or how they affect the flow. However, many flow parameters are highly dependent on the
slug pattern, e.g., the pressure drop in a flow-path. Thus, it is necessary to be able to explicitly account
for the occurrence of slugs.

The slug tracking model is designed to initiate, maintain, and track physically sharp fronts such as those
constituted by start-up slugs and hydrodynamic slugs. Among other things, the model gives information
about position, velocity, length, and other characteristic quantities of each individual slug. In turn, this
information is used to give better estimates of the actual properties of the overall flow.

When to use
The slug tracking model has two different options initiating slugs (keyword SLUGTRACKING). These
options are:

1. Level slug initiation, which initiate slugs when changes in liquid hold-up are detected from one
section to another. The change in hold-up might be caused by a start-up situation, liquid
sources, or boundary conditions changing with time just as well as geometry effects. This option
is activated through the LEVEL key and is mainly to be used for well-defined start-up slugs.
2. Hydrodynamic slug initiation, which is the recommended slug initiation method for
hydrodynamic and terrain slugging. Hydrodynamic slugs can be initiated when OLGA predicts
transitions from either stratified or annular flow to slug flow. This option is activated by the key
HYDRODYNAMIC.

In addition to these two options, there is manual hydrodynamic slug initiation. This option is activated
through the HYDRODYNAMIC key and requires that all slugs initiated are given as user input. Thus, in
order to use this option, detailed knowledge about the slugging is required since the user has to specify
the number of slugs to set up, at which positions to set them up, and at which times.

License requirements
Slug tracking is part of the Slugtracking Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

Initiation of level slugs

Startup Slug 2 Startup Slug 3

Startup Slug 1

Figure A Schematic visualization of a pipeline shut-in situation where liquid has been accumulated at
low points. The pipeline consists of a well, a transport line, and a riser.

152
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Level slug initiation may be carried out at any time in the user specified time interval given by
STARTTIME and ENDTIME. The detection of level slugs is based on differences in the gas fraction.
SLUGVOID is used to specify the maximum void allowed in a slug whereas BUBBLEVOID determines
the minimum void in a bubble. When a section is found with void less than SLUGVOID, a level slug
might be initiated, all depending on the void in the neighboring sections. If the void increases and
exceeds BUBBLEVOID within two upstream sections, a tail is initiated. If, on the other hand, the void
increases and exceeds BUBBLEVOID within two downstream sections, a front is initiated.
Initiation of hydrodynamic slugs
J-1 J J+1

ID=3

New Slug

J-1 J J+1

LSDINI

Figure B Schematic visualization of the initiation of a hydrodynamic slug.

If OLGA predicts slug flow (ID=3) at boundary J, a hydrodynamic slug may be initiated in section J, J-1,
or over both sections, see Figure B.
Initiating a new slug implies redistribution of masses which might lead to discontinuities in pressure in
inclined or vertical pipes. To avoid such discontinuities, the new slug is set up with an as short slug
length as possible. These short hydrodynamic slugs will then grow into larger slugs as they propagate
through the pipe if the conditions are favorable.

When OLGA predicts slug flow, two criteria must be met before a hydrodynamic slug is initiated in a
section:
• The distance to the closest slug must exceed a minimum distance.
• The time elapsed since a slug was either generated in or passed through the section must be
larger than a specified minimum time.

The minimum distance between slugs is specified through the INITFREQUENCY key (slug initiation
frequency, Fi). Using the slug initiation frequency, the minimum distance is calculated as UB/Fi, where
UB is the bubble nose velocity of the new slug. Per default, the minimum distance is 10 pipe diameters.

The idle time required before generating a new slug at any section boundary is specified through the
DELAYCONSTANT key. The delay constant,DC, is given as the minimum number of pipe diameters
between the new slug and the slug that last occupied the same section.

The idle time is calculated according to

∆ · (a)

153
 Slug Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where
D = pipe diameter [m]
Ul = average liquid velocity [m/s]

The default value for the delay constant is 150.

Limitations
Model limitations
The model currently used for hydrodynamic slug initiation uses a slug frequency and a delay constant to
determine when to set up new slugs. The slug frequency determines how close to an existing slug a
new slug can be initiated whereas the delay constant determines the shortest time allowed between
setting up two consecutive slugs at the same boundary or setting up a new slug after a slug has passed.

Compatibility limitations
At present, it is not possible to run slug tracking in combination with

• Pig. The combination is not allowed.

• Complex fluid. The simulation will run, but as far as slugging goes, the results will be the same
as if complex fluid had not been used.

How to use
General
1. Add the SLUGTRACKING keyword and choose a slug initiation method.
2. Add trend and profile plot variables to see differences between running the simulation with and
without slug-tracking, e.g.,
PROFILEDATA VARIABLE=(PT, TM, ID, HOL, HOLHL, HOLWT, UL, UG)
TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE5, SECTION=3, VARIABLE=(QLT, QLTHL, QLTWT, ACCLIQ,
ACCOIQ, ACCWAQ)

The accumulated flow rates (ACCLIQ) can be used to estimate slug sizes.

3. Add global trend to get overview of the simulation.

TRENDDATA VARIABLE=(LIQC, OILC, WATC)
TRENDDATA VARIABLE=(RMERR, VOLGBL, HT, NSLUG)

Slug identification number

When initiated, each slug is assigned a unique identification number. The first slug initiated gets
identification number, and then 1 is added for each new slug initiated. This unique number enables the
possibility to follow the development of individual slugs as they move through the pipeline. It is possible
to plot, e.g., slug length, front and tail velocities, etc. Plotting individual slug data is useful mainly when
there are few slugs is the system. When hydrodynamic slugging generates lots of slugs, it is difficult to
identify which slug to consider.

Illegal slug section

An illegal section is a section where no slugs are initialized and through which no slugs are allowed to
pass (keyword SLUGILLEGAL). A slug front may enter into the illegal section, but it will be trapped
inside it until the slug tail reaches the section and the slug is removed. The first section in a flow-path is
by default an illegal section and so is the last one. This implies that slugs cannot propagate through
networks.

154
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

If stability problems are encountered when using in-line process equipment together with slug-tracking,
it is recommended that illegal sections are introduced around the process equipment. Furthermore, if
there are large changes in pipe diameter, e.g., when modeling a separator at the end of a pipeline as a
pipe with big diameter, instabilities can be avoided by setting illegal sections on each side of such
boundaries.

With long pipelines mainly operating in the slug flow regime, the number of slugs can become very large
which in turn results in long simulation times. In such situations, it is recommended to only allow for
slugs close to the pipeline outlet, say the last 5-10 km. Yet again, this can be accomplished by using the
keyword SLUGILLEGAL. In cases where terrain effects are predominant and large slugs develop far
away from the outlet, illegal sections should not be used to prevent such slugs from developing.

Flow regime
When slug tracking is activated, the flow regime indicator (ID) should be used with caution since the flow
regime is forced to bubbly inside liquid slugs whereas it is forced to stratified in slug bubbles. Thus, the
flow regime indicator will never indicate slug flow when slug tracking is activated.

Vertical riser at the end of a pipeline

Problems might be encountered when slug tracking is activated and the pipeline has a vertical riser at
the end. The problems are usually caused by back-flow in the riser. If such problems are encountered,
the following actions might reduce them:
• Set the gas fraction on the outlet node equal to one. Now, if back-flow occurs at the outlet, only
gas will enter the pipeline.
• Unless the flow in the riser is expected to influence slug patterns significantly, set the riser
pipeline sections to illegal (SLUGILLEGAL).
• If possible, add a couple of horizontal sections at the top of the riser.

Startup slugs not detected

If all start-up slugs are not detected, it is possible to specify the void limits used for initializing start-up
slugs. This is done by modifying the void limits given by the keys BUBBLEVOID and SLUGVOID.

Hydrodynamic slug initiation

The slug model might initiate slugs too often or too seldom as compared to the expected slug pattern. In
order to tune the model to mimic the expected pattern, it is recommended that only the
DELAYCONSTANT key is varied first. If it is not possible to achieve the slug pattern sought by varying
DELAYCONSTANT alone, INITFREQUENCY can be modified as well.

Hydrodynamic slug initiation: the delay constant

The delay constant, DC, is the number of pipe diameters a slug must travel before the slug model tries
to initiate a new slug at the same boundary. Thus, the time between two consecutive slug initiations on
any given boundary or the time between a slug passes a boundary and a new slug can be set up is
given by

∆ · (a)

where
D = pipe diameter [m]
Ul = average liquid velocity [m/s]

Using the Shea correlation for the slug frequency

155
 Slug Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

.
. . (b)
∆

where
D = pipe diameter [m]
L = pipeline length [m]
Usl = superficial liquid velocity [m/s]

it is possible to get an estimate of the delay constant. Tuning on the delay constant should be performed
such that the resulting slug frequency is in the same order of magnitude as Fsl. It should be noted that
this correlation is based on experimental data and field data for systems dominated by hydrodynamic
slugging. Thus, if terrain effects are predominant, one should not use the Shea correlation. The default
value of 150 has been found to yield good results for a number of cases.

Profile plots, trend plots, and slug statistics

When specifying, e.g., the hold-up (HOL) in TRENDDATA or PROFILEDATA, it is important to note that
the hold-up plotted is the section average. It is not possible to resolve the hold-up of individual slug and
bubble regions inside sections, but these are used to calculate the section average. In order to visualize
the hold-up of individual slugs/bubbles, specify HOLEXP under TRENDDATA. This will show the
instantaneous hold-up at the boundary specified.

It is possible to plot properties of individual slugs using their identification number. This feature is mainly
of use when there are few slugs in the system and the slugs of interest are easily identified. In cases
with severe slugging, the large number of slugs will make it virtually impossible to single out a particular
slug. However, it might be of interest to look at a statistical sample of slugs in order to get an idea of the
general slug properties. The syntax for addressing individual slugs is
TRENDDATA SLUGID=1, VARIABLE = (LSL, LSB, JSLT, JSLF, USF, UST, ZFSL, ZTSL, PTJF, PTJT)

Slug statistics
The trend plot variables LSLEXP and LSBEXP show the length of a liquid slug or slug bubble currently
residing at a given section boundary.
TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTION=10, VARIABLE=LSLEXP

Using the OLGA GUI, these variables can be used to plot slug statistics. The slug statistics is generated
by post-processing of the .tpl-file and is accessed by selecting the variables LSLEXP_STAT and
LSBEXP_STAT in the trend plot dialog. These two plot variables represent the statistical distribution of
slug and slug bubble lengths at the boundary considered. The properties of these plots can be set
through 'Slug Statistics...' under the Edit menu.

156
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Slug Tuning
The SLUGTUNING keyword makes it possible to tune parameters in the slug model.

When to use
The SLUGTUNING keyword is used for tuning the OLGA slug tracking model to specific sets of
measurement data or sensitivity studies. SLUGTUNING should be applied with great care, as it might
cause the validation and verification of the OLGA model to no longer be valid.
License requirements
Slug tuning is part of the Tuning Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The slug tuning coefficients are multiplied by the related values calculated by OLGA. The exception is
slug length which is interpreted directly as slug length in number of diameters.

The Taylor bubble velocity is calculated as

(a)

where
CUB1 = tuning coefficient 1 given by the key UBCOEFF1
CUB2 = tuning coefficient 2 given by the key UBCOEFF2
C0 = distribution coefficient
Umix = mixture velocity, i.e., sum of the superficial velocities
U0 = drift velocity

The slug front pressure drop is given by

,
∆ (b)
0
where
CDP = tuning coefficient for slug front pressure drop given by key DPFACT
CDP0 = tuning coefficient for onset of slug front pressure drop given by key DPONSET
Lslug = slug length
f(α,ρl) = additional pressure drop
Ucrit = cutoff velocity at which the slug front pressure drop is switched on

Limitations
The slug tuning coefficients are given globally, i.e., it is not possible to specify different sets of tuning
parameters for different flow-paths.

How to use
Specify the desired slug tuning coefficients and where they should be applied. N.B., the slug tuning
coefficients is global.

157
 Source OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Source
A source can be used to model pipeline inflow and outflow of gas and liquid. OLGA use mass flow rate
for internal calculations, but input flow rate may also be given as volumetric flow at standard conditions.

Wells and nearwells are more specialized types of modelling pipeline inflow and outflow.

When to use
The SOURCE key can be used when a flow needs to be inserted into the pipeline.

For more advanced flow simulations the WELL or NEARWELL keys can be used.

Methods and assumptions

Two types of sources can be specified; the mass source and the pressure driven source, which is also
known as a controlled mass source or source controlled by valve (SOVA). Each type of source can be
either positive (flow into the pipeline) or negative (flow out of the pipeline).

The upstream (for positive source) or downstream (for negative source) pressure and temperature can
be specified. When the upstream/downstream pressure is given, the expansion from the given pressure
to the pressure inside the pipe section will be taken into account for the temperature calculations. A
mass source need not specify the upstream/downstream pressure, and this will then be set to the
pressure inside the pipe section where the source is introduced. A SOVA must always specify the
upstream/downstream pressure.

The external pressure and temperature can be constant or given as a time series.

Phase fractions can be specified in the input for a positive source. For a negative source, the phase
fractions in the connected section will be used.

Mass source
The mass source is the simplest model and has a given mass flow rate specified by the user.

Phase fractions for gas and water can be specified, from which the oil phase fraction will be calculated.
The default value for gas is -1, which means it will be read from the PVT file. The default value for water
is 0.

If a controller is used, the actual mass flow rate into the section (positive source) or out of the section
(negative source) is a fraction of the mass flow rate given as input, with the fraction regulated by the
controller.

Note that the mass flow node covers the functionality of a mass source in the first section after a closed
node.

Pressure driven source (SOVA)

The flow for a SOVA will be calculated from a flow equation for mass flow through an orifice, where the
orifice area can be governed by a controller.

The figure below illustrates this.

158
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Figure A. Illustration of a pressure driven source

Controlling the flow

The flow area of the SOVA is governed by the control system, where the valve has finite opening and
closing time (stroke time) specified by the user.

Both sub-critical and critical flow is described. For sub-critical flow the flow rate is governed by the
difference between the internal and external pressures, the upstream conditions and the flow area. For
critical flow the flow rate is governed by the upstream conditions and the flow area only. The pressure
difference determines the direction of flow in or out of the pipe.

The orifice area is calculated from:

π
Asova = ⋅ DSOVA
2
⋅ u s ;0 ≤ u s ≤1 (a)
4
where us = controller signal

Valve functionality
The valve-specific functionality is further described in the Valve section.

Calculating mass flow at standard conditions

The following equations show how the total mass flow is calculated from volumetric flow given at
standard conditions. Symbols used in the equations are given in the list below:

wc Water cut, volume of water divided by volume of liquid at standard condition

GOR Gas oil ratio, volume of gas divided by volume of oil at standard condition
GLR Gas liquid ratio, volume of gas divided by volume of liquid at standard condition
Q Volume flow
m& Mass flow
ρ Density

Indexes:
tot Total
ST At standard condition
g Gas phase
o Oil phase
liq Liquid phase (water + oil)
w Water phase
* Equivalent phase

159
Source OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The density in the equations below is taken from the PVT table. It is necessary that the properties at
standard condition are included in the PVT table.

ST
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of gas at standard condition ( Qg ) are known, use:

PHASE = GAS and STDFLOWRATE = Q gST

1 1 wc
m& tot = Q gST ( ρ gST + ρ oST + ( ) ρ wST ) (b)
GOR GOR 1 − wc
ST
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of liquid at standard condition ( Qg ) are known, use:

PHASE = LIQUID and STDFLOWRATE = QgST

m& tot = Qliq

ST
( wcρ wST + (1 − wc) ρ oST + GOR(1 − wc) ρ gST )
(c)

ST
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of oil at standard condition ( Qo ) are known, use:

PHASE = OIL and STDFLOWRATE = QoST

wc
m& tot = QoST ( ρ oST + GORρ gST + ρ wST )
1 − wc (d)

ST
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of water at standard condition ( Qw ) are known, use:

PHASE = WATER and STDFLOWRATE = QwST

1 − wc ST 1 − wc ST
m& tot = QwST ( ρ wST + ρ o + GOR ( )ρ g )
wc wc (e)

ST
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of gas at standard condition ( Qg ) are known, use:

PHASE = GAS and STDFLOWRATE = QgST

1 − wc ST wc ST
m& tot = Q gST ( ρ gST + ρo + ρw )
GLR GLR (f)

ST
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of liquid at standard condition ( Qliq ) are known, use:
ST
PHASE = LIQUID and STDFLOWRATE = Qliq

m& tot = Qliq

ST
( wcρ wST + (1 − wc) ρ oST + GLRρ gST )
(g)

ST
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of oil at standard condition ( Qo ) are known, use:

PHASE = OIL and STDFLOWRATE = QoST

160
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1 wc
m& tot = QoST ( ρ oST + GLR ( ) ρ gST + ρ wST )
1 − wc 1 − wc (h)

ST
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of water at standard condition ( Qw ) are known, use:

PHASE = WATER and STDFLOWRATE = QwST

1 − wc ST 1
m& tot = Q wST ( ρ wST + ρ o + GLR ( ) ρ gST )
wc wc (i)

Specified GOR or GLR will shift the values of gas mass fraction in the PVT table with use of the
following equation (2 phase)

GGP,T = GGST + (GGST + GHLST )(RS P,T − RS ST ) (j)

where
GG P ,T Gas mass flow at given pressure and temperature
GG ST Gas mass flow at standard condition - calculated from given GOR or GLR
GHL ST Oil mass flow at standard condition - calculated from given GOR or GLR
RS P ,T Gas mass fraction at given pressure and temperature - value from the PVT table
RS ST Gas mass fraction at standard condition - value from the PVT table

GG
RS =
GG + GHL (k)

*ST
If the equivalent gas volumetric flow rate at standard condition ( Qg ) and the mol weight of the total
flow, , are known, use:
PHASE = GAS, STDFLOWRATE = Qg
*ST
and MOLWEIGHT = MW

The density of the equivalent gas at standard conditions will then be calculated from ideal gas law, and
the total mass flow will be given from the following equation on condition that GOR or GLR is greater
then 1010 (infinitely in OLGA)

m& tot = Qg*ST ρ g*ST

(l)

If GOR or GLR is less than 1010 the total mass flow will be calculated from the equations described
earlier for PHASE = GAS with QgST = Qg*ST and ρ gST = ρ g*ST .

Note: There are limitations on how much the value of GOR/GLR can be changed when using a PVT
table. One can check the source input by plotting the volume flow rates through the source at standard
conditions (e.g. QGSTSOUR). E.g. if a source using default GOR/GLR has no gas at the in-situ
conditions, one cannot give a lower GOR/GLR for this source. Removal of gas that is not present is
impossible.

161
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Steady state pre-processor

Both source types can be used with the steady state pre-processor.

However, there are certain limitations:

• With a closed node, the sum of all flows into the adjacent section (including
contributions from all sources, wells, and nearwells) can not be 0

How to use
To define a SOURCE, follow the steps described below.

• Each SOURCE must have a unique LABEL.

• The position along the branch must be given; either by use of the POSITION key,
ABSPOSITION key, or a combination of the PIPE and SECTION keys.
• Phase fractions can be given either directly with the GASFRACTION and
WATERFRACTION/TOTALWATERFRACTION keys or at standard conditions with
the GLR/GOR/WATERCUT keys.
• The upstream/downstream PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE can be specified.
See Capabilities for further description.
• Each source type is also available for use with the compositional models (i.e.
Compositional Tracking, Blackoil, MEG, Wax).
• All input variables can be defined as time series with the TIME key.

See keyword SOURCE for more details.

Mass source
There are several keys available to define the mass source.

When the mass flow rate is to be specified at the source temperature and pressure without
compositional tracking use the key MASSFLOW.

With compositional models the keys FEEDMASSFLOW, FEEDMOLEFLOW or FEEDSTDFLOW may be

used.

When the volumetric flow rate at the standard conditions is given, the key STDFLOWRATE should be
used.

Pressure driven source (SOVA)

The SOVA massflow is defined by the valve specific input data. For further descriptions, see the Valve
section.

162
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Steady State Processor

The steady state pre-processor in OLGA computes a steady state solution for a pipeline or an entire
flow network. Steady state pressures, temperatures, mass flows, liquid hold-ups and flow regimes are
calculated along the pipelines. The steady state pre-processor is primarily intended for generation of
initial values for dynamic computations, but may also be used as a standalone steady state tool.

When to use
The steady state pre-processor may be used in order to
1. eliminate the need for user given initial conditions
2. get a consistent initial state as a basis for dynamic simulations
3. perform screening studies

The steady state pre-processor can be used for flow networks with any combination of boundary
conditions at inlets and outlets. Both merging and diverging networks can be calculated.

Except for displacement pumps and pump battery, the steady state pre-processor incorporates the
effect of process equipment. For PID controllers the bias settings are used as the controller outputs.

Methods and assumptions

The steady state pre-processor finds a consistent solution for flow networks by iteration. Networks
where all inlet flows and outlet pressures are known are solved by the following sequence of
computations:
1. Phase transitions are computed using old values of pressures and temperatures. The
combination of phase transition and inlet flows gives consistent flow rates along all the pipelines
in the entire network.
2. Using the newly computed flows, old temperatures, and the pressure boundary conditions at the
outlet, new pressures are computed along all the pipelines in the network. The point model
OLGAS THREE-PHASE is used in this step.
3. The temperatures along all the network components are computed.

Iteration on the sequence 1) to 3) is performed until the change between two iterates is smaller than a
tolerance. If the inlet flows and/or outlet pressures are not known, an outer iteration is needed in
addition to the one shown above. In this iteration the initial guesses for inlet flows/outlet pressures are
refined until the residuals are smaller than a given tolerance.

Limitations
The solution computed by the steady state pre-processor and the solution obtained when simulation
with the dynamic solver until a steady state is achieved may not be equal. This is mainly due to the two
following reasons:
1. For unstable systems (for instance slugging cases) the steady state pre-processor may find a
solution that differs from the average value in the transient solution as there is no truly steady-
state condition.
2. The steady state pre-processor has some small residual errors that are removed by the
transient simulation. In some sensitive cases this can cause a difference in pressure,
temperature and hold-up profiles.

Therefore, if the slug flow regime is detected in the simulation, it is recommended to perform a dynamic
simulation with the slug tracking model (not available in OLGA 6.1).

The steady state pre-processor is not as robust as the dynamic OLGA. This is particularly the case for
simulations with pressure or well (productivity index) as inlet boundary conditions, or negative sources.
In such cases, if the pre-processor does not converge to a reliable solution, the pre-processor must be
turned OFF (STEADYSTATE=OFF under OPTIONS), and INITIALCONDITIONS must be applied to all
the FLOWPATHS instead.

163
 Steady State Processor OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The steady state pre-processor cannot handle counter-current flow (such as for instance positive gas
flow and negative liquid flow).

The steady state pre-processor cannot handle zero flow in the pipeline, therefore it should not be used
with closed valves in the flow path or with mass sources that sum up to zero flow rate at start time.

For flow networks with one or more separators the steady state pre-processor uses a simplified
approach. The separator is treated as a simple node with mixture properties and the phase flow
fractions of any phase are assumed to be equal for any of the outlets of a separator. This approach may
lead to discontinuities between the steady state and dynamic solution.

The steady state pre-processor may be run with wax deposition or hydrate kinetics activated, but the
pre-processor does not consider the wax phase or hydrate formation.

How to use
To activate the steady state pre-processor from the OLGA GUI do the following:

In the property window for OPTIONS.

• Choose STEADYSTATE=ON to get a full steady state computation including calculations of

temperatures.
• Choose STEADYSTATE=NOTEMP to avoid the temperature calculation. In this case initial
temperature profiles must be given for all the flow components in the network.

The latter option can be useful if the pre-processor has problems finding a solution. This implies that the
simulation must be run dynamically for some time in order to achieve a true thermal steady state
solution.

The steady state pre-processor can sometimes fail to find a solution if flows are negative, i.e. if the flow
goes from the outlet to the inlet of a pipeline. For such pipelines it is therefore recommended to set
INIFLOWDIR=NEGATIVE in the BRANCH input group.

In order to do some fast studies (screening studies), one can use the steady state pre-processor results.
In this case use STEADYSTATE = ON under OPTIONS and STARTTIME equal ENDTIME under
INTEGRATION.

If input parameters (boundary conditions, valve openings, etc.) are given as time series, the steady
state pre-processor uses the values at the start time.

164
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SteamWater-HC
The SteamWater-HC functionality is an improved way of tracking when there is a considerable amount
of H2O in the fluid. There are some basic limitations when not using this module:

The standard table based version of the code assumes that the gas phase is always saturated with
steam (no mass balance for steam). Does not apply when using Inhibitor Tracking and Compositional
Tracking as they have a steam mass balance.

1. There must be a gas phase otherwise water can not be evaporated.

2. OLGA can not deal with a single component system if the saturation line is crossed. This is due to
the explicit coupling of volume balance and energy balance equations and the lack of a two
phase region (two phase envelope) for a single component system.

The second limitation is not a real limitation as there will usually be some HC gas in situations where
water is evaporating. The only situation where this limitation is real is if only water is present in the fluid
and temperature and pressure conditions are such that the saturation line is crossed.

The third limitation is related to the way the conservation equations are solved with an explicit coupling
between volume (pressure) balance and energy (temperature) balance.

This is solved by introducing time constants or delays in the evaporation/condensation process. The
difference between the saturation temperature and the fluid temperature serves as a potential for phase
mass transfer. Multiplying this temperature difference with a certain heat or energy transfer coefficient
gives a certain energy transfer rate that can be used to estimate the mass transfer rate. In that case an
asymptotic approach to equilibrium occurs. How fast this approach is depends on the size of the energy
transfer coefficient.

Also, this module gives more correct water/steam properties around the critical point and also in the
supercritical region.

When to use
The SteamWater–HC functionality should be used when there is a considerable amount of water in the
fluid, or when it is important to limit the rate of boiling/evaporation/condensation, e.g., when simulating
drying of a pipeline with hot gas.

License requirements
SteamWater–HC is part of the Single Component Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The following assumptions are mode in the model:

• Oil, gas, water and vapor (steam) will all have the same temperature, TM.
• The pressure of the water phase will be equal to the total pressure.
• The pressure of vapor will be equal to the partial pressure of vapor in the gas phase and will be
calculated assuming an ideal mix of vapor and hydrocarbon gas.
• Water saturation temperature, TSATW, will be calculated from the total pressure.
• Vapor saturation temperature, TSATV, will be calculated from the partial pressure of vapor.
• If the fluid temperature, TM, is higher than TSATW, flashing or boiling of water will take place.
• If TM is higher than TSATV but lower than TSATW, evaporation of water will take place.
• If TM is lower than TSATV, condensation of vapor will take place. Note that TSATV will always
be less or equal to TSATW.

165
 SteamWater-HC OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The inner pipe wall surface may be superheated or subcooled compared to TSATW or TSATV. Such a
situation may lead to surface boiling or surface condensation in cases where water or vapor is in direct
contact with the pipe wall. This additional mass transfer term will not be directly included but can be
accounted for by an enhanced heat transfer due to surface boiling/condensation.

Generation of steam and water properties.

The equations used to calculate the steam and water properties are taken from /37/.
These equations are time consuming to solve and will therefore be used only at the start of a simulation.
The properties will be calculated at pressure/temperature values corresponding to the
pressure/temperature grid points specified in the PVT table prepared for the simulation.

After the saturation points and the physical properties are calculated for all the P/T grid points that
correspond to the PVT table for the HC mixture, linear interpolation between the grid points is applied
during the simulations. For simulation cases where the pressure may cross the critical pressure, it is
important that the HC PVT table contains a grid point that is close to the critical point in order to obtain
accurate crossing of the saturation line.

For all the cases, a pressure interval less than10 bar and a temperature interval less than 10 K are
recommended in order to maintain acceptable accuracy of the linear interpolation.

Saturation line

Below the critical point, PC and TC, (pressure and temperature), the saturation pressure, Psat (T), and
saturation temperature, Tsat (P), at a given grid point, P,T, is determined from the saturation line.

Above the critical point, PC = 221.2 bar and TC = 647.3 K, and to 676 K and 250 bar, a straight line is
used to divide the single-phase or dense-phase region into vapor and liquid. Above 676 K and 250 bar,
the boundary line between region 2 and region 3 is used as the division between vapor and liquid. The
definition of the regions is described in /37/.

166
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Physical properties.
Water properties:
For pressures below 225 bar, water property equations for region 1 (see /37/) are used for water in the
water region.

In the vapor region, the properties for water are extrapolated from the saturation point: Enthalpy is
based on thermal capacity at saturation temperature corresponding to a given pressure and the density
according to the density derivative to pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to a given
temperature. All the other properties are from the saturation temperature.

For pressures above 225 bar, water properties are calculated based on equations for the different
regions specified in /37/.

Thermal capacity and enthalpy for water is singular near the critical point. To avoid numerical problems
in region 3 the water properties from region 1 instead of those for region 3 when the pressure is below
225 bar (the equations are very similar except when you are closer than <1C and 0.1 bar). The same is
done for steam.

Vapor properties:
For pressures below 225 bar, vapor property equations for region 2 are used for vapor in the vapor
region.

In the water region, the vapor properties are extrapolated from the saturation point. Enthalpy is based
on thermal capacity at saturation temperature corresponding to the given vapor pressure and the
density according to the density derivative to pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to the
given temperature. All the other properties are from the saturation temperature corresponding to the
vapor pressure.

For pressures above 225 bar, vapor properties are calculated based on equations for the different
regions.

With this procedure, the vapor and water properties are continuous across the vapor-liquid (V-L) division
line when pressure is above 225 bar.

Vapor pressure:
PVAP = P*Mvap/(Mvap + Mhc)
where
Mvap = MGVAP/MWH2O, kmoles of vapor/unit volume(m3)
Mhc = MGHC/MWhc, kmoles of HC gas/unit volume(m3)
MGVAP = Mass of vapor/unit volume
MGHC = Mass of HCgas/unit volume
MWH2O = Molweight of vapor = 18 kg/kmol
MWhc = Molweight of HC gas

Flashing/Condensation
The driving force for flashing of water or condensation of vapor will be the difference between the
saturation temperatures and the fluid temperature. The vapor saturation temperature will be directly
related to the partial pressure of vapor assuming an ideal mixing of HC-gas and vapor. With the
presence of HC-gas in the fluid, a gradual transfer of mass of H2O will take place as the partial pressure
of vapor changes. With no HC-gas in the fluid the partial pressure of vapor will be equal to the total
pressure and no bulk mass transfer takes place until either sub-cooled water reaches saturation
temperature or superheated steam cools down below saturation temperature.

167
 SteamWater-HC OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The effect of local boiling on a hot wall surface or condensation on a cold wall surface will not be
included directly in the mass balance of water and vapor but can be accounted for through an enhanced
heat transfer at the pipe wall.

The total energy available for generating vapor or condensing vapor to obtain saturated conditions is
HTOTV.

HTOTV = (mghc*cpgh + mlhc*cplh +mlwt*cpwt + mgv*cpv) *(TM-TSATV)

where
mghc = specific mass of HC-gas (kg/m3)
mlhc = specific mass of HC-liq (kg/m3)
mlwt = specific mass of water (kg/m3)
mgv = specific mass of vapor (kg/m3)
cpgh = specific heat of HC-gas (KJ/kgC)
cplh = specific heat of HC-liq (KJ/kgC)
cpwt = specific heat of water (KJ/kgC)
cpv = specific heat of vapor (KJ/kgC)

The total mass transfer to obtain saturated conditions is:

PSIVTOT = HTOTV / ( HSATV - HSATW )

In order to reduce numerical problems it will be assumed that this mass transfer will take a certain time
TPSI. The mass transfer rate will then be:

PSIV = PSIVTOT / TPSI ( kg/ m3sec )

The mass transfer per time step must not be larger than the available mass of the diminishing phase
component.

How to use
In order to activate the SteamWater-HC model, the input key COMPOSITIONAL under keyword
OPTIONS must be set to STEAMWATER-HC.

TCONDENSATION, TVAPORIZATION and TBOILING in keyword COMPOPTIONS can be used to

specify the time constants for condensation, evaporation and boiling, respectively. They are available as
time series if desired by using the subkey TIME (but not for Compositional Tracking). Large values will
slow down the mass transfer leading to fairly large non-equilibrium. Small values will speed up the mass
transfer thereby reducing the thermal non-equilibrium. Too small values may however cause instabilities
and probably nonphysical results.

For initialconditions, boundaries, sources and wells, the specified water fraction will be either steam or
liquid depending on the specified temperature compared to the water saturation temperature at the
specified pressure when STEAMFRACTION is set to -1 (default). For sources without any pressure
given, the pressure of the source receiving position will be used. STEAMFRACTION can be set
between 0 and 1 to give both water and steam.

New output variables for presenting vapor data have been implemented: TSAT, TSV, PSAT, PVAP (see
output variables description). Other data for vapor can be obtained by specifying compositional
variables.

After the saturation points and the physical properties are calculated for all the P/T grid points that
correspond to the PVT table for the HC mixture, linear interpolation between the grid points is applied
during the simulations. For simulation cases where the pressure may cross the critical pressure, it is

168
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

important that the HC PVT table contains a grid point that is close to the critical point in order to obtain
accurate crossing of the saturation line.

In OPTIONS the subkey WRITEPVTFILES=[NO]/YES controls if the program will write to file the
water/steam properties that are being used. For YES, tab files (fixed format) will be written for each HC
mixture PVT table, using the same P/T grid. The name of the file(s) will be
<inputfile>_pvt_<HCfluidlabel>.tab. Also, the saturation line will be written to a file with the name
<inputile>_pvt.env. Both can be viewed in the GUI.

For all the cases, a pressure interval less than 10 bar and a temperature interval less than 10 K are
recommended in order to maintain acceptable accuracy of the linear interpolation.

169
 Thermal Components OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Thermal Components
The basic functionality in OLGA computes an axial temperature distribution in pipelines taking into
account radial heat transfer through pipe walls.

In addition to this functionality, OLGA has three types of thermal components that also take cross-
sectional heat transfer between different pipelines into account. This is useful for, e.g., pipeline bundles,
buried pipelines and drilling configurations.

The Bundle model should be used for pipeline bundles when the effect of heat transfer between
different pipelines is important.

The Annulus model is similar to the Bundle model, but it is specially designed for well and drilling
configurations.

The FEMTherm model should be used when pipeline configurations are surrounded by a solid medium.
It computes a three-dimensional temperature distribution by combining computation of radial and
angular heat storage and heat transfer in the medium surrounding the pipelines, with the one-
dimensional axial computation for the pipeline fluid.

Annulus
In well- and drilling-configurations such as the one illustrated in Figure 1 below, there will be cross
sectional heat transfer between the different pipelines. If the temperature distribution in one pipeline
changes, it will affect the temperatures in all the other pipelines. The annulus model treat such heat
couplings in a more explicit and dynamic manner than the basic OLGA model.

Figure 1 Example of an annulus configuration.

When to use
The annulus model should be used for pipeline configurations like the one shown in Figure 1 below in
order to account for cross sectional heat transfer between the different pipelines. The annulus model is
very similar to the bundle model, but it is specially designed for well- and drilling-applications. In the
annulus model diameters are allowed to vary in the axial direction.

The annulus model may be used to model gas-lifted wells where gas is injected into the annulus
between the casing and tubing and recovered in the tubing together with the production fluid.

The annulus model has no purpose if all U-values (overall heat transfer coefficients) and temperatures
are known.

170
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

License requirements
Annulus is part of the Wells Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The annulus model computes temperatures in annular pipeline configurations by coupling the basic
temperature computation in the axial direction to a temperature computation in the cross sectional
direction. This is achieved by the following two-step procedure:
1. In each cross section of the annulus, the fluid temperature and wall layer temperatures of all the
enclosed pipelines are solved simultaneously.
2. A regular one-dimensional temperature calculation is performed for each pipeline, in which the
fluid temperatures and wall layer temperatures in the whole pipeline are solved simultaneously.
The combination of 1-dimensional fluid and wall layer temperature calculations in the axial direction and
the 2-dimensional calculation in each bundle cross section results in a 3-dimensional temperature field.

The annulus model is based on the following assumptions:

• The heat transfer from an outer wall surface of one pipeline to the surrounding fluid in a carrier
line is based on free/forced convection unless a user given heat transfer coefficient is given.
• No additional girding is used in the annulus model as compared to solving each pipeline
thermally decoupled from each other.

Limitations
All pipelines that are contained within the same annulus must have the same section lengths and
elevations.

The annulus model requires the WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option to be used.

The annulus must cover entire pipes.

How to use
To use the Annulus model, in the OLGA GUI do the following:

From the Case level, right click and choose:

Add→ThermalComponent→ANNULUS

In the OLGA GUI, an annulus consists of a carrier line enclosing one or several flow-paths. The carrier
line itself is a regular flow-path. To populate the annulus, the following has to be repeated for each
participating component:

From the newly created annulus, right click and choose:

Add→AnnulusComponents→COMPONENT

In the property window for the newly created component, fill out the required fields. In particular, the
FLOWPATH identifier have to be specified. N.B., no flow-path is created by this procedure, and, thus,
the flow-path specified have to either exist beforehand or be added to the case later.

The properties FROM and TO define the part of the flow path that is enclosed in the annulus (axial
direction). They refer to position labels which must be defined under Piping for the FLOWPATH.

The properties XOFFSET and YOFFSET are X- and Y-direction offsets for the FLOWPATH center from
an arbitrary reference point. All flow-paths contained in the same annulus must have the same
reference point.

171
Thermal Components OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The property OUTERHVALUE may be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer wall surface to
the carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection will be applied.

Flow-paths that are contained within the same annulus have to have the same section lengths and
elevations. Pipe diameters may vary in the axial direction.

The WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option must be specified when an annulus is present
in a case.

172
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

FEMTherm
FEMTherm may be used to calculate the thermal performance of the following systems:
• Bundled pipelines
• Buried pipelines
• Complex risers

Figure A A hot water insulated and buried bundle

FEMTherm covers the functionality of the Soil module implemented in earlier versions of OLGA, with
several differences:
• Easier input:
o Discretization: just one value is required (MESHFINENESS)
o Predefined shapes (circle, ellipse, rectangle) in addition to a user-defined polygon
• Better visualization of cross section, grid and results (FEMTherm Viewer)
• More accurate discretization around the circular pipe wall (unstructured triangular mesh)
• Radiation is included

When to use
The FEMTherm model is designed to simulate the thermal interactions between parallel pipelines
enclosed in a solid medium. In situations with buried pipelines, the model is capable of predicting the
transient thermal behavior of the surrounding soil. Therefore, the model is very useful when the
immediate surroundings of a pipe cannot be treated as a constant thermal reservoir. The model is also
very flexible with respect to geometry definitions and is well suited for analyzing complex risers with
temperature variations that are not axi-symmetric. However, the FEMTherm calculations can be time-
consuming, and, thus, this model is not recommended for systems where the ambient heat transfer
boundary conditions can be defined sufficiently well using the concentric wall layer model.

License requirements
The FEMTherm model is part of the FEMTherm Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

FEMTherm consists of a grid generator and a Finite Element Method (FEM) equation solver. The grid
generator makes a 2D finite element mesh in accordance with the Delaunay criterion. The finite element
equation solver determines the transient 2D temperature distribution of any user defined cross section,
which can have several shapes, i.e. CIRCLES, ELLIPSES, RECTANGLES and POLYGONS. Figure A
illustrates the grid system used for solving the 2-dimensional heat transfer equation in a rectangular

173
FEMTherm OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

cross section with two interior pipelines. The simulation model consists of stacks of such cross sections
along the pipeline.

Figure A: Cross section grid

In a FemTherm calculation, OLGA solves the following equations in two steps:

1. Energy equation for the fluid in the pipe and the heat transfer equation for the layers of the pipe
WALL. These equations are solved for each of the pipe sections along the pipelines, giving the
profiles of the fluid temperature along the pipeline and in the pipe WALL.
2. FEMTherm establishes the thermal coupling of the pipelines and solves the 2-dimensional heat
transfer equation in the solid medium surrounding the pipe WALL, giving the temperature
distribution over the cross sections as well as the interaction between fluid temperatures in
embedded pipes.

The combination of 1-dimensional fluid and WALL temperature equations along the pipelines and the 2-
dimensional heat transfer equations for the media in each of the cross sections along the pipeline
results in a 3-dimensional temperature field.

Consider the pipe cross section in Figure B.

Figure B: Cross section grid and concentric pipe with a single wall layer

In the situation of an incompressible fluid in the pipe visualized above, the governing equations for this
system are:
∂T f ∂T f &
ρ f C pf Af = −m& C pf − QWALL (a)
∂t ∂z

174
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

∂T w
ρ w C pw A w = +Q& WALL − Q& FEM (b)
∂t

∂T ∂ ⎛ ∂T ⎞ ∂ ⎛ ∂T ⎞ r r →
ρC p = ⎜λ ⎟ + ⎜⎜ λ ⎟⎟ ∧ q& = J q ⋅ n , J q = −λ∇T (c)
∂t ∂x ⎝ ∂x ⎠ dy ⎝ ∂y ⎠
In the more general case, equations (a) and (b) are solved for each component and for each wall layer.
Equation (a) describes the energy conservation of the fluid, Equation (b) the energy conservation of the
pipe WALL and Equation (c) the energy conservation with heat conduction in the interior of the solid
medium. In addition to these, a set of boundary and initial conditions are required for the calculation.
The temperature, T = T ( x, y, z, t ), is the central variable in FEMTherm and the parameters in the
model are:
Α Area of the pipe cross section

Τf Temperature of the fluid

ρf Density of the fluid

C pf Heat capacity of the fluid

Τw Temperature of the first wall layer

ρw Density of the first wall layer

C pw Heat capacity of the first wall layer

Αw Cross section area of first wall layer

m& Flow rate of fluid

Q& WALL Heat transfer between fluid and first layer

Q& FEM Heat transfer between first layer and FEM domain boundary

q& Heat flux across FEM domain boundary

λ Conductivity of the solid interior of the bundle

ρ Density of the solid interior of the bundle

Cp Heat capacity of bundle

→
Jq Heat flux at the FEM domain boundary
r
n Unit outward normal at the FEM domain boundary

The weak form of Equation (c) according to classical functional analysis is:
∂T r r
∫ ρC pδT
Ω
∂t
dA = ∫ λ∇δT ⋅ ∇TdA − ∫ δTJ q ⋅ n dS
Ω ∂Ω
(d)

175
FEMTherm OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where Ω is the interior of the FEM domain, ∂Ω is the boundary subject to non-essential boundary
conditions and δT is the test function. The last term in this equation is used to impose the boundary
condition for the Newton’s law of cooling of external boundaries:
r r
J q ⋅ n = − h (T − Tamb ) (e)

where the heat transfer coefficient, h , and the ambient temperature, Tamb , are user-defined
constants. The finite element domain is discretized using linear triangular elements, while the evolution
n+1
in time is modeled using a backward Euler scheme. By factoring out the ambient temperature, Tamb ,
and the temperature in the last wall layer, Ti,nN+1 , the following system of discrete equations is obtained.

(K + 1
Δt C)T n +1 = 1
Δt
n +1
CT n + R amb Tamb + ∑ R i Ti ,nN+1 (f)
i

n +1
This can now be used to solve the vector of nodal temperatures, T , as a function of the ambient
temperature, the last wall layer temperatures of each component and the temperature at previous
n
time step, T . The wall layer temperatures are not yet known, and therefore the equation system (f) is
coupled to and solved simultaneously with the equations for the fluid and wall temperatures for all
embedded components. The linearization needed for this coupling is derived in the following manner:
The ”ambient” temperature, Ti,ambient , of the last wall layer of each component is obtained by taking the
average temperature in the FEM domain along the boundary of thei’th component, ∂Ωi . This average
temperature of discrete nodal temperatures is defined by the function

∫T FEM (T)dS
∂Ωi (g)
Ti ,ambient (T) =
∂Ω i

∫
where dS = ∂ Ω i is the length of boundary i and the function TFEM is evaluated element by element
∂Ω i

along the boundary. By the linearity of the solution, using superposition this can be written as:
(
+1
Ti ,nambient n +1
= Ti ,ambient (T n ) + Ti ,ambient (B ambTamb ) + ∑ Ti ,ambient (B j T jn, N+1 )
j
(h)
ambient + a i , 0 Tamb + ∑ a ij T j , N
n +1 n +1
= Ti ,inertial
j

n +1
where B j T j , N = (K + 1 Δt C) −1 R jT jn, N+1 is a vector of nodal temperatures resulting from the boundary
(n
condition at perimeterj, and T = (K + 1Δt C) −1 1Δt CTn is a scaling of the nodal temperatures at timen.
Given that the temperature, TFEM ,within the FEM domain is a linear function of the nodal temperatures,
the constantsaijcan easily be obtained from:

Ti ,ambient (B j T jn, N+1 ) = Ti ,ambient (B j ) ⋅ T jn, N+1 = aij T jn, N+1 ,

176
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

With the exception of the term, Ti ,inertial

ambient , these integrals are evaluated once. This is possible because
FEMTherm operates with a fixed time step, decoupled from the temperature calculations in the pipes.
The inertial term, however, must be evaluated for each section and each FEMTherm time step.

Numerical considerations

In OLGA the fluid temperature varies in the axial (z) direction only. Therefore the heat conduction in the
first WALL layer is always in the radial (r) direction. In the cross section below, two OLGA pipes are
placed within a circular cross section. The temperature of the fluid and the temperature of the pipe
WALL are solved with the OLGA model (finite difference method) on the assumption that radial heat
conduction is predominant. Thus the pipe WALL outer surface (see Figure C) serves as an external
boundary to the finite element equation. The heat conduction in the rest of the cross section is in both
spatial directions (x and y). It is possible to include more than one radial conduction WALL layer in the
model.
inner
surface

outer
surface

Figure C: Two OLGA pipes in a cross section

One needs to determine the number of nodes that is required to obtain a suitable grid and time step in
order to obtain numerical solutions to the heat transfer Equation (c). The FEMTherm model should be
used with optimized spatial and temporal discretizations which gives a step-size independent solution.
In the figure below we see a close-up of the region between the two pipes in Figure C for three
examples of the spatial discretization. The numerical accuracy is strongly dependent on the number of
internal nodes (N) between external boundaries.

a b c

Figure D: Different discretizations for the area between two OLGA pipes

Due to the linear interpolation functions in the finite element calculation, we recommend that N should
be at least 4 to get a good approximation for the temperature field. In (a) N=0, in (b) N=3 and in (c) N=4.
Thus the grid in (c) is the only acceptable grid for high precision calculations. The MESHFINENESS[*]
key in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword sets the spatial resolution of the grid by determining the number of
nodes on the outermost shape. The number N can be checked after the simulation has been performed
by looking at the grid in FEMTherm Viewer, or alternatively using FEMTherm input dialog in GUI.

177
FEMTherm OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Thermal calculations with the finite element method are computationally expensive and are not carried
out for every single time step in OLGA. We recommend that the time step for thermal calculations
The key DELTAT in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword should be below the smallest characteristic time
constant in the system. For complex pipes this constant may be difficult (if not impossible) to calculate,
but a fairly valid approximation is:

1 ρC p 2
τ≈ L (a)
2 λ
where ρ , Cp and λ are the density, specific heat capacity and thermal conductivity of a pipe layer
thickness L . Thus, one should determine this time constant for all the layers in a pipe and use a time
step that is below the smallest of these.

It should be noted that the thermal masses in the solid medium can be very large and it may require
very long simulation times to obtain thermal equilibrium when integrating the energy balance equation.
To account for this, without using the steady state pre-processor, it is possible to switch the
TEMPERATURE option from FASTWALL to WALL between restarts. This is in principle the procedure
used in the steady state pre-processor. The FASTWALL option is equal to setting the heat capacity
parameter to zero and can be used when there are no thermal transients. The increase in computational
speed may be significant when compared to using the WALL option. However, for transient analyses
this option should only be used to initialize the simulations.

The results from an OLGA simulation where the FEMTherm module has been applied can be visualized
using FEMTherm Viewer. Note that the FEMTherm code makes a triangle mesh also for the OLGA
WALLS (radial conduction layers) and the fluid within. This is for the purpose of visualization only. The
temperature is not calculated separately for these dummy nodes (e.g., the nodes in the WALL layers
have the same temperature for a given radius). See Figure E that shows an inner OLGA WALL with two
outer walls defined by SHAPE.

Figure E: Left: Grid visualized in FEMTherm Viewer (the fluid in the middle will also have a mesh).
Right: Grid used in FEMTherm calculation.

The plotting frequency is determined by the key DTPLOT in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword and should be
set judiciously. For very fine discretization and/or long bundle sections, the amount of data may become
exceedingly large for long simulations. By increasing the value of DTPLOT, the amount of data may be
limited.

178
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

[*] MESHFINENESS is the number of nodes, which are evenly distributed on the outer boundary of the
SHAPE with the longest circumference within a SOLID BUNDLE, which is not a POLYGON. The density
of nodes (nodes divided by circumference) on the SHAPE with the longest circumference determines
the number of nodes on all other non-POLYGON SHAPES in order to obtain a mesh with uniform node
spacing.

Limitations
All pipelines that border to a solid shape must have a constant diameter in the axial direction. Thus, if an
annulus borders to a solid shape the diameter of the outermost pipeline of the annulus is not allowed to
vary.

Multiple outer shapes as well as overlapping shapes are allowed. However, shapes inside an outer
shape are not allowed to partially overlap, or to be adjacent as shown in Figure A. Note that the model
is constructed with the use of rectangles and circular pipes only.

Figure A Illustration of allowable FEMTherm/SOLIDBUNDLE configurations in OLGA.

The FEMTherm calculations are based on linear theory which assumes fixed geometry and material
properties. All materials are assumed to be homogeneous and isotropic. The integration in time is
performed using a fixed time step (no time step control) for the temperature distribution in the cross
section.

The model can only handle parallel pipes and pipes of a constant diameter.

How to use
FEMTherm is activated through the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword. To include a SOLIDBUNDLE/FEMTherm
computation in the simulation, the following must be done in the OLGA GUI:

From the Case level, right click and choose:

Add →ThermalComponent → SOLIDBUNDLE.

A SOLIDBUNDLE consists of a collection of SHAPES, FLOWPATHS, LINES and/or FLUIDBUNDLES.

In the following these are referred to as bundle components. For each bundle component do the
following:

From the newly created solid bundle, right click and choose:
Add → BundleComponents → COMPONENT.

In the property window for the newly created bundle component, fill out the required fields. In particular,
a reference to either a FLOWPATH, a LINE a FLUIDBUNDLE or a SHAPE must be specified. Note that
no new component is created by this procedure, and that the specified component must exist
beforehand or be added later.

179
FEMTherm OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The properties FROM and TO define the part of the component that is enclosed in the bundle (axial
direction). They refer to position labels.

The thermal computations are only affected by the relative position of one object to another. To give
better control of the cross section, without having to adjust the pipeline geometry, the coordinate system
of the bundle cross section is decoupled from the rest of the model. All components are by default
placed concentric around the origin and may be independently moved to its correct location with the
keys XOFFSET and YOFFSET. The only exception to this rule is for SHAPES of type RECTANGLE and
POLYGON. In this case, the x and y coordinates of the shape are given explicitly, but XOFFSET and
YOFFSET may still be used for an additional offset.

The property OUTERHVALUE may be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer surface of the
bundle component to the carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection will be applied.

The length and elevation of each section of a pipeline that is contained within a SOLIDBUNDLE must be
maintained.

A SOLIDBUNDLE/FEMTherm simulation requires that the WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation

option is selected

For every SOLIDBUNDLE a finite element triangle mesh is generated. The fineness of the mesh is set
by the MESHFINENESS key. The value of this key denotes the number of nodes on the component
with the largest circumference. The higher the MESHFINENESS, the finer the mesh. However, the grid
is not very sensitive with respect to MESHFINENESS as the value of this parameter is being rounded
off to multiples of 32. The typical values for this key is between 128 and 640. To select this parameter
wisely, it is recommended to read about numerical considerations in Methods and Assumptions.

The ambient conditions for the bundle may vary both in the vertical axis of the cross section and along
the length of the bundle. It is defined through the use of the AMBIENTDATA keyword. If this keyword is
not given, the ambient conditions defined in the HEATTRANSFER keyword in the largest flow
component of the bundle is used.

180
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Bundle
For pipeline configurations like the one shown in Figure 1 below, there will be cross sectional heat
transfer between the different pipelines. If the temperature distribution in one pipeline changes, it will
affect the temperatures in all the other pipelines. The bundle model treat such heat couplings in a more
explicit and dynamic manner than the basic OLGA model.

Hot liquid
Production return

Carrier

Carrier fluid

Insulation

Hot liquid
injection
Figure 1 Example of a fluid bundle configuration.

When to use
The bundle model should be used for pipeline configurations like the one seen in Figure 1 above when
accuracy in temperature is important.

License requirements
Fluid bundle is part of the FEMTherm Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The bundle model computes temperatures in bundled pipelines by coupling the basic temperature
computation in the axial direction to a temperature computation in the cross sectional direction. This is
achieved by the following two-step procedure:
1. In each cross section of the bundle, the fluid temperature and wall layer temperatures of all the
enclosed pipelines are solved simultaneously.
2. The combination of 1-dimensional fluid and wall layer temperature calculations in the axial
direction and the 2-dimensional calculation in each bundle cross section results in a 3-
dimensional temperature field.

The Bundle model is based on the following assumptions:

• The heat transfer from an outer wall surface of one pipeline to the surrounding fluid in a carrier
line is based on free/forced convection unless a user given heat transfer coefficient is given.
• No additional griding is used in the bundle model as compared to solving each pipeline
thermally decoupled from each other.

Limitations
The diameters of the carrier line and all the interior pipelines have to be constant in the axial direction.

181
 Bundle OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

All pipelines that are contained within the same bundle have to have the same section lengths and
elevations.

The bundle model requires the WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option to be used.

The bundle must cover entire pipes

How to use
To use the Bundle model, in the OLGA GUI do the following:

From the Case level, right click and choose:

Add→ThermalComponent→FLUIDBUNDLE

In the OLGA GUI a fluid bundle consists of a carrier line enclosing one or several flow components
(flow-paths, lines, and/or bundles). The carrier line itself is either a regular flow-path or a line. To
populate the fluid bundle, the following has to be repeated for each participating flow component:

From the newly created fluid bundle, right click and choose:
Add→BundleComponents→COMPONENT

In the property window for the newly created bundle component, fill out the required fields. In particular,
a reference to the flow component (FLOWPATH, LINE or FLUIDBUNDLE) has to be specified. N.B., no
new flow component is created by this procedure, and, thus, the component specified has to either exist
beforehand or be added to the case later.

The properties FROM and TO define the part of the flow path that is enclosed in the bundle (axial
direction). They refer to position labels which must be defined under Piping for the FLOWPATH.

The properties XOFFSET and YOFFSET are X- and Y-direction offsets for the component center from
an arbitrary reference point. All components contained in the same fluid bundle must have the same
reference point.

The property OUTERHVALUE may be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer wall surface of
the bundle component to the carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection will be applied.

Flow-paths that are contained within the same bundle have to have the same section lengths and
elevations. Pipe diameters must be constant in the axial direction.

The WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option must be specified when a fluid bundle is used
in a case.

182
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Line
A LINE is a type of FLOWPATH for which simplified one-phase calculations are performed.

In OLGA, a LINE also takes into consideration frictional effects and will give a pressure drop along the
pipeline. Thus, it needs fluid properties as a function of both pressure and temperature. These fluid
properties are given as usual with the PVTFILE and FLUID keys.

Note that this also applies when running component tracking (e.g. CompTrack, Blackoil). Example 1-
phase fluid files are provided with the Sample cases.

When to use
Lines are typically used in bundles, for injection lines and auxiliary lines where the pipeline hydraulics
may be neglected.

Limitations
LINES cannot be connected to multiphase nodes. LINES can form networks but these networks must
be hydrodynamically decoupled from multiphase networks.

How to use
The implementation of a LINE in the OLGA GUI is as follows:

From the Case level right click and choose

Add → FlowComponent → FLOWPATH.

In the property window for the FLOWPATH choose LINE=YES.

Fill in the required fields in the property window. For further instructions on FLOWPATH properties see
the keyword description for FLOWPATH.

LINES must be connected to nodes just as FLOWPATHS do. These nodes must also be defined as
singe-phase by selecting LINE=YES or LINE=CROSSOVER in the property window for the node. A
CROSSOVER node is a node that allows flow recirculation; see the keyword description of NODE for
details.

183
 Thermal Computations OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Thermal Computations
Temperature is an important parameter in flow assurance analyses and is a key prediction in the
analysis of phenomena such as hydrates and wax formation propensities. Thus, temperature can
influence the production capacity of a network and therefore, a reliable prediction of the temperature
profile in a pipeline is important.

In OLGA, a homogeneous temperature is calculated for the fluid which can be multiphase. In addition, it
calculates the heat transfer across the pipe wall by determining the average temperature of each wall
layer. The pipe wall may comprise of multiple layers of materials of different types, which are aligned
concentrically.

Ambient conditions for an area can vary significantly in winter and summer seasons or during a day.
This may cause freezing or melting of the soil surrounding a pipeline. OLGA can simulate phase
changing materials and give detailed modelling of the soil taking the latent heat of fusion and
differences in thermal properties for frozen and unfrozen materials into account.

Methods and assumptions

Thermal calculations for the wall rest on the assumption that radial heat conduction through the
concentric walls is the dominating phenomenon. The heat flux may be calculated in two ways:

• The heat flux through the pipe wall layers is calculated by the code with user-defined thermal
conductivities, specific heat capacities and densities for each wall layer.

• The heat flux is determined by a user-defined overall heat transfer coefficient.

The former is recommended since the heat storage capacity in the wall is often significant. It is preferred
to include a dynamic calculation of the temperatures of individual wall layers in a transient simulation.

The latter option will save some CPU time, but should be used with care and preferably in steady state
situations only.

Figure A: Illustration of a buried pipe

Buried pipelines may be modelled with the soil as the outermost wall layer. The first method of
calculating the heat flux (where heat flux is a function of wall properties) should then always be used
due to the large thermal mass of the soil.

The thickness of the composite soil layer is based on an equivalent heat transfer coefficient for the soil
for a pipeline burial of a particular depth. Theoretically, the equivalent heat transfer coefficient from the
outer surface of a buried pipeline to the top of the soil can be calculated to be:

184
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

λ soil
h soil =
D ⎛ 2H ⎞
cosh -1 ⎜ ⎟
2 ⎝ D⎠
(a)

where:
D = outer diameter of buried pipe
H = distance from centre of pipe to top of soil
λsoil = soil heat conductivity
hsoil = overall heat transfer coefficient for soil

The term cosh-1 (x) can be expressed mathematically as follows:

cosh-1 (x) = ln ( x + ( x2 - 1 ) 0.5 ) for x ≥ 1

The thickness of the composite soil layer can be determined using the expression below for a known
value of the soil thermal conductivity:

Rso
k soil =hsoil ⋅ Rsi ⋅ ln (b)
Rsi

where:
Rsi = inner radius of soil layer (=outer radius of pipe wall)
Rso = outer radius of soil layer
ksoil = input value of soil conductivity

The specific heat capacity of the soil may be adjusted as follows in order to predict the transient heat
transfer accurately:

k soil
C p input = C p soil (c)
λsoil

where:
Cp input = input value of soil thermal capacity
Cp soil = soil thermal capacity

Heat transfer at steady state conditions depends only on the outer soil layer radius Rso and on ksoil.
However, for dynamic situations, a good soil discretization is important in order to obtain a reliable
temperature profile across the wall layer. Alternatively, the Solid Bundle module may be used in such a
situation.

185
 Phase changing materials OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Phase changing materials

The model for simulating phase changing materials accounts for latent heat of fusion and the difference
in thermal properties for unfrozen and frozen materials. Thermal conductivity and heat capacity are
given for three ranges, above the melting point, below the melting point and in the transition zone.

For heat capacity, the value specified in CAPACITY is used for all temperatures above the melting point.
A multiplier (HCAPMULT) is used below the melting point. If the FUISIONMULT key is different from 0,
a step wise function is used for heat capacity having the value equal to FUSIONMULT*CAPACITY in
the phase changing region. If the FUSIONMULT key is 0, linear interpolation is performed between 1
and HCAPMULT. The FUSIONMULT key takes the latent heat of fusion (additional energy added or
withdrawn for a phase change) into consideration.

The exmple below describes how the latent heat of fusion is caluated in a situation with a wet soil
material. In the example, we use a phase changing region from -1 to 0 C. This gives one multiplier
between -1 and 0 C to account for the latent heat of fusion, while another multiplier is used below -1 C
for the frozen soil. The soil is assumed to have a dry density 1900 kg/m3, with 10% water weight/dry soil
weight. The moist unfrozen heat capacity is 1067 J/kgC (0.255 btu/lbF) and the frozen heat capacity is
876 J/kgC (0.209 btu/lbF). The latent heat of fusion is (190 kg/m3*333 kJ/kg)/(2090 kg/m3) = 30.27
kJ/kg. This gives:

HCAPMULT = 876/1067 = 0.82

FUSIONMULT = (30270+1067)/1067 = 29.4

Thermal conductivity given in CONDUCTIVITY is used directly for temperatures above the melting point.
A conductivity multiplier (CONDMULT) is used for temperatures below the melting point. Linear
interpolation is used in between.

Limitations

Wall Layer Thickness

The numerical solution for the temperatures in the wall layer depends on the discretisation of the layer.
It is sufficient to undiscretize the wall layer for steady-state calculations.

A finer discretisation of the wall layers may be necessary for transient calculations, when the heat
storage in the pipe walls can be important (cool down or warm up), A wall layer should, as a rule of
thumb, not be thicker than approximately 30% of the outer radius of the layer. The change in thickness,
δ, between two neighbouring layers should be 0.2 ≤ δ(i)/δ(i-1) ≤ 5 to obtain a good accuracy.

If ELECTRICHEAT is defined in the WALL definition, it is preferable to have at least three layers and
define the electric heating in the middle layer.

Very thin layers, such as paint etc., should be included in a neighbouring layer by adjusting the
thickness and conductivity of that layer. Only the thickness needs to be adjusted if the thermal
conductivity of the thin layer is fairly close to the conductivity of one of it is neighbours.

186
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use
In the OLGA GUI the method for the temperature calculation is set from the OPTIONS card on the Case
level. In the OPTIONS property window the TEMPERATURE can be set either to:

OFF No temperature calculation – initial temperatures must be specified with the

INITIAL keyword statement
ADIABATIC No heat transfer to surroundings
UGIVEN A user-defined overall heat transfer coefficient is used for the entire wall
WALL The heat flux through the pipe wall layers is calculated by the code with
user-defined thermal conductivities, specific heat capacities and densities
for each wall layer
FASTWALL Similar as WALL but heat storage is neglected in the wall

User-defined heat transfer parameters for the chosen temperature option must be given for each
pipeline. In the OLGA GUI under Boundary&InitialConditions for each FLOWPATH , one or several
HEATTRANSFER cards may be added. In the property window for each HEATTRANSFER card, the
required fields must be filled out.

In a temperature calculation the homogeneous temperature profile along the pipeline should be critically
examined. Large discontinuities are often unphysical, although if large pressure differences occur
between two neighbouring sections the Joule-Thompson effect may give a substantial temperature
difference. Furthermore, if there is a great difference in hold-up between two adjacent sections,
temperature differences can be expected depending on the thermal properties of the gas, liquid, and
pipe walls, as well as the surrounding medium.

In order to simulate a phase changing material, TYPE must be set to PCM in MATERIAL keyword. An
upper and lower temperature limit for melting and freezing must be specified, PHCHMAX and
PHCHMIN. Further, the three multipliers for properties below the melting point and in the phase
changing region must be given.

187
 Tracer Tracking OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Tracer Tracking
Tracer tracking simulations together with measurements of tracer output from real fields provide a
means to obtain valuable information about flow conditions in reservoirs, wells and pipelines. The tracer
tracking functionality in OLGA can be used to track tracers which have such a purpose of
investigation/examination, and it can be used to track tracers of inhibitor type (for instance kinetic
hydrate- or corrosion inhibitors).

OLGA predicts the distribution in space and time of mass, age and residence time for tracers being
inserted into wells/pipelines. The results may be used by for instance hydrate kinetics- and corrosion
models to take into account the effect of the inhibitors.

When to use
Tracer tracking should be used when one wants a distribution in space and time of mass, age and
residence time of tracers of such small amounts that their influence on the flow is negligible. Examples
of such tracers are KHI inhibitors, corrosion inhibitors and radioactive tracers.

License requirements
Tracer tracking is part of the Inhibitor Tracking Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and Assumptions

The Tracer Tracking model in OLGA computes a distribution in space and time of tracer mass, residence
time and age (if the key AGING=ON). If aging is on, ages are divided into age groups (defined by the key
AGEBOUNDARIES), and the average age within each group is computed.
The computation of all these variables is based on simple conservation equations, here represented by
the equation for mass:

Here G represents the sum of regular sources as well as the influence of entrainment and deposition of
droplets. The age- and residence time-equation has an additional source term, which, in the case of
aging, takes into account the amount of time the tracer is subject to sub-cooling relative to an equilibrium
temperature (for instance the hydrate formation temperature in case of KHI tracking).
The following assumptions are used:
The presence of tracers is assumed to have no effect on the flow, i.e. tracers usually exist in amounts so
small that the effect on the flow of the production fluids is negligible.
The tracers/inhibitors are assumed to be carried in a carrying phase (condensate, water or gas).
Partitioning of tracers/inhibitors to other phases than the carrying phase is not included in the current
version of the model.

Limitations

• The current corrosion model and hydrate kinetics model in OLGA do not take into account the
inhibition effect of any tracer.
• Partitioning of tracers is not implemented in the current version.

• The distribution of ages (when applicable) is divided into a given number of groups. Each group
has a user given low and high bound of age. All the inhibitors within each group are assumed to
have the same age (average age).

188
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

• It is not possible to specify an initial condition (by the keyword INITIALCONDITIONS) containing
tracers, but the steady state preprocessor will compute an initial steady state tracer distribution.
• It will not be possible to specify the tracer content in negative sources. The amount of tracer
going out will be based on the concentration of the tracer in the section from which the source
originates.
• Production flows from wells will not contain any tracer. The injection flows will be treated in the
same manner as negative sources.
• The tracer does not follow the water vapor phase. Any vaporization/condensation does not affect
the tracer mass, but the concentration changes. If a section is totally emptied of the carrying
phase, e.g. water, by vaporization, the remaining tracer is removed.

Tracer tracking can be combined with all other modules, but some limitations exist:
• Tracer tracking can be combined with slug tracking, but the tracer output variables are average
values for a section.
• Tracer tracking can be combined with pig tracking (which is a special version of slug tracking),
but distribution of tracer on each side of the pig might in some cases be inaccurate.
• Tracer functionality is not implemented in the near well module Rocx.

How to use

The following keywords and keys must be set to use tracer tracking.
In the property window for the keyword OPTIONS choose:
· TRACERTRACKING=ON

Specify one TRACERFEED for each tracer:

· In the OLGA GUI, at the library level right click and choose Add->TRACERFEED.

In the property window for each TRACERFEED set the following keys:
· LABEL choose a label
· AGING must be set to ON to track age distribution of the tracer
· CARRIERPHASE specify the fluid phase on which the tracer is based
· AGEBOUNDARIES may be specified when AGING=ON (numbers separated by comma)
· LOWLOWBOUND age below LOWLOWBOUND is not plotted
· HIGHLOWBOUND age below HIGHLOWBOUND is not plotted
under certain conditions

Tracers may be fed into pipelines either via a SOURCE or via a MASSFLOW node.
In the property window for a SOURCE or a node of type MASSFLOW set the following keys:
· SOURCETYPE select TRACER
· TRACERFEED set the name of the tracer feed in this source/node
· TRACERMASSFLOW specify the tracer mass flow
· TRACERAGE specify the age of the tracer
· TRACERRESIDENCETIME specify the residence time of the tracer

To compute aging of a kinetic hydrate inhibitor, specify the HYDRATECHECK keyword.

Some output variables are available for plotting per tracer feed and per age group.

189
 Transmitter OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Transmitter
Transmitters are used to measure flow path variables and transmit them to controllers etc. through an
output signal terminal.

When to use
The transmitters are used together with the controllers.

Methods and assumptions

The transmitter creates a trend object and update the signal terminal every time step. That implies that
every variable available for trending is available from a transmitter.

The signal is converted to user specified units. If no unit is given, the default unit is used.

One transmitter can measure and transmit an arbitrary number of variables (from a single position).

Transmitter - Limitations
The transmitters can only be connected to the flow path. For process equipment (Valve, Pump etc.)
variables, connected the equipment directly.

How to use
The transmitter is positioned on the flow path, using pipe and section/section boundary or absolute position.
It is possible to use one transmitter to for both PT (volume variable) and UL (boundary variable).

Make the connection between the transmitter, and the receiving signal terminal. Use the Connections view
to set variable name and unit.

After making a connection from the transmitter (ex. OUTSIG_1), a new terminal will be made available (ex.
OUTSIG_2). One transmitter can measure and transmit an arbitrary number of variables (from a single
position).

190
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Tuning
The TUNING keyword makes it possible to tune the fluid properties, friction, phase mass transfer and
entrainment of liquid droplets into the gas phase.

When to use
The TUNING keyword can be used for adjusting the OLGA model to specific sets of measured data or
for sensitivity studies. TUNING should be applied with great care, as it might cause the validation and
verification of the OLGA model to no longer be valid.

License requirements
The Tuning Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The tuning coefficients are multiplied by the related values which are either calculated by OLGA or set
in the input file depending on whether the tuned parameter is dynamically calculated by OLGA or case
invariant, e.g., geometry information.

How to use
Specify the desired tuning coefficients and where they apply.

The tuning coefficients AREA, DIAMETER and ROUGHNESS can only be specified for an entire pipe or
an entire branch. It is not possible to specify these coefficients using the section key.

The keys POSITION, PIPE and SECTION will be processed in a nested manner. The number of entries
must either be one or a multiple of the listed number of combinations of pipes, sections or positions.

191
 Water OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Water
The purpose of the Water model is to let the user specify the parameters and model used for oil/water
dispersion viscosities and to specify the approach used to determine the water distribution between
liquid and gas phases.

When to use
Changes to the dispersion model are recommended when experimental data shows that the default
options do not give a good description of the fluid. The module may also be used for sensitivity analysis
with respect to dispersion e.g. the water volume fraction at inversion point.

Methods and assumptions

Calculation of velocity difference between water and liquid hydrocarbon ("slip velocity")
Two different options can normally be used for calculating the velocity difference between liquid water
and hydrocarbon liquid (we term the latter "oil" for simplicity). This velocity difference is termed the "slip
velocity" or just "slip". The liquid droplets flowing in the gas phase are not included in this context.

By turning the water slip option off (WATERSLIP = OFF), the user assumes that there is no velocity
difference between the oil and water flow fields. In this case oil and water are always assumed to flow
as a homogeneous mixture with average properties. The fluid mechanical model reduces to a two-
phase gas-liquid model. However, water enthalpies are accounted for in the temperature calculations.

Water droplets are entrained in the oil if the water cut in the liquid film is less than the phase inversion
point, and vice versa. Phase inversion is assumed to occur at a water cut given by the user through the
key INVERSIONWATERFRAC (default value of 0.5). The degree of mixing of oil and water can vary
from fully separated to fully dispersed, depending on the phase velocities and the material properties.
This applies to all gas/liquid flow regimes.

It is also possible to specify an intermediate dispersion range. Between a lower critical water cut (given
by FWLOW) and the inversion point (given by INVERSIONWATERFRAC), the flow is assumed to be a
water-in-oil dispersion flowing above a free water layer. The degree of mixing of water into oil is
predicted by the standard OLGA model, but the maximum fraction of the total water stream that can be
mixed into the oil is given by EMAX:

(Volume flow of water in oil)/(Total volume flow of water) ≤ EMAX.

With the default values of FWLOW and EMAX, 0.0 and 1.0 respectively, no such intermediate range is
defined.

A third option is also available: The user may specify a constant velocity difference between oil and
water. This is a special option that should only be used with great care in special cases for tuning
purposes.

Dispersion viscosities
With the dispersion viscosity option turned on (DISPERSIONVISC= ON), six different viscosity models
can be chosen: Pal & Rhodes, Rønningsen, Pal & Rhodes correlated with experimental data, Woelflin,
Barnea & Mizrahi or table based model.

The mixture viscosity for oil continuous dispersions (μhw) and water continuous dispersions (μwh) are
expressed as:
μ hw = μ h ⋅ μ rel,h (a)

μ wh = μ w ⋅ μ rel,w (b)

192
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where μh [cP] is oil viscosity, μw [cP] is water viscosity and μrel [-] is relative viscosity (dispersion viscosity
/ viscosity of continuous phase).

Pal & Rhodes and Pal & Rhodes correlated with experimental data:
One correlation for relative viscosities of liquid/liquid dispersions was developed based on a
generalization of Einstein’s equation to also be valid for high concentrated dispersions. The correlation
was published by Pal and Rhodes (1989) /15/ and is primarily developed for dispersions where
coalescence and deposition has negligible influence on the pressure drop (and the apparent viscosity).

The equations below show the Pal & Rhodes correlations for relative viscosity of an oil continuous
dispersion (μrel,h) and a water continuous dispersion (μrel,w):
2.5
⎡ Φ w / Φ μ rel =100 ⎤
μ rel , h = ⎢1.0 + ⎥ (c)
⎢⎣ 1.19 − Φ w / Φ μ rel =100 ⎥⎦

2.5
⎡ Φ h / Φ μ rel =100 ⎤
μ rel , w = ⎢1.0 + ⎥ (d)
⎢⎣ 1.19 − Φ h / Φ μ rel =100 ⎥⎦

where Φ w = β wd /(β hc + β wd ) is the concentration of water droplets in the oil continuous dispersion,
and Φh = β hd /(β wc + β hd ) is the concentration of oil droplets in the water continuous dispersion. μrel is
limited upwards to 10000.

The parameter Φ μ rel =100 is the dispersed phase volume fraction for which the relative viscosity μrel equals
100. Based on pipe flow experiments on stable oil continuous emulsions for different crude oils and
formation waters, the parameter Φ μrel =100 is set equal to 0.765 (Søntvedt et al., 1994). In the present
version of the model, this correlation and the correlation parameters are also applied for water
continuous dispersions using the analogous quantities. It is still left to investigate how to discriminate
between oil and water continuous dispersions.

With an experimental point, Φrel (Φh or Φw depending on the inversion point) and μrel (μrel,w or μrel,h)
specified, the Pal & Rhodes method in Equations (c) and Equation (d) is rearranged to calculate the
Φ μ rel =100 value:

Φ rel
Φ =
μ rel = 100
(
1 . 19 1 − μ − 0 .4
rel ) (e)

Equation (c) will then be used to calculate the water in oil dispersion viscosity. For oil in water
dispersion, Equation (d) is used. Φrel is defined with the key PHIREL, μrel with the key VISCREL, and the
inversion point with the key INVERSIONWATERFRAC.

Rønningsen:
Another correlation for relative viscosities of an oil continuous dispersion is the correlation by
Rønningsen recommended for a shear rate of 500 1/s (2003) /17/:

193
Water OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ln μ rel,h = −0.06671− 0.000775T + 0.03484Φ w + 0.0000500TΦ w (f)

where
μrel,h = Relative viscosity (dispersion/oil)
T = Temperature (deg C)
Φw = Volume % of water dispersed in oil

Above the inversion point, the viscosity of the oil in water dispersion is assumed equal to the pure water
viscosity, when the Rønningsen method is applied.

The possibility to use a simple volume weighting with a tuning factor is also available.

μmix = (μoil*(1-WATERCUT) + μwater* WATERCUT)*VISCMOD (g)

where the tuning factor VISCMOD can be specified through input as a tabulated function of
WATERCUT.

Woelflin:
A third option for the relative viscosity is given by

exp
Defined by WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = WOELFLIN. Two parameters can be set with this model:
AWOELFLIN (default value 4.2) and BWOELFLIN (default value 2.5).

Barnea & Mizrahi:

For the Barnea & Mizrahi correlation, the relative viscosity is given by

exp 1
where

Here µc and µd are the viscosities for the continuous and dispersed phases, respectively. The model is
activated with WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = BARNEA.

Table based model:

The final way of giving a dispersion viscosity correlation is to use the bable based model. This can be
defined by WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = INPUTVISC. The input is used as in this example:

WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL=INPUTVISC, \
VISCMOD=(1,1.05,1.2,1.4,1.9,2.8,2.7,1.3,1.15,1.05,1)\,
WATERCUT=( 0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1),\,
WATERFLASH=ON, WATERSLIP=ON

Note that the "Table base model" should use WATERFLASH=ON and WATERSLIP=ON.

194
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Flashing/condensation of water
With the water flash option turned on for standard simulations with PVT tables (FLASHMODEL =
WATER in the OPTIONS keyword) the amount of water that evaporate or condense is calculated by
OLGA under the assumption that the gas phase is always saturated with water vapour. The pressure
and temperature dependent mass fraction of water vapour in the gas phase at water saturation is
determined from the fluid properties table. If water properties are calculated by OLGA itself, water
vapour in the gas phase is assumed to be zero and FLASHMODEL = WATER is disregarded.

If the inhibitor tracking module is used (which uses PVT tables), it is not assumed that the gas phase is
saturated with water vapor, that is, the gas might be dry if there is no available water. In some
instances, therefore, inclusion of the inhibitor tracking option may provide more accurate calculation of
the distribution of water between phases.

WATERFLASH has no effect on Compositional Tracking simulations, in which case flashing of water is
decided by FLASHTYPE in COMPOPTIONS.

Limitations
The three phase flash option is only valid when a three phase fluid property file is used.

How to use
The following sections describe how to use the keys in the WATEROPTIONS keyword.

Calculation of velocity difference between water and liquid hydrocarbon

By default OLGA calculates the velocities of the oil and water fields separately (WATERSLIP = ON). If
WATERSLIP = OFF, oil and water are always assumed to flow as a homogeneous mixture with average
properties. Finally, the user may specify a constant velocity difference between oil and water with
WATERSLIP = CONSTANT. The velocity difference is the specified by the key
VELOCITYDIFFERENCE. This is a special option that should only be used with great care in special
cases for tuning purposes.

Dispersion viscosities
The water volume fraction at inversion point is determined by the key INVERSIONWATERFRAC
(default: INVERSIONWATERFRAC = 0.5).

If DISPERSIONVISC = ON, the dispersion viscosities are calculated according to the model specified in
the DISPMODEL key. If DISPERSIONVISC = OFF, the viscosities are read from the fluid property file
directly if WATERSLIP = ON. When WATERSLIP = OFF | CONSTANT, viscosities of liquids are
weighted according to volume fraction.

If DISPMODEL = PALRHODES, PHI100 must be given (default: PHI100 = 0.765). PHIREL and
VISCREL are required for the EXPERIMENT option (default: PHIREL = 0.765 and VISCREL = 100).
The default values for the EXPERIMENT option correspond to the standard PALRHODES model.

If DISPERSIONVISC = OFF and WATERSLIP = OFF, the volume weighting calculation of viscosities
can be tuned using the keys VISCMOD and WATERCUT. WATERCUT must be given as a list
ascending values for the water cut. For each value in WATERCUT a corresponding value for the
viscosity tuning factor must exist in the VISCMOD key.

Hints and tips

Water fractions in sources, wells and at boundaries (when using PVT tables) are specified either as the
mass fraction of liquid water relative to the total mass (flow) with the keyword WATERFRACTION or as
mass fraction of total water (liquid water plus the water vapour in the gas phase) with the keyword

195
Water OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TOTALWATERFRACTION. The water vapour fraction of the gas phase is taken from the fluid properties
table.

If TOTALWATERFRACTION is set to -1, its actual value is taken from the fluid properties table. With
FLASHMODEL = WATER this value is split into free water and water in gas according to the water
mass fraction in gas values from the fluid table, while with FLASHMODEL = HYDROCARBON the value
is interpreted as only free water (resulting in more free water than with FLASHMODEL = WATER).

The relations between the various mass fractions and mass flow for e.g. a mass source at a specific
temperature and pressure are then by definition:

Rs = Ggas/Ghc
Rswt = Gw/Gtot
Rswv = Gwv/Ggas
Rsw = GwL/Gtot
Where

Rs - gas mass fraction

Rswt - total water mass fraction (TOTALWATERFRACTION)
Rswv - water vapor mass fraction (always from fluid table)
Rsw - liquid water mass fraction (WATERFRACTION)
Gtot - source total mass flow rate
Ghc - source total mass flow rate exclusive of liquid water
Gw - mass flow rate of total water (vapor + liquid)
GwL - mass flow rate of liquid water
Ggas - mass flow rate of total gas (including any water vapor)
Gwv - mass flow rate of water vapor in the gas phase

Example: Assume a flowing mixture consisting of 50 kg/s gas (saturated with water), 30 kg/s of oil and
20 kg/s of aqueous phase. Furthermore, let the saturated gas flow include 1 kg/s of water. The various
mass fractions then become:

Rs = 50/(50+30) = 0.625
Rswt = (20+1)/(50+30+20) = 0.21
Rswv = 1/50 = 0.02
Rsw = 20/(50+30+20) = 0.20

Please observe that either TOTALWATERFRACTION (Rswt) or WATERFRACTION (Rsw) can be

specified for the same e.g. source. If WATERFRACTION is specified all the water in the e.g. source is
considered to be liquid water.

When modeling a three-phase mixture using PVT tables where you want to include the mass transfer
between the free water and the gas phase, the water option in OLGA must be used with FLASHMODEL
= WATER. This option is more important for gas production systems than for "normal" oil production
systems.

When using two-phase PVT tables in OLGA simulations, internal routines are used for the calculation of
water properties. The water vapour mass fraction, however, will be set to zero; all water in the
calculations will be free water. If the fluid temperature becomes sub-zero, the enthalpy and entropy are
extrapolated, meaning that the fluid is in thermal but not in chemical equilibrium (sub-cooled water, not
ice). This is consistent with the 3-phase PVT tables created by PVTsim.

The user should be aware that when performing standard simulations with PVT tables there is no
separate water vapour mass balance equation. For three phase simulations, the gas phase is assumed
to be saturated with water. The amount of water vapour is determined by the water vapour mass fraction
from the PVT table. Therefore, the total water mass could be in error for cases where e.g. the inlet total

196
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

water mass flow rate is not sufficient to saturate the gas at the water vapour mass fraction from the PVT
table. However, MEG tracking has a water vapour mass balance equation that makes it suitable for
simulating three phase systems where a detailed analysis of the water distribution is necessary (can be
used with no MEG).

When using compositional tracking, the water vapour will be taken into account depending on
FLASHTYPE in COMPOPTIONS.

For multiphase transport systems where liquid accumulation could represent a problem, it is
recommended to perform three phase flow computations with the water slip switched on.

197
 Wax OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Wax
The wax deposition module allows for modeling of wax precipitation and deposition of wax on the wall.
Wax precipitation is calculated based on a pre-calculated wax table containing data on each of the wax
forming components. The format of this file is described in Wax table file. The wax file can be generated
in PVTSim. Wax deposition will be calculated for all flow paths, but different wax data can be given for
each flow path.

When to use

• When case laboratory experiments indicates the presence of wax, and the wax appearance
temperature is within the temperature envelope encountered during pipeline operation.
• Example cases:

a. During a system shut-in, when the temperature may fall under the wax appearance
temperature and wax solids starts to precipitate. This may cause both a reduction in
effective pipe diameter and a severe increase in oil viscosity. Gelling of the oil may occur
at zero fluid velocity and sufficiently low temperatures, making it difficult to restart the
pipeline.
b. Production cases where low fluid temperatures occurs in the pipeline, where wax both
deposits at the wall and precipitates as particles suspended in the oil. Both diameter
reduction due to the wax layer at the wall and the effect of suspended wax particles on oil
viscosity may significantly increase pipeline pressure drop and thereby reduce the
production capacity of a pipeline.
License requirements
The Wax Deposition Module requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

The model takes into account the thermal-hydraulic effects of the wax in the following way:

1. Mass conservation equations are solved for

a. Wax dissolved in oil
b. Wax precipitated and dispersed in oil
c. Wax deposited at wall
2. Pipe diameter and roughness for each section is adjusted depending on the thickness of wax
deposited on the wall.
3. Heat balance for precipitation, deposition and melting of wax.
4. Volume change due to precipitation, deposition and melting of wax.
5. Wall heat transfer is adjusted to take the wax layer into account
6. Oil viscosity is adjusted to take into account any suspended (dispersed) wax

Wax precipitation and dissolution in bulk

Precipitation and dissolution/melting of dispersed wax are calculated from variations of the wax
component solubility with pressure and temperature. The solubility variations are taken from the wax
property tables.

Transport mechanisms from bulk to wall

Wax deposition can occur in two ways, either by diffusion of dissolved wax due to a temperature
difference between fluid and wall, or by transfer of precipitated wax due to shear.

The wax deposition rate due to molecular diffusion may be described by:

, ,
(a)

198
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Where G [kg/(cm2s)] is the mass transfer rate of wax deposited and D [cm2/s] is the molecular diffusion
coefficient. The RRR and HEATANALOGY models are using the Hayduk & Minhas correlation. The
MATZAIN model is using the Wilke & Chang correlation. mfr [-] is the mass fraction of wax components,
ρoil [kg/cm3] is the oil density, and L [cm] is the thickness of the boundary flow layer. The boundary layer
is calculated differently for the different models activated through the key MODEL. In the RRR model,
the laminar velocity boundary layer is used. The HEATANALOGY model uses a laminar concentration
boundary layer based on the laminar thermal layer and the ratio of thermal vs. mass diffusivity (Lewis
number). The MATZAIN model uses the laminar thermal boundary layer and an adjustment constant to
enhance diffusion.

It is assumed that the precipitation rate at the wall is much quicker than the rate of wax transported to
the wall, so that all wax transported from bulk to wall immediately precipitates.

It is possible to adjust the diffusion coefficient for the wax components by using the key
DIFFCOEFFMULT. The value is directly multiplied with the diffusion coefficients calculated by the code.
The key may be applied for all deposition models.

Wax layer porosity (volume fraction of trapped oil in wax layer), φ [-], is taken into account when
calculating the wax layer thickness.

A model for shear stripping of wax is used as a wax deposition limiting effect in the MATZAIN and
HEATANALOGY models. The shear stripping terms are taken from the Matzain model /12/. The
equation for the rate of change in wax layer thickness is as follows:

(b)

⎛ dδ ⎞
where C2 and C3 are the constants given in /12/. Values: C2 = 0.055 and C3 = 1.4. ⎜ ⎟ is the
⎝ dt ⎠ diff
change rate due to diffusion, and porosity effects. The constant C1 = 15.0 from /12/ is included in
⎛ dδ ⎞
⎜ ⎟ for the MATZAIN model only. NSR is a flow regime dependent Reynolds number /12/:
⎝ dt ⎠ diff

ρ o voδ
N SR = , ( Single − phase, Stratified )
μ o, f
ρ m vl δ
N SR = , ( Bubble, Slug )
μ o, f
ρ m ρ o vl δ
N SR = , ( Annular )
μ o, f
Where ρo is the oil density [kg/m3], vo is the oil velocity [m/s], δ is the wax layer thickness [m], μ o, f
is the oil viscosity kg/(m s), ρm is the average density of the gas-oil mixture and vl is the liquid velocity.

It is possible to adjust the constants related to the shear stripping model by using the keys
SHEARMULTC2 and SHEARMULTC3. These are tuning parameters multiplied directly with C2 and C3 ,
respectively.

199
 Wax OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Shear deposition effects may be included by applying the key COEFSHEAR when using the RRR or
HEATANALOGY models. The deposition rate constant K* (=COEFSHEAR) determines the volume rate
of precipitated wax deposited due to shear by the following formula:

K * C wall γA ⎡ m 3 ⎤
Volshear
wax = ⎢ ⎥ (c)
ρ wax ⎣ s ⎦

Where Cwall is the volume fraction of precipitated wax in the oil at the inner wall temperature, is the
2
shear rate at the wall [1/s], A is the surface area available for deposition [m ] and is the average
density of the wax [kg/m3].

Transport mechanisms from wall to bulk (dissolution of wax layer)

Dissolution/melting of wax deposited on the wall may be activated separately through the keys
DISSOLUTION, DISSOLPRESS, DISSOLTDIFF and DISSOLRATE for the RRR model. The melting
process is calculated by the following method:

1. The dissolved wax concentration derivative with respect to temperature is found at the cloud
point for the pressure in the section.

2. The dissolved wax concentration at the wall is adjusted when the wall surface temperature is
above the dissolution temperature (found by applying DISSOLTDIFF). The adjustment is as
follows:
dC wax
C wax, wall = C wax,TWS + ⋅ (TWS − WDT )
dT WAP

dC wax
where Cwax is the concentration of wax, TWS is wall surface temperature, is the
dT WAP
concentration derivative with respect to temperature at the cloud point (see point 1), WDT is the
dissolution temperature:
WDT = WAP + DISSOLTDIFF
WAP is from the wax tables, while DISSOLTDIFF may be a constant or a function of the section
pressure (through the given DISSOLPRESS).

3. The adjusted Cwax,wall is used in the normal diffusion equations where

Cwax,bulk- Cwax,wall is the driving potential of the diffusion process. When
Cwax,wall > Cwax,bulk , melting will occur.

4. The total dissolution and diffusion rate of wax from wall to bulk, , is limited upwards by
DISSOLRATE (kg/(m2s )):
(
m& = min m& * , DISSOLRATE )
*
where m & is the mass diffusion rate based solely on the wax concentration differences between
wall and bulk (see point 3). The default value of DISSOLRATE is 1.0e+12, which means that
there is no limitation of the dissolution and molar diffusion rate. The reduction to DISSOLRATE
is done so that the mass fraction of the wax components transported by diffusion is kept
constant.

Viscosity of wax/oil dispersions:

Calculation of the viscosity of the wax/oil dispersion is done by using a model supplied by Calsep A/S,
when using the key VISCOPTION = CALSEP. The current model is the same as used in PVTSIM 16.
The apparent viscosity of oil with suspended wax particles is calculated as follows:

200
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

⎡ ⎤
⎢ 4 ⎥
E ⋅ Φ wax F ⋅ Φ wax ⎥
η = ηliq ⋅ ⎢exp( D ⋅ Φ wax ) + + (d)
⎢ dvx dvx ⎥
⎢ dy ⎥
⎣ dy ⎦

where η liq is the viscosity of the oil not considering solid wax and Φ wax the volume fraction of
dv x
precipitated wax in the oil-wax suspension. is the shear rate. The parameters D, E and F have the
dy
following values (viscosities in Pa s and shear rates in s-1)

D= 18.12
E= 405.1
F= 7.876*106

In the PVTsim program from Calsep, it is possible to tune the wax-oil dispersion viscosity model to
measurements. The resulting tuning parameters may be given directly as input to OLGA when using the
Calsep viscosity model. Keys: VISCMULTD, VISCMULTE, VISCMULTF. These are multiplied with the
D, E and F parameters, respectively.

The shear rate used in the equation is limited to be 10 s-1 or larger to avoid division by zero. The
resulting viscosity, , is limited to be or larger.

Wax layer properties:

One may also give information about the porosity (oil volume fraction) of the wax layer, the roughness
due to deposited wax (keys: WAXROUGHNESS and MAXROUGHNESS) and the thermal conductivity
of pure wax. The conductivity may be set manually in the input file by using CONDUCTOPT = MANUAL
and set CONDUCTIVITY, or it may be taken from the wax tables (CONDUCTOPT = TABLE).

The instantaneous porosity of wax added to the wax layer may be set as a constant
(INSTPOROSITYOPT = MANUAL, WAXPOROSITY between 0.0 and 1.0), or be calculated by the code
(INSTPOROSITYOPT = AUTOMATIC, minimum and maximum limit given by MINPOROSITY and
MAXPOROSITY). The instantaneous porosity equation used by the code is as follows /12/:

⎡ N RE0.15
,f
⎤
C oil = ⎢1 − ⎥
⎢⎣ 8 ⎥⎦
(e)
ρ vd
N RE , f = o l w
μ o, f
where Coil is the porosity (volume fraction of oil in the wax film), ρo is the oil density [kg/m3], vl is the
liquid velocity [m/s], dw is the inner pipe diameter including the wax layer [m] and μ o, f is the oil
viscosity kg/(m s).

The effect of ageing may also be included by using the keys AGEINGOPT=AGEING, AGEINGTIME,
INITPOROSITY and HARDPOROSITY. This activates a linear ageing model where the entries for
AGEINGTIME, INITPOROSITY and HARDPOROSITY are used to determine the derivative of porosity
with time. The porosity is averaged over the new layer and the old, aged layer at each time step.

201
 Wax OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The porosity of the wax layer is taken into account when calculating the thermal conductivity of the wax
layer. The conductivity is found by using the following equation [ref.13]

k dep =
[2k wax + k oil + (k wax − k oil ) Fw ]
k oil
[2kwax + k oil − 2(k wax − k oil ) Fw ]
(f)

Where kdep is the overall thermal conductivity of the wax film, kwax is the conductivity of pure wax
(=CONDUCTIVITY in input), koil is the conductivity of oil and Fw is the weight fraction of solid wax in
the wax film.

Limitations
Note: The wax deposition model cannot be used together with the slug tracking, compositional tracking
or the inhibitor tracking models. The steady state pre-processor will not consider the wax phase.

How to use
Input
To use the wax deposition module, follow the steps below;

Step 1:

Generate a wax file and an OLGA PVT table in PVTsim.

When generating the OLGA PVT table, multiphase flashing (gas, oil, wax) should be used. The wax
phase will, however, normally not have a significant effect on the properties of the oil phase, apart from
the viscosity of the oil/wax dispersion, which is taken into account in the model.

Step 2:

Prepare the OLGA input using the following keywords;

• OPTIONS to set WAXDEPOSITION = ON

• OPTIONS TEMPERATURE = WALL
• FILES WAXFILE to specify the file containing the wax data

WAXDEPOSITION to specify wax specific data for each flow path. Wax deposition may be calculated by
using one of the three following models:

• RRR model /6/

• HEATANALOGY model /14/
• MATZAIN model, as described by Matzain et. Al, /12/

The required model is chosen by using the key MODEL in keyword WAXDEPOSITION.
• BOUNDARY, WELL and/or SOURCE to specify WAXFRACTION. A scaling factor for
determining the amount of wax forming components relative to a HC mixture. The value must
be in the range [0,1]. If all inflow boundaries have WAXFRACTION = 1 (default value), the
amount of wax in the inflow will be according to equilibrium (specified in the wax data file).
• TREND to print wax variables for given positions to a trend plot file
• OUTPUT to print wax variables for a branch at given times to an output file
• PROFILE to print wax variables for a branch at given times to a profile file

Output

202
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The keywords TRENDDATA, PROFILEDATA and PLOT in the input file specifies the output from the
simulation.

The trend file (*.tpl), profile file (*.ppl) and plot file (*.plt) are used for plotting several variables related to
wax deposition:

The different was deposition variables are described in Waxdeposition Output Variables.

The trend file and profile file are text files that can be viewed in the OLGA GUI. The plot file is a binary
file that is viewed in a separate plotting tool called the OLGA Viewer. Due to the binary format this file
can use a shorter plotting interval and is useful for detailed analysis.

A sample case for wax deposition is described in Sample: Waxdeposition.

203
 Well OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Well
The wells module provides the possibility of building virtual wells that can be used to analyse ”what if”
case scenarios. This is especially useful for analyzing transient well behaviour such as start-up/shut-
down, unstable flow, rate changes, well clean-up, well testing, liquid loading and chemical injection.

It also enables a full-field integrated modelling approach, where a combination of reservoir, well bore,
pipeline network and facilities simulators are used to construct an analytical model of the full field
production system.

An Wells Module is available for well flow applications where the reservoir properties and the inflow
relationships play an important role in the modeling. See The Wells Module for more details.

Please also see /36/ which covers different topics where the OLGA wells module could be used.

When to use
The Wells module is suited for the following applications:

• Start-up and shut down of production and well testing

• Complicated production from several reservoir zones
• Reservoir injection, e.g., water alternating gas injection (WAG)
• Analyzing cross flow between different reservoir zones
• Water cut limit
• Flow from multilateral wells
• Flow stability
• Flow assurance (hydrates)
• Gas lift requirements
• Production optimization
• Well test equipment sizing

License requirements
Production or injection flow equations other than linear, quadratic, or tabular are enabled by the Wells
Module that requires a separate license.

Methods and assumptions

Well placement options
A well can be placed at the mid-point or the inlet (bottom) of the well section. When it is placed at the
inlet, the inlet or bottom hole flowing pressure is calculated by adding the hydrostatic pressure drop to
the pressure in the well section. If the well is placed at the mid-point of the section, the bottom hole
flowing pressure is equal to the pressure in the well section.

Phase fractions
For flows from the well section into the reservoir, the total mass flow is calculated with the gas mass
flow fraction equal to the gas mass fraction within the well section. For the flow from the reservoir into
the well section, the gas mass fraction of the oil and gas mixture of the well fluid, GASFRACTION, and
water mass fraction in the total mixture of the well fluid, WATERFRACTION (or
TOTALWATERFRACTION) are given. If GASFRACTION < 0 is given, the equilibrium gas mass fraction
will be used. If the water option is not used, WATERFRACTION should be zero (default value).

Options for calculating flow rate

204
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Flow from reservoir into well

Two thermal options for calculating enthalpy inflow are available. The isothermal option assumes that
the fluid enters the well at the reservoir temperature, and reservoir fluid enthalpy is calculated on the
basis of reservoir temperature and well pressure. If the adiabatic option is used, the reservoir fluid
enthalpy is calculated on the basis of reservoir temperature and reservoir pressure. The fluid
temperature may change as the pressure decreases from the reservoir pressure to the pressure at the
well section due to constant enthalpy expansion and flashing.

The following three options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and
the pressure difference (with the Wells Module seven new options are available – see The Wells
Module).

1. Linear formula: Gw = A + B( pR - pwf )

where Gw is the mass flow rate, pR the reservoir pressure, and pwf the bottom hole flowing pressure.
Constant B is defined as the productivity index. Constant A allows for a minimum pressure difference
required for the fluid to start to flow from the reservoir to the well and it must be less or equal to zero.

The inflow model Constant productivity index, Equation (g) in the Wells Module, can also be used for
linear inflow. This model is available for all users and is described in section Constant productivity index.

2. Non-linear formula: A + BGw + CGw2 = pR2 - pwf2

where A, B and C are constants. Constant A allows for a minimum pressure difference required for flow
to start from the reservoir to the well.

3. Tabular form (see keyword TABLE):

The table input option is made to support gas and water coning.
The relationship between the flow rate (or other well parameters) and the pressure difference is given by
a table. If the user does not give a zero flow point in the input, the program will automatically add a zero
point at zero pressure difference. For pressure differences within the range of the table, the flow rates
are calculated by a polynomial interpolation of second degree. For pressure differences larger than the
maximum value in the table, the flow rates are determined by a linear extrapolation using the tangent to
the quadratic curve at the end point of the table.

Flow from the well into the reservoir

For negative flow from the well to the reservoir, the negative enthalpy source will correspond to the
pressure and temperature conditions in the well section.

The following three options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and
the pressure difference.

1. Linear formula: Gw = A + B( pwf - pR )

where Gw is the mass flow rate into the reservoir and constant B is the injectivity index. Constant A
represents the minimum pressure difference required for the fluid to start to flow from the well into the
reservoir and it must be less than or equal to zero.

The inflow model Constant productivity index, Equation (g) in the Wells Module, can also be used for
linear inflow. This model is available for all users.

2. Non-linear formula: A + BGw + CGw2 = pwf2 - pR2

205
 Well OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

where A, B and C are constants. A is the minimum pressure required for flow to start from the well into
the reservoir.

3. Tabular form (see keyword TABLE):

The table input option is made to support gas and water coning.
The relationship between the flow rate (or other well parameters) and the pressure difference is given by
a table. If the user does not give a zero flow point in the input, the program will automatically add a zero
pressure difference. The interpolation and extrapolation procedure is the same as for flow from the
reservoir to the well.

Note: If equivalent pipe is used and there are wells in each parallel pipe, there are two ways to
prepare the data for these wells:

• Give input data for each individual well.

• Use a single equivalent well. Use one of the following procedures to construct data for the
equivalent well:

1. If the linear equation is used, the constants A and B for the equivalent well are:

A = NAi
B = NBi

where Ai and Bi are constants for each parallel well. N is number of parallel wells included in the
equivalent well.

2. If the non-linear equation is used, the constants A, B and C for the equivalent well are:

A = Ai
B = Bi/N
C = Ci/N2

where Ai, Bi and Ci are the constants for each parallel well.

3. If the well performance is given by a table, the flow rate in the table is the sum of the flow rates of all
the parallel wells at the same pressure difference.

With the Wells Module seven new models for calculating the reservoir inflow are available. For these
models the reservoir performance can be specified through reservoir variables or from draw-down/build-
up tests from the actual well, see The Wells Module for further information.

Dynamic Well Inflow

An option is available for simulating the dynamic characteristics of a well. For positive well flow, the
instantaneous flow rate for each phase, f, is calculated by

dq f q ∞f - q f
=
dt Tf (a)

where qf is the instantaneous flow rate for phase f, qf∞ is the steady-state flow with the bottom hole
flowing pressure at time t, and Tf is the time constant for the flow of phase f.

The steady-state flow for each phase is calculated by:

206
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

q ∞f = PI f ( Plim , f - P wf )
(b)

when the flowing pressure, Pwf, is less than a given threshold pressure, Plim,f. When Pwf is above Plim,f,
will be set to zero. The productivity index, PIf, as well as the time constant Tf can change with Pwf.
f

Numerically, Equation (b) is solved by

n+1

n+1 n
q∞f - qn+1
f
q f =q +
f Δt
Tf (c)

q∞f n+1 = PI nf ( P R - P n+1

wf )
(d)

As an option, a transport delay can be modelled by specifying a certain distance that the front of phase f
must travel before the actual inflow can be started. This distance, hf,o, will be user determined.

d h f h∞f - h f
=
dt T h, f (e)

Pres − Pw, f
h ∞f = h f ,o ⋅ (f)
Pres − Plim, f

If hf > hf,o, the flow rate into the well section is set to qf; otherwise, the flow rate into the well section is
set to zero.

The transient option is switched on if one or both of the time constants are greater than zero.

The transient option is only applied for positive flow (from the reservoir to the well section). For the
negative flow, the constants are assumed to be zero.

The Wells Module

The Wells Module is designed for well flow applications where the reservoir properties and the inflow
relationships play an important role in the modelling.

The Wells Module will be especially well suited for the following applications:
• Start-up and shut down of production and well testing.
• Complicated production from several reservoir zones.
• Reservoir injection, e.g. water alternating gas injection (WAG).
• Analysing cross flow between different reservoir zones.
• Flow from multilateral wells.

Reservoir inflow
In the Wells Module the reservoir performance is specified through permeability, extension of the
reservoir, fluid properties etc. or from draw-down/build-up tests from the actual well.

The reservoir inflow can be specified in a number of different ways depending on the type of reservoir
simulated. The different inflow performance models are presented below.

207
 Well OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Constant productivity index

The linear form is used for the production of a typical oil reservoir, or as a first estimate when the
production curve for the well is not properly defined:

q = J ( p R − pwf )
(g)
where pR is the static reservoir pressure, pwf is the flowing bottom hole pressure and J is the constant
productivity index given by:

Linear productivity (typical oil reservoir)

kh
J= (h)
141.2vBo(ln(re / rw ) − 0.75 + s)
in oilfield units (stb/d/psi)

where
J Productivity index [stb/d/psi]
kh Effective permeability x net pay [mD ft]
ν Oil viscosity [cP]
Bo Oil formation volume factor [Rft3/Sft3]
re Reservoir extension [ft]
rw Wellbore radius [ft]
s Mechanical skin

Forchheimer and Single Forchheimer model

When the full production curve can be estimated and a constant PI is not applicable a quadratic form of
the relation between inflow and draw-down can be used, for example the Forchheimer model (see ref.
/1/):

p R2 − p wf
2
= Bq g + Cq g2 (i)

where B and C are the linear and non-linear part of the productivity index respectively defined by:
Tμ g z
B= [ln(re rw ) − 0.75 + s ] [psi2/(scf/d)] (j)
0.703kh
Tμ g z
C= D [psi2/(scf2/d2)] (k)
0.703kh
Where:
T reservoir temperature [°R] (RESTEMPERATURE)
μg gas viscosity at reservoir conditions [cP] (VISGRES)
z Gas z-factor at reservoir conditions (ZFACT)
re reservoir extension [ft] (RESEXT)
rw wellbore radius [ft] (HOLES/2)
s mechanical skin [-] (SKINS)
D non-Darcy or turbulence skin [1/Sft3/d] (SKIND)
k reservoir permeability [mD] (KPERM)
h well effective net pay [ft] (HPAY)

208
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

For high pressure gas wells with limited draw down, pressure can be used instead of pressure-squared,
in which case the Single Forchheimer equation is written:

p R − p wf = Bq g + Cq g2 , (l)

a ≤ s×2
where B and C are defined by:
T ⎛ μgZ ⎞
B= ⎜ ⎟[ln (r r ) − 0.75 + s ] [psi/(scf/d)] (m)
(1.407 kh ) ⎜⎝ p av ⎟⎠ e w
T ⎛ μgZ ⎞
C= ⎜ ⎟D [psi/(scf2/d2)] (n)
(1.407 kh ) ⎜⎝ p av ⎟⎠
where pav is defined as pav= (pR + pwf)/2.

Vogels equation
The following IPR equation, known as Vogels equation, was traditionally used for oil-well performance in
saturated oil reservoirs (see ref. /1/ ).

⎡ ⎛ p wf ⎞ ⎛p ⎞
2
⎤
q 0 = q 0,max ⎢1 − 0.2⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 0.8⎜⎜ wf ⎟⎟ ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎝ pR ⎠ ⎝ pR ⎠ ⎥⎦
(o)

where q0,max is the theoretical maximum oil rate when flowing bottom hole pressure equals zero.

Backpressure and normalized backpressure equations

For gas wells the following simple equation is often used for the inflow performance (see ref. /1/ ).

(
q = C p R2 − p wf
2
)n

, (p)

where C is defined by:

C=
(0.703kh)
n

[scf/d/psi2n]
(Tμ g Z )n D1−n [ln(re rw ) − 0.75 + s]2n−1
(q)

This equation is often referred to as the backpressure equation. The exponent n ranges in value from
0.5 to 1.0. A normalised form of this equation can be used for saturated oil wells:

n
⎡ ⎛ p wf ⎞
2
⎤
q0 = q0,max ⎢1 − ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎝ p R ⎠ ⎥⎦
(r)

where q0,max is the maximum oil rate when flowing bottom hole pressure equals zero.

209
 Well OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Undersaturated oil wells

For oil wells producing from reservoirs with static reservoir pressure above the bubble point pressure,
the bottom hole flowing pressure might drop below the bubble point pressure during production. In these
cases the linear inflow relationship will not be sufficient alone to describe the inflow under varying
flowing pressures. The following two equations are therefore introduced:

q = J ( p R − pwf ) pb ≤ pwf ≤ p R
for (s)

⎛ J ⎞ 2
q = J ( p R − p b ) + ⎜⎜ (
⎟⎟ p b − p wf2 ) p wf ≤ pb
⎝ 2 pb ⎠ for (t)

where pb is the bubble point pressure.

Tabulated inflow performance curve

If neither of the above inflow performance curves nor the linear and non-linear option presented in this
section is applicable for the reservoir, a tabulated inflow curve can be specified by the user. See the
description in the beginning of this section.

Variable reservoir reference pressure

When a reservoir has been flowing for some time at high rates the reservoir pressure close to the well
can be reduced significantly. The initial static reservoir reference pressure is no longer applicable for
specifying the inflow from the zone and a reduced reference pressure is introduced.

For the model to take these local drawdown and build-up effects into account, the reservoir reference
pressure can be specified as a function of time by the user.

Injectivity index
The injectivity index is used for modelling of flow from the wellbore into the reservoir zone of gas,
hydrocarbon liquid or water. This option is for example used for pushing the gas back into the reservoir
during a work-over operation.

The injectivity index is adapted to specify the relation between the flow from the well into the reservoir
and the pressure build-up in the well. That is, when the bottom hole pressure exceeds the static
reservoir pressure an inflow into the reservoir will start depending on the injectivity index.

The inflow into the reservoir can be specified on the same form as the well production, but a different
relationship can also be used. In addition, a separate linear injectivity index can be used for the oil
phase or the water phase.

Fracture pressure

When the pressure in the wellbore exceeds a certain value above the static reservoir pressure the
formation will break down. The pressure required to burst the formation is called the fracture pressure.
When the pressure inside the wellbore exceeds this pressure small fractures will be created in the
formation resulting in a significant increase in injectivity, and the fluid in the wellbore will flow into these
fractures instead of flowing into the reservoir matrix.

By specifying the fracture pressure the user defines the maximum allowable pressure inside the
wellbore. In the Wells Module this is modelled by an "infinite" inflow into the reservoir zone.

210
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Limitations
The steady state pre-processor does not handle injection wells. For these cases a solution with source
close to 0 is found as input to the dynamic solver.

How to use
Standard and advanced well feature
There are two ways of specifying the data for flow between the reservoir and the well. You may either
specify the coefficients used in the inflow correlations directly, or you may specify traditional
well/reservoir variables like permeability and net pay.

In the standard well for OLGA the coefficients used in the inflow correlations is specified directly. Three
options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and the pressure
difference, a linear formula, a non-linear formula and a tabular form. Please see Methods and
Assumption description for more details.

The Wells Module is designed for well flow applications where the reservoir properties and inflow
relationships play an important role in the modeling. In the Wells Module the reservoir performance is
specified through permeability, extension of reservoir, fluid properties etc. The well/reservoir variables
are translated into the coefficients used in the inflow correlations. The volume flow q is a function of the
bottom hole pressure pwf, the reservoir pressure pR, and the computed coefficients used in the inflow
correlations. The coefficients used in the inflow correlations may also be given directly.

There are several different inflow models implemented in the Wells Module e.g. Forchheimer, Vogels
and Backpressure. Please see Methods and Assumption for more information.

Input
The keyword ”WELL” is used to define required data for calculating the flow performance of wells.

Keyword dependencies: BRANCH, GEOMETRY, OPTIONS, POSITION, FEED

Required keys: LABEL, INJOPTION, PRODOPTION, RESPRESSURE, RESTEMPERATURE,
ISOTHERMAL, LOCATION (Default values can be used if specified)

Either the key ABSPOSITION or POSITION or the keys PIPE and SECTION is used to locate the well.

The production and the injection models are specified through the keys PRODOPTION and INJOPTION
with the following values available:

• LINEAR
• QUADRATIC
• TABULAR
• FORCHHEIMER (The Forchheimer model)
• SINGLEFORCHHEIMER (Forchheimer with pressure instead of pressure squared)
• VOGELS (The Vogels equation for saturated oil reservoirs)
• BACKPRESSURE (The Backpressure equation for oil and gas wells)
• NORMALIZEDBACKPR (Normalized backpressure for saturated oil wells)
• UNDERSATURATED (Under saturated oil wells)

For advanced well inflow types the coefficients could be given directly by using the keys BINJ, CINJ,
BPROD, CPROD and EXPONENTN or by setting
the reservoir variables through using some of the keys BOOIL, BPPRESSURE, FRACPR, GASINJ,
HOLES, GASINJ, HPAY, INJECTIVITY, INJPOSTFRACFACTOR, INJPREFRACFRATOR,
INJTHRESHOLD, KPERM, OILINJ, PHASE, PRODI, PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR,

211
 Well OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PRODPREFRACFACTOR, QMAX, RESEXT, SKIND, SKINS, VISGRES, VISLRES, WATINJ and

ZFACT. Which key to use for the different well flow models will be highlighted in the GUI interface.

When using the standard well in Olga the key GASFRACTION, and WATERFRACTION or
TOTALWATERFRACTION is the one to use since AINJ, BINJ, APROD and BPROD then are mass
based. Values from PVT table is used when GASFRACTION and TOTALWATERFRACTION is set to -
1 in the input.

With the advanced well inflow types the key GORST and WATERCUT is appropriate to use since AINJ,
BINJ, APROD and BPROD then are volume based. WATERCUT is calculated from PVT table if set to -
1 in the input.

If COMPOSITIONAL = ON in OPTION then either the key FEEDMASSFRACTION or

FEEDMOLEFRACTION is used.

If COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL in OPTION then the key FEEDVOLFRACTION is used.

Be aware of that you may not get as output the fractions or water cut specified for the well since this
depend on that there are enough content of the specified phases in the well.

Please see the keyword Well description for more details.

Output
The keywords TREND and PROFILE in the input file specify the output from the simulation.

The resulting trend file (*.tpl) and profile file (*.ppl) are used for plotting several Well variables (same
variables for Advanced and Standard well):

• Mass rates for each phase (gas, oil and water)

• Steady-state mass rates for each phase
• Total mass rate for the liquid phase and all phases
• Cone front for each phase
• Enthalpy for the well

Please see the Well variables for more details.

212
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Zone
A zone is a region within a branch in which OLGA automatically generates inflows in each control
volume based on a template definition.

When to use
The Zone keyword simplifies input when inflows are to be present in all control volumes in a given
region of a branch. Instead of specifying each individual inflow in each control volume, these are
automatically generated based on a template.

License requirements
Zone is only implicitly affected by license requirements, i.e., it is only affected by license requirements
that apply to the inflows referenced.

Methods and assumptions

General
Given a start position and an end position, inflows are automatically generated in all control volumes
inside the region based on a template. While most properties are assumed to be constant over a zone,
pressure and temperature can change. Please refer to the Interpolation section for further details.

Please refer to the individual sections to get detailed information on the various references given in the
ZONE keyword.

Reservoir inflow assumptions

The inflows specified generate well-type objects where the location is assumed to be in the middle of
the control volume. Furthermore, it is assumed, that all reservoir properties except for the reservoir
pressure and the reservoir temperature remain constant throughout the zone.
Interpolation
There are three different kinds of interpolation implemented, which will be described in the following.

No interpolation
This option (referred to as OFF in the input) means that the reservoir pressure and reservoir
temperature is assumed to be constant through the entire zone.

Vertical interpolation
This option (referred to as VERTICAL in the input) applies linear interpolation w.r.t. vertical depth
between the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature specified at the zone endpoints.

Automatic interpolation
This option (referred to as AUTOMATIC in the input) requires that the reservoir pressure and reservoir
temperature is specified at one of the zone endpoints. Given this reference pressure, p0, the pressure,
p(h), is calculated at each depth h by integrating the hydrostatic pressure of the reservoir liquid
according to

, (a)

The reservoir temperature is assumed to be constant.

213
 Zone OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

How to use
General
Instead of specifying WELL keywords in numerous consecutive control volumes, the ZONE keyword
can be used to simplify input. The extend of the zone is specified through the position references
STARTPOSITION and ENDPOSITION. For each control volume between the endpoints, well-type
objects are automatically generated according to a template. The template is specified using the
keyword RESERVOIRINFLOW under Library and is linked to ZONE through the reference key
RESERVOIRINFLOW.

Reservoir inflow
The keyword RESERVOIRINFLOW under Library is in most parts a duplicate of the flow-path level
keyword WELL. As compared to WELL, there is no position to be specified since the positions of each
respective inflow is automatically generated through the input given on ZONE. Furthermore, the
reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature are specified through ZONE. For detailed information,
please refer to the section on interpolation below.

Coefficient specification
One final thing to be noted is the specification of the injection and production coefficients. On WELL,
these are specified for that particular inflow object whereas their interpretation in RESERVOIRINFLOW
is depending on the COEFTYPE key on ZONE. For COEFTYPE=TOTAL, the coefficient values are
considered to correspond to the sum for all contributions within the zone. For COEFTYPE=PERMETER,
the coefficient values need to be multiplied by a length in order to generate the value for each individual
inflow. To illustrate this, consider a 1,000 meter long zone. If one of the coefficients is specified to equal
50 when COEFTYPE=TOTAL, the equivalent input using COEFTYPE=PERMETER is to specify that
very same coefficient to be 0.050.
Interpolation

The zone has a number of options for specifying the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature;
INTERPOLATION=[OFF],VERTICAL,AUTOMATIC. The default option, OFF, corresponds to constant
reservoir pressure and temperature as given through PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE. A more
advanced option is vertical interpolation. Here, the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature are
specified at the zone endpoints (STARTPRESSURE, ENDPRESSURE, STARTTEMPERATURE, and
ENDTEMPERATURE) and linear interpolation is carried out as a function of vertical depth. The third
interpolation option, automatic interpolation, uses a uniform temperature while the pressure is calculated
through integrating the hydrostatic pressure contribution in the reservoir fluid starting at the given
reference pressure.

Output
When specifying output variables for zones, output is always given accumulated over the entire zone. In
order to get data for the individual inflows, set ZONEDETAILS=YES in the TRENDDATA keyword. By
doing so, output is generated for each individual inflow that has been automatically generated in
addition to the accumulated one. N.B., it is not possible to get data for an individual inflow, it is either all
or nothing.

214
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Restrictions and Limitations

Memory consumption
OLGA will allocate memory for the simulation as needed. The memory usage will be a function of the
total number of pipe sections in the case, any special modules used (for instance: slug-tracking, inhibitor
tracking, compositional tracking) and to some extent the number of plot variables (TREND, PROFILE).
In particular, it is important to be aware that the amount of memory required during the simulation will
roughly be proportional to the total number of sections in the network. That is, double the number of
sections for a given case, and you will double the memory usage.

If the machine running the simulation is short on physical and virtual memory, this will ultimately lead to
an unexpected program termination.

Flow Model Limitations

Generally, these limitations are difficult to assess. Their possible consequences, however, will normally
not be influenced by the user input.

An exception is the correlation for the void fraction in liquid slugs. An average correlation based on the
diesel, naphtha and stanco experiments at the SINTEF loop is applied by default. The actual correlation
quite significantly influences the transition from stratified to slug flow. The selected correlation yields
good agreement for all the above experiments. For air/water, another correlation should be applied and
OLGA provides an alternative which may be activated by specifying the key SLUGVOID in the keyword
OPTIONS.

Unless the slug tracking option is used, OLGA applies an average slug flow description. That is, if slug
flow is predicted at a section boundary, the flow parameters at that boundary, such as slug bubble
velocity and volume fraction, slug fraction, etc., are computed based on the assumption of fully
developed slug flow with an infinite number of identical slug cells. The detailed flow parameters at
another point along the pipeline will normally differ as the average flow parameters (pressure, hold-up,
etc.) differ. The average description implies that if slug flow occurs in two adjacent sections, the detailed
slug flow parameters at one section do not explicitly influence those in the section following it.

The flow history at a pipe location is to a small extent considered in the flow regime determination. For
example, if slug flow is predicted in an upward sloping pipe and stratified flow in a following downward
sloping pipe, all slugs die at the entrance of the latter pipe. In reality, slug flow may persist some
distance downstream since a slug needs some time to disintegrate. Eventually, one slug may proceed
downstream and cause liquid blockage at a bend in a riser connection with possible build-up of a terrain
slug. This special type of mechanism for the onset of terrain slugging is not represented in the standard
OLGA model. To simulate this phenomenon accurately the SLUGTRACKING model with
HYDRODYNAMIC=ON should be used.

Another restriction on the Flow Model is that gas is assumed to be lighter than oil and water. Oil can in
turn however be lighter or heavier than water. Please note however that the numerical models in OLGA
has only been verified and tuned for fluids where the density of oil is smaller than density of water. How
OLGA deals with fluids where oil or water densities are equal to or smaller than gas densities are
described in Limitations in the use of fluid properties.

Limitations in the use of fluid properties

All fluid properties are normally assumed to be unique functions of temperature and pressure, and have
to be input to OLGA in a particular file. Thus, the total composition (the mole fractions of the
components) of the multiphase mixture is assumed to be constant both in time and space. This
limitation is important for mixtures with pronounced compositional dependent properties. Note, however,
that one may use different fluid properties in different branches in a pipeline network. Network
simulations are special cases where total compositional changes in the pipeline may be important.

215
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Due to the phase velocity differences, the fluid composition in a pipe is generally different from the fluid
compositions used in the PVT table (for example during the depressurisation of a pipeline). If only gas is
released from the pipe, the total composition in the pipe will change. Condensate may accumulate in the
lower parts of the pipe and result in large compositional differences between sections.

This difference will not affect the steady state results provided that the inlet flowing fluid has the same
composition as in the PVT table. In transient simulations the fluids in the pipes have different
compositions. Thus, changes in physical properties and equilibrium mass fractions due to changes in
temperature and pressure will be different from the values in the PVT table. These differences are
usually small.

As an alternative to PVT tables, it is possible to perform a simulation using compositional tracking,

where the compositional data is provided in a feed file and the code calculates the fluid properties
internally. This means that the total composition may vary both in time and space, and that no special
consideration is needed for a pipeline network. This procedure is also more accurate in simulations
where the fluid composition will change considerably with time, e.g., blowdown of pipelines. However,
compositional tracking is more CPU demanding and may prolong the simulation time significantly.

The gas and liquid phases are assumed to be in thermodynamic equilibrium; the temperature and
pressure are equal in both phases, and any interface mass transfer occurs instantaneously. The latter
has important implications for the pressure wave propagation (or speed of sound); if normal
condensation takes place, the mixture will appear too compressible in OLGA and the pressure wave
velocity will be smaller than if the mass transfer rate was finite.

Due to the instantaneous mass transfer, compositional tracking and regular table based OLGA both has
problems handling single component systems and systems with a very narrow phase envelope. This is
because a small change in pressure and temperature might change the holdup and physical properties
of the fluid dramatically

Fluid property assumptions

In addition to having some restrictions on the behaviour of fluids in pipes, OLGA also imposes some
restrictions on the physical properties of a fluid, and the pressure and temperature dependency of
these. This is done in order to ensure the validity of the numerical models, and to try to avoid numerical
instabilities. Unless stated otherwise these restrictions applies to table-based fluids and compositional
tracking.

First of all OLGA assumes that gas is the lightest phase, and thus flows at the top. If the gas density for
some reason is larger or equal to the oil density, the gas densities are modified to be slightly smaller
than the oil density. Similarly if the gas density is larger than or equal to the water density, the water
density is modified to be slightly larger than the gas density. A warning of this is then printed. The
density of oil can both be smaller and larger than the water density, but note that the numerical models
in OLGA has only been verified and tuned for fluids where the density of oil is smaller than density of
water. OLGA also checks if all densities are zero, and terminates if they are.
Secondly OLGA checks if the viscosities are <10-9, and sets these viscosities to 10-9 if they are. OLGA
also checks if the gas-density is smaller than the oil and water viscosities. If the gas viscosity is, for
some reason, larger than either of these, the oil or water viscosity is set to a value slightly larger than
the gas-viscosity at this point. A warning of this is then printed.

Thirdly OLGA checks if the surface tension between phases is smaller than 10-5. If they for some reason
are smaller, OLGA will set these values to 10-5. A warning of this is then printed.
Finally OLGA also investigates if the enthalpies and temperature and pressure dependencies of the
enthalpies seem reasonable. A warning is printed if something unexpected is found. This check is not
performed in Compositional Tracking.

216
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Input/Output Limitations
Input pre-processor
The input pre-processor that checks the input data for inconsistencies is not foolproof. Although the
most frequent input errors are found, there may be cases with faulty input that are not detected.

Initial value pre-processor

OLGA contains a steady state pre-processor, that computes values to be used as initial conditions in
dynamic computations. The pre-processor uses the OLGAS interface iteratively over all pipe sections to
calculate pressure gradients and other parameters in the flow network until a consistent steady-state
solution has been found.
However, the solution computed by the steady state pre-processor and the solution obtained when
simulation with the dynamic solver until a steady-state is achieved may not be equal. See limitations in
the steady state pre-processor chapter for an explanation for this.

Printed output
As this is a user specified quantity, care must be taken to avoid a paper or file ”explosion”. The amount
of printed output is proportional to the number of output intervals and to the number of output variables
and sections specified in the keyword statement OUTPUT.

Output postprocessor
The output postprocessor summarizes the simulation results. Some of the information is dedicated to
steady state cases. Other items, like the minimum and maximum variable values, are interesting also for
transient simulations. The postprocessor will not give any information on any process equipment that is
simulated.

Plot file sizes

There are no formal program restrictions regarding the size of these files. The user implicitly controls the
size through the data specified in the keyword statements PLOT, TREND and PROFILE. The size is
determined by the number of variables, sections and output time intervals. The file size limitation will be
system dependent. For 32-bit operating systems, a rule-of-thumb says that files should not exceed 2GB.

Standard Conditions in OLGA

”Standard conditions” are often defined in SI units as 1 bara and 15 °C, but the default value in OLGA it
is defined as 1 atm/14.7 psia and 15.56 °C/60 F. This definition is the most commonly used in the
petroleum industry. The default value can only be overridden when using keyword based PVT table.

”Stock tank conditions” are also used in the industry, but this phrase is often perceived to mean dry oil
and gas. Therefore, the term ”standard conditions” is used in OLGA. Also, ”volume rates at standard
conditions” are sometimes expressed as simply the in-situ mass rate divided by the density at standard
conditions (for liquid), but in OLGA this definition is not used.

Output variables for volume rates at standard conditions assume that a single stage flash from in-situ to
standard conditions has been performed. That is, mass transfer between the phases from in-situ to
standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not dehydrated unless FLASHMODEL =
HYDROCARBON is specified in the keyword OPTIONS.

For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and densities from the fluid property file
to perform the conversion (requires that the tables contain standard conditions). For Compositional
tracking simulations a flash is performed for the in-situ fluid to standard conditions for each section and
time the output variables are to be reported. This can increase the simulation time as a flash is CPU
demanding, and such output variables should therefore be used with care for Compositional tracking
simulations.

217
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Important Numerical Recommendations

Time step
OLGA has time step control based on several criteria. They can all be given at user specified sections
through the keyword statement DTCONTROL.

The first time step control is based on the transport criterion of Courant-Friedrich-Levy (CFL):
∆
∆ min
This criterion is by default switched on. This means that the time step is limited so that no mass is trans-
ported across a whole section in one time step. This is the maximum time step allowed if a mass
transient is to be followed correctly.

The second time step control, SOUND_CFL, (default OFF) uses the same principles as the CFL but is
based on the speed of the pressure wave instead of the fluid velocity. It has been introduced to better
calculate shock waves (e.g. due to water hammer).

The third time step control, PRESSURE, (default OFF) is based on the second order time derivative of
the pressure.

The fourth time step control, GRADPRESSURE, (default OFF) is based on the first order time derivative
of the pressure. This has been introduced to be able to reduce the time step earlier for quick pressure
changes, e.g. a pipeline with high pressure is opened into a small closed volume.

If all time step control criteria are switched on, OLGA will choose the minimum time step from the
activated time steps controls. The upper and lower limit for the time step is the user-given MINDT and
MAXDT in the keyword statement INTEGRATION.

Additional time step controls are activated when process equipment is simulated, or the slug tracking
option is activated.

Section Lengths
For a pipeline of fixed length the simulation time increases roughly quadratically with the number of
sections in the pipeline. First, the number of arithmetic operations per time step increases proportionally
to the number of sections. Second, the time step decreases with decreasing section length if the CFL
transport criterion is switched on.

The accuracy of the solution increases with smaller sections but in a complex manner that is difficult to
estimate quantitatively. The numerical solution should, however, approach the analytical one as ∆ and
∆ approach zero.

Variable Mesh Length

Past experience indicates that the section lengths should not differ too much along the pipeline. A factor
of 2 or less in length ratio between adjacent sections is recommended although factors of 5-10 might
work in some cases.

Pipe-Section Discretisation
In general, if either the inclination angle or the diameter of the pipes varies, each pipe should be divided
into at least two sections to ensure meaningful results, i.e. to reduce numerical 'smearing out' of these
effects.

Wall Layer Thickness

The numerical solution of the wall temperatures in the wall layers is dependent on the wall layer
discretisation. For steady state calculations, the wall layer discretisation can be quite coarse, one layer
for each material layer.

218
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

For transient calculations when the heat storage in the pipe walls can be important (cool down or heat
up) a finer discretisation of the pipe walls may be necessary.

Very thin layers, such as paint etc., should be included in a neighbouring layer by adjusting the
thickness and conductivity of that layer. If the thermal conductivity of the thin layer is fairly close to the
conductivity of one of the neighbours, only the thickness needs to be adjusted.

219
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

220
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 4

Keyword Description

221
 ANNULUS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ANNULUS
Annulus is a network component. See ANNULUS COMPONENT for more description.
See also ANNULUS COMPONENT Keys

Type Parameter set

Description
Key Unit: Default:[ ]
LABEL String [ANNULUS_1] Name of annulus.

AMBIENTDATA (on Annulus)

See keyword AMBIENTDATA. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and solid
bundle.

COMPONENT (on Annulus)

This statement defines the configuration of pipes which are bundled together and have thermal
interaction. Gas-lifted wells are typical examples, where gas is injected in the annulus between the
casing and tubing while the production fluid together with the injected gas is produced in the tubing.
Parameter
Type
set Description
Key Unit: ()
Default:[ ]
Label of a FLOWPATH that resides inside the
FLOWPATH Symbol
BUNDLE.
Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it
FROM Symbol
enters the BUNDLE.
Heat transfer coefficient at the wall surface of a
Real
OUTERHVALUE branch to the bulk fluid in the carrier line. Forced/free
(W/m2-C)
convection will be applied if this key is not defined.
Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it
TO Symbol
exits the BUNDLE.
The component's displacement along the x-axis
XOFFSET Real (m) [0.0]
relative to the center of the bundle.
The component's displacement along the y-axis
YOFFSET Real (m) [0.0]
relative to the center of the bundle.

PROFILEDATA (on Annulus)

See PROFILEDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and
solid bundle.

SERVERDATA (on Annulus)

See SERVERDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and
solid bundle.

TRENDDATA (on Annulus)

See TRENDDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and solid
bundle.

222
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

AMBIENTDATA
This statement specifies the ambient conditions of bundles (solidbundle, fluidbundle and annulus),
which is quite similar to the HEATTRANSFER keyword with respect to input data and axial variation. To
facilitate different configurations in the cross section plane, the ambient conditions can vary in the
vertical axis as well as along the bundle axis.

The vertical variation is controlled by the key TYPE:

Simplified input for buried pipelines (TYPE=SIMPLEBURIED)

This option is intended to offer a simplified input for the discontinuous data encountered when modelling
buried pipelines. If TYPE=SIMPLEBURIED, only a single AMBIENTDATA may be given. The
VERTPOS key will then be inactive, while the keys SOILSURFACELEVEL, SOILTEMPERATURE,
SOILTEMPLEVEL and SOILVERTBOUND are active.

SOILSURFACELEVEL define a horizontal line, above which the ambient conditions apply (e.g. ambient
temperature and heat transfer coefficient).

The scalar SOILTEMPERATURE define the temperature at the horizontal line that intersects the lowest
point of all SHAPEs (YMIN). This will be constant along the pipeline.

Between YMIN and SOILSURFACELEVEL, the temperature at the boundaries will either be calculated
by OLGA (SOILVERTBOUND=NOFLUX) based on the assumption of no heat flux normal to the
boundaries, or set by SOILTEMPEATURE (SOILVERTBOUND=FIXEDTEMP). The latter will in most
circumstances give a rough but conservative estimate on the overall heat loss from the pipeline.

Detailed (TYPE=VERTICALPOINTS)

If this option is used, a set of AMBIENTDATA may be given, where each will have a key VERTPOS to
identify the vertical position to which it applies. Ambient conditions will be interpolated linearly between
each AMBIENTDATA. Conditions will be constant above/below the higher/lowest VERTPOS. A single
AMBIENTDATA with TYPE=VERTICALPOINTS results in ambient conditions that are uniform in the
cross section plane.

One important consideration is what to do when the ambient conditions are discontinuous. This may
solved by defining two AMBIENTDATA keywords positioned very close on the vertical axis. (NOTE: only
available for SOLIDBUNDLE)

223
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Heat capacity of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1000
J/KG-K is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
CAPACITY 4186 J/KG-K is used. Input can
(J/kg-C)
either be a single value (constant
along bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.
Thermal conductivity of ambient
fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is AIR,
0.023 W/mK is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
CONDUCTIVITY 0.56 W/mK is used. Input can
(W/m-C)
either be a single value (constant
along bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.
Density of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.29
kg/m3 is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
DENSITY 1000 kg/m3 is used. Input can
(kg/m3)
either be a single value (constant
along bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.
The emissivity is a measure of the
ability of a material to emit heat by
radiation. It is given as the ratio of
EMISSIVITY Real (-) [0] energy radiated by a particular
material to energy radiated by a
black body at the same
temperature.
Thermal expansion coefficient of
ambient fluid. If HOUTEROPTION
is AIR, 34E-4 1/C is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
EXPANSION 21E-5 1/C is used. Input can
(1/C)
either be a single value (constant
along bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.

224
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Mean heat transfer coefficient on
outer wall surface. Input can
RealList
HAMBIENT either be a single value (constant
(W/m2-C)
along bundle length) or given
explicitly for each section.
AIR | WATER | Option for ambient heat transfer
HOUTEROPTION Symbol
OTHER | [HGIVEN] coefficient.
Overall heat transfer coefficient at
the inlet of the first pipe in a
Real
INHAMBIENT pipeline section where
(W/m2-C)
interpolation is used for overall
heat transfer coefficient.
Ambient temperature at the inlet
of the first pipe in a branch where
INTAMBIENT Real (C)
interpolation is used for ambient
temperature.
Type of interpolation used to
calculate the ambient temperature
LENGTH |
and outer heat transfer coefficient.
HORIZONTAL |
INTERPOLATION Symbol Note that the outer heat transfer
VERTICAL |
coefficient is only affected by the
[SECTIONWISE]
INTERPOLATION key when
HOUTEROPTION = HGIVEN.
Overall heat transfer coefficient at
the outlet of the last pipe in a
Real
OUTHAMBIENT pipeline section where
(W/m2-C)
interpolation is used for overall
heat transfer coefficient.
Ambient temperature at the outlet
of the last pipe in a pipeline
OUTTAMBIENT Real (C)
section where interpolation is
used for ambient temperature.
RealList Heat flux into solid due to external
RADIATION [0]
(W/m2) radiation.
List of reference to TIMESERIES
keywords. The value of each time
series is scaled with a
RADIATIONSERIES SymbolList corresponding factor in
RADIATIONSERIESFACTOR and
added to the heat flux defined in
RADIATION.
List of factors to be used to scale
RADIATIONSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] heat radiation time series in
RADIATIONSERIES.

225
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Vertical level that defines the
surface of the soil
(SIMPLEBURIED only). At and
SOILSURFACELEVEL Real (and) [0] above this level, ambient
conditions given in the
"Radiation", "Heat transfer
coefficient", "Ambient temperature
Temperature at
SOILTEMPLEVEL (or lowest
vertical position of cross section if
SOILTEMPLEVEL is not given). If
SOILTEMPERATURE is not
RealList
SOILTEMPERATURE given, TAMBIENT is used
(C)
(TAMBIENTSERIES is not used).
Input can either be a single value
(constant along bundle length),
two values (length-interpolated) or
given explicitly for each section.
Vertical level where the soil
temperature is given. If this key is
SOILTEMPLEVEL Real (m) not given, the lowest vertical
position of the cross section is
used.
List of reference to TIMESERIES
keywords. The value of each time
series is scaled with a
corresponding factor in
SOILTEMPSERIES SymbolList
SOILTEMPSERIESFACTOR and
added as a temperature
increment to the temperature
defined in SOILTEMPERATURE.
List of factors to be used to scale
SOILTEMPSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] soil temperature time series in
SOILTEMPSERIES.

226
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Ambient conditions for boundaries
between SOILSURFACELEVEL
and SOILTEMPLEVEL. When
NOFLUX is used, there is no heat
flow across external boundaries.
FIXEDTEMP |
SOILVERTBOUND Symbol For FIXEDTEMP, the temperature
[NOFLUX]
is determined by
SOILTEMPERATURE.
FIXEDTEMP is always used for
boundaries at or below
SOILTEMPLEVEL.
Ambient temperature. Input can
RealList either be a single value (constant
TAMBIENT
(C) along bundle length) or given
explicitly for each section.
List of reference to TIMESERIES
keywords. The value of each time
series is scaled with a
corresponding factor in
TAMBIENTSERIES SymbolList TAMBSERIESFACTOR and
added as an increment to the
temperature defined in
TAMBIENT or INTAMBIENT and
OUTTAMBIENT.
List of factors to be used to scale
ambient temperature time series
TAMBSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] in TAMBIENTSERIES. Note that
this key also introduces the unit of
the function.
Type of ambient data input. If
TYPE = VERTICALPOINTS,
ambient heat transfer coefficient,
ambient temperature, radiation
and emissivity will be linearly
interpolated in the vertical axis
SIMPLEBURIED | between AMBIENTDATA
TYPE Symbol
[VERTICALPOINTS] definitions. For TYPE =
SIMPLEBURIED, only a single
AMBIENTDATA can be defined
but different ambient conditions
are used for boundaries that are
below or above
SOILSURFACELEVEL.

227
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Speed of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, default
is 4 m/s. If HOUTEROPTION is
RealList WATER, default is 1 m/s. Input
VELOCITY
(m/s) can either be a single value
(constant along bundle length),
two values (length-interpolated) or
given explicitly for each section.
Vertical position of given ambient
conditions. Used only if TYPE =
VERTICALPOINTS. Ambient heat
transfer coefficient, ambient
VERTPOS Real (m) [0] temperature, radiation and
emissivity will be linearly
interpolated in the vertical axis
between AMBIENTDATA
definitions.
Viscosity of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.8E-5
N-s/m2 is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 1E-
RealList
VISCOSITY 3 N-s/m2 is used. Input can either
(N-s/m2)
be a single value (constant along
bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.

228
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

BLACKOILCOMPONENT
This statement defines a component (gas, oil or water) for the black oil options.
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:()
Default:[ ]
API gravity. API = 141.5/(oil specific gravity)–
APIGRAVITY Real [30] 131.5. Cannot be given if
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY is given.
Mole fraction of CO2 in gas at standard
CO2MOLEFRACTION Real [0.0] conditions. CO2MOLEFRACTION has to be
less than 10%.
Gas specific gravity (gas density/air density).
GASSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [0.64] GASSPECIFICGRAVITY has to be larger than
0.5 (0.55 is pure methane).
Mole fraction of H2S in gas at standard
H2SMOLEFRACTION Real [0.0] conditions. H2SMOLEFRACTION has to be
less than 10%.
[BOCOMP-
LABEL String Name of the blackoil component.
1]
Mole fraction of N2 in gas at standard
N2MOLEFRACTION Real [0.0] conditions. N2MOLEFRACTION has to be less
than 10%.
Oil specific gravity (oil density/water density).
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [0.876]
Cannot be given if APIGRAVITY is given.
OIL | GAS | Define if the component is an oil, Gas or water
TYPE Symbol
WATER component.
Water specific gravity (water density/fresh
water density). Used in order to include density
WATERSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [1.0]
effect on water due to components other than
salt, e.g. MEG.

229
BLACKOILFEED OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

BLACKOILFEED
This statement defines a black oil feed.
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
GASCOMPONENT Symbol Ref. to blackoil component label of type gas.
Real
GLR Gas/liquid ratio. Alternative to GOR.
(Sm3/Sm3)
Real
GOR Gas/oil ratio. Alternative to GLR.
(Sm3/Sm3)
LABEL String [BOFEED-1] Blackoil feed label.
Real Liquid/gas ratio. Alternative to GLR (to be
LGR
(Sm3/Sm3) used for gas feeds).
Real Oil/gas ratio. Alternative to GOR (to be used
OGR
(Sm3/Sm3) for gas feeds).
OILCOMPONENT Symbol Ref. to blackoil component label of type oil.
Ref. to blackoil component label of type
WATERCOMPONENT Symbol
water.
WATERCUT Real [0.0] Watercut.

230
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

BLACKOILOPTIONS
This statement defines the black oil options.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
API gravity. API = 141.5/(oil specific
APIGRAVITY Real gravity)–131.5. Cannot be given if
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY is given.
BUBBLEPRESS Real (Pa) Bubble pressure at a given temperature.
The temperature corresponding to the
BUBBLETEMP Real (C)
bubble pressure.
Gas specific gravity (gas density/air
GASSPECIFICGRAVIT
Real density). GASSPECIFICGRAVITY has to
Y
be larger than 0.5 (0.55 is pure methane).
Real Gas/oil ratio. The GOR should not be
GOR
(Sm3/Sm3) larger than 1000 Sm3/Sm3.
STANDING |
BEGGS | Correlation used to calculate the gas/oil
GORMODEL Symbol
GLASO | ratio.
[LASATER]
Oil specific gravity (oil density/water
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY Real density). Cannot be given if APIGRAVITY
is given.
Real (N- Measured oil viscosity at a given
OILVISC
s/m2) pressure and temperature.
OILVISC-TUNING Symbol ON | [OFF] Enable tuning of oil viscosity.
Enable tuning of RSGO (gas dissolved in
RSGO_BP-TUNING Symbol ON | [OFF]
oil) and Bubble point.
The pressure at which the viscosity is
VISCPRESS Real (Pa)
measured.
The temperature at which the viscosity is
VISCTEMP Real (C)
measured.

231
BRANCH OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

BRANCH
This statement defines a grouping of pipes by reference to a GEOMETRY.
Type Parameter set
Key Description
Unit:() Default:[ ]
Label or number of the fluid table to apply for this
branch. If a keyword based pvt-file is used,
FLUID Symbol
FLUID has to be the LABEL given in the pvt-file,
i.e., numbering is not valid for this format.
Label of GEOMETRY keyword. Only one
GEOMETRY Symbol
geometry is allowed in each BRANCH statement.
Preprocessor input. Defines whether the initial
guess on the flow direction for a branch should
NEGATIVE | be positive or negative. Changing the direction
INIFLOWDIR Symbol
[POSITIVE] might avoid a crash in the preprocessor or result
in a solution closer to the transient steady state
solution.

CASE
Defines information about a simulation.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
AUTHOR String Author of the input file.
DATE String Date.
INFO String General information about the case.
PROJECT String Project name.
TITLE String Case title.

232
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

CHECKVALVE
Defines a check valve in the pipeline. Allows flow only in the defined flow direction.
Type Parameter set
Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Real
ABSPOSITION Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
(m)
NEGATIVE | Allowed direction. Positive direction refers to
DIRECTION Symbol
[POSITIVE] direction of increasing section number.
LABEL String [CHECK-1] Check valve label.
Pipe number or pipe label where the check
PIPE Symbol
valve is located.
Position label where the source is located. If
POSITION Symbol this is defined, PIPE and SECTION should not
be used.
Section boundary number where the
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1
checkvalve is located.

233
COMPOPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

COMPOPTIONS
This statement specifies the different options used in the PVT routines for calculating material properties
and flashing terms in the Compositional Tracking model.

If VISCOSITYCORR is specified the chosen model is used for viscosity calculations for the gas and oil
phases. An error is given if the feed has been tuned to another viscosity correlation in PVTsim, in which
case this is the only allowed option.

The FLASHTYPE key specifies the type of flash calculations to use. TWOPHASE is the simplest one
and is default if no aqueous components (H2O, MEG, etc) are part of the feed. SIMPLETHREEPHASE
is the default if there are at least one aqueous component. FULLTHREEPHASE is the most time-
consuming option, but provides full mixing in all phases. This option must be used if any salt
components are defined in the feed.

The TCONDENSATION/TVAPORIZATION keys are non-equilibrium delay constants for the mass
transfer from liquid phase to gas phase and vice versa. The keys can be introduced for each component
specified with the COMPONENT key. The equilibrium state reached in the flash calculations will then be
delayed for the specified components. The default is no delay.

The DENSITYLIMIT key can be used to specify the limit for the dense phase region density. In the
dense phase region, where there are no good criteria to distinguish gas from oil, a fluid with higher
density than the given value is defined as liquid and a fluid with lower density is defined as gas.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Components to specify delay constants for
COMPONENT SymbolList
(defined in feed file).
Used in the dense phase region. A fluid with a
density higher than this limit is defined as a
liquid and a fluid with lower density is
identified as gas. If used, it should preferably
DENSITYLIMIT Real
be set equal to the fluid density at the critical
point. If not used, internal routines will decide
the phase (may cause instabilities when
crossing bubble/dew point).
TWOPHASE | Algorithm used in flash calculations.
SIMPLETHREEPH TWOPHASE is default if no aqueous
FLASHTYPE Symbol ASE | components are part of the feed.
FULLTHREEPHAS SIMPLETHREEPHASE is default if there is at
E least one aqueous component in the feed.
Time constant for mass transfer from liquid
phase to gas phase due to boiling for
TBOILING
RealList (s) [1.0] components in COMPONENT. (Non-
equilibrium delay constant). Only for
STEAMWATER-HC.

234
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time constant for mass transfer from gas
phase to liquid phase (Non-equilibrium delay
constant). When COMPOSITIONAL=ON, the
default value is no delay and each value must
TCONDENSATIO have a corresponding component in
RealList (s)
N COMPONENT. When
COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC,
TCONDENSATION may be defined as a time
series and the default value is 1 s.

Time points for which TBOILING,

TIME RealList (s) [0.0] TVAPORIZATION and TCONDENSATION
changes. Only for STEAMWATER-HC.
Time constant for mass transfer from liquid
phase to gas phase (Non-equilibrium delay
constant). When COMPOSITIONAL=ON, the
default value is no delay and each value must
TVAPORIZATIO
RealList (s) have a corresponding component in
N
COMPONENT. When
COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC
TVAPORIZATION may be defined as a time
series and the default value is 1 s.
Whether to use Corresponding state or
VISCOSITYCOR LBC |
Symbol Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation for viscosity
R [CORRSTATE]
correlation.

235
COMPRESSOR OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

COMPRESSOR
Describes the configuration of a compressor in the system. The compressor is represented through its
characteristics which give pressure increase and temperature as a function of flow and rotating speed
(RPM). Note that the compressor characteristics are given in a separate file. It is possible to specify
characteristics for more than one compressor. Each of the characteristics is assigned to a label, which is
referred to in the COMPRESSOR statement.

The compressor RPM is governed by the compressor speed controller:

RPM = RPMmin + urpm × (RPMmax - RPMmin)
where
urpm = output signal from compressor speed controller
The recirculation is governed by the anti surge controller (ASC).
Note that a compressor cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
Discharge coefficient of valve/choke in recycle
CD Real [0.84]
loop.
Name of compressor data. This refers to a label
COMPRDATA Symbol
in the compressor characteristics file.
Maximum heat transfer rate from fluid flowing
COOLCAPACITY Real (W)
through the heat exchanger in the recycle loop.
Switch for turning on or off heat exchanger in
COOLER Symbol ON | [OFF]
recycle loop.
DIAMETER Real (m) Orifice diameter of valve/choke in recycle loop.
LABEL String [COMPR-1] Label of the compressor.
Real
MAXRPM Maximum RPM.
(rpm)
Real
MINRPM Minimum RPM.
(rpm)
Number/name of pipe where compressor is
PIPE Symbol
located.
Position of the compressor. If POSITION is
POSITION Symbol defined, PIPE and SECTIONBOUNDARY should
not be used.
Section boundary number where compressor is
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1
located.
Security factor (e.g. 1.2 implies that the min. flow
SECURITYFACTOR Real
is 120% of surge rate).
Temperature values out of heat exchanger.
RealList
TEMPERATURE Number of temperature values must correspond
(C)
to the number of times given in the TIME-key.
RealList Time series for temperature out of heat
TIME
(s) exchanger.

236
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

CONTROLLER

ALGEBRAICCONTROLLER
The controller type ALGEBRAIC can combine signals from other controllers using a defined set of
operators, see below. The controller loops over all operators given in VARIABLEFUNCTION key. The
number of operands is defined by the operation. The operators are applied to the current result (result
from previous operation) as the first operand and additional operands in terms of input signals terminals
(INPSIG_i). The initial current result (result from previous operation) is input signal one (INPSIG_1).

The following unary operator has been implemented:

ABS – Take the absolute value of the current result

The following binary operators have been implemented:

ADD – Add next input signal (INPSIG_i) to the current result
SUB – Subtract next input signal (INPSIG_i) from the current result
MUL – Multiply the current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i)
DIV – Divide the current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i)
GT – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is greater than next input signal, value zero otherwise
LT – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is less than next input signal, value zero otherwise
GE – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is greater than or equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise
LE – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is less than or equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise
EQ – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise
NEQ – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result
is not equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise

Controller type Algebraic makes use of the following signal terminals:

INPSIG_1..N (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

237
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
BIAS Real [0.0] Initial output signal.
Time required to change
valve settings or
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [0] compressor speed from
maximum to minimum
value.
Time from when the
measured value is read to
DELAY Real (s) [0.0]
when it is used by the
controller.
ALL | BIAS | DELAY |
States which keys should
MAXSIGNAL | MINSIGNAL |
be made available as input
EXPOSE SymbolList STROKETIME | OPENINGTIME |
variables on the OPC
CLOSINGTIME | MODE |
server.
MANUALOUTPUT
LABEL String [ALGEBRAICCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0e10] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [-1.0e10] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint
is defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller
output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
controller output is given
MANUAL | EXTERNALSIGNAL | by the controller connected
MODE SymbolList
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC] to the SIGNAL terminal.
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the
controller connected to the
SETPOINT terminal.
FREEZE the controller
output is frozen (kept
constant).
Time required to change
valve settings or
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [0] compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value.

238
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Stroke or actuator time.
Time required to change
valve settings or
STROKETIME Real (s) [0] compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.

RealList Time series for the

TIME
(s) SETPOINT key.
For use when one or more
variables are specified.
The values of the variables
will be subject to the
operator specified. The first
operator vill be used on the
ADD | SUB | MUL | DIV | GT | LT |
VARIABLEFUNCTION SymbolList first operand(s)=INPSIG
GE | LE | EQ | NEQ | ABS
terminal(s). The second
operator will be used on
the result ffor the first
operation and possibley
any additional INPSIG
terminal.

239
 CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ASCCONTROLLER
The main purpose of the Anti Surge Controller (ASC) is to prevent a compressor from operating to the left
of the Surge Line in a compressor performance map.

The controller uses a non-symmetrical PID algorithm. Two amplification constants must therefore be
given. One amplification for positive and one for negative controller error.

The ASC controller has the following signal terminals:

MEASRD (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Anti Surge Controller amplification
AMP1 Real (proportional term). Used for
negative deviation from setpoint.
Anti Surge Controller amplification
AMP2 Real (proportional term). Used for
positive deviation from setpoint.
BIAS Real Initial output signal.
Time required to change valve
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed
from maximum to minimum value.
Time from when the measured
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] value is read to when it is used by
the controller.
Coefficient in front of the
DERIVATIVECONST Real (s) [0.0]
derivative term of a PID controller.
ALL | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL |
SAMPLETIME |
MAXCHANGE | DELAY |
AMP1 | AMP2 | BIAS |
DERIVATIVECONST | States which keys should be
EXPOSE SymbolList INTEGRALCONST | made available as input variables
NORMRANGE | on the OPC server.
SETPOINT | MODE |
MANUALOUTPUT |
STROKETIME |
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME

240
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Coefficient in front of the integral
of PID controllers. It represents a
characteristic time. N.b., it is the
inverse of the coefficient which
INTEGRALCONST Real (s) [1.0E+10] appears in the expression for the
output signal. If the non-linear
option is chosen, this is an array
as a function of the ERROR
array.
LABEL String [ASCCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
Analog controller: Maximum
allowed change in controller
output signal from one time-step
to the next. This restriction is
used by the time-step control. If
the change in output exceeds this
value, OLGA will go back to the
previous point in time and
integrate with a shorter time-step.
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2]
Digital controller: Maximum
discrepancy between the instance
a sample should be taken and the
actual time in the simulation in
terms of a fraction of the sample
time interval. (E.g., with SAMPLE-
TIME=2.0s and MAX-
CHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller output is
given by key MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
MANUAL |
controller output is given by the
EXTERNALSIGNAL |
MODE SymbolList controller connected to the
EXTERNALSETPOINT |
SIGNAL terminal.
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC]
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the controller
connected to the SETPOINT
terminal. FREEZE the controller
output is frozen (kept constant).
For normalized controllers (used
together with AMPLIFICATION).
NORMRANGE Real Indicates measuring range for
input to controller.

241
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
from minimum to maximum value.

Time interval between each

SAMPLETIME Real (s) sampling of input. Activates digital
controller option.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve settings
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value and
vice versa.
RealList Time series for the SETPOINT
TIME
(s) key.
If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the
time step control is bypassed. If
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol OFF | [ON] STROKETIME is less than
DTMIN the time step control is
also bypassed.

242
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

CASCADECONTROLLER
A cascade controller (normal or extended) is a PID controller. The cascade controller is used in the
inner loop of a cascade control. The output of the primary controller changes the setpoint of the
secondary (cascade) controller.

A cascade controller has the following terminals:

MEASRD (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
PID amplification factor. If the non-
linear option is chosen, this is an
AMPLIFICATION RealList
array as a function of the ERROR
array.
For use with EXTENDED CASCADE
controller. Average time for the
AVERAGETIME Real (s)
moving averaging function of the
primary controller variable.
BIAS Real Initial output signal.
Time required to change valve
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed from
maximum to minimum value.
For use with EXTENDED CASCADE
CONSTONE Real (1/s)
controller: Constant C1.
For use with EXTENDED CASCADE
CONSTSWITCH Real controller: Switching value for using
C1 and C2.
For use with EXTENDED CASCADE
CONSTTWO Real (1/s)
controller: Constant C2.
Setpoint for
DEFAULTINPUT Real INACTIVEMODE=DEFAULTMODE

Time from when the measured value

DELAY Real (s) [0.0] is read to when it is used by the
controller.

243
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]

Coefficient in front of the derivative

term of PID controllers. If the non-
RealList
DERIVATIVECONST [0.0] linear option is chosen, this is an
(s)
array as a function of the ERROR
array.
Activate the non-linear option for the
PID. Coefficients are given as an
ERROR RealList [0.0] array of values representing each
value in ERROR. Error is the
deviation.
ALL | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL |
SAMPLETIME |
MAXCHANGE | DELAY |
AMPLIFICATION | BIAS |
DERIVATIVECONST | States which keys should be made
SymbolLis
EXPOSE ERROR | available as input variables on the
t
INTEGRALCONST | OPC server
NORMRANGE | MODE |
MANUALOUTPUT |
STROKETIME |
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME
Select ON to use the EXTENDED
EXTENDED Symbol ON | [OFF]
CASCADE controller.
Specifies how the controller act
when it is deactivated by a selector,
override controller etc. ONHOLD:
Restore old values, everything is on
hold. INTERLOCK: The PID
controller get feedback on the output
signal used from the connected
ONHOLD | INTERLOCK |
controller (Selector or Override). If
INACTIVEMODE Symbol DEFAULTINPUT |
the PID controller becomes inactive
NORMAL
it will back calculate its integral error
to match the output signal of the
connected controller.
DEFAULTINPUT: Compute output
signal based on default input, given
in key DEFAULTINPUT. NORMAL:
No action.
INITIALSETPOINT Real Initial setpoint for extended cascade.

244
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Coefficient in front of the integral of
PID controllers. It represents a
characteristic time. N.b., it is the
RealList inverse of the coefficient which
INTEGRALCONST [1.0E+10]
(s) appears in the expression for the
output signal. If the non-linear option
is chosen, this is an array as a
function of the ERROR array.
[CASCADECONTROLLER
LABEL String Name of controller.
_1]
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
Analog controller: Maximum allowed
change in controller output signal
from one time-step to the next. This
restriction is used by the time-step
control. If the change in output
exceeds this value, OLGA will go
back to the previous point in time
and integrate with a shorter time-
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] step. Digital controller: Maximum
discrepancy between the instance a
sample should be taken and the
actual time in the simulation in terms
of a fraction of the sample time
interval. (E.g., with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and
MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
Maximum setpoint for secondary
MAXSETPOINT Real
controller in cascade control loop.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
Minimum setpoint for secondary
MINSETPOINT Real
controller in cascade control loop.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller. MANUAL:
The controller output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller
MANUAL |
SymbolLis output is given by the controller
MODE EXTERNALSIGNAL |
t connected to the SIGNAL terminal.
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC]
EXTERNALSETPOINT the setpoint
is given by the controller connected
to the SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE
the controller output is frozen (kept
constant).

245
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
For normalized controllers (used
together with AMPLIFICATION).
NORMRANGE Real
Indicates measuring range for input
to controller.
Time required to change valve
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value.
For use with EXTENDED CASCADE
SAMPLEDT Real (s) controller. Logging time interval for
the primary controller variable.
Time interval between each
SAMPLETIME Real (s) sampling of input. Activates digital
controller option.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve settings or
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0]
compressor speed from minimum to
maximum value or vice versa.
RealList
TIME Time series for the SETPOINT key.
(s)
If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the
time step control is bypassed. If
TIMESTEPCONTRO
Symbol OFF | [ON] STROKETIME is less than DTMIN
L
the time step control is also
bypassed.

246
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ESDCONTROLLER
ESD - Emergency shutdown controller. The ESD controller will send a signal intended to close a
valve when the measured variable is above or below (depending on the OPENMODE key) the
setpoint value. The setpoint is given as a signal or a key. The valve is opened again if RESET is
given, and if the measured variable is below or above (depending on the OPENMODE key) the
setpoint value.

The ESD controller has the following signal terminals:

MEASRD_1..N (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time required to change valve
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed
from maximum to minimum value.
Time from when the measured
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] value is read to when it is used by
the controller.
ALL | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL |
SAMPLETIME |
MAXCHANGE | DELAY |
States which keys should be
RESET | SETPOINT |
EXPOSE SymbolList made available as input variables
MODE |
on the OPC server.
MANUALOUTPUT |
STROKETIME |
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME
LABEL String [ESDCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.

247
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Analog controller: Maximum
allowed change in controller
output signal from one time-step
to the next. This restriction is used
by the time-step control. If the
change in output exceeds this
value, OLGA will go back to the
previous point in time and
integrate with a shorter time-step.
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2]
Digital controller: Maximum
discrepancy between the instance
a sample should be taken and the
actual time in the simulation in
terms of a fraction of the sample
time interval. (E.g., with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and
MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller output is
given by key MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
MANUAL |
controller output is given by the
EXTERNALSIGNAL |
MODE SymbolList controller connected to the
EXTERNALSETPOINT |
SIGNAL terminal.
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC]
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the controller
connected to the SETPOINT
terminal. FREEZE the controller
output is frozen (kept constant).
Time required to change valve
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed
from minimum to maximum value.
For ESD. Either ABOVE or
BELOW. Depending on whether
OPENMODE Symbol BELOW | [ABOVE] the valve is to close when the
signal goes above or below the
setpoint.

248
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
The valve closes if the input
variable gets below or exceeds
RESET RealList
the reset value depending on
OPENMODE.
Time interval between each
SAMPLETIME Real (s) sampling of input. Activates digital
controller option.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve settings
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value or
vice versa.
Time series for the SETPOINT
TIME RealList (s)
key.
If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the
time step control is bypassed. If
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol OFF | [ON] STROKETIME is less than
DTMIN the time step control is
also bypassed.

249
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

MANUALCONTROLLER
The manual controller simulates an operator. It provides a valve opening directly from a user specified
series, only dependent on time. The user specified series is given in the setpoint key, or as a setpoint
signal. The manual controller limits the setpoint with STROKETIME or CLOSINGTIME/OPENINGTIME.

A manual controller has the following signal terminals:

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
from maximum to minimum
value.
ALL | SAMPLETIME |
MAXSIGNAL | MINSIGNAL |
SETPOINT | MODE |
States which keys should be
MANUALOUTPUT |
EXPOSE SymbolList made available as input
STROKETIME |
variables on the OPC server.
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME |
MAXCHANGE
LABEL String [MANUALCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.

250
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Analog controller: Maximum
allowed change in controller
output signal from one time-
step to the next. This
restriction is used by the time-
step control. If the change in
output exceeds this value,
OLGA will go back to the
previous point in time and
integrate with a shorter time-
step. Digital controller:
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2]
Maximum discrepancy
between the instance a
sample should be taken and
the actual time in the
simulation in terms of a
fraction of the sample time
interval. (E.g., with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and
MAXCHANGE=0.2, the
maximum discrepancy will be
±0.4s.)
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller
output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
MANUAL |
controller output is given by
EXTERNALSIGNAL |
MODE SymbolList the controller connected to the
EXTERNALSETPOINT |
SIGNAL terminal.
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC]
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the
controller connected to the
SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE
the controller output is frozen
(kept constant).
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
from minimum to maximum
value.
If RANGECHECK=ON
MINSIGNAL and MAXSIGNAL
RANGECHECK Symbol ON | [OFF] will be used to limit the output
signal.

251
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time interval between each
SAMPLETIME Real (s) sampling of input. Activates
digital controller option.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed
from minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
Time series for the SETPOINT
TIME RealList (s)
key.
If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF
the time step control is
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol OFF | [ON] bypassed. If STROKETIME is
less than DTMIN the time step
control is also bypassed.

252
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OVERRIDECONTROLLER
An override controller is a low select or high select operator. An override controller uses any number of
input signals. The input signals are compared, and the minimum/maximum (depending on the
SELECTIONMODE key) input signal is chosen as the output signal from the override controller.

An override controller has the following signal terminals:

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

INPSIG_1..N (Required input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time required to change
valve settings or compressor
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
speed from maximum to
minimum value.
ALL | MAXSIGNAL | MINSIGNAL
| SAMPLETIME | MODE | States which keys should be
EXPOSE SymbolList MANUALOUTPUT | made available as input
STROKETIME | OPENINGTIME | variables on the OPC server.
CLOSINGTIME
LABEL String [OVERRIDECONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.

253
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller
output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
controller output is given by
MANUAL | EXTERNALSIGNAL | the controller connected to
MODE SymbolList
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC] the SIGNAL terminal.
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the
controller connected to the
SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE
the controller output is frozen
(kept constant).

Time required to change

valve settings or compressor
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
speed from minimum to
maximum value.
Time interval between each
SAMPLETIME Real (s) sampling of input. Activates
digital controller option.
An override controller selects
either minimum or maximum
of the signals from all the
SELECTIONMODE Symbol HIGH | [LOW] subcontrollers. Key
SELECTIONMODE
determines the selection of
minimum or maximum signal.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] settings or compressor speed
from minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
Time series for the
TIME RealList (s)
SETPOINT key.

254
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PIDCONTROLLER
PID (Proportional-Integral-Derivative) controllers are designed to maintain a specified value (given by a
setpoint signal or key) for a measured flow variable (given as an input signal).

The user can specify if the controller is linear or non-linear. If a controller is non-linear, the user has to
give tables for specifying the amplification factors, integral time constants, and derivative time constants
as functions of the error input.

The PID controller has the following signal terminals:

MEASRD (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

WINDUP (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
PID amplification factor. If the non-
AMPLIFICATION RealList linear option is chosen, this is an array
as a function of the ERROR array.
BIAS Real Initial output signal.
Time required to change valve settings
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] or compressor speed from maximum
to minimum value.
Setpoint for
DEFAULTINPUT Real
INACTIVEMODE=DEFAULTMODE.
Time from when the measured value is
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] read to when it is used by the
controller.
Coefficient in front of the derivative
RealList term of PID controllers. If the non-
DERIVATIVECONST [0.0]
(s) linear option is chosen, this is an array
as a function of the ERROR array.
Activate the non-linear option for the
PID. Coefficients are given as an array
ERROR RealList [0.0] of values representing each value in
ERROR. Error is the deviation.

255
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
ALL | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL |
SAMPLETIME |
MAXCHANGE | DELAY |
AMPLIFICATION | BIAS
| DERIVATIVECONST |
States which keys should be made
SymbolLis ERROR |
EXPOSE available as input variables on the
t INTEGRALCONST |
OPC server.
NORMRANGE |
SETPOINT | MODE |
MANUALOUTPUT |
STROKETIME |
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME
Specify how the controller acts when it
is deactivated by a selector, override
controller etc. ONHOLD: Restore old
values, everything is on hold.
INTERLOCK: The PID controller gets
feedback on the output signal used
ONHOLD | INTERLOCK from the connected controller (Selector
INACTIVEMODE Symbol | DEFAULTINPUT | or Override). If the PID controller
NORMAL becomes inactive it will back calculate
its integral error to match the output
signal of the connected controller.
DEFAULTINPUT: Compute output
signal based on default input, given in
key DEFAULTINPUT. NORMAL: no
action.
Coefficient in front of the integral of
PID controllers. It represents a
characteristic time. N.b., it is the
RealList inverse of the coefficient which
INTEGRALCONST [1.0E+10]
(s) appears in the expression for the
output signal. If the non-linear option is
chosen, this is an array as a function
of the ERROR array.
LABEL String [PIDCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller..
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.

256
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Analog controller: Maximum allowed
change in controller output signal from
one time-step to the next.

This restriction is used by the time-

step control. If the change in output
exceeds this value, OLGA will go back
to the previous point in time and
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] integrate with a shorter time-step.
Digital controller: Maximum
discrepancy between the instance a
sample should be taken and the actual
time in the simulation in terms of a
fraction of the sample time interval.
(E.g., with SAMPLETIME=2.0s and
MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is defined
on the controller. MANUAL: The
controller output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
MANUAL |
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller
EXTERNALSIGNAL |
SymbolLis output is given by the controller
MODE EXTERNALSETPOINT |
t connected to the SIGNAL terminal.
FREEZE |
EXTERNALSETPOINT the setpoint is
[AUTOMATIC]
given by the controller connected to
the SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE the
controller output is frozen (kept
constant).
For normalized controllers (used
together with AMPLIFICATION).
NORMRANGE Real
Indicates measuring range for input to
controller.
Time required to change valve settings
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] or compressor speed from minimum to
maximum value.
Time interval between each sampling
SAMPLETIME Real (s) of input. Activates digital controller
option.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
Stroke or actuator time. Time required
to change valve settings or
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] compressor speed from minimum to
maximum value or vice versa.

257
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
RealList
TIME Time series for the SETPOINT key.
(s)
If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the time
TIMESTEPCONTRO step control is bypassed. If
Symbol OFF | [ON]
L STROKETIME is less than DTMIN the
time step control is also bypassed.

258
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SCALERCONTROLLER
The main purpose of a SCALER controller is to scale the measured signal from range
LOWLIMIT..HIGHLIMIT to range MINSIGNAL..MAXSIGNAL. Output U is set:

U = (Y -LOWLIMIT)/(HIGHLIMIT - LOWLIMIT)*(MAXSIGNAL-MINSIGNAL) + MINSIGNAL

where Y is the measured signal, value at the MEASRD terminal.

A scaler controller has the following terminals:

MEASRD (Required input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
BIAS Real [0.0] Initial output signal.
Time required to change
valve settings or
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] compressor speed from
maximum to minimum
value.
Time from when the
measured value is read to
DELAY Real (s) [0.0]
when it is used by the
controller.
ALL | BIAS | MAXSIGNAL | MINSIGNAL States which keys should
| LOWLIMIT | HIGHLIMIT | DELAY | be made available as input
EXPOSE SymbolList
STROKETIME | OPENINGTIME | variables on the OPC
CLOSINGTIME server.
High limit for measured
HIGHLIMIT Real
signal.
LABEL String [SCALERCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
Low limit for measured
LOWLIMIT Real
signal.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
Time required to change
valve settings or
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value.
Stroke or actuator time.
Time required to change
valve settings or
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0]
compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.

259
 CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SELECTORCONTROLLER
The selector controller has two sub controllers, SUBCONLOW and SUBCONHIGH. The selector
controller switches between these sub-controllers depending of the low and high limits given as
input through the HIGHLIMITSIG and LOWLIMITSIG signal terminals. A sub-controller that is active
due to a limit being reached stays active until another limit is reached. Then another sub-controller
takes over, and stays active until yet another limit is reached.

Any number of limits (HIGHLIMITSIG/LOWLIMITSIG) can be given.

A selector controller has the following signal terminals:

SUBCONLOW (Required input)

SUBCONHIGH (Required input)

HIGHLIMITSIG_1..N (Required input)

LOWLIMITSIG_1..N (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Time required to change
valve settings or
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] compressor speed from
maximum to minimum
value.
Time from when the
measured value is read to
DELAY Real (s) [0.0]
when it is used by the
controller.
ALL | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL | SAMPLETIME |
States which keys should
DELAY | MODE |
SymbolLis be made available as input
EXPOSE MANUALOUTPUT |
t variables on the OPC
STROKETIME |
server.
OPENINGTIME |
CLOSINGTIME

260
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
HIGHLIMIT is compared
with the HIGHLIMITSIG
signal input. If the signal
from SUBCONLOW is
used, the controller will
switch to the
SUBCONHIGH signal if
HIGHLIMIT RealList HIGHLIMITSIG >
HIGHLIMIT. If multiple
HIGHLIMIT/HIGHLIMITSIG
is given, the controller will
loop all connections and
test if HIGHLIMITSIG_i >
HIGHLIMIT[i]

Active sub-controller at the

INITIALCONTROLLE SUBCONHIGH | start of the simulation. Has
Symbol
R SUBCONLOW to refer to a SUBCON
terminal.
[SELECTORCONTROLLER_1
LABEL String Name of controller.
]
LOWLIMIT is compared
with the LOWLIMITSIG
signal input. If the signal
from SUBCONHIGH is
used, the controller will
switch to the
SUBCONLOW signal if
LOWLIMIT RealList
LOWLIMITSIG <
LOWLIMIT. If multiple
LOWLIMIT/LOWLIMITSIG
is given, the controller will
loop all connections and
test if LOWLIMITSIG_i <
LOWLIMIT[i].
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.

261
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint
is defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller
output is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
controller output is given by
MANUAL |
SymbolLis the controller connected to
MODE EXTERNALSIGNAL | FREEZE
t the SIGNAL terminal.
| [AUTOMATIC]
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the
controller connected to the
SETPOINT terminal.
FREEZE the controller
output is frozen (kept
constant).
Time required to change
valve settings or
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value.
Time interval between each
sampling of input. Activates
SAMPLETIME Real (s)
digital controller option.

Stroke or actuator time.

Time required to change
valve settings or
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0]
compressor speed from
minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
RealList Time series for the
TIME
(s) SETPOINT key.

262
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

STDCONTROLLER
The STDController converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.
Set correct phase in PHASE key. Specify the fluid in the FLUID or FEEDNAME keys. Specify the
wanted GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT, and the overall mass flow rate will be calculated.

Connect the STDController output terminal OUTSIG to a PID controller MEASRD terminal.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Condensate-gas ratio. The
Real
CGR default value is the equilibrium
(Sm3/Sm3)
value from PVT data.
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList Mass fraction of each feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList Mole fraction of each feed.
Label of feeds feeding to
terminal nodes. Requires
FEEDNAME SymbolList COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS
keyword.
Volume fraction of each feed
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList given in FEEDNAME for choke
model (only for Blackoil model).
Label or number of fluid table to
apply for the specific branch. If
a keyword based pvt-file is
FLUID Symbol used, FLUID must be the same
as the LABEL given in the pvt-
file, i.e., numbering is not valid
for this format.
Real Gas/liquid volumetric flow ratio
GLR
(Sm3/Sm3) at standard conditions.
Gas/oil volumetric flow ratio at
Real standard conditions. By default,
GOR [-1.0]
(Sm3/Sm3) the GOR from the PVT table is
used.
LABEL String [STDCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
Molecular weight of equivalent
gas (total flow). By default, the
gas density at standard
Real
MOLWEIGHT conditions from the PVT table is
(kg/kmol)
used to determine the molecular
weight.

Sm3/h | Sm3/d | scf/d |

MMscf/d | STB/d | STB/M |
OUTPUTUNIT Symbol Unit of controller output.
scf/s | scf/h | MSm3/d |
Mscf/d | [Sm3/s]
GAS | OIL | WATER | The phase for which the
PHASE Symbol
LIQUID | ALL volumetric flow rate is specified.

263
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Water volume fraction in
oil/water mixture. With a value
WATERCUT Real [-1.0]
of -1.0 the total water fraction is
taken from the fluid table.
Ratio between water (including
Real water in gas phase) and gas. By
WGR [-1.0]
(Sm3/Sm3) default, WGR from the PVT
table is used.

264
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SWITCHCONTROLLER
The main purpose of the switch controller is to switch between alternative inputs values. The output of
the controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or SETPOINT terminal if
MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT.

SP < 1.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_1

1.5 <= SP < 2.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_2

2.5 <= SP < 3.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_3

….

(Ni-0.5) <= SP unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_N

Where Ni is the number of connected input terminals INPSIG

A switch controller has the following terminals:

INPSIG_1..Ni (Required input)

MODE (Optional input)

SIGNAL (Optional input)

SETPOINT (Optional input)

ACTIVATE (Optional input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
BIAS Real [0.0] Initial output signal.
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
from maximum to minimum
value.
Time from when the measured
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] value is read to when it is used
by the controller.
ALL | BIAS | MAXSIGNAL |
MINSIGNAL | DELAY |
States which keys should be
SymbolLi SETPOINT | MODE |
EXPOSE made available as input
st MANUALOUTPUT |
variables on the OPC server.
STROKETIME | OPENINGTIME
| CLOSINGTIME
LABEL String [SWITCHCONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.

265
CONTROLLER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is
defined on the controller.
MANUAL: The controller output
is given by key
MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The
MANUAL | EXTERNALSIGNAL |
SymbolLi controller output is given by the
MODE EXTERNALSETPOINT |
st controller connected to the
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC]
SIGNAL terminal.
EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the controller
connected to the SETPOINT
terminal. FREEZE the controller
output is frozen (kept constant).
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0]
from minimum to maximum
value.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve settings
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value or
vice versa.
RealList Time series for the SETPOINT
TIME
(s) key.

266
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TABLECONTROLLER
A table controller uses the input signal (terminal INPSIG) as lookup variable, x, in a table. The controller
output is y = f(x). The look-up function is linear interpolation.

The table controller has the following terminals:

INPSIG (Required input)

OUTSIG_1..N (Optional output)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:() Default:[ ]
BIAS Real [0.0] Initial output signal.
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10]
from maximum to minimum
value.
Time from when the measured
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] value is read to when it is used
by the controller.
ALL | DELAY | BIAS | MAXSIGNAL | States which keys should be
EXPOSE SymbolList MINSIGNAL | STROKETIME | made available as input
OPENINGTIME | CLOSINGTIME variables on the OPC server.
LABEL String [TABLECONTROLLER_1] Name of controller.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10]
from minimum to maximum
value.
Stroke or actuator time. Time
required to change valve
STROKETIME Real (s) [10] settings or compressor speed
from minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
Label of the table. The table
consist of x and y. Input signal
TABLE Symbol
x1 gives output signal y1 by
table interpolation.

267
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OUTPUTDATA (on CONTROLLER)

This statement defines the controller variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).

See Controller Output Variables for available variables.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
VARIABL SymbolList List of variables to be printed.
E (ValueUnitPair) Units may be specified.

TRENDDATA (on CONTROLLER)

This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for controllers. A trend plot is a time
series plot for a specified variable.

For available variables see Controller Output Variables.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
VARIABL SymbolList List of variables to be plotted.
E (ValueUnitPair) Units may be specified.

268
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

CORROSION
This statement is used to define corrosion module input parameters. Requires access to the corrosion
module.

If the corrosion rate in single phase liquid flow is to be calculated correctly, PTMAX must be set equal
to the pressure in the pipeline where gas is formed (bubble point pressure). That is, if a simulation
shows single phase liquid flow, a new simulation should be performed with the correct PTMAX set to
the pressure in the section where gas is formed. Alternatively, the output variable PCO2 can be read
and PCO2MAX can be set to the PCO2 value in the section where gas is formed.

The corrosion module cannot be applied together with the wax deposition module.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Bicarbonate (HCO3-)
BICARBONATE Real [0.0] concentration in water given in
Molar (M=mol/l).
Mole percentage of CO2 in gas
CO2FRACTION Real phase (ratio of CO2 partial
pressure to total pressure in %).
Glycol concentration in weight-%
in a glycol/water mixture. Only
used if Inhibitor tracking is not
GLYCOLFRACTION Real [0.0]
used. If Inhibitor tracking is used,
the glycol fraction will be
calculated.
Inhibitor (not glycol) efficiency in
%. The effect of glycol and an
additional inhibitor (through
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY)
depends on the model used. For
INHIBITOREFFICIENC the NORSOK model, the larger
Real [0.0]
Y of the two resulting reduction
factors is used, while for the de
Waard models the product of the
two factors is used.
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY=100%
means no corrosion.
Total ionic strength in Molar
IONICSTRENGTH Real [0.0]
(M=mol/l).
Which model to use. MODEL1:
SymbolLis MODEL1 | MODEL2 | NORSOK. MODEL2: Top of Line
MODEL
t MODEL3 | [ALL] corrosion model. MODEL3: de
Waard 95.
Maximum CO2 partial pressure
PCO2MAX Real (Pa) [1000000]
in single phase liquid flow.
Whether or not to calculate the
pH for condensed water
PHSAT Symbol ON | [OFF]
saturated with ion carbonate.

269
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Bubble point pressure from
which the CO2 partial pressure
PTMAX Real (Pa)
for a single phase liquid flow will
be calculated.
Water droplet wall wetting limit.
Has to be given as watercut in
%. If the liquid film watercut is
higher than this value, the water
droplets will wet the wall, even if
no continuous water film is
present. It is only used in the
corrosion module to detect if
water droplets are wetting the
WCWET Real [30.0]
wall. It has no influence on the
flow conditions. If a continuous
water film is predicted by the
flow model, water wetting is
detected by the corrosion
module regardless of the water
cut set as the wetting limit. See
the corrosion module description
in ch. 2 for further information.

270
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

DRILLINGFLUID
This statement enables the use of drilling fluids. They are treated as extra fluids and are tracked
through the pipeline. They do not replace any of the phases. The fluid properties of a drilling fluid
can be given in two different ways:

1. Define the range of density and viscosity at standard conditions for a drilling fluid. The density
and viscosity used at the inlet is given in SOURCE or NODE.

2. Get the fluid properties for the drilling fluid from a separate fluid property file. The fluid property
file must then have an appropriate string in the header of the file:
• string "GASMUD" if gas phase is used as drilling fluid
• string "OILMUD” if oil phase is used as drilling fluid
• string "WATERMUD" if water phase is used as drilling fluid

Non-Newtonian rheology is applied if the PVT table contains the rheology parameters yield stress
or power law exponent. The non-Newtonian models Bingham and Power law are used to modify
the viscosity of the drilling fluid as for the complex viscosity option, see (Complex Fluid Module).
For oil-based mud, the power law exponent or yield stress is read when the heading contains the
strings "POWEXPL" or "YIELDSTRL" respectively. For water-based mud, the power law exponent
or yield stress is read when the heading contains the strings "POWEXPW" or "YIELDSTRW"
respectively. For both types of mud the power law exponent and/or the yield stress should then
be given in the file as a function of pressure and temperature.

A combination of 1) and 2) can not be used in the same case.

This keyword requires access to the Wells Module.

Type
Parameter set
Key Unit:( Description
Default:[ ]
)
Real Density of cutting particles. Global value
CUTDENSITY [2100.0]
(kg/m3) that only should be set once.
FLUIDTABLE Symbol Label or number of fluid table in PVT file.
[DRILLINGFLU
LABEL String Name of definition.
ID-1]
The maximum density of the drilling fluid to
Real be used in the entire drilling process. The
MAXDENSITY
(kg/m3) densisty must be given at standard
conditions.
The maximum viscosity of the drilling fluid
Real (N- to be used in the entire drilling process.
MAXVISCOSITY
s/m2) The viscosity must be given at standard
conditions.
The minimum density of the drilling fluid to
Real be used in the entire drilling process. The
MINDENSITY
(kg/m3) density must be given at standard
conditions.

271
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type
Parameter set
Key Unit:( Description
Default:[ ]
)
The minimum viscosity of the drilling fluid
Real (N- to be used in the entire drilling process.
MINVISCOSITY
s/m2) The viscosity must be given at standard
conditions.
WATERMUD |
Type of drilling fluid. The following types
TYPE Symbol OILMUD |
are allowed: WATER, OIL, and GAS.
GASMUD
B constant in the Vogel viscosity model for
water based muds. visc =
VISCOSITYBCONST Real
visc0*exp(B/(T+C)) where visc0 is given in
SOURCE and/or NODE.
C constant in the Vogel viscosity model for
water based muds. visc =
VISCOSITYCCONST Real
visc0*exp(B/(T+C)) where visc0 is given in
SOURCE and/or NODE.

272
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

DTCONTROL (on caselevel)

This statement defines a switch for stability control.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
The Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL)
CFL Symbol OFF | [ON]
criterion based on the flow velocity.
CFLFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for the CFL time-step.
Time-step control based on the first-order
GRADPRESSURE Symbol ON | [OFF]
derivative of pressure w.r.t. time.
PREFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for pressure criterion.
Time-step control based on the second-
PRESSURE Symbol ON | [OFF]
order derivative of pressure w.r.t. time.
Time-step control based on the speed of
SOUND_CFL Symbol ON | [OFF]
pressure waves.

DTCONTROL (on flowpath level)

This statement defines a switch for stability control.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Pipeline position where the criteria
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) changes will be applied. Absolute position.
Distance from branch inlet.
The Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL)
CFL Symbol OFF | [ON]
criterion based on the flow velocity.
CFLFACTOR Real [0.8] Adjust the CFL time-step.
Time-step control based on the first-order
GRADPRESSURE Symbol ON | [OFF]
derivative of pressure w.r.t. time.
Pipe numbers or labels where the criteria
PIPE SymbolList
changes will be applied.
Labels of specified positions where the
POSITION SymbolList
criteria changes will be applied.
PREFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for pressure criterion.
Time-step control based on the second-
PRESSURE Symbol ON | [OFF]
order derivative of pressure w.r.t. time.
Section numbers where the criteria
SECTION IntegerList 0
changes will be applied.
Time-step control based on the speed of
SOUND_CFL Symbol ON | [OFF]
pressure waves.

273
 FEED OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

FEED
This statement defines a feed (fluid composition used in a source or at a boundary) and its
components with belonging mole fractions. The components in the feed must be defined in the feed
file, and the properties for each component will be taken from the feed file. Feeds can also be
defined directly in the feed file. The feed file is generated in PVTsim.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Components in feed. For COMOSITIONAL=ON
the components are defined in the feed file. For
COMPONENT SymbolList DRILLING=ON available components are HC,
H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH, CUTTING and MUD
components.
LABEL String [FEED-1] Name of feed.
MASSFRACTION RealList Mass fractions of the components of the feed.
Mole fractions of the components of the feed.
MOLEFRACTION RealList
Can not be used with Drilling.

FILES
This statement defines the additional input files, e.g., PVT table files for fluid properties, pump
data table files, compressor table files, feed file for the compositional tracking model and wax file
for the wax deposition model.

Note: several files can be listed for COMPRESSORFILE, PUMPFILE and PVTFILE.

If drilling fluids are used and the fluid properties are given in files, these are specified as
additional files in the PVTFILE key.

Paramete
Type
Key r set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
COMPRESSORFIL StringLis Name of COMPRESSOR file(s). The files can
E t contain several compressors each.
Name of FEED file (used by the
compositional tracking module). Note that
FEEDFILE String
only one file may be specified, however one
file can contain several feeds.
StringLis Name of PUMP file(s). Each file can contain
PUMPFILE
t only one pump.
StringLis
PVTFILE Name of the file(s) containing fluid properties.
t
Name of the file containing the WAX table.
Note that only one wax table can be specified
WAXFILE String
for the time being. See user manual for
details.

274
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

FLOWPATH
This statement defines the label of the flow path.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
The phase of the fluid flowing in the
FLUIDTYPE Symbol GAS | OIL | WATER
single-phase line.
General information about the flowpath.
INFO String
For information purposes only.
LABEL String [FLOWPATH_1] Name of flow path.
NO: Three-phase flow. YES: Use a
LINE Symbol YES | [NO]
single-phase fluid in the flowline.

275
 FLUID OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

FLUID
This statement enables the use of the complex viscosity model and the complex fluid model
for simulation of non-Newtonian flows and high viscosity liquids.

The complex fluid model

The Complex Fluid module requires a separate license. The module utilizes either the
Bingham, the power law or a Newtonian model. As opposed to the complex viscosity
model, the complex fluid model includes numerous modifications to the physical models for
both separated and distributed flow taking into account the non-Newtonian behavior of the
fluids. As soon as TYPE is set to COMPLEXFLUID the modified physical models are used,
even if CFLUML or CFLUMW are set to NEWTONIAN.

Due to limited testing against Newtonian data, the complex fluid model is not recommended
used on gas-condensate and oil-gas systems with oil viscosity less than 50 cp.

For the complex fluid model, the fluid properties can be given in two ways, simple or full
(FULL = YES). In the simple mode the power law exponent or yield stress is given in the
main input file. In the full mode, the power law exponent or the yield stress is given as a
function of pressure and temperature in the fluid property table file specified in PVTFILE in
FILES. This implies that the FLUID keyword must be given above the FILES keyword in the
OLGA input file since the fluid property files are read as soon as OLGA reads the FILES
keyword.

In all cases the hydrocarbon liquid and/or the water viscosity part of the usual PVT file is
used. In the power law formulation it is used as the consistency factor K, and in the
Bingham formulation it is used as the coefficient of rigidity. Therefore, setting CFLUML =
NEWTONIAN is equivalent to CFLUML = BINGHAM with YIELDSTRL = 0, and CFLUML =
POWERLAW with POWEXPL = 1.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex fluid model of the
CFLUML Symbol
[NEWTONIAN] liquid hydrocarbon phase.
BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex fluid model of the
CFLUMW Symbol
[NEWTONIAN] water phase.
Consistency factor for
CONSFL Real hydrocarbon liquid in the complex
viscosity model.
Consistency factor for water
CONSFW Real phase in the complex viscosity
model.
BINGHAM | POWERLAW |
Type of complex viscosity model
CVISL Symbol HERSCHELBUCKLEY |
of the liquid hydrocarbon phase.
[NEWTONIAN]
BINGHAM | POWERLAW |
Type of complex viscosity model
CVISW Symbol HERSCHELBUCKLEY |
of the water phase.
[NEWTONIAN]
Whether or not to use power
exponent/yield stress as function
FULL Symbol YES | [NO] of P and T from the fluid property
file in a complex fluid model.

276
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Hydrocarbon liquid plastic
Real (N-
PLASTL viscosity, used in the complex
s/m2)
viscosity model.
Real (N- Water plastic viscosity used in the
PLASTW
s/m2) complex viscosity model.
Exponent for water phase model,
POWEXPW Real used in both the complex viscosity
and complex fluid model.
COMPLEXFLUID |
TYPE Symbol COMPLEXVISCOSITY | Fluid model type.
[NEWTONIAN]
Yield stress for hydrocarbon liquid
YIELDSTRL Real (Pa) phase in the complex viscosity
and complex fluid models.
Yield stress for water phase in the
YIELDSTR
Real (Pa) complex viscosity and complex
W
fluid models.

277
 FLUIDBUNDLE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

FLUIDBUNDLE
FLUIDBUNDLE is a network component.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
LABEL String [FLUIDBUNDLE_1] Name of Fluidbundle.

This keyword defines a carrier line that encloses one or several FLOWPATHS, LINES and/or
FLUIDBUNDLES. The carrier line itself must be specified as either a FLOWPATH or a LINE. The length
and elevation of each pipe section contained in the bundle must be maintained. Pipe diameters must be
constant in the axial direction. The effects of heat transfer between all the pipelines will be accounted
for.

A LINE is a FLOWPATH for which simplified one-phase calculations are performed. It is activated by
choosing LINE=YES as a parameter for a FLOWPATH. FLOWPATHS must be connected to nodes
when the sub key LINE=YES. The CROSSOVER functionality must be set up explicitly with nodes of
type CROSSOVER with a specified reference pressure and boost pressure.

The outer heat transfer coefficients and the ambient temperatures used by the Fluid Bundle are the
values given for the outermost pipeline.

The outer surface heat transfer coefficient for each OLGA FLOWPATH can be calculated by the code or
specified by the user. If calculated by the code the forced/free convection on the outer surface will be
taken into account. The user can specify the outer surface heat transfer coefficient by the sub key
OUTERHVALUE.

See also COMPONENT below and AMBIENTDATA. PROFILEDATA, SERVERDATA and

TRENDDATA are also available for FLUIDBUNDLE.

AMBIENTDATA (on Fluid bundle)

See keyword AMBIENTDATA. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and solid
bundle.

278
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

COMPONENT (on Fluid bundle)

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
FLOWPATH Symbol Label of a FLOWPATH that resides inside the BUNDLE.
FLUIDBUNDLE Symbol Label of a bundle that resides inside the BUNDLE.
Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it
FROM Symbol
enters the BUNDLE.
Label of a line (FLOWPATH) that resides inside the
LINE Symbol
BUNDLE.
Real Heat transfer coefficient at the wall surface of a branch to
OUTERHVALUE (W/m2- the bulk fluid in the carrier line. Forced/free convection
C) will be applied if this key is not defined.
Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it exits
TO Symbol
the BUNDLE.
The component's displacement along the x-axis relative
XOFFSET Real (m) [0.0]
to the center of the bundle.
The component's displacement along the y-axis relative
YOFFSET Real (m) [0.0]
to the center of the bundle.

PROFILEDATA (on Fluid bundle)

See PROFILEDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and
solid bundle.

SERVERDATA (on Fluid bundle)

See SERVERDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and
solid bundle.

TRENDDATA (on Fluid bundle)

See TRENDDATA for bundles. This keyword is the same for all bundles; annulus, fluid bundle and solid
bundle.

279
GEOMETRY OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

GEOMETRY
This statement defines the geometry label and the co-ordinates of the starting point for a branch. The
pipes belonging to this geometry must be defined sequentially after the geometry statement by use
of the PIPE-keyword for each pipe.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
LABEL String [GEOMETRY-1] Geometry label
XSTART Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
YSTART Real (m) [0] y-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
ZSTART Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry

280
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

HEATEXCHANGER
This statement describes the effects of a heat exchanger. There are two types of heat exchangers;
setpoint and controlled.

The setpoint heat exchanger is represented as an ideal loss. The heat exchanged is equal to the
enthalpy difference corresponding to the difference between the inlet temperature and a user specified
outlet temperature of the heat exchanger.

The controlled heat exchanger does not know the outlet temperature and does not calculate the heat
exchanged. Instead it uses a controller to specify the effect to be used. The controller signal (which
should be between 0 and 1) is the fraction of the heat exchangers maximum capacity. A controller
signal of 1 implies that the heat exchanger uses its maximum capacity.

Note that a heat exchanger cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of the pipeline.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
Maximum heat exchanger capacity. Positive value
CAPACITY Real (W)
is for heating and negative value for cooling.
LABEL String [HEATEX-1] Heat exchanger label.
Number/name of the pipe where heat exchanger is
PIPE Symbol
located.
Position of the heat exchanger. If POSITION is
POSITION Symbol defined, PIPE and SECTIONBOUNDARY should
not be used.
Section number where the heat exchanger is
SECTION Integer 0
located.
RealList
TEMPERATURE Heat exchanger outlet temperature set points.
(C)
RealList
TIME Time series in temperature set point table.
(s)
CONTROLLED
TYPE Symbol Heat exchanger type.
| [SETPOINT]

281
HEATTRANSFER OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

HEATTRANSFER
This statement specifies the heat transfer data for the pipe walls. The temperature of the
surroundings must be given. In addition to this one of the following three options must be used:

• Specify overall heat transfer coefficient: UVALUE (requires TEMPERATURE=UGIVEN in

OPTIONS)
• Specify ambient heat transfer coefficient: HAMBIENT (HOUTEROPTION=HGIVEN, requires
TEMPERATURE=WALL in OPTIONS)
• Specify properties of the ambient fluid (HOUTEROPTION=OTHER / WATER / AIR, requires
TEMPERATURE=WALL in OPTIONS)

For options 2 and 3, the overall heat transfer coefficient is calculated and the keyword WALL has to
be specified. If option 3 is used, the ambient heat transfer coefficient is a function of the pipe
diameter, the fluid velocity, and fluid properties such as density and viscosity. Velocity and fluid
properties have to be given only if a user specified fluid is used (HOUTEROPTION=OTHER). The
VELOCITY can be specified for HOUTEROPTION=AIR or WATER, otherwise the default values
4 m/s and 1 m/s, respectively, will be used. Default values are applied for all other properties when
HOUTEROPTION=AIR or WATER.

In order to simplify the input of the ambient temperature distribution along a predefined pipeline
section, the user can specify start and end ambient temperature and OLGA will perform an
interpolation along the pipeline. Four different interpolation options are available. For the default
option, SECTIONWISE, the ambient temperature is given by the user for the midpoint of the first
and last section. The interpolation is performed between these points using the distance between
section midpoints to achieve a linear temperature profile with respect to the distance along the
pipeline. For the options HORIZONTAL, LENGTH, and VERTICAL, the ambient temperature is
specified at the inlet and outlet boundaries (INTAMBIENT and OUTTAMBIENT). The interpolation is
then based on either horizontal length, actual length or vertical depth.

Type Parameter
Key Unit:( set Description
) Default:[ ]
Heat capacity of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1000 J/KG-K is
used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
CAPACITY 4186 J/KG-K is used. Input can either be a
(J/kg-C)
single value (constant along range of
sections), two values (length-interpolated)
or given explicitly for each section.
Thermal conductivity of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 0.023 W/mK is
used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
CONDUCTIVITY 0.56 W/mK is used. Input can either be a
(W/m-C)
single value (constant along range of
sections), two values (length-interpolated)
or given explicitly for each section.

282
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Density of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.29 kg/m3 is
used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
DENSITY 1000 kg/m3 is used. Input can either be a
(kg/m3)
single value (constant along range of
sections), two values (length-interpolated)
or given explicitly for each section.
Thermal expansion coefficient of ambient
fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 34E-4
1/C is used. If HOUTEROPTION is
RealList WATER, 21E-5 1/C is used. Input can
EXPANSION
(1/C) either be a single value (constant along
range of sections), two values (length-
interpolated) or given explicitly for each
section.
Mean heat transfer coefficient on outer
RealList wall surface. Input can either be a single
HAMBIENT
(W/m2-C) value (constant along range of sections) or
given explicitly for each section.
RealList Minimum inner heat transfer coefficient on
HMININNERWALL [0.0]
(W/m2-C) inner wall surface.
AIR | WATER |
Option for ambient heat transfer
HOUTEROPTION Symbol OTHER |
coefficient.
[HGIVEN]
Overall heat transfer coefficient at the inlet
Real of the first pipe in a pipeline section where
INHAMBIENT
(W/m2-C) interpolation is used for overall heat
transfer coefficient.
Ambient temperature at the inlet of the first
INTAMBIENT Real (C) pipe in a branch where interpolation is
used for ambient temperature.
Type of interpolation used to calculate the
LENGTH | ambient temperature and outer heat
HORIZONTAL | transfer coefficient. Note that the outer
INTERPOLATION Symbol
VERTICAL | heat transfer coefficient is only affected by
[SECTIONWISE] the INTERPOLATION key when
HOUTEROPTION = HGIVEN.
Overall heat transfer coefficient at the
outlet of the last pipe in a pipeline section
Real
OUTHAMBIENT where interpolation is used for overall heat
(W/m2-C)
transfer coefficient.

283
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Ambient temperature at the outlet of the
last pipe in a pipeline section where
OUTTAMBIENT Real (C)
interpolation is used for ambient
temperature.
Pipe label or pipe number (single or
PIPE SymbolList [ALL]
continuous range in the form x-y).
SECTION IntegerList 0 Section number.
Ambient temperature. Input can either be
RealList a single value (constant along range of
TAMBIENT
(C) sections) or given explicitly for each
section.
List of reference to TIMESERIES
keywords. The value of each time series is
scaled with a corresponding factor in
TAMBIENTSERIES SymbolList TAMBSERIESFACTOR and added as an
increment to the temperature defined in
TAMBIENT or INTAMBIENT and
OUTTAMBIENT.
List of factors to be used to scale ambient
temperature time series in
TAMBSERIESFACTOR RealList [1]
TAMBIENTSERIES. Note that this key
also introduces the unit of the function.
RealList Overall heat transfer coefficient given by
UVALUE
(W/m2-C) user based on the inner pipe diameter.
Speed of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, default is 4 m/s.
If HOUTEROPTION is WATER, default is
RealList
VELOCITY 1 m/s. Input can either be a single value
(m/s)
(constant along range of sections), two
values (length-interpolated) or given
explicitly for each section.
Viscosity of ambient fluid. If
HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.8E-5 N-s/m2
is used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
RealList
VISCOSITY 1E-3 N-s/m2 is used. Input can either be a
(N-s/m2)
single value (constant along range of
sections), two values (length-interpolated)
or given explicitly for each section.

284
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

HYDRATECHECK
This keyword can be used to specify a set of hydrate formation curves and how these should be treated
in the flowpath.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Constant in Hammerschmidt equation. Note that
HAMCONST Real (C) [1297]
unit is delta temperature.
Switch for activating the Hammerschmidt formula
for computing hydrate temperature curves for
HAMMERSCHMID
Symbol ON | [OFF] different inhibitor concentrations. Can only be used
T
with a single hydrate curve without any specified
inhibitor concentration (i.e. INHIBITORCONC=0).
SymbolLis Labels of the HYDRATECURVEs (from Library)
HYDRATECURVE
t that shall be used in this flowpath.
Name of file with inhibitor corrections to hydrate
INHIBITORFILE String
equilibrium.
With PRESSOVERRIDE the limit for the difference
between hydrate and section pressure, DPHYD
PRESSOVERRIDE Real (Pa) [-5000000] (default -50 bar), can be changed. Such sections
are not used when calculating the maximum
DPHYD in a branch.
With TEMPOVERRIDE the limit for the difference
between hydrate and section temperature, DTHYD
TEMPOVERRIDE Real (C) [-50] (default -50 C), can be changed. Such sections are
not used when calculating the maximum DTHYD in
a branch.
Label of tracer feed. Requires TRACERTRACKING
= ON under the OPTIONS keyword. If given the
TRACERFEED Symbol
hydrate temperature will be corrected according to
INHIBITORFILE.
Hydrates will not form in sections with less water
WATERLIMIT Real [0]
than the waterlimit (default = 0).

285
HYDRATEKINETICS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

HYDRATEKINETICS
The hydrate kinetics module combines the hydrate kinetics and rheological model developed by
Colorado School of Mines with the flow equations of the OLGA model. The hydrate kinetics model
determines the amount of gas and water consumed by hydrate formation and the effective viscosity of
the hydrate particle laden oil phase. The flow model integrates the mass consumption rate to obtain the
amount of hydrate phase and uses the effective viscosity for the flow calculations.

The model is still in the research phase, and the initial emphasis has been on flowing liquid dominated
systems with excess of water and gas for hydrate formation. Future versions will likely also address gas
dominated systems and include deposition mechanisms. Special care should be taken when using the
model since the model has only been validated against limited data sets. Further, it is not designed for
shut-in and depressurization studies.

Type Parameter
Key Unit:( set Description
) Default:[ ]
Weighting factor for hydrate velocity related to oil
COIL Real [1.0]
velocity
Weighting factor for hydrate velocity related to water
CWATER Real [0.0]
velocity
NO: Use OLGA flow model. YES: Forces the gas
velocity to be proportional to the liquid velocity, and
DRIFTFLUX Symbol YES | [NO]
the keys VELOCITYRATIO and DRIFTVELOCITY
become active.
DRIFTVELOCITY is a constant slip velocity of the
Real gas. Used when DRIFTFLUX = YES. gas velocity =
DRIFTVELOCITY [0]
(m/s) VELOCITYRATIO times liquid velocity +
DRIFTVELOCITY
FOGEXPONENT is used to adjust the gas-liquid
interface friction. The scaling factor for the
FOGEXPONENT Real [0]
interfacial friction is equal to the viscosity ratio of the
oil phase raised to the power of FOGEXPONENT.
NO: Use OLGA oil/water dispersion model. YES:
Force all of oil or water to be dispersed in water or
FULLDISPERSION Symbol YES | [NO] oil depending on inversion point. The inversion point
can be adjusted through the WATEROPTIONS
keyword.
METHANECONCFIL
String File containing methane concentration in oil.
E

286
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter
Key Unit:( set Description
) Default:[ ]
Type of hydrate model. KINETIC should be used in
most cases. Two prototype models are available
from Colerado School of Mines: TRANSPORT and
TRANSPOR COLDFLOW. KINETIC calculate the rate of hydrate
T| formation using a chemical kinetics equation based
MODEL Symbol
COLDFLOW on the temperature driving force. TRANSPORT
| [KINETIC] accounts for mass and heat transfer resistances in
the calculation of the hydrate formation rate.
COLDFLOW adapted transport model for simulation
of the stabilized flow concept.
Type of hydrate structure. Structure I tends to
enclathrate smaller natural gas molecules such as
STRUCTURE Symbol SI | [SII] methane, whereas structure II tends to enclathrate
larger natural gas molecules such as propane
(Sloan and Koh, 2008)
Real Subcooling (given as temperature difference) from
SUBCOOLING [3.611111]
(C) hydrate equilibrium before nucleation. Default 6.5 F.
Distribution coefficient for gas velocity. Used when
VELOCITYRATIO Real [1]
DRIFTFLUX = YES

287
HYDRATECURVE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

HYDRATECURVE
This keyword defines a hydrate formation curve to be used with the HYDRATECHECK keyword.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Units and orders of columns of the
temperature and pressure in the
COLUMNHEADE SymbolList TEMPERATURE |
HYDRATEFILE. By default the first
R (ValueUnitPair) PRESSURE
column is for temperature and the second
for pressures.
YES: The hydrate dissociation curve is to
be read from a data file. NO: The hydrate
FROMFILE Symbol YES | [NO]
curve is specified using the keys
PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE.
The name of the file containing hydrate
temperature as a function of pressure or
HYDRATEFILE String
vice versa. Must be specified when
FROMFILE=YES.
Inhibitor concentration (in weight percent)
INHIBCONC Real [0]
for a hydrate curve (default = 0).
The inhibitor component to use with the
hydrate curve. For Compositional
Tracking only. The inhibitor component
INHIBITOR Symbol
must be defined in the feed file, possible
selections are: EtOH, MeOH, MEG, DEG
and TEG.
LABEL String [HYD-1] The label of this hydrate curve.
Hydrate formation pressure for each
given temperature point. The pressure
PRESSURE RealList (Pa)
points have be unique and entered in
increasing order.
Temperature points defining the hydrate
TEMPERATURE RealList (C) curve. The temperature points have to be
unique and entered in increasing order.

288
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

INITIALCONDITIONS
This statement defines initial conditions for the dynamic calculation. The initial conditions are given flow
path-, pipe- or section-wise. The total mass flow is defined at section boundaries while the remaining
parameters are given for section volumes.
There are several ways to define initial data, depending on the key STEADYSTATE in the OPTIONS
statement:

1. STEADYSTATE=OFF (initial conditions not calculated by steady state pre-processor): User

defines the pressure, temperature, gas volume fraction, mass flow, and water volume fraction in the
liquid phase for all sections in each flow path.

2. STEADYSTATE=NOTEMP (initial temperature not calculated by steady state pre-processor):

User defines the temperature for all sections in each flow path.

The latter option can be useful if the pre-processor has problems finding a solution. This implies that
the simulation must be run for some time in order to achieve a steady state solution.

Compositional tracking input such as FEEDMOLEFRACTION can be given for all settings of
STEADYSTATE (in OPTIONS). For STEADYSTATE=ON or NOTEMP, the given
FEEDMOLEFRACTION will be an initial input to the steady state pre-processor.

In order to simplify the input for certain initial condition variables, OLGA can perform interpolation along
pre-defined flow path segments. Three different interpolation options are available; HORIZONTAL,
LENGTH and VERTICAL. The variable is specified at the inlet and outlet of the pipeline segment, and
the interpolation is performed based on horizontal length, actual length or vertical depth along the
pipeline. LENGTH is the default option.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Mass fraction of each feed given in
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList
FEEDNAME.
Mole fraction of each feed given in
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList FEEDNAME. Can not be used with
Drilling.
Label(s) of initial feed(s) to be used for
calculating the local fluid compositions in
the pipe(s)/section(s). A list means mixing
FEED-1 |
FEEDNAME SymbolList of feeds. Requires
BOFEED-1
COMPOSITIONAL=ON/BLACKOIL or
DRILLING=ON under the OPTIONS
keyword.
Volume fraction of each feed given in
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList
FEEDNAME (only for blackoil model).
Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase
INHIBFRACTION RealList [0.0]
in each section.
Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase
ININHIBFRACTION Real [0.0] at the inlet to the first pipe in a pipeline
section where interpolation is used.
Pressure at the inlet to the first pipe in a
INPRESSURE Real (Pa)
branch where interpolation is used.

289
INITIALCONDITIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Fraction of total mass of H2O component
in the gas phase inlet to the first pipe in a
INSTEAMFRACTION Real [0] pipeline section where interpolation is
used. The default is zero mass of H2O
component is in the gas phase.
Temperature at the inlet to the first pipe in
INTEMPERATURE Real (C)
a branch where interpolation is used.
HORIZONTA
Type of interpolation used to calculate the
INTERPOLATION Symbol L | VERTICAL
initial conditions.
| [LENGTH]
Void fraction at the inlet to the first pipe in
INVOIDFRACTION Real
a branch where interpolation is used.
Watercut at the inlet to the first pipe in a
INWATERCUT Real
branch where interpolation is used.
Total mass flow at each section
MASSFLOW RealList (kg/s) [0.0]
boundaries.
Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase
OUTINHIBFRACTION Real [0.0] at the outlet of the last pipe in a pipeline
section where interpolation is used.
Pressure at the outlet of the last pipe in a
OUTPRESSURE Real (Pa)
branch where interpolation is used
Fraction of total mass of H2O component
in the gas phase outlet to the last pipe in
OUTSTEAMFRACTION Real [0] a pipeline section where interpolation is
used. The default is zero mass of H2O
component is in the gas phase.
Temperature at the outlet of the last pipe
OUTTEMPERATURE Real (C)
in a branch where interpolation is used.
Void fraction at the outlet of the last pipe
OUTVOIDFRACTION Real in a branch section where interpolation is
used.
Watercut at the outlet of the last pipe in a
OUTWATERCUT Real branch section where interpolation is
used.
Pipe label or pipe number (single or
continuous range in the form x-y).
PIPE SymbolList [ALL]

PRESSURE RealList (Pa) Initial pressure in each section.

REFPIPE Symbol Pipe label for REFPRESSURE.
Reference pressure used if no pressure
REFPRESSURE Real (Pa) boundary condition is used. To be given
for one section only.
REFSECTION Integer Section number for REFPRESSURE.
SECTION IntegerList 0 Section number.

290
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Fraction of total mass of H2O component
in the gas phase. The default is zero
STEAMFRACTION RealList [0]
mass of H2O component is in the gas
phase.
TEMPERATURE RealList (C) Initial temperature in each section.
VOIDFRACTION RealList Initial void fraction in each section.
WATERCUT RealList [0.0] Initial watercut in each section.

291
INTEGRATION OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

INTEGRATION
This statement defines the start and end times of the simulation. It also defines the start value, the
maximum value and the minimum value of the time step.

A controller can be used to setup a conditional stop of the simulation before the specified end time. The
simulation stops when the signal from the controller is zero.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
DTSTART Real (s) Initial time-step.
Label of the controller
determining conditional
ENDCONTROLLER Symbol
termination of the
simulation.
ENDTIME Real (s) Simulation end time.
States which keys should
ALL | MAXDT | MINDT |
SymbolLis be made available as
EXPOSE SIMULATIONSPEED |
t input variables on the
MAXLAGFACT
OPC server.
RealList
MAXDT [1.0] Largest time-step allowed.
(s)
Maximum lagging factor
(see LAGFACT output
MAXLAGFACT Real [0.3] variable) to allow before
the output variable
LAGIND is set to 1.
RealList Timetable for changing
MAXTIME [0.0]
(s) MAXDT.
RealList Smallest time-step
MINDT [0.001]
(s) allowed.
RealList Timetable for changing
MINTIME [0.0]
(s) MINDT.
Select whether or not to
recompute the time-step if
RUNTIMESTEPAGAIN Symbol FALSE | [TRUE]
the first-stage solution is
unsatisfactory.
Simulation speed relative
to real-time. Zero means
simulate at highest
possible speed. Any other
SIMULATIONSPEED Real [0] positive number means
that the simulator will slow
down the simulation so it
matches the factor given
relative to real time.
STARTTIME Real (s) Simulation start time.

292
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

LEAK
This statement specifies a negative mass source (mass out of the pipe). The leak is positioned in the
middle of the section that is specified. Both sub-critical and critical flow is modelled.

It can be used to model a valve or rupture where the mass out of the pipe is removed from the simulated
system, that is, the mass is lost to the surroundings.

Backflow is not allowed for the LEAK, that is, there will be no backflow if section pressure is lower than
the backpressure.

The LEAK has one optional input terminal, INPSIG. INPSIG scales the LEAK flow area.
Type Parameter set
Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Absolute position. Distance from branch
ABSPOSITION Real (m)
inlet.
For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Constant
used for a temperature dependent GLV. 0
means that the bellows temperature
ALFA Real
equals the injection temperature, 1
means the production temperature, and
interpolation for <0,1>.
RealList
BACKPRESSURE Leak back pressure
(Pa)
For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Pressure
in GLV bellows (dome) at
BELLOWSPRESSURE Real (Pa)
REFTEMPERATURE, used for a
temperature dependent GLV.
Leak discharge coefficient. Used only in
CD Real [0.84]
pressure driven source.
Ratio between gas and liquid sizing
CF Real
coefficient.
Check valve active on the leak valve: NO:
CHECKVALVE Symbol YES | [NO] No check valve, YES: Check valve
present to stop backflow
Choice of critical flow model to be used.
HENRYFAUSKE |
CRITFLOWMODEL Symbol Homogenous frozen critical flow model or
[FROZEN]
Henry-Fauske model.
Maximum equivalent diameter of leak
DIAMETER Real (m)
area
Names of tables (defined in keyword
GASLIFTTABLES SymbolList
TABLE) that define the curves of a GLV.
For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Specify
PRODOPERATED | whether a GLV is operated by injection
GLVOPERATION Symbol
[INJOPERATED] pressure or production pressure. Used for
a temperature dependent GLV.

293
LEAK OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
LABEL String [LEAK-1] Label of the leak.
Predominant phase. Used with valve
PHASE Symbol GAS | LIQUID
characteristics.
Number/name of pipe where leak is
PIPE Symbol
located.
Position of the leak. If POSITION or
POSITION Symbol ABSPOSITION is defined, PIPE and
SECTION should not be used.
For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Geometry
R Real factor used for a temperature dependent
GLV.
For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. The
REFTEMPERATURE Real (C) temperature for which the gas lift
response curve is defined.
SECTION Integer 0 Section number where the leak is located.
Label of table containing valve
TABLE SymbolList
characteristics.
Specify the temperature dependency of a
GLV. OFF: No temperature dependency.
ON: Temperature dependency for a
TEMPDEPENDENCY Symbol ON | [OFF] nitrogen charged bellow. Sub-keys ALFA,
BELLOWPRESSURE, GLVOPERATION,
R and REFTEMPERATURE must be
specified.
RealList The time series for the leak back
TIME
(s) pressure
Refer to position the leak is targeted to.
When this key is used, the following sub-
TOPOSITION Symbol
keys cannot be defined: TIME,
BACKPRESSURE.

294
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

LOSS
This statement defines pressure loss due to valves, bends, contractions, expansions or other obstructions
in or between pipes.

The expansion pressure recovery that is always included in OLGA is:

A⎛ A⎞
Δp = - ⎜ 1- ⎟ ρ U
2
A′⎝ A′⎠

The contraction pressure loss that is always included in OLGA is:

1⎛ ⎛ A ⎞ ⎞
2

ΔP = ⎜1 - ⎜ ⎟ ⎟ ρ U 2
2 ⎝ ⎝ A′ ⎠ ⎠

The additional loss specified by the user for positive flow is:

1
ΔP = POSC(J)ρ U 2
2
The additional loss specified by the user for negative flow is:

1
ΔP = NEGC(J)ρ U 2
2

J-1 J J+ 1

CONTRACTION

A', U' A, U

J-1 J J+ 1

EXPANSION

A, U A', U'

Figure A An illustration of the use of loss coefficients for contraction and expansion.

295
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Real Absolute position where the pressure loss is
ABSPOSITION
(m) located. Distance from branch inlet.
LABEL String [LOSS-1] Loss label.
Loss coefficient when the flow is in negative
NEGCOEFF Real
direction.
PIPE Symbol Pipe label with pressure loss.
Loss coefficient when the flow is in positive
POSCOEFF Real
direction.
POSITION Symbol Position where the pressure loss is located.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1 Section boundary where pressure loss is located.

296
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

MATERIAL
This statement specifies physical properties of the materials associated with the pipe wall, pipeline
coating, insulation and soil. If a fluid is enclosed between two concentric cylinders, natural convection
will be significant for the heat transfer rate. By choosing TYPE = FLUID, OLGA will calculate the
natural convection. The viscosity and expansion coefficient of the fluid must then be given. If the fluid is
a gas at low pressure (< 100 bar) natural convection will have less influence on the heat transfer rate
and radiation will become important as well. Radiation is included in heat transfer calculation by setting
RADIATION = YES. INNEREMISSIVITY and OUTEREMISSIVITY must then be specified. (High
emissivity means low reflectivity.) Stefan-Boltzmann's law for long concentric cylinders is used to
calculate the heat transfer rate. The heat transfer rate due to radiation is negligible if one or both of the
emissivities are small.
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Real
CAPACITY Thermal capacity of the material.
(J/kg-C)
Conductivity multiplier below PHCHMIN. Between
CONDMULT Real PHCMIN and PHCMAX, the multiplier is linearly
interpolated from CONDMULT to 1.
Real
CONDUCTIVITY Thermal conductivity of the material.
(W/m-C)
Real
DENSITY Material density.
(kg/m3)
Young's modulus of elasticity. Used to compute the
Real
EMOD radial flexibility of the pipe (typical value for steel:
(Pa)
2.1e11 Pa).
Real
EXPANSION Expansion coefficient of fluid layer.
(1/C)
Heat capacity multiplier between PHCHMIN and
PHCHMAX used to model latent heat of fusion. If
FUSIONMULT Real FUSIONMULT is 0, the heat capacity multiplier is
linearly interpolated from HCAPMULT to 1 between
PHCMIN and PHCMAX.
HCAPMULT Real Heat capacity multiplier below PHCHMIN
INNEREMISSIVITY Real [0] Emissivity of inner surface of fluid layer.
LABEL String [MAT-1] Material label.
OUTEREMISSIVITY Real [0] Emissivity of outer surface of fluid layer.
PHCHMAX Real (C) Upper temperature limit for phase change region
PHCHMIN Real (C) Lower temperature limit for phase change region
NO: No radiation across fluid layer. Yes: Radiation
RADIATION Symbol YES | [NO]
across fluid layer.
Type of wall material. SOLID: Normal wall layer
FLUID | PCM
TYPE Symbol material. FLUID: Stagnant fluid material. PCM: Phase
| [SOLID]
changing material
Real (N-
VISCOSITY Dynamic viscosity of fluid material
s/m2)

297
NEARWELLSOURCE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

NEARWELLSOURCE
This input definition specifies the data for a ”NEARWELLSOURCE” which links OLGA TO the near-
wellbore reservoir simulator Rocx developed by IFE. OLGA delivers boundary conditions to Rocx, and
the production from (or injection into) the reservoir is received by OLGA from Rocx as mass rate for
each phase.

Areas for use

The link provides coupled transient simulation of near-wellbore reservoir flow and well flow. Dynamic
phenomena not accurately predicted or even not seen with the steady-state inflow performance
relationship model (WELL) may therefore be simulated in a more realistic way. Typical examples are
well shut-in and start-up, dynamic gas and water coning, cross flow between layers, etc.

Input
The position of the NEARWELLSOURCE is given by referring to the distance from the inlet of the
branch (ABSPOSITION), a pipe and a section number, or by reference to a defined POSITION.
RESBOUNDNAME must refer to a boundary label defined in the Rocx input file. Each Rocx boundary
label can only be refereed once, which means it is not allowed to split the flow from one Rocx boundary
into two or more OLGA sections. But for one OLGA section, there can be several
NEARWELLSOUCES.

Rocx reads a separate input file describing the reservoir properties, boundary conditions and initial
conditions. The file name should be given under the key ROCX under FILES. This input file is edited
with the ROCX GUI. Rocx writes both formatted and binary industry standard Eclipse output files for
post processing (3D visualization). Please refer to the ”r;Rocx User Manual” for how to define a proper
input file for the Rocx simulator.

There is no automatic check of the correspondence in positioning and size between numerical sections
in OLGA and boundary grid blocks in Rocx. The user must therefore discretize both grids in such a
way that this is satisfied. The flow area at the wellbore and near-wellbore interface is calculated based
on the Rocx grid block rather than the corresponding OLGA numerical section.

Rocx may be run with the RESTART option. Definition of the file with restart data for Rocx should be
given in the Rocx input file. Rocx may be set up to read the same PVT data file as OLGA.
Rocx can be run as a standalone tool. This is a useful way to obtain a suitable condition for the
reservoir before initiating a coupled (and more time consuming) simulation.

Limitations
OLGA Rocx is not compatible with these fluid property models
• Compositional option
• Black oil option
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
LABEL String [NWSOUR-1] NearWellSOURCE label.
PIPE Symbol Pipe number for well.
POSITION Symbol Position label for where the well is located.
RESBOUNDNAME String Name of boundary in OLGA Rocx.
ROCX String Name of input filename for boundary in Rocx.
SECTION Integer 0 Section number for well.

298
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

NODE
This statement defines the nodes in the flow network system. All nodes except CLOSED nodes need a
fluid for fluid properties calculations.

There are four types of nodes:

CLOSED: The node represents a closed boundary (zero flow). This can be combined with a
source or a well definition in the flow path.

PRESSURE: The node represents a pressure boundary. Values for pressure, temperature and
fluid must be given.

INTERNAL: For definition of internal node. Fluid must be given.

The model for internal nodes (merge/split nodes) uses more or less the same physics and the
numerical methods as the sections in the pipes. Pressure, temperature and masses are calculated.
Interphasial mass transfer is included in the node, but entrainment/deposition of liquid droplets are
ignored.

The current implementation of internal nodes requires a finite volume in the node. If no volume is
specified (or given as less than or equal to zero), a default volume is calculated by OLGA based on
the sizes of incoming and outgoing sections:

100 ,

where i is taken over all incoming/outgoing sections. It should be noted that the node does not
account for heat lost to the surroundings.

MASSFLOW: The node represents a mass flow boundary. Values for pressure, temperature, fluid
and mass flow or standard mass flow must be given. The behaviour of the MASSFLOW node is
very similar to a mass source. The main exception is that the MASSFLOW node has an internal
pressure calculation for obtaining the correct pressure that will set up the user given mass flow rate
into the connected pipe.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Condensate-gas ratio. By
RealList
CGR default, CGR from the
(Sm3/Sm3)
PVT table is used.
Density of the drilling fluid
for each time point. Must
RealList
DENSITY be within the min and max
(kg/m3)
density as specified in the
keyword DRILLINGFLUID
Refer to the drilling fluid
defined by the keyword
DRILLINGFLUID Symbol DRILLINGFLUID.
Requires access to the
Wells module.

299
NODE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
ALL | WATERFRACTION |
TOTALWATERFRACTIO
N | INHIBFRACTION |
TOTALINHIBFRACTION |
GASFRACTION | States which keys should
MASSFLOW | be made available as
EXPOSE SymbolList
STDFLOWRATE | GLR | input variables on the
GOR | CGR | WATERCUT OPC server.
| WGR | MOLWEIGHT |
DENSITY | VISCOSITY |
TEMPERATURE |
PRESSURE
Mass rate for each feed
(used when mass source
FEEDMASSFLOW RealList (kg/s)
is defined). One item per
time and feed.
Mass fraction of each
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList
feed.
Mole rate for each feed
RealList (used when mass source
FEEDMOLEFLOW
(kmol/s) is defined). One item per
time and feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList Mole fraction of each feed.
Label of feeds feeding to
terminal nodes. Requires
FEEDNAME SymbolList COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the
OPTIONS keyword.
Volumetric flow rate at
standard conditions of
RealList phase PHASE for each
FEEDSTDFLOW
(Sm3/s) feed specified by
FEEDNAME (only for
Blackoil model).
Volume fraction of each
feed given in FEEDNAME
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList
for choke model (only for
Blackoil model).
Label or number of fluid
table to apply for the
specific branch. If a
keyword based pvt-file is
FLUID Symbol used, FLUID must be the
same as the LABEL given
in the pvt-file, i.e.,
numbering is not valid for
this format.
The phase of a fluid from
FLUIDTYPE Symbol GAS | OIL | WATER
a single-phase source.

300
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
By default, the equilibrium
gas fraction of the total
flow is used for the gas
flow in the compositional
or the Blackoil model
GASFRACEQ RealList [1.0]
(GASFRACEQ=1).
However, the user may
specify a fraction of the
gas equilibrium flow to be
sent into the pipeline.
Gas mass fraction of the
inflow gas+oil mixture.
Specify –1 for OLGA to
use the equilibrium values
GASFRACTION RealList [-1.0]
from the PVT table. A list
of both positive and
negative values is not
allowed.
Gas/liquid volumetric flow
RealList
GLR ratio at standard
(Sm3/Sm3)
conditions.
Gas/oil volumetric flow
ratio at standard
RealList
GOR [-1.0] conditions. By default,
(Sm3/Sm3)
GOR from the PVT table
is used.
General information about
INFO String the node. For information
purposes only.
Mass fraction of inhibitor
INHIBFRACTION RealList [0.0] in the water phase.

LABEL String [NODE_1] Name of node.

If connected to a single-
YES | CROSSOVER | phase flowpath or not.
LINE Symbol
[NO] CROSSOVER for a
crossover node.
Total mass flow rate at
MASSFLOW RealList (kg/s)
different instants in time.
Maximum pressure boost
MAXPRESSUREBOOST RealList (Pa)
for a crossover node.
Molecular weight of
equivalent gas (total flow).
By default, the gas density
RealList at standard conditions
MOLWEIGHT
(kg/kmol) from the PVT table is used
to determine the molecular
weight.

301
NODE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
By default, the equilibrium
oil fraction of the total flow
is used for the oil flow in
OILFRACEQ RealList [1.0]
the compositional or the
Black oil model
(OILFRACEQ=1).
The phase for which the
LIQUID | GAS | OIL |
PHASE Symbol volumetric flow rate is
WATER
specified.
PRESSURE RealList (Pa) Boundary pressure.
RealList Volumetric flow rate at
STDFLOWRATE
(Sm3/s) standard conditions.
Fraction of total mass of
H2O component in the
gas phase. By default (=-
1), the mass of H2O
component is in the gas
phase if the temperature is
greater than the saturation
temperature, otherwise,
STEAMFRACTION RealList [-1.0] the mass of H2O
component is distributed
between the gas phase
and the water phase
according to the vapor
pressure of H2O in the
gas phase. A list of both
positive and negative
values is not allowed.
Temperature of the inflow
TEMPERATURE RealList (C)
mixture.
Instants in time for the
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] specified values of the
boundary conditions.
Mass fraction of inhibitor
TOTALINHIBFRACTION RealList [0.0] in total water (water
phase+water vapor).
Mass fraction of total
water in the total boundary
fluid mixture. Use –1 for
TOTALWATERFRACTIO the total water fraction to
RealList [-1.0]
N be taken from the PVT
table. Either this key or
WATERFRACTION can
be specified.

302
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Boundary type. CLOSED:
Closed inlet or outlet
node. INTERNAL: Nodes
or junctions that have one
or more incoming and one
or more outgoing
CLOSED | PRESSURE | branches (covers both
TYPE Symbol
MASSFLOW | INTERNAL MERGE and SPLIT
nodes). PRESSURE: Inlet
or outlet node with a
pressure condition.
MASSFLOW: Inlet or
outlet node with a
massflow condition.
Viscosity of the drilling
fluids for each time point.
RealList Must be within the min
VISCOSITY
(Ns/m2) and max viscosity as
specified in the keyword
DRILLINGFLUID
Volume of internal node. If
specified volume is less
VOLUME Real (m3) [-1]
than or equal to 0, OLGA
will estimate the volume.
Water volume fraction in
oil/water mixture. With a
WATERCUT RealList [-1.0] value of -1.0 the total
water fraction is taken
from the PVT table.
By default, the equilibrium
water fraction of the total
flow is used for the water
WATERFRACEQ RealList [1.0]
flow in the compositional
or the Black oil model
(WATERFRACEQ=1).
Mass fraction of free water
in the total boundary fluid
WATERFRACTION RealList mixture. Either this key or
TOTALWATERFRACTIO
N can be specified.

303
 NODE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Scaling factor for
determining the amount of
wax forming components
relative to HC mixture.
The value must be in the
range [0,1]. 1 means the
amount of wax forming
WAXFRACTION RealList [1.0]
components is equal to
values from the wax table.
Requires
WAXDEPOSITION=ON
under OPTIONS and
access to the
waxdeposition module.
Ratio between water
(including water in gas
RealList
WGR [-1.0] phase) and gas. By
(Sm3/Sm3)
default, WGR from the
PVT table is used.
x-coordinate of node in
X Real (m) [0] network. Used for 3D
graphics only.
y-coordinate (vertical axis)
Y Real (m) [0] of node in network. Used
for 3D graphics only.
z-coordinate of node in
Z Real (m) [0] network. Used for 3D
graphics only.

OUTPUTDATA (on NODE)

This statement defines the node variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
SymbolList List of variables to be printed. Units may be
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) specified.

TRENDDATA (on NODE)

This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for nodes. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
SymbolList List of variables to be plotted. Units may be
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) specified.

304
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OPTIONS
This statement specifies the different calculating options to be applied in the simulation.
OPTIONS is a required keyword.

Type
Parameter set
Key Unit: Description
Default:[ ]
()
OFF: No compositional tracking, just use the
ON | MEG |
fluid table. ON: Enable compositional
MEOH | ETOH |
tracking. MEG/MEOH/ETOH: Use Inhibitor
BLACKOIL |
COMPOSITIONAL Symbol tracking with the given component.
STEAMWATER-
BLACKOIL: Use Black oil model.
HC | SINGLE |
STEAMWATER-HC: Use steam model.
[OFF]
SINGLE: Use single-component model
Turn on or off printing of time step
information to standard output. DEBUG =
OFF reports only essential warnings.
DEBUG = ON will report all informative
ON | LIMITED |
DEBUG Symbol messages and can slow down simulation
[OFF]
significantly. DEBUG = LIMITED will be
more silent about fluid table warnings and
some informative messages, but otherwise
report the same as DEBUG = ON.
DRILLING Symbol ON | [OFF] Set it to ON for simulation drilling process
Turn on or off the use of the effect of
ELASTICWALLS Symbol ON | [OFF]
expanding/contracting walls
Mass transfer model. WATER: Mass
HYDROCARBON transfer between gas-oil and gas-water.
FLASHMODEL Symbol
| [WATER] HYDROCARBON: Only mass transfer
between gas-oil.
This key (HYDSLUG) makes it possible to
turn off the distributed flow regimes
(hydrodynamic slug flow and dispersed
HYDSLUG Symbol OFF | [ON]
bubble flow). HYDSLUG OFF will enforce
stratified or annular flow (both including
liquid droplets).
Discretization scheme used for solving the
2NDORDER |
MASSEQSCHEME Symbol mass equations. For further details, see
[1STORDER]
User's manual.
OFF: Slip between phases is calculated
(recommended). ON: Should only be used
for sensitivity simulations. The gas and liquid
(oil and water) is treated as one single
homogenized phase in the pressure drop
NOSLIP Symbol ON | [OFF] and momentum calculations. The other
calculations, mass conservation, mass
transfer, etc, will be as for a normal
simulation with slip. The no-slip option is
implemented in both the steady state pre-
processor and the dynamic code.

305
OPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:() Default:[ ]
Define the number of phases to be
PHASE Symbol [THREE] simulated. In OLGA 6 the only option is
THREE.
Select correlations for determining gas
SLUGVOID Symbol AIR | [SINTEF]
volume fraction in liquid slugs.
Turns off the initial value (steady state) pre-
OFF | NOTEMP | processor or only turn off the temperature
STEADYSTATE Symbol
[ON] calculation in the pre-processor.

Define the upper and lower limits of

pressure and temperature allowed in the
simulation. OFF: The limits will be the ones
specified in the fluid tables (recommended).
ON: This option should only be used when
old PVT files with too narrow
ON | UNLIMITED |
TABLETOLERANCE Symbol pressure/temperature ranges cannot be
[OFF]
reproduced and improved. UNLIMITED: This
option will remove the upper an lower limits
of temperature and pressure and will use the
end values in the table outside the table
range without extrapolation. Use with
extreme care.
Specify the desired temperature calculation
option. OFF: No temperature calculation,
initial values are used. ADIABATIC: No
energy exchange with the walls. Adiabatic
flow is assumed. UGIVEN: Total heat
ADIABATIC |
transfer coefficient for the pipe-wall is given.
UGIVEN | OFF |
TEMPERATURE Symbol No wall temperatures are calculated. WALL:
FASTWALL |
Heat transfer on wall inside and outside, wall
[WALL]
heat conduction and heat storage is
accounted for. FASTWALL: Same as option
WALL except that heat storage is neglected.
This option is used for a fast approach to
steady state thermal conditions.
TRACERTRACKING Symbol ON | [OFF] Switch for using tracertracking
WAXDEPOSITION Symbol ON | [OFF] Switch wax deposition model on or off.
For STEAMWATER-HC and SINGLE only.
YES: PVT table file(s) and saturation line file
WRITEPVTFILES Symbol YES | [NO]
are written for steam and single component
properties.

306
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OUTPUT
This statement defines the time intervals for when the variables defined in OUTPUTDATA is reported.
The information is saved as an output file (*.out) which can be opened in a text editor.

It is possible to specify either time points for output (TIME) or a time interval for output (DTOUT). It is
also possible to specify different time intervals for output using a combination of TIME and DTOUT.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Number of variable columns per page. Must not be greater
COLUMNS Integer [4]
than 6.
Time interval(s) between subsequent printings of output. The
time interval is changed at the times specified in TIME. If TIME
RealList
DTOUT is not specified or only contains one value, only one value must
(s)
be given for DTOUT. This value is used throughout the entire
simulation.
RealList
TIME [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol OFF | [ON] Enable plotting to file

307
 OUTPUTDATA (on flowpath level) OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

OUTPUTDATA (on flowpath level)

This statement defines the variables to be printed to the output file (*.out). Global variables are not
available on this level.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with
AGEGROUPID IntegerList aging effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor
(KHI).
Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking
module, available components are HC, H2O
and MEG/MEOH/ETOH. Using DRILLING=ON
under OPTIONS, available components are
COMPONENT SymbolList BOCOMP-1
HC, H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH, CUTTING and
MUD components. For compositional models
the names of the available components are
given in the feed file.
Wall layer numbers for plotting of wall
LAYER IntegerList temperatures. Layer no. 1 is the innermost
one.
Pipe numbers or labels where the variables will
PIPE SymbolList
be plotted.
Section numbers where the variables will be
SECTION IntegerList 0
plotted.
Tracer label that the tracer type variables are
TRACERFEED SymbolList
plotted for.
SymbolList List of variables to be printed. Units may be
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) specified.

OUTPUTDATA (on case level)

This statement defines the variables to be printed to the output file (*.out). Only the global variables are
available on this level.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
SymbolList List of variable names to be printed. Units
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) may be specified.

308
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PHASESPLITNODE
The phase split node behaves as something in-between the internal network node and the network
separator. There are no level controls and separator efficiencies included, but the phase distributions for
the outgoing branches can be specified.

The phase split node has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. It has six different types of terminals:
GAS, OIL, WATER, LIQUID, DRYGAS and MIXTURE.

Terminal = GAS - gas +droplets

Terminal = OIL - oil bulk
Terminal = WATER - water bulk
Terminal = LIQUID - oil and water bulk
Terminal = DRYGAS - gas only
Terminal = MIXTURE - all phases within the node itself(default)

The following connections are defined:

• MIXTURE_1, … MIXTURE _N inlets and outlets

• GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets
• OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets
• WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets
• LIQUID_1, ... LIQUID_N outlets
• DRYGAS _1, … DRYGAS _N outlets

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList Mass fraction of each feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList Mole fraction of each feed.
Label of feeds feeding to terminal
nodes. Requires
FEEDNAME SymbolList FEED 1 | BOFEED-1 COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS
keyword.
Volume fraction of each feed given in
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList FEEDNAME for choke model (only
for Blackoil model).
Label or number of PVT table to
apply for the specific branch. If a
keyword based pvt-file is used,
FLUID Symbol
FLUID must be the same as the
LABEL given in the pvt-file, i.e.,
numbering is not valid for this format.
General information about the
INFO String PhaseSplitNode. For information
purposes only.

309
PHASESPLITNODE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Mass fraction of inhibitor in the water
INHIBFRACTION Real [0.0]
phase.
LABEL String [PHASESPLITNODE_1] Name of phase split node.
Initial pressure when using
PRESSURE Real (Pa)
INITIALCONDITIONS.
Fraction of total mass of H2O
component in the gas phase. By
default (=-1), the mass of H2O
component is in the gas phase if the
temperature is greater than the
saturation temperature, otherwise,
STEAMFRACTION Real [-1.0]
the mass of H2O component is
distributed between the gas phase
and the water phase according to the
vapor pressure of H2O in the gas
phase. A list of both positive and
negative values is not allowed.
Initial temperature when using
TEMPERATURE Real (C)
INITIALCONDITIONS.
Gas volume fraction when using
INITIALCONDITIONS.. Specify –1
VOIDFRACTION Real
for OLGA to use the equilibrium
values from the fluid property tables.
Volume of PhaseSplitNode. If
specified volume is less than or
VOLUME Real (m3) [-1]
equal to 0, OLGA will estimate the
volume (see User's manual).
Initial watercut when using
WATERCUT Real [0.0]
INITIALCONDITIONS.
x-coordinate of node in network.
X Real (m) [0]
Used for 3D graphics only.
y-coordinate (vertical axis) of node in
Y Real (m) [0]
network. Used for 3D graphics only.
z-coordinate of node in network.
Z Real (m) [0]
Used for 3D graphics only.

310
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PIG
This statement defines the pig option.

The pig keyword should be used when the user wants to simulate a pig or plug in the pipeline. The pig
is inserted at LAUNCHPOSITION and taken out when it reaches either the TRAPPOSITION or a
boundary NODE. TRAPPOSITION can be in the same flowpath as LAUNCHPOSITION or in a different
flowpath. When the pig comes to an internal NODE or SEPARATOR it will take the path with the
highest volume flow. The path the pig takes in a network can be overridden by the ROUTING key. If the
TRAPPOSITION is specified in a different flowpath than LAUNCHPOSITION and the pig does not
reach the TRAPPOSITION (because highest volume flow or ROUTING does not take it there) the pig is
taken out when it reaches a boundary node.

The keys LINEARFRIC, QUADRATICFRIC and STATICFORCE are the usual way to define the friction
of the pig.

The keys LEAKAGEFACTOR, LEAKDPCOEF or LEAKOPENING are used to specify the leakage in
the propagation direction of the pig.

The key DIAMETER is used to calculate the liquid backflow around the pig.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Pig diameter NOTE! If no diameter is given, the
diameter of the pig is set to the inner pipe
DIAMETER Real (m) diameter minus 4 times the wall roughness. This
implies that leakage between the pig and the wall
will occur.
INSERTTIME Real (s) Pig launch time.
LABEL String [PIG-1] Pig label.
Position for pig launch. The pig is launched
LAUNCHPOSITIO
Symbol downstream of the section boundary closest to
N
the launch position.
Pig leakage factor. Leakage factor at 0
corresponds to no fluid leaking past pig, and 1.0
corresponds to all fluid leaking past pig. When
LEAKAGEFACTOR Real
not given for the hydrate model, the program will
calculate the leakage factor from the cross
sectional area.
Pressure loss coefficient measured by letting the
LEAKDPCOEF Real [1E199]
fluid flow past a pig that is fixed to the pipe wall.
Leakage opening relative to pipe cross section
LEAKOPENING Real [0.0]
area.
Linear friction factor coefficient for fluid friction of
LINEARFRIC Real (Ns/m) [10]
fluid film between pig and pipe wall.
MASS Real (kg) [140] Pig mass.
Wax cutting efficiency. Only available with the
PGWXFORMFAC Real [0.0]
wax module.
Real Quadratic friction factor coefficient for fluid
QUADRATICFRIC [0.0]
(Ns2/m2) friction of fluid film between pig and pipe wall.

311
PIG OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Name of branches a pig passes from the launch
position to trap position. This key is optional. If
not given, a pig goes to the branch that has the
ROUTING SymbolList
highest volumetric flowrate out of the node the
pig enters. When given, the launch branch name
must be the first in the list.
STATICFORCE Real (N) [1000.0] Force necessary to tear pig loose from the wall.
When turned on the slug in front of the pig is
generated and tracked, else no slug is set up in
TRACKSLUG Symbol ON | [OFF]
front of the pig. Activating this key requires
access to the slugtracking module.
Position for pig trap. The pig is trapped at the
boundary closest to the trap position. Trap
TRAPPOSITION Symbol
position is optional and if not given, the pig is
removed when it exits through a terminal node.
WALLFRICTION Real (Ns/m) [1000.0] Factor for wall friction between pig and pipe.
Plastic viscosity of wax plug in front of pig. The
wax plug is assumed to exhibit Bingham fluid
Real (N-
WPPLASTVISC [-1] behavior. –1 implies using internal model for
s/m2)
estimating the plastic viscosity. Only available
with the wax module.
Porosity of wax plug in front of pig. Used for wax
plug friction calculation. Default value –1 implies
WPPOROSITY Real [-1] that the porosity of the wax wall layer is used for
the wax plug. A value = 1 implies that no wax
plug friction will be applied.
Yield stress of wax plug in front of pig. The wax
plug is assumed to exhibit Bingham fluid
WPYIELDSTRESS Real (Pa) [-1] behavior. –1 implies using internal model for
estimating the yield stress. Only available with
the wax module.
Coefficient C in wax breaking force equation.
WXBRFCOEF Real [0.0]
Only available with the wax module.
Wax removal efficiency. Only available with the
WXRMEFF Real [1.0]
wax module.
Yield stress of wax layer on the wall. –1 imples
WXYIELDSTR Real (Pa) [-1] that the internal yieldstress correlation is used.
Only available with the wax module.

312
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PIPE
This statement defines the pipe elements in a geometry. A pipe is one straight part of a pipeline. Pipe
data such as geometrical data: elevation, diameter, roughness, number and length of sections for
discretization are specified.

If the temperature option is WALL or FASTWALL in OPTIONS, a WALL for the pipe must be specified.
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Total cross-sectional flow area in case of equivalent pipes.
Real
AREA Equivalent pipe means one single pipe representing a
(m2)
number of equal parallel pipes with a correct total flow area.
Hydraulic diameter of the pipe. Equivalent to the pipe's
DIAMETER Real (m)
inner diameter for normal pipe flow.
ELEVATION Real (m) End point elevation relative to starting point of the pipe.
IDIAMETER Real (m) Inner diameter of external pipe for annulus flow.
LABEL String [PIPE-1] Pipe label.
LENGTH Real (m) Length of the pipe.
RealList
LSEGMENT Section lengths.
(m)
Total number of pipes represented in the equivalent pipe.
NEQUIPIPE Real The total flow area in the equivalent pipe will correspond to
this number of original parallel pipes.
NSEGMENT Integer Number of sections in the pipe.
Outer diameter for internal pipe for annulus flow. Zero for
ODIAMETER Real (m)
internal flow.
ROUGHNESS Real (m) Absolute roughness of the pipe wall.
WALL Symbol Label of the wall used.
XEND Real (m) x-coordinate of the pipe end.
YEND Real (m) y-coordinate of the pipe end.
ZEND Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the pipe end.

313
PLOT OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PLOT
This statement defines the plot variables.

Plot files:

The graphical presentation of results should be considered the primary source to an understanding of
the calculated state in the pipeline. A graphical package is supplied as part of the OLGA GUI. The
trend plot file and the profile plot file are in ASCII format. The ASCII format files can be used to
interface the results from OLGA with any graphical package the user might have access to.

Both the trend plot file and the profile plot file consist of a heading and the time and variables specified
with the keyword statement TREND and PROFILE in the input file (extension inp).

In addition to the OLGA GUI graphical package, the stand-alone tools OLGA Viewer (.plt files) and
FEMTherm Viewer (.osi) are available for visualisation of results. The .plt and .osi files are in binary
format.
Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Time interval between subsequent printouts of the
DTPLOT RealList (s)
plot variables.
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
List of variable names to be plotted. Units may be
SymbolList
VARIABLE included in the list. N.b., variables from different
(ValueUnitPair)
groups can be defined on the same line.
WRITEFILE Symbol OFF | [ON] Enable plotting to file

314
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

POSITION
This statement specifies a position along the pipeline. It may either specify a distance from flow path
inlet (ABSPOSITION), or a reference to a pipe and a section-volume/-boundary number.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Absolute position. Distance from
ABSPOSITION Real (m)
branch inlet.
LABEL String [POS-1] Position label.
PIPE Symbol Pipe label.
SECTION Integer 0 Section number of position.
Section boundary number of
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1
position.

315
PROFILE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PROFILE
This statement defines either time points (TIME) or a time interval (DTPLOT) for the profile plot
variables.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
RealList Time interval between subsequent printouts to the profile
DTPLOT
(s) plot file.
RealList
DTTIME [0.0] Points in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
RealList
TIME Instants in time when data is written to the profile plot file.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol OFF | [ON] Enable plotting to file

316
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PROFILEDATA
This statement defines profile plot variables along the pipeline at specified time points.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AGEGROUPI Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with aging
IntegerList
D effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor (KHI).
Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking
module, available components are HC, H2O and
MEG/MEOH/ETOH. Using DRILLING=ON under
BOCOMP-
COMPONENT SymbolList OPTIONS, available components are HC, H2O,
1
MEG/MEOH/ETOH, CUTTING and MUD
components. For compositional models the names of
the available components are given in the feed file.
HYKPID IntegerList Array element index of HYKPLIST.
Wall layer number for plotting of wall temperatures.
LAYER IntegerList
Layer no. 1 is the innermost one.
TRACERFEE Tracer label that the tracer type variables are plotted
SymbolList
D for.
SymbolList Variables to be written to the profile plot file. Units
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) should not be used.

317
PUMP OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

PUMP
OLGA contains four pump models: the centrifugal pump, the displacement pump, the simplified
centrifugal pump and the pump battery model. The desired pump model is selected by setting the
PUMPTYPE subkey of the PUMP keyword..

Centrifugal pump
For the centrifugal pump, the pressure increase over the pump, ∆P, is dependent on the flow rate Q,
pump speed N, inlet gas volume fraction αI, and the pump inlet pressure PI.

A valve can be located at the centrifugal pump section boundary for controlling flow through the pump.

The transient pump characteristics for a centrifugal pump presented in the form of four quadrant curves.
The four quadrant curves are converted to a simpler form by the development of homologous curves
where the head and torque ratios (actual value to rated value) are functions of the pump speed and flow
rate ratios. A complete default set of homologous curves is tabulated in the code. These are based on
experimental data and are representative for centrifugal pumps. If other curves shall be used they must
be given with the TABLE keyword.

Displacement pump
For the displacement pump, the pump flow rate can be expressed as the difference between the
theoretical flow rate and the back flow rate. For a given pump the theoretical rate is proportional to
pump speed. The back flow is tabulated as a function of pump speed, pressure increase across the
pump, void fraction at pump inlet, liquid kinetic viscosity and pressure at pump inlet. A default table is
included in the code. If other table values shall be used they must be given with the TABLE keyword.

The following options are available for controlling the pump speed:

(1). Controlled manually by specifying time and speed series in the controller definition. The setpoint
specifies the required N (MAXSPEED > N > MINSPEED)
(2). Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by N = MINSPEED + u (MAXSPEED -
MINSPEED)

Here MAXSPEED is the maximum pump speed (defined by user), MINSPEED is the minimum pump
speed (defined by user) and u the signal from the controller.

Simplified centrifugal pump

A simplified description of a centrifugal pump is used for modeling the behavior of a centrifugal pump
around an operational point. Simple algebraic expressions are used to calculate pressure increase over
the pump and pump efficiency.

Pump battery
The pump battery is used for pumping drilling fluid, e.g. muds in a drilling operation. The purpose is to
get an overall estimate of pump power needed as well as the volume of mud pumped. The volume
delivered iby the pump is proportional to the rate of pump strokes.

(a)

where

QP = Volume delivered by the pump battery

PFAC = Pumping factor
SPES = Strokes per time unit

318
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The pump rate is normally controlled by the following set of controllers:

• Controller on the maximum hydraulic horsepower allowed

• Controller on the maximum pump rate
• Controller on the minimum pump rate
• Controller on the maximum pump pressure allowed

If either one of these controllers is set into action the pump rate is reduced automatically. The number of
controllers can be extended above the number shown above and different variables (e.g. fluid rate,
inflow rate) can be used to control the pumps.

Note that a pump cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Absolute position. Distance from branch
ABSPOSITION Real (m)
inlet.
Pump speed acceleration. When
recycle flow is over or below the limits,
Real
ACCECOEFF [0.0] this value will be used to increase or
(rad/s2)
decrease the pump speed. For
centrifugal and displacement pumps.
Experimentally determined exponent for
ACOEFFICIENT Real [1.6] calculating the mechanical friction loss
for a displacement pump.
Experimentally determined exponent for
BCOEFFICIENT Real [1.6] calculating the viscous friction loss for a
displacement pump.
Diameter of the valve in the bypass flow
line. For centrifugal and displacement
BYDIAMETER Real (m) [0.0]
pumps. Has to be 0.0 if
PUMPTYPE=SIMPLIFIED.
Relative change in pump pressure
Real
DCOEFF1 [0.0] increase with pump speed for simplified
(1/rpm)
pump.
Relative change in pump pressure
Real
DCOEFF2 [0.0] increase with flow rate for simplified
(1/m3/s)
pump.
Relative reduction in pump pressure
DCOEFF3 Real [0.0]
increase with gas volume fraction.
Real Rated pump density. Used for
DENSITYR [900]
(kg/m3) centrifugal and simplified pumps.
Pump pressure increase at rated
DPRATED Real (bar)
conditions for simplified pump.
Real Relative change in pump efficiency with
ECOEFF1 [0.0]
(1/rpm) pump speed for simplified pump.

319
PUMP OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Real Relative change in pump efficiency with
ECOEFF2 [0.0]
(1/m3/s) pump speed for simplified pump.
Relative reduction in pump efficiency
ECOEFF3 Real [0.0]
with gas volume fraction.
Mechanical efficiency of centrifugal and
EFFIMECH Real [0.7]
simplified pump.
Adiabatic efficiency of simplified pump
EFFRATED Real [0.5]
at rated conditions.
Rated pump flow. Used for centrifugal
FLOWRATED Real (m3/s)
and simplified pumps.
Rated pump head. Used for centrifugal
HEADRATED Real (m)
pumps.
Maximum hydraulic horsepower for
HPMAX Real (W)
each single pump in the pump battery.
LABEL String [PUMP-1] Label of the pump.
Maximum flow capacity for pump
MAXCAPACITY Real (m3/s)
battery.
Maximum downstream pressure for
MAXPRESSURE Real (Pa)
pump battery.
MAXRECYCLE Real (kg/s) Maximum recycle mass flow rate.
MAXSPEED Real (rpm) Maximum pump speed.
Mechanical dissipation at nominal
MDISSIPATION Real (W) [0.0]
speed for a displacement pump.
Minimum flow capacity for pump
MINCAPACITY Real (m3/s)
battery.
MINRECYCLE Real (kg/s) [0.0] Minimum recycle mass flow rate.
MINSPEED Real (rpm) [0.0] Minimum pump speed.
PIPE Symbol Pipe label for pump location.
POSITION Symbol Position where pump is located.
Pump reference speed. Used for
PREFSPEED Real (rpm) [3000]
displacement pumps.
DISPLACEMENT |
SIMPLIFIED |
PUMPTYPE Symbol Pump model.
PUMPBATTERY |
[CENTRIFUGAL]
Choke diameter for recycle flow. For
centrifugal and displacement pumps.
RECDIAMETER Real (m)
Has to be 0.0 if
PUMPTYPE=SIMPLIFIED.
GAS | LIQUID |
Phase of recycle flow. For centrifugal
RECPHASE Symbol WATER |
and displacement pumps.
[MIXTURE]

320
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Section boundary number where the
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer
pump is located.
Real Pump specific volumetric capacity,
SPECAPACITY
(m3/R) Qspc. Used for displacement pumps.
Rated pump speed. Used for centrifugal
SPEEDR Real (rpm)
and simplified pumps.
Name of the tables of pump back flow
TABLE Symbol data or pump characteristic data. For
centrifugal and displacement pumps.
Maximum motor torque allowed. Can
TORQMAX Real (Nm)
only be used for centrifugal pumps.
Rated pump hydraulic torque. Used for
TORQR Real (Nm)
centrifugal pumps.
Viscous dissipation at nominal speed
VDISSIPATION Real (W) [0.0]
for a displacement pump.

321
RESTART OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

RESTART
The restart statement defines a restart of the program from a previous run. The restart file contains
data necessary to restore the state of the simulation engine from a previous run. OLGA will not contain
a complete snapshot of the in-memory data structures. This means in particular that the original input
file has to be read to get information about e.g. the pipe line, sources, walls, time integration, and
output information. The content of the restart file can be thought of as specialized initial conditions, but
with more information than the standard user specified initial conditions.

Please note that it is not allowed to change any geometry data in a restart run. E.g all pipes must have
the same number of sections, section lengths, elevations and diameters. Nodes must have the same
connections. Walls and materials must be the same. The setting for component tracking (keyword
OPTIONS, key COMPOSITIONAL) cannot be changed.

By default, without using the RESTART keyword, a restart file is written at the end of the simulation.
To save restart files generated at other times, either of the keys DTWRITE or WRITETIME can be
used.

Several actions, such as activate/deactivate SLUGTRACKING, change valve openings, modify

controller settings etc. may be performed in a restart.

Discrepancies between the original and the restart case will be reported as info messages when the
restart case is started. Watch out for these to catch any unintended effects in the restart run (e.g. a
missing source or something else that will influence results).

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Define the time interval at which to write restart
DTWRITE Real (s)
data to file.
The name of the restart file from which to restart
FILE String
the simulation.
ON: Enable reading of the restart file. OFF:
READFILE Symbol ON | [OFF]
Restart is disabled.
Time in previous simulation at which the state is
READTIME Real (s) read in order to restart this simulation (only one
time point is allowed).
OVERWRITE: Replace any existing restart file
APPEND | OFF | with the current data. APPEND: Add data to an
WRITE Symbol
[OVERWRITE] existing restart file. OFF: No restart data is written
to file.
RealList A specific time or time series when restart data is
WRITETIME
(s) written to the restart file.

322
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SEPARATOR
The network separator model in OLGA is not intended to accurately model separation phenomena, but
is meant to include the influence of a separator on transient pipeline dynamics.

The network separators have arbitrary number of outlets. Two phase separators must have connected
at least one gas-outlet and one oil-outlet to pipes. Three phase separators must have connected at least
one gas-outlet, one oil-outlet and one water-outlet to pipes.
The user can define the separation efficiency (gas/liquid and oil/water), and set critical levels for oil and
water drainage.

Model description and user guidelines:

1. Separator type: The separator may be horizontal or vertical, two-phase of three-phase.
2. Pipelines downstream of network separators. For a two phase separator, the following outlets
are defined:
• GAS_1, .., GAS_N outlets (Use Gas_2 to model flare outlet)
• OIL_1, .., OIL_N outlets (Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)

For a three-phase separator, the following outlets are defined:

• GAS_1, .., GAS_N outlets
• OIL_1, .., OIL_N outlets
• WATER_1, .., WATER_N outlets

3. Valves. The network separators have no internal valves. All valves must be defined on the
outgoing branches, using the VALVE keyword.
4. Levels used by a network separator. The separator levels are controlled by the valves and
controllers in the outlet branches. Moreover, the water level limit for when the water will be
drained together with the oil can be specified by the keys: HHWATHOLDUP or HHWATLEVEL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
DIAMETER Real (m) Separator diameter.
Liquid volume fraction when the efficiency
EFFHIGH Real [0.995] goes toward zero and the separator is
treated as a normal section.
Gas/liquid separation efficiency. (One
EFFICIENCY Real [1.0] minus the volume fraction of liquid
droplets in the gas outlet stream.)
Liquid volume fraction when the efficiency
EFFLOW Real [0.995]
is reduced.
FEEDMASSFRACTIO
RealList Mass fraction of each feed.
N
FEEDMOLEFRACTIO
RealList Mole fraction of each feed.
N
Label of feeds used to initialize separator.
FEED-1 | Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
FEEDNAME SymbolList
BOFEED-1 BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS keyword.

323
SEPARATOR OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Volume fraction of each feed given in
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList FEEDNAME for choke model (only for
Blackoil model).
Label or number of fluid table to apply for
the specific branch. If a keyword based
FLUID Symbol pvt-file is used, FLUID must be the same
as the LABEL given in the pvt-file, i.e.,
numbering is not valid for this format.
Water hold-up upper limit. If the water
hold-up exceeds this value water will be
HHWATHOLDUP Real
drained together with oil through the oil
drain.
Water level upper limit. If the water level
HHWATLEVEL Real (m) exceeds this value water will be drained
together with oil through the oil drain.
INITOILLEVEL Real (m) The initial oil level.
INITPRESSURE Real (Pa) Initial pressure.
INITTEMPERATURE Real (C) Initial temperature.
INITWATLEVEL Real (m) [0.0] The initial water level.
LABEL String [SEPARATOR_1] Name of separator.
LENGTH Real (m) Separator length.
Label of the table where the relation
LEVELTABLE Symbol between level (height) in the separator
and volume of the separator is given.
Time constant for separation of oil from
OILTCONST Real (s) [0.0]
water.
VERTICAL |
ORIENTATION Symbol Orientation of the separator..
HORIZONTAL
Number of phases separated in the
PHASE Symbol TWO | THREE
separator.
SURFACEAREA Real (m2) Surface area of the separator.
RealList
TAMBIENT Ambient temperature.
(C)
RealList
TIME [0.0] Time series for specified boundary values.
(s)
Real Overall heat transfer coefficient given by
UVALUE [0.0]
(W/m2-C) user based on inner pipe diameter.
Time constant for separation of water
WATTCONST Real (s) [0.0]
from oil.

324
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
x-coordinate of separator in network.
X Real (m) [0]
Used for 3D graphics only
y-coordinate (vertical axis) of separator in
Y Real (m) [0]
network. Used for 3D graphics only
z-coordinate of separator in network.
Z Real (m) [0]
Used for 3D graphics only

OUTPUTDATA (on SEPARATOR)

This statement defines the separator variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
List of variables to be printed. Units may
VARIABLE SymbolList
be specified.

TRENDDATA (on SEPARATOR)

This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for separators. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
List of variables to be plotted. Units may
VARIABLE SymbolList
be specified.

325
SERVERDATA OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SERVERDATA
This statement defines the SERVERDATA. Server data is available both on flowpath level and on case
level. On the case level it is only the keys DTPLOT and VARIABLE that are available.

If the position is given either through pipe/section or through a reference to an equipment label e.g.
VALVE-1, the variables are trend variables. However, if the position is not specified, the variables are
treated as profile variables.

More than one server data statement can be specified for each flowpath. The DTPLOT can differ from
statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different variables.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Pipeline position where the variable will be
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) plotted. Absolute position. Distance from
branch inlet.
Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with
AGEGROUPID IntegerList aging effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor
(KHI).
Checkvalve for which the variable is to be
CHECKVALVE SymbolList
plotted.
Component names. Using the Inhibitor
tracking module, available components are
HC, H2O and MEG/MEOH/ETOH. Using
DRILLING=ON under OPTIONS, available
BOCOMP-
COMPONENT SymbolList components are HC, H2O,
1
MEG/MEOH/ETOH, CUTTING and MUD
components. For compositional models the
names of the available components are given
in the feed file.
Compressor for which the variable is to be
COMPRESSOR SymbolList
plotted.
Interval for update of server data when value
DTPLOT Real (s) [0] > 0. Value 0 means that the variables are
updated after each time step.
HeatExchanger for which the variable is to be
HEATEXCHANGER SymbolList
plotted.
HYKPID IntegerList Array element index of HYKPLIST.
Wall layer number for plotting of wall
LAYER IntegerList temperatures. Layer no. 1 is the innermost
one.
LEAK SymbolList Leak for which the variable is to be plotted.
NearWellSource for which the variable is to be
NEARWELLSOURCE SymbolList
plotted.
PIG SymbolList Pig for which the variable is to be plotted.
Pipe numbers or labels where the variables
PIPE SymbolList
will be plotted.

326
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Labels of specified positions where the
POSITION SymbolList
variables will be plotted.
PUMP SymbolList Pump for which the variable is to be plotted.
Section numbers where the variables will be
SECTION IntegerList 0
plotted.
SLUGID IntegerList [0] Unique identity defining a slug or a pig.
SOURCE SymbolList Source for which the variable is to be plotted.
Tracer label that the tracer type variables are
TRACERFEED SymbolList
plotted for.
VALVE SymbolList Valve for which the variable is to be plotted.
SymbolList List of variables to be plotted. Units should not
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) be used.
WELL SymbolList Well for which the variable is to be plotted.

327
SERVEROPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SERVEROPTIONS
See OLGA OPC Server Guide for more information on how to use the OPC server in OLGA. This
document is included in the OLGA installation.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
States which keys should be made available
EXPOSE SymbolList ALL | INPUTLOG
as input variables on the OPC server.
Turns on or off logging of external inputs to
the simulator. Must be ON if later playback
INPUTLOG Symbol ON | [OFF]
for reproducibility of simulation results should
be possible.
MODELNAME String The model or submodel name.
The OPC server name. The servername
SERVERNAME String [OLGAOPCServer] should be a single word, with no spaces (' ')
or dots ('.').
Simulator mode. 'Simulator' means a free-
running simulator operating on its own.
EXTERNAL | 'External' means that the simulator will try to
SIMULATORMODE Symbol
[SIMULATOR] keep synchronized with the ticking of the
external clock, it will wait whenever it catches
up with the external clock.

328
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SHAPE
This keyword describes the external contour of a material. The type of the shape can be one of the
following: CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, RECTANGLE, POLYGON. The material inside the shape is being
described with the MATERIAL keyword. The shape keyword is being used for solid bundles.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
LABEL String [SHAPE-1] Name of shape.
MATERIAL Symbol Name/label of solid inside the shape.
RADIUS Real (m) Radius of the circle.
CIRCLE |
Type of shape. CIRCLEs are automatically
TYPE Symbol RECTANGLE |
placed in the origin.
POLYGON
x-coordinate of the lower left corner of the
X_LOWER_LEFT Real (m)
rectangle.
x-coordinate of the upper right corner of the
X_UPPER_RIGHT Real (m)
rectangle.
RealList x-coordinates of the polygon. Polygon points
XPOINTS
(m) have to be specified counter clockwise.
y-coordinate of the lower left corner of the
Y_LOWER_LEFT Real (m)
rectangle.
y-coordinate of the upper right corner of the
Y_UPPER_RIGHT Real (m)
rectangle.
y-coordinates of the polygon points. Polygon
RealList
YPOINTS points have to be specified counter
(m)
clockwise.

329
SINGLEOPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SINGLEOPTIONS
This statement defines options for simulation of single component systems in OLGA, turned on by
specifying COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE in keyword OPTIONS.

There are three single component systems that can be specified. These are H2O, CO2 and OTHER,
and are specified by key COMPONENT in SINGLEOPTIONS. For COMPONENT equal H2O and CO2
most physical parameters are implemented in OLGA, while for COMPONENT=OTHER the user needs
to specify these parameters in SINGLEOPTIONS.

Note: The availability of the single component module depends on the User's licensing agreement with
SPT Group.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
H2O | CO2 |
COMPONENT Symbol Name of single-component.
OTHER
Coefficients in equation for
CPIC RealList specific heat. Only for
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Maximum pressure for PVT table
MAXPRESSURE Real (Pa)
generated.
Maximum temperature for PVT
MAXTEMPERATURE Real (C)
table generated.
Minimum pressure for PVT table
MINPRESSURE Real (Pa)
generated.
Minimum temperature for PVT
MINTEMPERATURE Real (C)
table generated.
Molecular weight. Only for
MW Real (g/mol)
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Accentric factor. Only for
OMEGA Real
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Critical pressure. Only for
PC Real (Pa)
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Time constant for mass transfer
from liquid phase to gas phase
TBOILING RealList (s) [1.0]
due to boiling for component.
(Non-equilibrium delay constant).
Critical temperature. Only for
TC Real (C)
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Time constant for mass transfer
from gas phase to liquid phase for
TCONDENSATION RealList (s) [1.0]
the component. (Non-equilibrium
delay constant).
Time points for which TBOILING
TIME RealList (s) [0.0]
and TCONDENSATION changes.
Viscosity tuning factor. Only for
VISX Real [1.0]
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
Volume tuning factor. Only for
VOLX RealList [0.0]
SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.

330
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SLUGTRACKING
This statement defines the slug tracking option. This statement has two main sub-options for initiation
of liquid slugs: the level slug option (LEVEL) and the hydrodynamic slug option (HYDRODYNAMIC).

These two options may be used together or separately. Terrain slugging will be detected in ordinary
simulations without the slug tracking module, and the interactions between terrain and hydrodynamic
slugging can be investigated using the key HYDRODYNAMIC. The level slug option is mostly used for
startup-slugs.

If HYDRODYNAMIC = ON, the code will set up a new slug in a section whenever the set-up criteria are
fulfilled. These are:
(1) Flow regime at the section boundary changes from separated to slug flow.
(2) Other slug fronts are the required distance away.
(3) The time elapsed since the previous slug was generated in or passed this section is
higher than a specified minimum time.

If HYDRODYNAMIC = MANUAL, the user can specify a fixed number of slugs to be set up at predefined
positions and times. Using this option, liquid will be injected into the pipeline to generate slugs of
required size.

Slugs are not allowed to be generated at the inlet and outlet sections by default. That is, the boundary
sections are automatically set to illegal for slugs by the program itself. However, the slug front is allowed
to move into the outlet section, and the slug tail into the inlet section. Users can specify the sections
where slugs are not allowed to be generated by using SLUGILLEGAL keyword.

The slug tracking option offers full temperature calculation capabilities.

Remark: The availability of the slug tracking option depends on the user’s licensing agreement with
SPT Group.
To turn off slug-tracking in a restart there are two possibilities:
(1) Set both LEVEL and HYDRODYNAMIC to OFF. Then the only slugs in the system will be
the ones read from restart.
(2) Remove SLUGTRACKING keyword. Average values will be used in the sections. No
slugs in the simulation.

More details can be found in the description of the slug tracking module.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Minimum void required behind a level tail and
BUBBLEVOID Real
ahead of a level front at initiation time
Number of pipe diameters a slug needs to
DELAYCONSTANT Real [150] propagate before the next hydrodynamic slug
is initiated.
End time for level slug initiation. If not given
ENDTIME Real (s)
no end time restriction is enforced.

331
SLUGTRACKING OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Gas entrainment into slug from bubble for
breaking/level front in slug tracking. NYDAL:
NYDAL |
GASENTRAINMENT Symbol Nydal correlation for entrainment.
[VOIDINSLUG]
VOIDINSLUG: Entrainment based on
correlation for void in slug.
ON | MANUAL |
HYDRODYNAMIC Symbol Option for initiating hydrodynamic slugs.
[OFF]
INITBUBBLEVOIDS RealList [1] Void fractions in the slug bubbles.
INITENDTIMES RealList (s) End times for slug generation.
The minimum distance between two
INITFREQUENCY Real (1/s) consecutive slugs is defined as (bubble
vel./INITFREQUENCY).
Maximum initial length of hydrodynamic slugs
INITLENGTH Real
in number of pipe diameters.
Time interval between initiations of
INITPERIODS RealList (s)
consecutive slugs.
Labels of section boundaries where slug
INITPOSITIONS SymbolList
generation zones are located.
INITSLUGVOIDS RealList [0.0] Void fraction in the liquid slug.
INITSTARTTIMES RealList (s) Start times for slug generation.
RealList The length of zones where slugs are to be
INITZONELENGTHS
(m) generated.
LEVEL Symbol ON | [OFF] Option for detecting and initiating level slugs.
Max number of slugs allowed in the system, if
MAXNOSLUGS Integer
not given there are no restrictions.
The maximum void allowed in a level slug at
SLUGVOID Real
initiation time.
Start time for level slug initiation. If not given,
STARTTIME Real (s)
level detection is on from simulation start.

332
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TABLE
This statement defines a function in tabular form either valve sizing coefficient or well flow parameters.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
INJECTIONPRESSUR Injection pressure at which
Real (Pa)
E the GLV curve is defined.
LABEL String [TABLE-1] Table label.
LOOKUP Symbol ON | [OFF] Turn on look-up function.
Define the opening for
which DELTAP-CV
relationship is valid.
Instead of defining one
OPEN-CV table for a valve,
one can instead define a
list of DELTAP-CV tables,
OPENING Real
and the CV for the valve is
found by interpolating w.r.t.
both DELTAP and
OPENING. This
functionality is only valid for
valves with
PHASE=LIQUID.
Define the list of values of
both independent and
POINT RealList
dependent variables in the
table (x1, y1, x2, y2, ...).
Table where
TABLE Symbol XLOOKUPVARIABLE input
is sampled.
XLOOKUPVARIABLE Symbol XVAR | [YVAR] Name of x variable
NOTGIVEN | OPEN |
SymbolList
XVARIABLE DELTAP | LEVEL | Independent variable name
(ValueUnitPair)
PRODUCTIONPRESSURE
NOTGIVEN | CV | FLOW |
GASFL | LIQFL | PILIQ |
SymbolList
YVARIABLE WATFR | OILTC | GASTC | Dependent variable name
(ValueUnitPair)
WATTC | STDGASFLOW |
VOLUME

333
TIMESERIES OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TIMESERIES
The TIMESERIES keyword is a generic function of time. This means that it can be used for different p
properties. There is a built in sine function, normal point series can be used, and in addition a combin
are possible. The time series functionality is implemented for ambient temperature, soil temperature a

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AMPLITUDE Real Amplitude of the sine function
This key determines how the time series
in SERIESREF are combined. When
using SEQUENTIAL, the time series are
combined in sequence according to the
SEQUENTIAL
COMBINETYPE Symbol order in which they are defined. The
| [ADDITIVE]
transition from one to the next is defined
in the keys TRANSITIONTIME and
TRANSITION. If ADDITIVE is used, the
values are simply added.
Scaling factor for each time series in
FACTOR RealList [1] SERIESREF. If this key is not given, a
factor of 1 is used.
STEP | Type of interpolation between each point
INTERPOLATION Symbol
[LINEAR] in time.
[TIMESERIES
LABEL String Label of timeseries
-1]
The time it takes for the sine function to
PERIOD Real (s)
start repeating itself.
If this key is set to ON, the function will be
repeated. If the first and last value of the
function are equal, the function will be
PERIODIC Symbol ON | [OFF] smooth. If PERIODIC = OFF, the last
value will be used for the remainder of the
simulation when the time exceeds the
defined range.
Series of function values at corresponding
SERIES RealList
times defined in key TIME
List of TIMESERIES labels to be used.
SERIESREF SymbolList Note that circular references are not
allowed.
Points in time for every given value in the
TIME RealList (s)
key SERIES
This key is used to define the phase shift
TIME0 Real (s) [0] of the sine function. If it is set to a quarter
period, a cosine function is created.
STEP | Type of transition from one time series in
TRANSITION Symbol
[LINEAR] SERIESREF to the next.

334
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
This key is used to determine the points in time
when the transition from one time series in
TRANSITIONTIM SERIESREF to the next occurs. If PERIODIC =
RealList (s)
E ON, the difference between the first and last
point is used to determine the period of the
function.
POINTS |
TYPE Symbol COMBINE | Option for type of time series.
[SINE]

335
 TOOLJOINT OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TOOLJOINT
This statement defines the geometrical data for internal and external pipe upsets in the flow path. The
purpose is to calculate a correction factor for the pipe wall roughness due to the pipe upsets.

The TOOLJOINT keyword is part of the Wells Module.

DD2
DD1

D2INUP

D1EXUP

Figure A Side view and cross section of flow path with upsets

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
D1EXUP Real (m) External upset of pipe/tubing.
D2INUP Real (m) Internal upset in annulus/tubing.
DD1 Real (m) Inner diameter of annulus.
DD2 Real (m) Outer diameter of annulus.
GEOMETRY Symbol Geometry label to where the tool-joint is located.
LABEL String [TOOLJ-1] Tool-joint label, default is tool-joint number.
LJOINT Real (m) Distance between upsets.
LUPSET Real (m) Length of upset.
Label of pipe(s) for which the wall roughness
PIPE SymbolList
shall be adjusted.

336
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TRANSMITTER
This keyword defines output-signals sent from the flowpath. The signals can be received by a
signalcomponent (typicallly a controller). The signals can be measured values in the branch, e.g.
pressure, massflow etc. Controllers that receive these measured values use them to calculate new
signal which in turn is used to regulate e.g. a valve opening (see Controllers).

Type Parameter set

Key Unit:( ) Default:[ ] Description

Absolute position. Distance from

ABSPOSITION Real (m)
branch inlet.
LABEL String [TM-1] Transmitter Terminal label.
PIPE Symbol Pipe number for the transmitter.
Section number where the
SECTION Integer 0
transmitter is located.
Section boundary number where the
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1
transmitter is located.

337
TRACERFEED OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TRACERFEED
This statement defines a feed of tracer, for instance a feed of kinetic hydrate inhibitor or corrosion
inhibitor. When used for tracking a tracer with aging effect, a distribution in age groups may be chosen,
otherwise the key AGING should be set to OFF. The tracer mass, residence time and age are tracked
through the pipeline system. Tracers are, however, assumed to be present in such small concentrations
that they do not influence the hydraulics. TRACERFEEDs may be referenced in a SOURCE or
MASSFLOW node. To use TRACERFEED, the key TRACERTRACKING must be set to ON under the
OPTIONS keyword.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Boundaries of age groups [s]. N AGEBOUNDARIES
RealList give N+1 age groups, one below the lowest boundary,
AGEBOUNDARIES
(s) one above the highest boundary, and N-1 groups
bounded by the N boundaries.
AGING Symbol ON | [OFF] Switch for activating aging effect on.
Carrying phase of the inhibitor. KHI will not follow any
GAS | OIL | vaporization to the gas phase. Gas/liquid phase
CARRIERPHASE Symbol
[WATER] transfer will not affect the KHI amounts in the carrying
phase, only the concentrations.
Age output variables are set to zero if (tracer
mass)/(tracer mass + carrier phase mass) of the
HIGHLOWBOUND Real [0.0] requested feed/age group is lower than this value and
the ratio hasn't been above HIGHLOWBOUND since
it was lower than LOWLOWBOUND.
LABEL String [TFEED-1] Tracer feed label.
Age output variables are set to zero if (tracer
LOWLOWBOUND Real [0.0] mass)/(tracer mass + carrier phase mass) of the
requested feed/age group is lower than this value.

338
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TREND
This statement defines the time interval for trend plotting. The time intervals may be given as single
time interval (DTPLOT), directly as a set of time points (TIME) or as a set of time intervals changing at
specified time points (combination of DTPLOT and TIME).

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Time interval between subsequent trend variable printouts.
RealList
DTPLOT DTPLOT should only be given once in the input file, if given
(s)
more than once, OLGA will use the last value given.
Number of data points. A list of NPLOT values refers to the
NPLOT IntegerList time points given in TIME, i.e., the sample period will be
DTIME/NPLOT.
RealList
TIME [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol OFF | [ON] Enable plotting to file

339
TRENDDATA OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TRENDDATA
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted. A trend plot is a time series plot for a specified
variable. Global variables are not available on this level.

Paramete
Type
Key r set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Pipeline position where the variable will be
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) plotted. Absolute position. Distance from
branch inlet.
Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with
AGEGROUPID IntegerList aging effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor
(KHI).
Checkvalve for which the variable is to be
CHECKVALVE SymbolList
plotted.
Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking
module, available components are HC, H2O
and MEG/MEOH/ETOH. Using DRILLING=ON
BOCOMP- under OPTIONS, available components are
COMPONENT SymbolList
1 HC, H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH, CUTTING and
MUD components. For compositional models
the names of the available components are
given in the feed file.
Compressor for which the variable is to be
COMPRESSOR SymbolList
plotted.
HeatExchanger for which the variable is to be
HEATEXCHANGER SymbolList
plotted.
HYKPID IntegerList Array element index of HYKPLIST.
Wall layer number for plotting of wall
LAYER IntegerList temperatures. Layer no. 1 is the innermost
one.
LEAK SymbolList Leak for which the variable is to be plotted.
NearWellSource for which the variable is to be
NEARWELLSOURCE SymbolList
plotted.
PIG SymbolList Pig for which the variable is to be plotted.
Pipe numbers or labels where the variables will
PIPE SymbolList
be plotted.
Labels of specified positions where the
POSITION SymbolList
variables will be plotted.
PUMP SymbolList Pump for which the variable is to be plotted.
Section numbers where the variables will be
SECTION IntegerList
plotted.
SLUGID IntegerList [0] Unique identity defining a slug or a pig.
SOURCE SymbolList Source for which the variable is to be plotted.

340
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Tracer label that the tracer type
TRACERFEED SymbolList
variables are plotted for.
Valve for which the variable is to
VALVE SymbolList
be plotted.
SymbolList List of variables to be plotted.
VARIABLE
(ValueUnitPair) Units should not be used.
Well for which the variable is to
WELL SymbolList
be plotted.

Zone for which the variable is to

ZONE SymbolList (-)
be plotted.

Switch telling whether to store

ZONEDETAILS Symbol (-) YES | [NO] trend data for all autogenerated
sources/wells within zones.

TRENDDATA for BUNDLE

This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for all the Thermal components; annulus, fluid
bundle and solid bundle. A trend plot is a time series plot for a specified variable.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Position where the variable will be plotted.
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) Absolute position. Distance from bundle
start position
Section numbers in bundle definition where
SECTIONNUMBER IntegerList
the variables will be plotted.
SymbolList
VARIABLE [TBUNXY] List of variables to be plotted.
(ValueUnitPair)
List of X coordinates where the variables
XPOS RealList (m)
are plotted
List of Y coordinates where the variables
YPOS RealList (m)
are plotted

341
TUNING OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TUNING
This statement defines the tuning option, witch makes it possible to tune certain parameters in the
model. The parameters available for tuning are at the moment very limited.

Remark: The availability of the tuning option depends on the user’s licensing agreement with SPT
Group.

The TUNING keyword may be used for adjusting the OLGA model to specific sets of measured data or
for sensitivity studies. TUNING should be applied with great care, as the validation and verification of
the OLGA model may not be valid for such cases.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Tuning coefficient for AREA in PIPE (used for
AREA RealList [1.0] equivalent pipes). NOTE: Cannot be applied on
individual sections. Pipe level and higher is allowed.
Tuning coefficient for diameter. NOTE: Cannot be
DIAMETER RealList [1.0] applied on individual sections. Pipe level and higher
is allowed.
Tuning coefficient for entrainment rate of liquid
ENTRAINMENT RealList [1.0]
droplets in gas
GROUGHNESS Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for roughness from droplets.
Tuning coefficient for interfacial friction factor
LAM_LGI RealList [1.0]
between liquid and gas
Tuning coefficient for interfacial friction factor
LAM_WOI RealList [1.0]
between oil and water
Tuning coefficient for mass transfer between gas
MASSTRANSFER RealList [1.0]
and oil.
OILDENSITY RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for oil density
OILVISC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for oil viscosity
Pipe numbers or labels where the tuning
PIPE SymbolList [ALL]
parameters will be applied.
Positions where the tuning parameters will be
POSITION SymbolList applied. If this key is defined, PIPE and SECTION
can not be used in the same keyword statement.
Maximum of laminar and turbulent friction factor will
be used for Reynold's number higher than REHIGH,
REHIGH RealList [3000] and an interpolated value will be used for Re
between RELOW and REHIGH. Can be applied on
individual sections, pipes and branches.
Laminar friction factor will be used for Reynold's
number lower than RELOW, and an interpolated
RELOW RealList [2300] value will be used for Re between RELOW and
REHIGH. Can be applied on individual sections,
pipes and branches.

342
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
Tuning coefficient for inner wall roughness. NOTE:
ROUGHNESS RealList [1.0] Cannot be applied on individual sections. Pipe level
and higher is allowed.
Section or section boundary numbers where the
SECTION RealList
tuning parameters will be applied.
TAMBIENT RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for ambient temperature.
WATERDENSITY RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for water density
WATERVISC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for water viscosity

343
VALVE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

VALVE
Here data for valves and chokes are defined.

The position of the valve can be specified in 3 ways:

1. by referring to a pipe and a section boundary number

2. by referring to a pre-define position
3. by specifying the distance from the left end of the branch (absolute position)

The valve performance is either obtained from a discharge coefficient and the maximum choke
diameter, or from a table with valve characteristics. The relative opening of the valve can be prescribed
as a function of time, or it can be driven by a controller.

There are two valve models (GASSIZING and HYDROVALVE). Model selection is done with the
MODEL key. GASSIZING is an implementation of the gas sizing equation given in Valve - Methods and
assumptions. The GASSIZING option requires gas valve characteristics given by the TABLE key.
HYDROVALVE can be used to simulate chokes, liquid valves and gas valves.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Absolute position. Distance from branch
ABSPOSITION Real (m)
inlet.
CD Real [0.84] Discharge coefficient.
Ratio between gas and liquid sizing
CF Real
coefficient.
Choice of critical flow model to be used.
HENRYFAUSKE Homogenous frozen critical flow model or
CRITFLOWMODEL Symbol
| [FROZEN] Henry-Fauske model. In addition, a forced
subcritical option is available.
DIAMETER Real (m) Maximum valve diameter.
States which keys should be made
EXPOSE SymbolList ALL | OPENING available as input variables on the OPC
server.
LABEL String [VALVE-1] Valve label. Default is valve number.
Valve model. HYDROMODEL is used for
chokes and valves with liquid/gas
GASSIZING |
MODEL Symbol characteristics. GASSIZING can only be
[HYDROVALVE]
used to simulate valves with gas
characteristics.'
Relative openings in the valve opening
OPENING RealList [1.0]
timetable.
The type of flow through the valve. For two
PHASE Symbol GAS | LIQUID
or three phase flow, use LIQUID.
PIPE Symbol Pipe label where the valve is located.

344
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Position where the valve is located. If this
value is defined PIPE and
POSITION Symbol
SECTIONBOUNDARY should not be used.

Section boundary number where the valve

SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer 1
is located.
STROKETIME Real (s) [0.0] Stroke time of the valve.
SymbolLis
TABLE Label of table for valve characteristics.
t
RealList
TIME [0.0] Time series for valve opening table.
(s)

345
ZONE OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ZONE
The ZONE keyword defines an area between two positions in the PIPELINE (STARTPOSITION AND
ENDPOSITION).

If INTERPOLATION=OFF, PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE must be given. These will be used for the
whole zone.

If INTERPOLATION=VERTICAL, STARTPRESSURE and STARTTEMPERATURE as well as

ENDPRESSURE and ENDTEMPERATURE must be given. The reservoir pressure and temperature will
then be interpolated in the sections between STARTPOSITION and ENDPOSITION.

If INTERPOLATION=AUTOMATIC, either START- or END-values of pressure and temperature must be

given. Pressures between start- and endposition will then be computed using the hydrostatic gradient.

The ZONE keyword refers to a RESERVOIRINFLOW keyword in which reservoir inflow data must be
given. This means that reservoir inflow points will be created in all pipeline sections in the ZONE. A
ZONE with reference to a RESERVOIRINFLOW is equivalent to specification of one WELL keyword for
each section between the start- and endposition of the ZONE.

All plot variables for WELL are also be available for ZONE.

On global level:
TRENDDATA VARIABLE=GGWELL (will plot GGWELL for all ZONES)

On flowpath level:
TRENDDATA ZONE=ALL, VARIABLE=GTWELL, ZONEDETAILS=YES (will plot GTWELL for all
ZONES and for all inflow points in the ZONE)

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
TOTAL: Production and
injection coefficents are
given for the entire zone.
COEFTYPE Symbol (-) PERMETER | [TOTAL]
PERMETER: Production
and injection parameters
are given per meter.
Position where the zone
ENDPOSITION Symbol (-)
ends.
RealList Pressure at the end of
ENDPRESSURE
(Pa) the zone
RealList Temperature at the end
ENDTEMPERATURE
(C) of the zone
ALL | PRESSURE |
States which keys
TEMPERATURE |
should be made
SymbolList STARTPRESSURE |
EXPOSE available as input
(-) ENDPRESSURE |
variables on the OPC
STARTTEMPERATURE |
server.
ENDTEMPERATURE

346
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Type of interpolation used to calculate the
zone properties. OFF: constant reservoir
pressure and temperature. AUTOMATIC:
VERTICAL |
Symbol (- constant reservoir temperature whereas
INTERPOLATION AUTOMATIC |
) the reservoir pressure varies
[OFF]
hydrostatically. VERTICAL: reservoir
temperature and reservoir pressure are
given by interpolation between end points.
LABEL String (-) [ZONE-1] Zone label.
Reservoir pressure. The pressure can be
given as a single value or as a time
RealList
PRESSURE series. The time series will be a function
(Pa)
of the key TIME given in the specified
RESERVOIRINFLOW template.
Reference to template specifying the
Symbol (-
RESERVOIRINFLOW properties of the automatically generated
)
inflows.
Symbol (-
STARTPOSITION Position where the zone begins.
)
RealList
STARTPRESSURE Pressure at the start of the zone
(Pa)
RealList
STARTTEMPERATURE Temperature at the start of the zone
(C)
Reservoir temperature. The temperature
can be given as a single value or as a
RealList
TEMPERATURE time series. The time series will be a
(C)
function of the key TIME given in the
specified RESERVOIRINFLOW template.

347
WALL OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

WALL
This statement specifies the wall data for pipes. In the wall statement the user specifies the wall layer
geometry and the name of the wall. These data are required if the TEMPERATURE option is "WALL" or
"FASTWALL" in OPTIONS. The user also specifies the required data if the walls are to be heated.
Heated walls can only be used together with TEMPERATURE = WALL.

The pipe wall may consist of different material layers, specified by the keys "MATERIAL" and
"THICKNESS". Each material layer can be divided into sub layers either by specifying each sub layer as
a new material layer or by automatic discretization of the material layers by the use of the key
"DISCRETIZATION".

Heat can be provided to a user specified wall layer in each wall. Constant heat or heat varying with time.
Each wall in OLGA may contain only one heat source, i.e. the heat per unit length supplied to the wall is
constant along the pipe having this specific wall. The heat sources may vary along the pipelines by
specifying different walls along the line. A combination of walls having constant power supply and no
power supplied at all can be specified in the same OLGA case.

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

CONTROLLERLABEL Symbol Name of controller for electric heating

ON | Switch on or off auto-discretization for each wall
DISCRETIZATION SymbolList
[OFF] material layer.
ON | Calculate the effect of contraction/expansion of wall
ELASTIC Symbol
[OFF] in pressure equation
ON |
ELECTRICHEAT Symbol Switch electric heating on or off.
[OFF]
Cut off ratio for material elasticity in adjacent wall
layers. If the Young's modulus of the material in a
wall layer is less than ERATIOMIN times the
ERATIOMIN Real (-) [0.1]
Young's modulus of the material in the inside wall
layer, this and all subsequent layers will be ignored
in the calculation of the total wall elasticity.
INNERDIAMETER Real (m) Pipe's inner diameter.
Radial flexibility of pipe (increase in area for a unit
change in pressure relative to area of pipe). This
key can be used to override the value calculated by
KAPPA Real (1/Pa) OLGA. If this key is not given, OLGA will calculate
the flexibility based on the pipe wall geometry and
Young's modulus of elasticity (EMOD) of the
materials.
LABEL String [WALL-1] Label of the wall.
MATERIAL SymbolList Names of materials that are used in the wall layers.
Maximum number of sub-layers allowed for each of
MAXNOLAYERS IntegerList
the layers.
Maximum ratio of outer to inner radius of sub-layers
MAXRATIO RealList [2]
.

348
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Parameter
Type
Key set Description
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

RealList Power per unit length for the electric heating time
POWER
(W/m) series.
ON |
POWERCONTROL Symbol Switch power control on or off.
[OFF]
Max. power per unit length for electric heating if it is
POWERMAX Real (W/m)
restricted by a control system.
RealList
THICKNESS Thickness of each wall layer.
(m)
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Time series when POWER is to be modified.
WALLAYER Integer Wall layer for electric heating.

349
WATEROPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

WATEROPTIONS
In WATEROPTIONS several options are available for modeling the dispersion viscosity
(DISPERSIONVISC) and the slip between the water and oil phases (WATERSLIP).

If WATERSLIP = CONSTANT, the slip between the oil and water phases must be specified with
VELOCITYDIFFERENCE.
If WATERSLIP = ON, the velocities of liquid hydrocarbon and water is calculated by separate
momentum balance equations.

DISPERSIONVISC specifies which model is used to calculate the dispersion phase viscosity.
If DISPERSIONVISC= OFF, a continuous phase is assumed (no dispersion).

If DISPERSIONVISC = PALRHODES, PHI100 - value of the dispersed phase volume fraction when the
relative viscosity = 100% - must be specified. The relative viscosity is the viscosity of the dispersed
phase divided by the viscosity of the continuous phase.

If DISPERSIONVISC = EXPERIMENT, values for the dispersed phase volume fraction (PHIREL) for
each given value of the relative viscosity (VISCREL) must be specified.

If DISPERSIONVISC = VOLUMEAVERAGE, the user may specify values for the viscosity tuning factor
(VISCMOD) corresponding to given WATERCUT (volume fraction of water in the liquid phase) values.

If DISPERSIONVISC = WOELFLIN, the user may specify the two parameters a (AWOELFLIN) and b
(BWOELFLIN) of this relative viscosity model:

exp

No parameters are needed for the option DISPERSIONVISC = BARNEA, for which the Barnea &
Mizrahi model is used:

exp / 1

where

5
2

Here μc and μd are the viscosities for the continuous and dispersed phases, respectively.

A table based model is available using input as given in this example:

WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL=INPUTVISC, \
VISCMOD=(1,1.05,1.2,1.4,1.9,2.8,2.7,1.3,1.15,1.05,1)\,
WATERCUT=( 0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1),\,
WATERFLASH=ON, WATERSLIP=ON
Note that one should use WATERFLASH=ON and WATERSLIP=ON with this model.

The flowing water volume fraction inversion point (INVERSIONWATERFRAC) can be specified for any
Dispersion Viscosity model.

An intermediate dispersion range is introduced. Between the lower critical water cut (FWLOW, default
value 0.0) and the inversion point (given by INVERSIONWATERFRAC) the flow is assumed to be a
water-in-oil dispersion flowing above a free water layer.

The degree of mixing of water into oil is predicted by the standard OLGA model, but the maximum

350
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

fraction of the total water stream that can be mixed into the oil is given by EMAX (default value 1.0):

(Volume flow of water in oil)/(Total volume flow of water) ≤ EMAX.

Both parameters should be defined under the WATEROPTIONS keyword.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Constant A in Woelflin viscosity
AWOELFLIN Real [4.2]
correlation
Constant B in Woelflin viscosity
BWOELFLIN Real [2.5]
correlation
ON: Dispersion viscosity calculated
according to DISPMODEL settings. OFF:
Viscosity volume weighting if
DISPERSIONVISC Symbol OFF | [ON]
WATERSLIP = OFF or CONSTANT.
Viscosity from tables for continuous
phase is used if WATERSLIP = ON.
RONNINGSEN |
EXPERIMENT | Specify which model to be used to
WOELFLIN | calculate the dispersion viscosity
DISPMODEL Symbol
BARNEA | (DISPERSIONVISC=ON). For further
INPUTVISC | details see User's manual.
[PALRHODES]
Maximum fraction of water dispersed for
EMAX Real [1.0] FWLOW < WC <
INVERSIONWATERFRAC
Scaling factor for water entrainment rate
ENTRAINMENTFACTOR Real [1.0]
from bulk to droplets
Critical water fraction above which the
FWLOW Real [0.0] fraction of the water dispersed into oil <
EMAX
Flowing water volume fraction at
INVERSIONWATERFRAC Real [0.5]
inversion point.
Dispersed phase volume fraction when
the relative viscosity (visc. of dispersed
PHI100 Real [0.765]
phase/ visc. of continuous phase) is
100%.
Dispersed phase volume fraction given
PHIREL Real [0.0] the relative viscosity (VISCREL). Used if
DISPMODEL=EXPERIMENT.
Real Define the velocity difference between
VELOCITYDIFFERENCE [0.0]
(m/s) the oil and water phases.
Viscosity tuning factors corresponding to
VISCMOD RealList given WATERCUT values. Used if
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF.

Relative viscosity for a given dispersed

VISCREL Real [0.0] phase volume fraction (PHIREL). Used if
DISPMODEL=EXPERIMENT.

351
WATEROPTIONS OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Watercut values corresponding to a given
WATERCUT RealList viscosity tuning factor (VISCMOD). Used
if DISPERSIONVISC=OFF.
ON: Oil/water slip velocity is calculated
within the flow model. OFF: No velocity
OFF | CONSTANT difference. CONSTANT: A constant
WATERSLIP Symbol
| [ON] velocity difference between oil and water
is specified. Should be used with great
care.

352
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

WAXDEPOSITION
This group is used to define input parameters for the wax deposition module. Wax deposition is defined
for all flow paths, that is, all flow paths must have assigned a wax table. If multiple wax tables are used
in a network, the fluid properties must be generated in a specific manner.

The derivative of wax porosity (if POROSITYOPTION=AGEING) is defined in this manner:

(INITPOROSITY-HARDPOROSITY)/AGEINGTIME

Full temperature calculation (OPTIONS TEMPERATURE = WALL) is necessary when simulating wax
deposition.

Remarks: The availability of the wax deposition option depends on the user's licensing agreement with
SPT Group.

The wax deposition module cannot be applied together with the slug tracking or corrosion modules. The
wax file is generated in PVTsim.

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Options for treatment of porosity of deposited
wax as function of time. If CONSTANT, no
aging mechanism is activated. The porosity
will either be directly given by
WAXPOROSITY or an average value
calculated by OLGA . If AGEING,
AGEING | INITPOROSITY, HARDPOROSITY and
AGEINGOPT Symbol
[CONSTANT] AGEINGTIME will be used to find change in
porosity with time. New deposits will still have
the porosity according to WAXPOROSITY
settings. If INITPOROSITY is to be used as
porosity values of new deposits,
WAXPOROSITY must be set to the same
values.
Time for reduction of porosity from
RealList INITPOROSITY to HARDPOROSITY. Used to
AGEINGTIME [7]
(d) describe change in porosity with time due to
aging.
RealList Shear deposition rate constant for deposition
COEFSHEAR [0.0]
(kg/m2) of precipitated wax.
RealList Pure paraffin wax thermal conductivity.
CONDUCTIVITY [0.242]
(W/m-K) Currently not available.
Options for pure wax thermal conductivity.
TABLE: The wax conductivity is taken from
TABLE |
CONDUCTOPT Symbol the wax tables. MANUAL: The conductivity is
[MANUAL]
given through the key CONDUCTIVITY.
Currently not available.
Linear multiplier for modification of the
DIFFCOEFFMULT RealList [1.0] component specific diffusion coefficients given
in the wax-table.

353
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Pressures at which the values of
DISSOLTDIFF apply. The melting/dissolve
table (defined by DISSOLRATE,
DISSOLTDIFF and DISSOLPRESS) will apply
RealList to all branches referred to in the BRANCH list.
DISSOLPRESS
(Pa) If different tables are wanted, separate
WAXDEPOSITON statements must be given
for each branch. Linear interpolation between
table values. NOTE! Works only for
MODEL=RRR.
Maximum melting/diffusion rate. Applied for all
RealList
DISSOLRATE [1.e+12] branches given in keyword. Works only for
(kg/s-m2)
MODEL=RRR.
Difference between dissolution temperature
and wax appearance temperature as function
of pressure. The melting/dissolve table
(defined by DISSOLRATE, DISSOLTDIFF
RealList and DISSOLPRESS) will apply to all branches
DISSOLTDIFF [0.0]
(C) referred to in the BRANCH list. If different
tables are wanted, separate
WAXDEPOSITON statements must be given
for each branch. Linear interpolation between
table values. Works only for MODEL=RRR.
Switch for turning on/off dissolution. Only
DISSOLUTION Symbol ON | [OFF]
applicable with RRR model.
Lower value of porosity after the given ageing
period through AGEINGTIME. Has the
following purposes: 1. To calculate change in
porosity with time due to ageing. 2. Giving
lower limit for porosity in the case of ageing
when INSTPOROSITYOPT = MANUAL.
HARDPOROSITY RealList (-) [0.2]
When INSTPOROSITYOPT = AUTOMATIC,
the lower limit for the porosity is given by
MINPOROSITY, and HARDPOROSITY is
only used for calculating the porosity change
rate. HARDPOROSITY must be equal to or
larger than MINPOROSITY.
Initial porosity of deposited wax, used only for
INITPOROSITY RealList (-) [0.8] describing change in porosity with time due to
ageing.

354
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Options for calculating instantaneous porosity
of deposited wax. MANUAL: A constant value
is used, given by WAXPOROSITY.
AUTOMATIC: The porosity will be calculated
by the internal flow dependent model. The
keys MINPOROSITY and MAXPOROSITY
MANUAL |
INSTPOROSITYOPT Symbol are used to determine the minimum and
[AUTOMATIC]
maximum limits for the porosity. The wax
porosity may be changing with changing flow
conditions, and the average porosity seen at a
given point may be different from the
instantaneous porosity given by the internal
porosity model.
The maximum limit for the calculated porosity
is given by this key. Used when
INSTPOROSITYOPT=AUTOMATIC. The
MAXPOROSITY RealList (-) [0.8]
porosity of new deposits is calculated by
OLGA and a volume averaging of the porosity
of new and old layers will be performed.
RealList
MAXROUGHNESS [1.0E6] Maximum wax layer roughness allowed.
(m)
The minimum limit for the calculated porosity
is given by this key. Used when
INSTPOROSITYOPT=AUTOMATIC. The
MINPOROSITY RealList (-) [0.2] porosity of new deposits is calculated by
OLGA and an volume averaging of the
porosity of new and old layers will be
performed.
MATZAIN |
MODEL Symbol HEATANALOGY Wax deposition model.
| [RRR]
Tuning multiplier for empirical constant C2 in
SHEARMULTC2 Real [1.0]
MATZAIN wax deposition model.
Tuning multiplier for empirical constant C3 in
SHEARMULTC3 Real [1.0]
MATZAIN wax deposition model.
Tuning multiplier for the “D” parameter in the
internal non-newtonian viscosity correlation.
Only used when VISCOPTION = CALSEP. If
VISCMULTD Real [1.0] these are also specified in the wax-table (see
userguide), user-specified values for the
multiplier will override those in the wax-table
file.

355
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Tuning multiplier for the “E” parameter in the
internal non-newtonian viscosity correlation.
Only used when VISCOPTION = CALSEP. If
VISCMULTE Real [1.0] these are also specified in the wax-table (see
userguide), user-specified values for the
multiplier will override those in the wax-table
file.
Tuning multiplier for the “F” parameter in the
internal non-newtonian viscosity correlation.
Only used when VISCOPTION = CALSEP. If
VISCMULTF Real [1.0] these are also specified in the wax-table (see
userguide), user-specified values for the
multiplier will override those in the wax-table
file.
Option for calculating the wax/oil dispersion
viscosity TABULAR: Currently not available.
VISCOPTION Symbol [CALSEP] CALSEP: Use internal model. VISCOPTION
must be selected for the whole system of
branches.
Ratio of viscosity of wax/oil dispersion to oil
viscosity. Corresponding to the wax volume
fractions given in WAXVOLFRACTION. The
viscosity multiplier table (defined by
VISMULTIPLIER and WAXVOLFRACTION) will
VISMULTIPLIER RealList (-)
apply to all flowpaths referred to in the
flowpath list. If different tables are wanted,
separate WAXDEPOSITON statements must be
given for each branch. Linear interpolation
between table values. Currently not available.
Porosity of new deposits in wax layer. Used
WAXPOROSITY RealList (-) [0.6]
when INSTPOROSITYOPT = MANUAL.
Fraction of wax layer thickness that is
WAXROUGHNESS RealList (-) [0.0] interpreted as wax layer roughness (i.e. wall
roughness). Limited by MAXROUGHNESS.
WAXTABLE SymbolList Name of wax table.
Volume fractions of precipitated wax
dispersed in oil corresponding to the viscosity
multiplier values given in VISMULTIPLIER.
The viscosity multiplier table (defined by
VISMULTIPLIER and WAXVOLFRACTION)
WAXVOLFRACTION RealList (-)
will apply to all branches referred to in the
BRANCH list. If different tables are wanted,
separate WAXDEPOSITON statements must
be given for each branch. Linear interpolation
between table values. Currently not available.

356
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

WELL
The well statement is used to define required data for calculating the flow performance of wells.

There are two ways of specifying the data for flow between the reservoir and the well. You may either
specify the coefficients used in the inflow correlations directly, or you may specify traditional
well/reservoir variables like permeability and net pay. When you use the latter, the well/reservoir
variables are translated into the coefficients used in the inflow correlations. This option is only available
with the Wells Module.

Observe that the linear coefficient BPROD can not be zero if the well is located in the first (inlet) section
of a flow path.

Type
Parameter set
Key Unit:( Description
Default:[ ]
)
Absolute position. Distance from
ABSPOSITION Real (m)
branch inlet.
Negative coefficient A in well flow
equation. Less than zero if a
minimum pressure difference is
required for fluid flow from well
into reservoir. Unit: kg/s for the
linear formula, Pa2 for the non-
AINJ RealList
linear formula. Given at in situ
conditions - uses gas mass
fraction from the PVT table to
calculate the split between the
phases.

Positive coefficient A in well flow

equation. Less than zero if a
minimum pressure difference is
required for fluid flow from
reservoir into well. Unit: kg/s for
the linear formula, Pa2 for the
APROD RealList
non-linear formula. Given at in
situ conditions - uses gas mass
fraction from the PVT table to
calculate the split between the
phases.

357
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Negative coefficient B in
well flow equation.
Injectivity index for linear
inflow equation. Unit:
kg/s/Pa for the linear
formula, Pa2-s/kg for the
non-linear formula, psi2-
BINJ RealList d/scf for Forchheimer, psi-
d/scf for Single
Forchheimer. Given at in
situ conditions - uses gas
mass fraction from the PVT
table to calculate the split
between the phases.

Oil formation volume factor

BOOIL Real

Bubble point pressure at

RealList
BPPRESSURE reservoir temperature for
(Pa)
Undersaturated oil wells.
Positive coefficient B in
well flow equation.
Productivity index for linear
inflow equation. Unit:
kg/s/Pa for the linear
formula, Pa2-s/kg for the
non-linear formula, psi2-
BPROD RealList
d/scf for Forchheimer, psi-
d/scf for Single
Forchheimer. Given at in
situ conditions - uses gas
mass fraction from the PVT
table to calculate the split
between the phases.
Condensate-gas ratio. By
RealList
CGR [-1.0] default, CGR from the PVT
(Sm3/Sm3)
table is used.
Negative coefficient C in
well flow equation. Unit:
Pa2-s2/kg2 for the non-
linear formula, psi2-d2/scf2
CINJ RealList
for Forchheimer, psi-
d2/scf2 for Single
Forchheimer, scf/d/psi2n
for Backpressure.

358
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Positive coefficient C in
well flow equation. Unit:
Pa2-s2/kg2 for the non-
linear formula, psi2-d2/scf2
CPROD RealList
for Forchheimer, psi-
d2/scf2 for Single
Forchheimer, scf/d/psi2n
for Backpressure.
Constant in Backpressure
inflow equation. It normally
EXPONENTN RealList [1.0]
varies between 0.5 and
1.0.
ALL | RESPRESSURE |
RESTEMPERATURE |
GASFRACTION |
States which keys should
WATERFRACTION |
be made available as input
EXPOSE SymbolList TOTALWATERFRACTION
variables on the OPC
| WATERCUT | AINJ | BINJ
server
| CINJ | APROD | BPROD |
CPROD | INJECTIVITY |
PRODI
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList Mass fraction of each feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList Mole fraction of each feed.
Label of initial feed to be
used for calculating local
fluid compositions in the
branch (from feed file and
FEED keyword). A list
means mixing of feeds for
FEEDNAME SymbolList FEED-1 | BOFEED-1 each section in the branch.
Note that this key can only
be specified branch-wise.
Requires
COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the
OPTIONS keyword.
Volume fraction of each
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList feed given in FEEDNAME
(only for blackoil model).
RealList
FRACPR Fracture pressure.
(Pa)
Distance gas front has to
travel before it reaches the
GASDIS Real (m) [0.0]
well bore. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.

359
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Gas mass fraction in the
gas+oil mixture for positive
flow. -1 indicates
GASFRACTION RealList [-1.0]
equilibrium. A list of both
positive and negative
values is not allowed.
Linear injectivity index for
RealList gas entering the well
GASINJ
(Sm3/s/Pa) section. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar).
Pressure at which the gas
front will be at the well bore
GASPLIMIT Real (Pa) at steady-state conditions.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Time constant for the gas
GFRTC Real (s) front movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Gas/oil volumetric ratio. By
RealList
GORST [-1.0] default, GOR from the PVT
(Sm3/Sm3)
table is used.
Hole size (diameter).
RealList
HOLES Normally given in inches
(m)
(in).
RealList
HPAY Net pay from inflow zone.
(m)
Injectivity. Given at std
conditions - uses GOR
RealList from the PVT table (or the
INJECTIVITY
(Sm3/s/Pa) specified GORST) and the
PHASE to calculate the
split between the phases.
LINEAR | QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER|
Negative well flow equation
INJOPTION Symbol BACKPRESSURE|
type.
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR
Multiplier for injection rate
when BH pressure is above
fracture pressure. If BH
pressure has been above
INJPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0]
fracture pressure this is a
multiplier when BH
pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD as well.

360
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Multiplier for injection rate
when BH pressure is below
fracture pressure. If the BH
INJPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] pressure has been above
fracture pressure this is a
multiplier only below
INJTHRESHOLD.
Table reference for
negative well flow
performance. Option for
INJTABLE Symbol supporting coning. The
table variables must be
given at reservoir
conditions.
Pressure. If BH pressure
has been above fracture
pressure the injection rate
RealList multiplied by the
INJTHRESHOLD
(Pa) INJPOSTFRACFACTOR
will be used when the BH
pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD.
ISOTHERMAL Symbol NO | [YES] Turn on or off isothermal.
RealList
KPERM Effective permeability.
(mD)
LABEL String [WELL-1] Well label.
Well location in the well
section. MIDDLE if the
reservoir pressure at the
LOCATION Symbol BOTTOM | [MIDDLE] middle of the zone is
specified. BOTTOM if the
reservoir pressure given is
at the bottom of the zone.
Time constant for the oil
OFRTC Real (s) front movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Distance oil front has to
travel before it reaches the
OILDIS Real (m)
well bore. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Linear injectivity index for
RealList oil entering the well
OILINJ
(Sm3/s/Pa) section. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar).

361
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Pressure at which the oil
front will be at the well bore
OILPLIMIT Real (Pa) at steady-state conditions.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR
The phase for which
GAS | WATER | LIQUID | productivity index or
PHASE Symbol
[OIL] absolute open flow rate is
given.
PIPE Symbol Pipe number for well.
Position where the well is
located. If POSITION is
POSITION Symbol defined, BRANCH, PIPE,
and SECTION should not
be used.
Productivity index for linear
inflow equation. Normally
given in (Sm3/d/bar). Given
at std conditions - uses
RealList
PRODI GOR from the PVT table
(Sm3/s/Pa)
(or the specified GORST)
and the PHASE to
calculate the split between
the phases.
LINEAR | QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER |
Positive well flow equation
PRODOPTION Symbol BACKPRESSURE |
type.
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR
Multiplier for production
rate after the reservoir is
fractured. Use when the
PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0]
well parameters are given
for conditions before the
reservoir is fractured.
Multiplier for production
rate before the reservoir is
fractured. Used when the
PRODPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0]
well parameters are given
for conditions after the
reservoir is fractured.
Table reference for positive
flow performance. Option
for supporting coning. The
PRODTABLE Symbol
table variables must be
given at reservoir
conditions.

362
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Maximum flow in Vogels
RealList and Normalized
QMAX
(Sm3/s) Backpressure inflow
equation.
RealList
RESEXT Reservoir extension.
(m)
RealList
RESPRESSURE Reservoir pressure.
(Pa)
RESTEMPERATURE RealList (C) Reservoir temperature.
Gas density at standard
Real
ROGST [-1.0] conditions. By default value
(kg/Sm3)
from PVT table is used.
Oil density at standard
Real
ROLST [-1.0] conditions. By default value
(kg/Sm3)
from PVT table is used.
SECTION Integer 0 Section number for well.
Turbulent non-darcy skin.
RealList
SKIND Normally given in
(1/Sm3/s)
(1/MMSCF/d).
SKINS RealList Mechanical damage skin.
Fraction of total mass of
H2O component in the gas
phase. By default (=-1), the
mass of H2O component is
in the gas phase if the
temperature is greater than
the saturation temperature,
otherwise, the mass of
STEAMFRACTION RealList [-1.0]
H2O component is
distributed between the gas
phase and the water phase
according to the vapor
pressure of H2O in the gas
phase. A list of both
positive and negative
values is not allowed.
Time series when the
reservoir conditions are to
be changed. Note that the
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] value actually used by the
program is interpolated
between the values
specified by the time table.

363
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Mass fraction of total water
in the in the total fluid
mixture of the reservoir.
With a value of –1, the total
TOTALWATERFRACTION RealList [-1.0] water fraction is taken from
the fluid table. Either this
key or WATERFRACTION
can be
specified.
Viscosity of gas reservoir
Real
VISGRES [-1] conditions. By default value
(Ns/m2)
from PVT table is used.
Viscosity of oil reservoir
Real
VISLRES [-1] conditions. By default value
(Ns/m2)
from PVT table is used.
Distance water front has to
travel before it reaches the
well bore. This key can
only be used if water option
is available. Non-zero
WATDIS Real (m)
values are ignored for two-
phase simulations, even if
the water option is
available. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Watercut at standard
conditions. With a value of
WATERCUT RealList [-1.0]
-1.0 the total water fraction
is taken from the fluid table.
Mass fraction of free water
in the total flow mixture of
the reservoir. Either this
key or
TOTALWATERFRACTION
WATERFRACTION RealList
can be specified. For
outflow, this key is ignored
if GASFRACTION<0 (the
water fraction in the source
section is used).
Linear injectivity index for
RealList water entering the well
WATINJ
(Sm3/s/Pa) section. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar).

364
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Type Parameter set

Key Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
Pressure at which the
water front will be at the
well bore at steady-state
WATPLIMIT Real (Pa) conditions. This key can
only be used if water option
is available. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Scaling factor for
determining the amount of
wax forming components
relative to HC mixture. The
value must be in the range
[0,1]. 1 means that the
amount of wax forming
WAXFRACTION RealList [1.0]
components is equal to the
values from the wax table.
Requires
WAXDEPOSITION=ON
under the OPTIONS
keyword and access to the
wax deposition module.
Time constant for the water
front movement. This key
can only be used if water
WFRTC Real (s)
option is available.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
Ratio between water
(including water in gas
RealList
WGR [-1.0] phase) and gas. By default,
(Sm3/Sm3)
WGR from the PVT table is
used.
ZFACT Real [1] Gas compressibility factor.

Internal dependencies of keys:

Alphanumeric values are only given as samples

either
BRANCH = 1
PIPE = 1
SECTION = 1
or
POSITION = POSITION-1
end

If you want to use the coefficients directly for standard inflow types:
either
WATERFRACTION = [0.0]
or
TOTALWATERFRACTION = [0.0]
end

365
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

end if

GASFRACTION = -1

If INJOPTION = LINEAR, then

AINJ = 0.0 [kg/s]
BINJ = 0.1E-5 [kg/s/Pa]
else if INJOPTION = QUADRATIC, then
AINJ = 0.0 [Pa2]
BINJ = 0.0 [Pa2-s/kg]
CINJ = 0.3354E08 [Pa2-s2/kg2]
else if INJOPTION = TABULAR, then
INJTABLE = TABLE-1
end if

If PRODOPTION = LINEAR, then

APROD = 0.0 [kg/s]
BPROD = 0.1E-5 [kg/s/Pa]
else if PRODOPTION = QUADRATIC, then
APROD = 0.0 [Pa2]
BPROD = 0.0 [Pa2-s/kg]
CPROD = 0.3354E08 [Pa2-s2/kg2]
else if PRODOPTION = TABULAR, then
PRODTABLE = TABLE-2
If phase front transient is to be simulated, then
GASDIS = [0.0] [m]
GASPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
GFRTC = [0.0] [s]
OILDIS = [0.0] [m]
OILPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
OFRTC = [0.0] [s]
WATDIS = [0.0] [m]
WATPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
WFRTC = [0.0] [s]
end if
end if

If you want to use the coefficients directly for Advanced Well inflow types:

WATERCUT = [0.0] [-]

ROGST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]

ROLST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]
GORST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]

if INJOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then

BINJ = 0.6 [psi2-d/scf]
CINJ = 1.E-9 [psi2-d2/scf2]
else if INJOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
BINJ = 1.E-4 [psi-d/scf]
CINJ = 1.E-9 [psi-d2/scf2]
else if INJOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
EXPONENTN = 1
CINJ = 1 [scf/d/psi2]
end if

366
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

if PRODOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then

BPROD = 0.6 [psi2-d/scf]
CPROD = 1.E-9 [psi2-d2/scf2]
else if PRODOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
BPROD = 1.E-4 [psi-d/scf]
CPROD = 1.E-9 [psi-d2/scf2]
else if PRODOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
EXPONENTN = 1
CPROD = 1 [scf/d/psi2]
end if

If you want to use well/reservoir variables:

WATERCUT = [0.0] [-]

If INJOPTION = LINEAR, then

either
INJECTIVITY = 240 stb/d/Psi
FRACPR = 1000 bar
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
PHASE = [OIL]
or
FRACPR = 1000 bar
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
end
else if INJOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if INJOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1

367
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if INJOPTION = VOGELS, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
else if INJOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
EXPONENTN = 1
else if INJOPTION = NORMALIZEDBACKPR, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
EXPONENTN = 1
PHASE = [OIL]
else if INJOPTION = UNDERSATURATED, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
BPPRESSURE = 600 bar
end if

If the user wants to define a specific linear injectivity index for one or more of the phases
GASINJ = 100 stb/d/Psi
OILINJ = 100 stb/d/Psi
WATINJ = 180 stb/d/Psi
end if

If PRODOPTION = LINEAR, then

368
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

either
PRODI = 240 stb/d/Psi
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
PHASE = [OIL]
or
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
end
else if PRODOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if PRODOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if PRODOPTION = VOGELS, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
else if PRODOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]

369
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]

VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
EXPONENTN = 1
else if PRODOPTION = NORMALIZEDBACKPR, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
EXPONENTN = 1
PHASE = [OIL]
else if PRODOPTION = UNDERSATURATED, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
BPPRESSURE = 600 bar
end if

If COMPOSITIONAL = ON in OPTION, then (multiple time and feeds, see note below)
TIME = (0, 5) h
FEEDNAME = (FEED-1, FEED-3)
either
FEEDMASSFRACTION = (0.7, 0.3, 0.7, 0.3)
or
FEEDMOLEFRACTION = (0.6, 0.4, 0.5, 0.5)
end

or if COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL in OPTIONS, then

TIME = (0, 5) h
FEEDNAME = (BO-1, BO-2)
FEEDVOLFRACTION = [1.0, 0.0, 0.5, 0.5]
endif

Note: For the subkeys FEEDMASSFRACTION, FEEDMOLEFRACTION and FEEDVOLFRACTION, the

array is a function of both feed and time as shown below.
FEEDMASSFRACTION = FEED-1 (T1), FEED-2(T1), FEED1(T2), FEED-2(T2))

370
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 5

Data Files

371
 Compressor data file OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Data Files

In addition to the main file describing the simulation model, OLGA also requires a description of the fluid
properties as a unique function of temperature and pressure. These can be given either as a fluid file,
through specific component data given in a feed file (Compositional Tracking) or defined in the main file
(Blackoil), or computed internally (STEAMWATER-HC)

A previous simulation run can be continued through the use of a restart file, as described with the
RESTART keyword.

If a compressor is present in the pipeline, a file specifying the compressor characteristics is also
required.

If pumps are used in the simulation, the pump characteristics are specified through a pump file. A
complete set of pump characteristics is given in the code. This set can be used if no pump
characteristics are available.

If wax deposition is simulated, the wax data are specified through a wax file.

If the possible formation of hydrate is simulated, a hydrate curve file might be required.

If the OLGA Rocx module is used for simulating near wellbore, a Rocx input file is required.

These files have to be written in certain formats that are described in the following sections.

Compressor data file

This file contains tables of the compressor characteristics, defined below, as functions of reduced RPM and
reduced inlet mass flow. The reason for giving the characteristics as functions of reduced RPM and
reduced inlet mass flow, is to obtain one table for several inlet conditions (pressure, temperature), instead of
having one table for each inlet condition.

Variables

The definitions of reduced mass flows and reduced RPM are as follows:

Reduced inlet mass flow : MASSRE = G * Θ 0 , 5 / δ

Reduced surge mass flow : MREDSU = G SURGE * Θ 0,5 / δ

Reduced RPM : RPMRED = RPM / Θ 0 , 5

G = inlet mass flow (kg/s)

GSURGE = surge mass flow (kg/s)
RPM = rotational speed (r/min)
Θ = normalized inlet temp = inlet temp / 288 K (-)
= normalized inlet pressure = inlet pressure / (1.013*105 Pa) (-)

The table values can be equidistant or non-equidistant.

372
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Variables: Name Unit Definition

IDENTF File identification (40 characters)

NCOMTA (-) Number of compressors
COMPID(I) Compressor identification,
compressor(I) (40 characters)

Note! All characters after a blank in a character string are omitted.

(I = 1, NCOMTA)
NTABWG(I) (-) Number of reduced mass flow points, compressor(I)
NTABOM(I) (-) Number of reduced RPM points, compressor(I)
RPMRED(K,I) (r/min) Reduced RPM, compressor(I)
K=1,NTABOM(I)
MASSRE(J,I) (kg/s) Reduced inlet mass flow, compressor(I) J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(1,I) Heading, pressure ratio table,
compressor(I) (40 characters)
PRATIO(J,K,I)(-) Pressure ratio, δ.
compressor(I) K=1,NTABOM
J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(2,I) Heading, temperature ratio table,
compressor(I) (40 characters)
TRATIO(J,K,I) (-) Temperature ratio, Q. Compressor(I)
K=1,NTABOM(I), J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(3,I) Heading, reduced surge mass-flow table, compressor(I) (40 characters)
MREDSU(K,I) (kg/s) Reduced surge mass flow, compressor(I) K=1,NTABOM(I)

Data file structure:

IDENTF
NCOMTA

The following data is repeated for each compressor :

COMPID(I)
NTABWG(I) NTABOM(I)
RPMRED(1,I). . . . . . . RPMRED(NTABOM(I),I)
MASSRE(1,I). . . . . . . MASSRE(NTABWG(I),I)
COTEXT(1,I)
PRATIO(1,1,I). . . . . . PRATIO(1,NTABOM(I),I)
.
.
.
.
PRATIO(NTABWG(I),1,I). . PRATIO(NTABWG(I),NTABOM(I),I)
COTEXT(2,I)
TRATIO(1,1,I). . . . . . TRATIO(1,NTABOM(I),I)
.
.
.
.
TRATIO(NTABWG(I),1,I). . TRATIO(NTABWG(I),NTABOM(I),I)
COTEXT(3,I)
MREDSU(1,I). . . . . . . MREDSU(NTABOM(I),I)

Note that the number of compressor tables must equal the number of compressors. The tables must be
given in increasing order; the first table is for compressor number one etc.

373
 Wax table file OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Wax table file

This file can contain tables with the properties of the wax forming components for multiple fluids. The
table for each fluid should have the following format:

1. Name of table.
No more than 20 characters and no blanks.
2. Number of wax components.
3. Names of wax components. Each name may take up max. 20 characters. No blanks. Component
names encircled by apostrophes and separated by commas.
Example: 'C10-C20','C35','C40-C50'
4. Molecular weights (g/mol) of wax components.
5. Liquid densities of wax components (kg/m3).
6. Heat of melting (J/kg) of wax components.
7. Concentration (mol/mol) of wax components in HC mixture.
8. Number of pressure points, number of temperature points.
9. Pressure points (Pa).
10. Cloud point temperatures (C) for each pressure point.
11. First pressure point.
12. Columns with
- Temperature (C)
- Solubility of wax component 1 (mol/mol) in oil including wax forming
components
- Solubility of wax component 2 (mol/mol) in oil including wax forming
components
- etc.
- Wax phase density (kg/m3)
- Gas phase molecular weight (g/mol)
- Liquid phase molecular weight (g/mol)
- Wax phase molecular weight (g/mol)
- Enthalpy of wax (J/kg)
- Heat capacity of wax (J/kg K)
- Thermal conductivity of wax (W/m K)
13. Second pressure point
14. etc.
15 Repeat 1-14 for next fluid

Comment lines start with an !. If the temperature is above the cloud point temperature, oil properties
should be used.

The following keyword may be placed on a separate line anyplace within the lines described in point 1-
14 in the list above:
• OIL_WAX_VISCOSITY_MULTIPLIERS D=1.01, E=1.002, F=1.0003
• The values for D, E, F are the multipliers as calculated in PVTSim

Note: If VISCMULTD, VISCMULTE or VISCMULTF are given in the GUI/input file, these values will
override the values from the wax property file.

The wax file is generated in PVTSim.

NOTE! The following requirements need to be fulfilled when using multiple fluids in networks:

• Same pseudo-components (number of components and lumping) for all fluids.

• All fluids in one wax data file.

Procedure for generating PVT tables in PVTSIM:

374
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1. Add the inlet fluids as separate fluids.

2. Use Fluids-> Same pseudos (Select the resulting fluids for inlets. Resulting fluids with same
pseudos available at bottom of fluid table from database)
3. Use Mix to mix ”same pseudos” inlet fluids in proper ratios
4. Generate OLGA and wax tables for each fluid made by ”same pseudos” and mix.

Hydrate curve definition file

A hydrate curve must be defined as pairs of corresponding temperature and pressure points, which
must be unique and in increasing order. A header line must include the temperature and pressure units.

An example hydrate definition file is shown below:

TEMPERATURE (C) PRESSURE (BAR)

0.4853 32.4656
1.9738 36.7623
3.4717 41.6277
4.9768 47.1369
6.4870 53.3754
7.9997 60.4394
9.5125 68.4384
11.0227 77.4959

OLGA Rocx
Rocx reads a separate input file describing the reservoir properties, boundary conditions and initial
conditions. The file name should be given in the NEARWELLSOURCE keyword. This input file is edited
with the Rocx GUI. Please refer to the OLGA Rocx User Manual for how to define a proper input file for
use with OLGA Rocx.

Fluid Properties File

The file that contains the fluid data, is either a feed file with data for each component used in
compositional tracking, or a file that have fluid properties as a function of temperature and pressure.
There are two valid formats of the latter file, either the standard format or a keyword based format.
When more than one fluid properties file is used, they all have to have the same format.

Note that the fluid label cannot start with a number. This is a general limitation for labels.

Feed file for compositional tracking

This file is generated in PVTSim, and contains data for each fluid component as well as the fluid
composition (component mole fractions) for one or more feeds.

The syntax of the file is complex, and is not explained here. There should be no need to view the
contents of the file, as the feed and component names can be chosen directly from the OLGA GUI when
a feed file has been specified.

PVT properties for non-existing phase

When generating an OLGA fluid properties file (TAB file) all properties need to be given at all pressure
and temperature points in the file. That applies also if the phase the property belongs to does not exist

375
 PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

at the pressure and temperature in question. OLGA does in certain cases use the numbers in the TAB
file for the non-existent phase, so these should generally be sensible numbers rather than for instance a
zero. How this can be done is briefly described below. Some examples of when the non-existent phase
is used are:

1. The user specifies a well or source with non-equilibrium inflow. That is, the user can for instance
specify that there is gas present at conditions where according to the fluid file there is single
phase liquid. This is typically done to adjust the GOR of the fluid or for simulation of gas lift.
2. During a shut-in the liquid in the pipeline redistributes. The gas and liquid volumes in a section
are then no longer well represented by the TAB file. Subsequent pressure and temperature
changes can result in a phase being present outside the region where it should be according to
the TAB file.
3. During the numerical solving process OLGA may stray outside of the 2-phase region as part of
its iteration sequence before converging to a point which is inside the 2-phase region.

There are no specific requirements on how the properties of the non-existent phase should be
generated. However, the numbers should be reasonable, since they in many cases in reality are used to
represent fluids with slightly different composition than what the TAB file was made with. However, two
main approaches have been used:

Extrapolation: The value and its derivative with respect to pressure at the phase boundary are used to
extrapolate into the region where the property does not exist.

Compositional: By addition of gas or condensate the phase envelope is expanded so that it passes
through the P and T for which a property is to be calculated.
The experience is that the extrapolation method is preferable, but unreasonable values are often seen
when extrapolation is performed far into the non-existing region. It is further important that the there are
no abrupt changes in property values with changing pressure and temperature. Step changes in
property values will generally create numerical instabilities when a simulation is performed in that
pressure and temperature region.
The extrapolation of enthalpy and entropy should be consistent with thermal capacity. Extrapolation of
density should be consistent with the derivative of density with regard to pressure.

Note that going vertically up from the critical point, OLGA considers the phase to the left (lower T) to be
dense oil, and the phase to the right to be dense gas. The properties set for the non-existing phase
must ensure that properties are continuous at the critical line so that this is a virtual transition with no
actual effect.

Keyword based
This format has all the possibilities as the standard format, and some additional ones. The intension of
introducing a table based format is to:

1. Improve the readability of PVT table

2. Be able to give bubble points and dew points curve to improve the accuracy close to the
saturation line
3. Use different units for the various PVT parameters
4. Facilitate conversion between mass flow rate and volumetric flow rate at standard conditions
5. Be able to adapt more easily the temperature and pressure mesh to the phase envelope
6. Make a format that is easily extendable for new parameters
7. Provide composition information to help custom support for PVT related problems
8. Easily export PVT data to spreadsheets

The syntax of the keyword

The syntax of OLGA input applies to the new table format. Specifically, an input statement has the
general form:

376
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

KEYWORD KEY = Parameter list, ...

where the ellipses (...) indicate that the statement may contain more than one "KEY = Parameter list"
combinations. Commas separate such combinations. The KEYWORD identifies the input statement.
Each keyword has a set of variables, each identified by a KEY (e.g. SETPOINT).

Separators:
Items are separated by commas (,).
Tabulation is treated as one single space.
Line continuation:
An input statement can be written on several lines by ending each line with the continuation
character: \ (backslash)
Comments:
Comments are indicated with the comments mark:
! (exclamation mark)
Any information on a line after a comment mark is ignored.
The comment mark can be put anywhere on the line.
String protector:
A string that contains spaces or commas should be protected with double quotes:
" (double quote)
List protector:
Any list should be put inside a parenthesis:
( ... )

Table Structure
A table is defined through the keyword:

PVTTABLE

The structure of the fluid property table is as follows:

For each of the tables

PVTTABLE LABEL = fluid-1, etc
For each of the pressure and temperature points
PVTTABLE POINT = ( ⁄ )
End of pressure and temperature points

End of tables

The values of all parameters except POINT must be written in a single line. Fluid properties for each
pressure/temperature point must subsequently be specified through the PVTTABLE POINT structure,
repeated for each pressure/temperature point.

377
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Keyword PVTTABLE

Key Type Parameter set Description

Unit: ( ) Default: [ ]

LABEL str. Name of the table.

PHASE sym [TWO] | Two or three phase table
THREE
EOS str. Equation of state used in generating
the pvt table. Optional.
MESHTYPE sym. [STANDARD] | STANDARD: Both temperature and
pressure points are fixed
FREEPRES | independently
FREETEMP FREEPRES: Temperature points are
fixed first and the pressure points are
specified for each of the individual
temperature points.
FREETEMP: Pressure points are
fixed first and the temperature points
are specified for each of the
individual pressure points.
COMPONENTS1 str.l. List of names of the components in
the composition. Optional.
MOLES1 r.l. Mole fraction for each of the
components in the composition.
Optional.
DENSITY1 r.l. (kg/m3) Density for each of the components
in the composition. Set to –999 if not
available. Optional.
MOLWEIGHT1 r.l. (g/mol) Molecular weight for each of the
components in the composition.
Optional.
STDPRESSURE1 r. (Pa) [ 1 ATM] Pressure at standard conditions (1
atm) . Optional
STDTEMPERATURE1 r. (°C) [15.5 °C] Temperature at standard conditions
o
(15.5 C). Optional.
GOR1 r. (Sm3/Sm3) Gas/oil ratio at standard conditions.
For two-phase flow, GOR is
interpreted as gas/liquid ratio, i.e. it is
ratio of gas volume fraction to the
liquid volume fraction at standard
conditions. For cases where there is
no oil/liquid, set GOR = -999.
GLR1 r. (Sm3/Sm3) Gas/liquid ratio at standard
conditions. For cases where there is
no liquid, set GLR = -999.
WC1,2 r. (-) Water cut standard conditions, for
three-phase table only.
STDGASDENSITY1 r. (kg/m3) Gas density at standard conditions.

STDOILDENSITY1 r. (kg/m3) Oil density at standard conditions.

378
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Key Type Parameter set Description

Unit: ( ) Default: [ ]

STDWATDENSITY1, r. (kg/m3) Water density at standard conditions.

2
TOTWATERFRACTION r. (-) Mass fraction of water component in
the composition.
DEWPRESSURES r.l. (Pa) Dewpoint pressures. The subkeys
DEWPRESSURES and
DEWTEMPERATURES are optional.
Leave out these two subkeys if no
dew point curve is found
DEWTEMPERATURES r.l. (°C) Dewpoint temperatures cor-
responding to the dewpoint pressure
given in keyword DEWPRESSURES.
BUBBLEPRESSURES r.l. (Pa) Bubble point pressures

BUBBLETEMPERATURES r.l. (°C) Bubble point temperatures

corresponding to the bubble point
pressures given in keyword
BUBBLEPRESSURES
The subkeys BUBBLEPRESSURE
and BUBBLETEMPERATURE are
optional. Leave out these two
subkeys if no bubble point curve is
found.
CRITICALPRESSURE r. (Pa) Pressure at the critical point

CRITICALTEMPERATURE r. (°C) Temperature at the critical point. The

subkeys CRITICALPRESSURE and
CRITICALTEMPERATURE are
optional. If the critical point is not
found, either set the values of critical
pressure and temperature to –999,
or leave out these two subkeys.
NOPRES i.l. Number of pressure points for each
of temperature points given in
subkey TEMPERATURE. Only if
MESHTYPE = FREEPRES
TEMPERATURE r.l. (°C) Temperature points if MESHTYPE =
FREEPRES or STANDARD
NOTEMP i.l. Number of temperature points for
each of pressure points given in
subkey PRESSURE. Only if
MESHTYPE = FREETEMP
PRESSURE r.l. (pa) Pressure points if MESHTYPE =
FREETEMP or STANDARD
COLUMNS sym.l. The default unit Specify orders and units of
is given in parameters for a table point.
parenthesis
TM (°C) Temperature
PT (Pa) Pressure
RS (-) Gas mass fraction in gas/oil mixture

379
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Key Type Parameter set Description

Unit: ( ) Default: [ ]
RSW (-) Water vapour mass fraction in gas
phase2
ROG (kg/m3) Gas density
DROGDP Derivative of gas density w.r.t
(s2/m2) pressure
DROGDT Derivative of gas density w.r.t
(kg/m3°C) temperature
DROHLDP Derivative of oil density w.r.t pressure
(s2/m2)
DROHLDT Derivative of oil density w.r.t
(kg/m3°C) temperature
ROWT (kg/m3) Water density.2
DROWTDP Derivative of water density w.r.t
(s2/m2) pressure.2
DROWTDT Derivative of water density w.r.t
(kg/m3°C) temperature.2
TCG (W/m°C) Gas thermal conductivity.
TCHL (W/m°C) Oil thermal conductivity.
TCWT (W/m°C) Water thermal conductivity.
CPG (J/kg°C) Gas thermal capacity.
CPHL (J/kg°C) Oil thermal capacity.
CPWT (J/kg°C) Water thermal capacity.2
HG (J/kg) Gas enthalpy.
HHL (J/kg) Oil enthalpy.
HWT (J/kg) Water enthalpy.2
VISG (Ns/m2) Gas viscosity.
VISHL (Ns/m2) Oil viscosity.
VISWT (Ns/m2) Water viscosity.2
SEG (J/kg°C) Gas entropy.
SEHL (J/kg°C) Oil entropy.
SEWT (J/kg°C) Water entropy.2
SIGGHL (N/m) Surface tension between gas and oil.
SIGGWT (N/m) Surface tension between gas and
water. 2
SIGHLWT (N/m) Surface tension between oil and
water.2
POINT r.l. Values of parameters, see note 1
and 2 below.

Note 1: The pressure and temperature values must be the same as specified in the keys PRESSURE
and TEMPERATURE for mesh type STANDARD. Pressure must be the same as specified in the keys
PRESSURE for mesh type FREETEMP. Temperature must be the same as specified in the keys
TEMPERATURE for mesh type FREEPRES.
Note 2: The order and the units must be the same as specified in the key COLUMNS.
Note 3: The use of pressure and temperature dependant values in the complex fluid module is not yet
implemented.

380
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Examples

Example 1: Two-phase, Standard mesh type

PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = TWO, \

COMPONENTS =(N2,CO2,C1,C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5,NC5, C6,C7) ,\
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3)
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3
STDPRESSURE = 1 ATM, \
STDTEMPERATURE = 15.5 C, \
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDGASDENSITY = 1.0 KG/M3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = ( 5.00, 5.99, 7.50, 9.39, 11.74 ,\
14.67, 18.32, 22.87, 28.55, 35.65, \
44.57, 55.79, 67.71, 70.01, 84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
CRITICALPRESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
CRITICALTEMPERATURE = 156.59 C, \
MESHTYPE = STANDARD, \
!
!both temperature points and pressure points are fixed
!
TEMPERATURE =(1,2,3,4,5) C,\
PRESSURE = (1,2,3,4,5) BARA, \
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C, ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, DROHLDP, DROGDT, \
DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG, HHL,TCG,TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,1, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, -3.557E-03, \
-5.931E-01, 4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, 1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, \
4.841E+02, -3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, 1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, \
-7.810E+02)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,2,…)
…
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,5,..)
… )
PVTTABLE POINT = (5,1,..)
…
)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5,5,…)

381
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Example 2: Two-phase, freepressure mesh type

PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = TWO, \

COMPONENTS =(N2,CO2,C1,C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5,NC5, C6,C7) ,\
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03) ,\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3) ,\
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3 ,\
STDPRESSURE = 1 ATM, \
STDTEMPERATURE = 15.5 C, \
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDGASDENSITY = 1.0 KG/M3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3 ,\
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03, \
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65, \
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50, \
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85, \
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95, \
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = (5.00,5.99,7.50,9.39,11.74,14.67,18.32,22.87, \
28.55,35.65,44.57,55.79,67.71,70.01,84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67, \
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00. \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
CRITICALPESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
CRITICALTEMPERATURE = 156.59 C, \
MESHTYPE = FREEPRES, \
!
! temperature points are specified here.
! number of pressure points and pressure values can be different for
! (be dependent on) different temperature points.
! number of pressure points for each of the temperature points are given here
!..the pressure values are given in subkey POINT
TEMPERATURE =(1.0,2.0,3.0,4.0,5.0) C,\
NOPRES =(5,5,5,5,6),\
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C,ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, DROHLDP, \
DROGDT,DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG,HHL,TCG, \
TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
! first temp. point contains five pressure points ranging from 1 to 10 bara
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,1.0, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, \
-3.557E-03,-5.931E-01,4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, \
1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, 4.841E+02, -3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, \
1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, -7.810E+02)
PVTTABLE POINT = (2.0,1.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (3.0,1.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,1.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (10.0,1.0,…)
!
! more temperature points. Each has five pressure points.
!
…
!
!last temperature point contains six pressure points

382
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

!
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (6.0,5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (7.0,5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (8.0,5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (9.0,5.0,..)

Example 3: Two-phase, freetemperature mesh type

PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = TWO, \

COMPONENTS =(N2,CO2,C1,C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5,NC5, C6,C7) ,\
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3),\
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3, \
STDPRESSURE = 1 ATM, \
STDTEMPERATURE = 15.5 C, \
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDGASDENSITY = 1.0 KG/M3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = (5.00,5.99,7.50,9.39,11.74,14.67,18.32,\
22.87,28.55,35.65,44.57,55.79,67.71,70.01, \
84.78,102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=(139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39,54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85,18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85,0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
CRITICALPRESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
CRITICALTEMPERATURE = 156.59 C, \
!
! Pressure points are specified here.
! Number of temperature points and temperature values can change for
! (be dependent on) different pressure points.
! Number of temperature points for each of the pressure points are given here
!..The temperature values are given in subkey POINT

MESHTYP = FREETEMP, \
PRESSURE =(1.0,2.0,3.0,4.0,5.0) BARA,\
NOTEMP =(5,5,5,5,6),\
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C, ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, \
DROHLDP,DROGDT,DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG, \
HHL,TCG,TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
! First pressure point contains five temperature points
! Temperature ranging from 1 to 20 C
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 1.0, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, \
-3.557E-03,-5.931E-01, 4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, \
1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, 4.841E+02,-3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, \

383
 PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, -7.810E+02)

PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 2.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 4.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,10.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,20.0,…)
!
! more pressure points. Each has five temperature points.
!
…
!
!last pressure point contains six temperature points
!
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0, 1.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0, 5.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,13.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,14.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,15.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0,20.0,..)

Example 4: Three-phase, Standard mesh type

PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = THREE, \

COMPONENTS =(N2,CO2,C1,C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5,NC5, C6,C7) ,\
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3)
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3
STDPRESSURE = 1 ATM, \
STDTEMPERATURE = 15.5 C, \
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDGASDENSITY = 1.0 KG/M3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3, \
STDWATDENSITY = 998. KG/M3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = ( 5.00, 5.99, 7.50, 9.39, 11.74 ,\
14.67, 18.32, 22.87, 28.55, 35.65, \
44.57, 55.79, 67.71, 70.01, 84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
CRITICALPRESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
CRITICALTEMPERATURE = 156.59 C, \
MESHTYPE = STANDARD, \
!
!both temperature points and pressure points are fixed

384
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

!
TOTWATERFRACTION = 0.112, \
WC=.489380E-02,\
TEMPERATURE =(1,2,3,4,5) C,\
PRESSURE = (1,2,3,4,5) BARA, \
COLUMNS = (PT,TM,ROG,ROHL,ROWT,DROGDP,DROHLDP,DROWTDP,DROGDT,DROHLDT, \
DROWTDT,RS,RSW,VISG,VISHL,VISWT,CPG,CPHL,CPWT,HG,HHL,HWT,TCG, \
TCHL,TCWT,SIGGHL,SIGGWT,SIGHLWT,SEG,SEHL,SEWT)
!
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,1,.112510E+01,.708593E+03,.677649E+03,.113188E-04, \
.520848E-06,.156303E-06,-.418187E-02,-.332632E+00,.535346E+00, \
.372160E-01,.182867E-02,.979882E-05,.591224E-02,.263150E-02, \
.176425E+04,.202253E+04,.449390E+04,.731026E+02,-.345943E+06, \
-.196628E+07,.248102E-01,.148744E+00,.570657E+00,.118942E-01, \
.755188E-01,.544038E-01,.435748E+03,-.631419E+03,-.537537E+04)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,2,…)
…
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,5,..)
… )
PVTTABLE POINT = (5,1,..)
…
)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5,5,…)

Standard conditions for keyword based PVT file

STDPRESSURE and STDTEMPERATURE in the PVT table file (keyword format) are the standard
pressure and temperature given in PVTsim when creating the file, while GOR, GLR, STDGASDENSITY,
STDOILDENSITY, STDWATDENSITY and WC (the two latter only for 3 phase table files) are the
properties at this standard condition

This will give more precise results in simulations where e.g. GORST in WELL is used and the table is
coarse around the standard conditions (e.g. if the two lowest pressure is 0.1 and 10 bara) since the gas
mass fraction is not linear with pressure for such low pressures.

A new key STDLIQDENSITY will be introduced in the next PVTsim version. This gives the standard
density of liquid water and hydrocarbons (HC) in the case where a two phase PVT file is generated from
a composition with water. STDOILDENSITY is the density for HC only and thus does not contain the
necessary information.

If the keys are not present (removed manually since always written), linear interpolation between the
pressure and temperature points will be used as before. Note that the given STDPRESSURE and
STDTEMPERATURE will be used for both input and output instead of the default values of 1 atm and
15.56 °C/60 F.

Standard format
The fluid properties are given as functions of pressure and temperature. This table of properties can be
equidistant or non-equidistant in pressure and temperature. A more refined interpolation in the fluid
property tables close to the two-phase envelope is performed only for the gas mass fraction utilising the
bubble point pressure given in the file. The dew point pressures are not used in the present OLGA
version. Figure A shows the above mentioned two-phase envelope as a function of pressure and
temperature.

If OLGA is used with the water option, water properties are also needed. These properties may be given
as tables in the fluid properties file, or may be calculated by the code itself. This is determined by the
text, in the fluid identifier, FLUIDF, given in the fluid properties file.

385
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

If the fluid contains water and it is decided to use the two phase option in OLGA, only two-phase tables
for fluid properties must be used. Liquid properties must be for the mixture of oil and water.

The partial derivatives of gas and liquid densities with respect to pressure and temperature are required
as separate tables. The reason is that the partial derivatives should be those of the isolated phase, gas
or liquid, at the actual thermodynamic conditions. These cannot be obtained from the densities by
interpolation in the tables since the partial derivatives in that case would also include phase mass
transfer/changes in phase compositions.

Remarks: -The gas mass fraction may not be zero for pressures above the bubble point pressure
due to linear interpolation in the tables. For pressures above the bubble point
pressure, the gas mass fraction calculated from the tables will, however, always be
set to zero.

Indicators for the fluid file content:

The interpretation of tables in the fluid properties file is determined from:

1. Whether there is more than one fluid.

2. The content of the fluid identifier, FLUIDF, as follows:

If the sub-string "WATER-OPTION" is present, three phase tables are expected in the file.

If the sub-string "NONEQ" is present, non-equidistant spacing in the tables are expected.

If the sub-string "ENTROPY" is present, entropy tables for gas, oil and eventually water are
expected.

The input variables FILEID, NCOMP and LC can be collectively omitted for single branch cases.

Variables: Name Unit Definition

[FILEID] File identification (60 characters)
[NCOMP] Number of fluids in this file.
The following data are repeated for each fluid:
FLUIDF (-) Fluid identifier enclosed in apostrophes.
If FLUIDF contains the sub-string WATER-
OPTION, NONEQ or ENTROPY the tables will
be read as explained above.

[LC] Fluid label The label must be unique and may be

a number or a text
string.
(LAB_1,LAB_2, ... ,LAB_NCOMP)
NTABP (-) Number of pressure points in the table

NTABT (-) Number of temperature points in the table

RSWTOTB (kg/kg) Total water mass fraction for the feed. Optionally,
default value = 0 (Only used together with three-
phase tables)

DP (N/m2) Pressure step in the table

386
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Variables: Name Unit Definition

DT (°C) Temperature step in the table
PP(I) (N/m2) Pressure values in the table, I=1,NTABP
TT(J) (°C) Temperature values in the table, J = 1, NTABT
PBB(J) (N/m2) Bubble point pressures, J = 1, NTABT
PDEW(J) (N/m2) Dew point pressures, J = 1, NTABT
For temperatures in the table which indicate single
phase flow for the whole range of pressures (all
points are outside the two-phase envelope for a
specific temperature, see Figure A), the
corresponding bubble point pressures must be
greater than the largest pressure point in the tables.
The dew point pressures are not used in the present
OLGA version
TABTEX(L) (-) Text string to identify the different properties.

NB! For all tables below, J = 1, NTABT and I = 1, NTABP

ROGTB(J,I) (kg/m3) Gas densities
3
ROOTB(J,I) (kg/m ) Oil densities
ROWTB(J,I) (kg/m3) Water densities
2 2
DRGPTB(J,I) (s /m ) Partial derivatives of gas densities with respect to
pressure
2 2
DROPTB(J,I) (s /m ) Partial derivatives of oil densities with respect to
pressure
2 2
DRWPTB(J,I) (s /m ) Partial derivatives of water densities with respect to
pressure.
3
DRGTTB(J,I) (kg/m C) Partial derivatives of gas densities with respect to
temperature
3
DROTTB(J,I) (kg/m C) Partial derivatives of oil densities with respect to
temperature
DRWTTB(J,I) (kg/m3C) Partial derivatives of water densities with respect to
temperature.
RSGTB(J,I) (kg/kg) Gas mass fraction in gas and oil mixture; the gas
mass divided by the gas and oil mass. All values in
this table must be set to a constant (between 0 and
1) (for all points) in case of no interphase mass
transfer. ( = 0 gives single phase liquid, =1 gives
single phase gas).
REMARK: The gas may also contain water vapour.
RSWTB(J,I) (kg/kg) Water vapour mass fraction in the gas phase

VSGTB(J,I) (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for gas

VSOTB(J,I) (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for oil
VSWTB(J,I) (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for water
CPGTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Gas heat capacities at constant pressure
CPOTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Oil heat capacities at constant pressure

CPWTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Water heat capacities at constant pressure

387
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Variables: Name Unit Definition

HGTB(J,I) (J/kg) Gas enthalpies
HOTB(J,I) (J/kg) Oil enthalpies
HWTB(J,I) (J/kg) Water enthalpies
TKGTB(J,I) (W/mC) Gas thermal conductivities
TKOTB(J,I) () Oil thermal conductivities
TKWTB(J,I) (W/mC) Water thermal conductivities
SIGOGT(J,I) (N/m) Surface tension between gas and oil
SIGWGT(J,I) (N/m) Surface tension between gas and water
SIGWOT(J,I) (N/m) Surface tension between water and oil
SGTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Gas specific entropy
SOTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Oil specific entropy
SWTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Water specific entropy.

Figure A Example of the use of the bubble and dew point pressures in relation to the two-phase
envelope and the fluid property table points (NTABT=6 and NTABP=5).

The figure does not correspond to the tables of fluid properties used in the sample case.

388
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Data file structure:

The data enclosed in brackets can collectively be omitted for single branch cases.

[FILEID]
[NCOMP]

The following data are repeated for each fluid composition.

The file heading for equidistant tables. Note that RSWTOTB is set to zero by OLGA if omitted:

FLUIDF
[LC]
NTABP NTABT RSWTOTB
DP DT
PP(1) TT(1)

The file heading for non-equidistant tables. Note that RSWTOTB is set to zero by OLGA if omitted:

FLUIDF
[LC]
NTABP NTABT RSWTOTB
PP(1) . . . . . . . . PP(NTABP)
TT(1) . . . . . . . . TT(NTABT)

The fluid property tables:

PBB(1) . . . . . . . . PBB(NTABT)
PDEW(1) . . . . . . . . PDEW(NTABT)

TABTEX(1)
ROGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . ROGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
ROGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . ROGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(2)
ROOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . ROOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
ROOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . ROOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(3)
ROWTB(1,1) . . . . . ROWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
ROWTB(1,NTABP) . . . ROWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(4)
DRGPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRGPTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DRGPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRGPTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(5)

389
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

DROPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DROPTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DROPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DROPTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(6)
DRWPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRWPTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DRWPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRWPTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(7)
DRGTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRGTTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DRGTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRGTTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(8)
DROTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DROTTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DROTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DROTTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(9)
DRWTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRWTTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
DRWTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRWTTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(10)
RSGTB(1,1). . . . . . . RSGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
RSGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . RSGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(11)
RSWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . RSWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
RSWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . RSWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(12)
VSGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
VSGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(13)
VSOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.

390
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

VSOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(14)
VSWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
VSWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(15)
CPGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
CPGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(16)
CPOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
CPOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(17)
CPWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
CPWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(18)
HGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.

HGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(19)
HOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
HOTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(20)
HWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
HWTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(21)
TKGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKGTB(NTABT,1)
.

391
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

.
TKGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(22)
TKOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
TKOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(23)
TKWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
TKWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

TABTEX(24)
SIGOGT(1,1). . . . . . . SIGOGT(NTABT,1)
.
.
SIGOGT(1,NTABP). . . . . SIGOGT(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(25)
SIGWGT(1,1) . . . . . . . SIGWGT(NTABT,1)
.
.
SIGWGT(1,NTABP) . . . . . SIGWGT(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(26)
SIGWOT(1,1) . . . . . . . SIGWOT(NTABT,1)
.
.
SIGWOT(1,NTABP) . . . . . SIGWOT(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION

if FLUIDF contains substring ENTROPY, then

TABTEX(27)
SGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SGTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
SGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . SGTB(NTABT,NTABP)

TABTEX(28)
SOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SOTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
SOTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . SOTB(NTABT,NTABP)

if FLUIDF also contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(29)
SWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SWTB(NTABT,1)
.
.
SWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . SWTB(NTABT,NTABP)

392
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

end WATER-OPTION
end if

The entropy data will be used if a Henry-Fauske type critical flow model is chosen for the flow through a
valve. If the entropy is not given, the entropy data will be computed by the code.

The tables for heat capacity, enthalpy and thermal conductivity are used only for temperature calculations.

The water tables are used only if the water option is used.

Examples of fluid property tables are given electronically with the OLGA software package.
Complex fluid module
The liquid viscosity table in the fluid properties file plays different, but related, roles in the three different
rheology models in the complex fluid module.

1. The Newtonian option (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=NEWTONIAN in the

FLUID keyword) yields the original interpretation.
2. The power law model (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=POWERLAW in the
FLUID keyword) yields the consistency factor, K.
3. The Bingham fluid model (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=BINGHAM in the
FLUID keyword) yields the coefficient of rigidity.

If simplified input is used (FULL=NO in the FLUID keyword), the non-Newtonian parameters are used at
the in situ shear stress to calculate the effective viscosity of the fluid at standard conditions. In order to
obtain the effective viscosity of the fluid at pipeline conditions, the effective viscosity at standard
conditions have to be multiplied by the ratio of the viscosity (as given in the viscosity table in the fluid
data file) at pipeline conditions and standard conditions.

The fluid identifier FLUIDF, see Standard format for fluid properties, have to include certain text
strings in order to enable OLGA to interpret the fluid property file correctly. The strings required are
explained below.

• POWEXPL: The fluid property file contains a table of the power law exponent for
the oil phase.
• POWEXPW: The fluid property file contains a table of the power law exponent for the
water phase.
• YIELDSTRL: The fluid property file contains a table of yield stress for the oil phase.
• YIELDSTRW: The fluid property file contains a table of yield stress for the water
phase.

The text string that identifies the different properties TABTEX(), see Standard format for fluid
properties, also have to include the same text strings as described above.

393
PVT properties for non-existing phase OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Example:

TABTEX(:)
.
VSOTB(1,1) VSOTB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
VSOTB(1,NTA . VSOTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)

if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then

TABTEX(:)
.
VSWTB(1,1) VSWTB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
VSWTB(1,NTA . VSWTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)
end WATER-OPTION

if FLUIDF contains substring POWEXPL, then

TABTEX(:)
.
POWNTB(1,1) POWNTB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
POWNTB(1,NTA . POWNTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)
end

if FLUIDF contains substring YIELDSTRL, then

TABTEX(:)
.
TAUITB(1,1) TAUITB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
TAUITB(1,NTA . TAUITB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)
end

if FLUIDF contains substring POWEXPW, then

TABTEX(:)
.
POWNWTB(1,1) POWNWTB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
POWNWTB(1,NTA . POWNWTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)
end

if FLUIDF contains substring YIELDSTRW, then

TABTEX(:)
TAUIWTB(1,1) . TAUIWTB(NTABT,1)

394
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

..
: :
TAUIWTB(1,NTA . TAUIWTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)
end

TABTEX(:)
.
CPGTB(1,1) CPGTB(NTABT,1)
..
: :
CPGTB(1,NTA . CPGTB(NTABT,NTA
BP) . . BP)

395
 Pump Data Files OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Pump Data Files

• Pump Data Table for Centrifugal Pumps
• Pump Data Table for Displacement Pumps

Pump Data Table for Centrifugal Pumps

The pump characteristics for the centrifugal pump are presented in the form of four quadrant curves.
These curves are empirically developed by the pump manufacturer. The four quadrant curves must be
converted to a dimensionless form by the development of homologous curves where the head and
torque ratios (actual value to rated value) are functions of the pump speed and flow rate ratios. In order
to interpret the homologous curves, the following variables are defined:

H Q
h= - head ratio q= - flow ratio
HR QR
N TH
ω= - speed ratio β= - torque ratio
NR TH R
where subscript R means rated value. Four sets of homologous curves are tabulated:

1. Single phase head HS

2. Two phase head HT
3. Single phase torque THS
4. Two phase torque THT

Each set of homologous curves consists of four curves, comprised of two dependent variables each as
function of two independent variables. A more detailed description is given under Pumps .

The transfer from single phase to fully degraded two phase conditions is described by the two phase
head and two phase torque multipliers.

A complete default set of homologous curves is tabulated in the code. These are based on experimental
data and are representative for centrifugal pumps. However, the users can change these data easily by
specifying their own experimental or model-specific data through the pump data table.

The structure of the table is as shown in the example below. The reading of the input is based on
keywords, but the sequence of the keywords must be as shown in the example. For the independent
variables, the keyword QOMEG is used for q/ and the keyword OMEGQ is used for /q. For each
table, the number of dependent and independent variable entries must be the same.

396
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

!*************************************************************************************************
! Pump type and label
!*************************************************************************************************
TYPE = CENTRIFUGAL, LABEL = Label of the table
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for single phase head HS
!*************************************************************************************************
! HS1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHS1)
HEADS1 = (y1, y2, … , YHS1)
! HS2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHS2)
HEADS2 = (y1, y2, … , YHS2)
! HS3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHS3)
HEADS3 = (y1, y2, … , YHS3)
! HS4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHS4)
HEADS4 = (y1, y2, … , YHS4)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase head HT
!*************************************************************************************************
! HT1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHT1)
HEADT1 = (y1, y2, … , YHT1)
! HT2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHT2)
HEADT2 = (y1, y2, … , YHT2)
! HT3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHT3)
HEADT3 = (y1, y2, … , YHT3)
! HT4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHT4)
HEADT4 = (y1, y2, … , YHT4)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for single phase torque THS
!*************************************************************************************************
! THS1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHS1)
TORQS1 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS1)
! THS2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHS2)
TORQS2 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS2)
! THS3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHS3)
TORQS3 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS3)
! THS4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHS4)
TORQS4 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS4)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase torque THT
!*************************************************************************************************
! THT1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHT1)
TORQS1 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT1)
! THT2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHT2)
TORQS2 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT2)

397
 Pump Data Files OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

! THT3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHT3)
TORQS3 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT3)
! THT4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHT4)
TORQS4 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT4)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase head multiplier
!*************************************************************************************************
VOID = (x1, x2, … , xHV)
HEADM = (y1, y2, … , YHV)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase torque multiplier
!*************************************************************************************************
VOID = (x1, x2, … , xTV)
TORQM = (y1, y2, … , YTV)
!
!*************************************************************************************************
! End of the table
!*************************************************************************************************
END
!

NOTE ! The number of elements for each curve is limited to 10.

Pump Data Table for Displacement Pumps

The back flow rate, Qb , is a function of PI , ΔP, αI, νl , and N.

Qb = f ( N , ΔP , α I , PI , ν I )
In order to define Qb a complete table with 5 independent variables and one dependent variable should
be defined. Linear interpolation is used to calculate the Qb-value and its partial derivatives at the
operating point.
The default units of the variables in the table:
PI, - Pa; Pump inlet pressure
ΔP - Pa; Pump pressure increase
Qb - m3 / s; Volumetric back flow
νl - m2 / s; Liquid kinematic viscosity
αI - (-); Gas volume fraction
N - rpm. Pump speed

The units can also be specified by users.

The structure of the table is as shown in the example below. The reading of the input is based on
keywords, but the sequence of the keywords must be as shown in the example.

398
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

The structure of the table is:

!*************************************************************************
! Pump type and label
!*************************************************************************
TYPE = DISPLACEMENT, LABEL = Label of the table
!
!*************************************************************************
! First pump speed (1)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PUMPSPEED = N1
!
!*************************************************************************
! First suction pressure (2)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INPRESSURE = Pl,1
!
!*************************************************************************
! Lists of voidfractions and deltap for first pump speed and
! suction pressure. (3)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOIDFRACTION = (αI,1, αI,2, … , αI,J)
!
DELTAP = (ΔP1, ΔP2, … , ΔPK)
!
!*************************************************************************
! First viscosity (4).
!
! For each viscosity back flow is listed as function of void-
! fraction and ΔP. Each BACKFLOW entry is for one
! ΔP and runs over all voidfractions.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VISCOSITY = νl,1
!
BACKFLOW = (Qb,1,1, Qb,1,2, … , Qb,1,J)
BACKFLOW = (Qb,2,1, Qb,2,2, … , Qb,2,J)
:
:
BACKFLOW = (Qb,K,1, Qb,K,2, … , Qb,K,J)
!
!*************************************************************************
! Second viscosity.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VISCOSITY = νl,2
:
:
!
!*************************************************************************
! (2)+(3)+(4) is repeated for each suction pressure
! associated with the first pump speed.
! Different values for voidfraction, deltap and viscosity can
! be used for each suction pressure.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INPRESSURE = Pl,2
!
:
:
!
!*************************************************************************
! (1)+(2)+(3)+(4) is repeated for each pump speed.
! Different values for suction pressure, voidfraction, deltap
! and viscosity can be used for each suction pressure.

399
Pump Data Files OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PUMPSPEED = N2
!
:
:
!*************************************************************************
! End of the table
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENDTABLE
!

NOTE! The number of pump speeds and suction pressures is limited to 5, while the number of
voidfraction, deltap and viscosity entries is limited to 10.

400
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Chapter 6

References

401
 Referenced papers OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Referenced papers
1. H.B. Bradley:
Petroleum Engineering Handbook.
Society of Petroleum Engineers, 1987

2. A.T. Bourgoyne, K.K. Millheim, M.E. Chenevert, and F.S. Young:

Applied Drilling Engineering.
Society of Petroleum Engineers, 1991

3. R.E. Henry and H.K. Fauske:

The two-phase critical flow of one-component mixtures in nozzles, orifices and short tubes.
Journal of Heat Transfer, May 1971, p. 179-187

4. Terje Straume, Magnus Nordsveen and Kjell Bendiksen:

Numerical simulation of slugging in pipelines.
ASME Symposium on Multiphase Flow in Wells and Pipelines, Anaheim, CA (1992)

5. M. Nordsveen, R. Nyborg, L. Hovden:

Implementation of CO2 corrosion models in the OLGA three-phase flow code.
BHR Group 1999 Multiphase ’99, ISBN 1 86058 212 5

6. O.B. Rygg, A.K. Rydahl and H.P. Rønningsen

Wax Deposition in offshore pipeline systems
BHRGroup Multiphase Technology, Volume 31, Banff, Canada, June 1998

7. Calsep: PVTSIM Method documentation:

Modelling of wax formation -> Viscosity of oil-wax suspensions.

8. Rolf Nyborg, Peter Andersson and Magnus Nordsveen:

Implementation of CO2 Corrosion Models in a Three-Phase Fluid Flow Model.
CORROSION/2000, Paper No. 48 (Houston, TX: NACE International, 2000)

9. E.F. Caetano, O. Shoham and J.P. Brill:

Upward Vertical Two-Phase Flow Velocity and Flow Through an Annulus. Part I: Single-Phase Friction
Factor, Taylor Bubble Rise Velocity and Flow Pattern Prediction. Part II: Modelling Bubble, Slug and
Annular Flow.
BHRA, Multi-Phase Flow - Proceedings of the 4th International Conference, Nice, France, pp. 301-362,
1989

10. O.B. Rygg, J. D. Friedmann and J. Nossen:

Advanced well flow model used for production, drilling and well control applications.
IADC Well Control Conference for Europe, Aberdeen, May 1996

11. A. H. P. Skelland:
Non-Newtonian Flow and Heat Transfer.
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1967

12. Matzain, Zhang, Volk, Redus, Brill, Apte and Creek:

Multiphase flow wax deposition modelling.
Proceeding ETCE, February 2001, Houston USA

13. Singh,Venkatesan,Fogler, Nagarajan:

Formation and Aging of Incipient Thin Film Wax-Oil Gels.

AIChE Journal, Vol. 46, No. 5.

402
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

14. Incropera & DeWitt:

Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer.
4th ed., ISBN 0-471-30460-3

15. Pal, R., Rhodes, E.:

Viscosity/Concentration Relationships for Emulsions.
J. of Rheology, Vol. 33, no. 7, pp. 1021-1045 (1989)

16. Rønningsen, H. P.:

Correlations for Predicting Viscosity of W/O Emulsions based on North Sea Crude Oils.
SPE Paper 28968, presented at the SPE International Symposium on Oilfield Chemistry, San Antonio,
Texas, US, February 14-17, 1995

17. Rønningsen, H. P.:

Viscosity of ’live’ water-in-crude-oil emulsions: experimental work and validation of correlations.
J. of Petroleum Science and Engineering 38, pp. 23-26 (2003)

18. Stein Olsen and Arne Dugstad:

Corrosion under Dewing Conditions
CORROSION/91, Paper No.472, NACE, 1991

19. Hammerschmidt, E.G.:

Gas Hydrate Formations: A Further Study on Their Prevention and Elimination from Natural Gas Pipe
Lines.
GAS, Vol. 15, no. 5, pp. 30-35, May 1939

20. Winkler, H.W. and Eads, P.T.:

Algorithm for More Accurately Predicting Nitrogen-Charged Gas-Lift Valve Operation at High Pressures
and Temperatures.
SPE 18871, March 1969

21. Pedersen, K. S., and Rønningsen H. P.:

Effect of precipitated wax on viscosity
Presentation at AIChE Spring National Meeting, Houston, TX, March 14-18, 1999.

22. Darby R., Melson J.:

How to predict the friction factors for flow of Bingham plastics
Chemical Engineering, December 28, 1981

23. White, F.M.:

Fluid Mechanics
2nd ed., ISBN 0-07-066525-7

24. Turian, R.M., Hsu, F.L. and Ma, T.W.:

Estimation of the Critical Velocity in Pipeline Flow of Slurries
Powder Technology, 51, pp 35-47, 1987

25. Krieger, I.M. and Dougherty, T.J.:

A mechanism for Non-Newtonian Flow in Suspensions of Rigid Spheres
Trans. Soc. Rheol. III 137-152., 1959

26. Thomas, A.D.:

Slurry Pipeline Rheology
2nd Conference on Rheology, Sydney, Australia.

403
Referenced papers OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

27. Lasater, J. A.:

Bubble Point Pressure Calculation
Trans. ANIME (1958), 379.

28. McCain W. D.:

The properties of petroleum fluids.
PennWell P. C. 1990

29. Vazquez and Beggs:

Correlations for Fluid Physical Property Prediction
M.S. Thesis, Tulsa Univ. 1976.

30. Glaso, Oistein.:

Generalized Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations
Journal of Petroleum Technology, pp. 785-795, May 1980.

31. Katz D. L.
Handbook of natural gas engineering.
McGRAW-Hill 1959

32. Campbell J. M.
Gas conditioning and processing, vol 1.
John M. Campbell and Company, 1966-1998

33. Baker O. and Swerdloff W.:

Finding surface tension of hydrocarbon liquids.
Oil and Gas Journal, Jan. 2., 1956.

34. Selmer-Olsen, S., Holm, H., Haugen, K., Nilsen, P. J. and Sandberg, R.,
Subsea Chokes as Multiphase Flowmeters. Production Control at Troll Olje.
Proc. 7th Int. Conf. on Multiphase Production, BHR Group, Wilson, A. (ed.)
Cannes 7-9 June 1995, pp. 441-446

35. The Properties of Gases & Liquids Fourth Edition, Reid, R.C., Prausnitz, J.M. and Poling, B.E.

36. Juan Carlos Mantecon, SPT Group: SPE 109829: The Virtual Well: Guidelines for the Application of
Dynamic Simulation to Optimise Well Operations, Life Cycle Design and Production

37. Revised Release on the IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of
Water and Steam, The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam, Lucerne,
Switzerland, August 2007

38. Revised Release on the IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of
Water and Steam, The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam, Lucerne,
Switzerland, August 2007

39. K. S. Pedersen et al. Properties of Oils and Natural gases. Gulf Publishing Company, 1989,
Houston, Texas.

40. B.E.Poling, J.M.Prausnitz, J.P.O’Connell: The properties of gases and liquids. 5th Edition. McGRAW-
HILL 2000.

41. R. Span and W. Wagner: A New Equation of State for Carbon Dioxide Covering the Fluid Region
from the Triple-Point Temperature to 1100 K at Pressures up to 800 MPa. J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data,
Vol. 25, No. 6, 1996

404
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Non-referenced papers
Bendiksen, K.H., Malnes, D., Moe, R. and Nuland, S.: The Dynamic Two-Fluid Model OLGA: Theory
and Application. SPE Production Engineering, May 1991, pp. 171-180

Rygg, O.B. and Ellul, I.R.: The Dynamic Two-Phase Modeling of Offshore Live Crude Lines Under
Rupture Conditions. OTC 6747, presented at the 23rd annual Offshore Technology Conference,
Houston, U.S.A (May 16-9, 1991)

Shea, R.H., Rasmussen, J., Hedne, P. and Malnes, D.: Holdup predictions for wet-gas pipelines
compared. Oil & Gas Journal, May 19, 1997

Burke, N.E. and Kashou, S.F.: Slug Sizing/Slug Volume Prediction, State of the Art Review and
Simulation, OTC 7744, presented at the 27th annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, U.S.A
(May 1-4, 1995)

Burke, N.E., Kashou, S.F. and Hawker, P.C.: History Matching of a North Sea Flowline Startup. Journal
of Petroleum Technology, May 1993, pp. 470-476

Courbot, A.: Prevention of Severe Slugging in the Dunbar 16" Multiphase Pipeline. OTC 8196,
presented at the 28th annual Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, U.S.A (May 6-9, 1996)
Erickson, D.D. and Mai, M.C.: A Transient Multiphase Temperature Prediction Program. SPE 24790,
1992, Presented at the 6th Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition of the SPE, Washington, D.C.,
October 4-7, 1992

Flaten, G., Nunes, G.C. and Assayaga, S.: Evaluation of the dynamic flow behavior for the Petroboost
system. Presented at the 8th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1997, BHR Group
Conference Series No. 24, pp. 185-198

Hustvedt, E.: Determination of Slug Length Distribution by the Use of the OLGA Slug Tracking Model.
Presented at the 6th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1993, BHR Group Conference
Series No. 4, pp 147-163

Hærdig, A. and Moe, R.: Dynamic simulations of multiphase flow in flowline bundles on Åsgård.
Presented at the 8th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1997, BHR Group Conference
Series No. 24, pp. 275-289

Klemp, S., Meland, B., and Hustvedt, E.: Operational experiences from multiphase transfer at Troll.
Presented at the 8th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1997, BHR Group Conference
Series No. 24, pp. 477-496

Lingelem, M.N.: TOGI Multiphase Flow From Troll to Oseberg. OTC 6670, presented at the 23rd annual
Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, U.S.A (May 16-9, 1991)

Mazzoni, A., Villa, M., Bonuccelli, M., De Toma, G., Mazzei, D., and Crescezi, T.: Capability of the
OLGA Computer Code to Simulate Measured Data From AGIP Oil Field. Presented at the 6th Int. Conf.
on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1993, BHR Group Conference Series No. 4

Mazzoni, A. and Bonuccelli, M.: OLGA and WOLGA dynamic codes validation with Trecate test loop
three-phase transient data. Presented at the 8th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase Production, Cannes, 1997,
BHR Group Conference Series No. 24, pp. 257-274

Rygg, O.B., Friedemann, J.D. and Nossen, J.: Advanced Well Flow Model Used for Production, Drilling
and Well Control Applications. Presented at The IDAC Well Control Conference for Europe, Aberdeen,
May 22-24, 1996

405
Non-referenced papers OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Straume, T., Nordsveen, M. and Bendiksen, K.: Numerical Simulation of Slugging in Pipelines, ASME
Int. Symp. On Multiphase Flow in Wells and Pipelines, Anaheim, 8-13 Nov., 1992

Xu, G.Z., Gayton, P., Hall, A. and Rambaek, J.: Simulation study and field measurement for mitigation of
slugging problem in The Hudson Transportation lines. Presented at the 8th Int. Conf. on Multi-Phase
Production, Cannes, 1997, BHR Group Conference Series No. 24, pp. 497-512

Xu, Z.G.: Solutions to Slugging Problems Using Multiphase Simulations.

406
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Appendix A

Complete list of
output variables

407
 Output variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Output variables

The variables belonging to a section in the pipeline are divided between boundary variables and volume
variables. This is due to the staggered mesh used in the numeric solution of the problem, where some
variables are computed at the section boundaries (boundary variables) while others are computed in the
middle of the section (volume variables).

Branch variables will give quantities, relating to the branch, such as, for instance, liquid content. Global
variables will give quantities relating to the total system, such as total mass in the system, or relating to
the integration, such as the time step.

In addition to the variables describing the pipeline, we have variables describing the process equipment,
such as compressors, sources etc.

All variables listed can be written to the trend plot data file. Variables defined as boundary or volume
variables can also be written to the profile plot data file. The abbreviations for the use of the variables (in
the «Use as» column in the listing) are as follows:

O: Printed output variable (to be specified with keyword OUTPUTDATA).

TP: Trend plot variable (to be specified with keyword TRENDDATA).
PP: Profile plot variable (to be specified with keyword PROFILEDATA).
C: Controller signal input variable (to be specified as the controlled variable for a controller,
input group CONTROLLER).
S: Only for server output

GTP: Global trend plot variable (to be specified with keyword TRENDDATA on case level)
GPP: Global profile plot variable (to be specified with keyword PROFILEDATA on case level)
GO: Global output variable (to be specified with keyword OUTPUTDATA on case level)
N: Node trend plot variable
SEP: Seperator trend plot variable

Variables belonging to different groups cannot be specified together in the input for trend plotting (except
the boundary and volume variable groups). A new TRENDDATA entry has to be specified for each
variable group.

408
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Boundary Variables

WCST, GORST, QGST, QLST, QOST and QWST are given at standard conditions (60 oF, 1
atm). A single stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is,
mass transfer between the phases from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account.
The gas is not dehydrated unless WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA
uses the gas mass fractions and densities from the fluid property file to perform the
conversion.

Note: These variables are CPU demanding for Compositional Tracking simulations since a
flash must be performed for each section and time they are plotted, and should be used with
care.

Erosional velocity ratio (EVR)

EVR = Vactual / Vmax

Vactual = Usg + Usl + Usd
Vmax = C / (Rons)1/2
Rons = [ g Usg + l(Usl + Usd)]/(Usg+ Usl + Usd)
C = 100 for U in ft/s and in Lb/ft3
C = 121.99 for U in m/s and in kg/m3

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C ACCGAG KG Accumulated gas mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCGAQ M3 Accumulated gas volume flow
TP/PP/C ACCGT KG Accumulated total mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCLIG KG Accumulated liquid mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCLIQ M3 Accumulated liquid volume flow
TP/PP/C ACCOIG KG Accumulated oil mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCOIQ M3 Accumulated oil volume flow
TP/PP/C ACCWAG KG Accumulated water mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCWAQ M3 Accumulated water volume flow
TP/PP/C CFLFACT Local CFL factor
TP/PP/C DPZA PA/M Additional pressure drop gradient
TP/PP/C DPZF PA/M Frictional pressure drop gradient
TP/PP/C DPZG PA/M Gravitational pressure drop gradient
TP/PP/C DS Distribution slip ratio
TP/PP/C DUG M/S2 Time derivative of gas velocity
TP/PP/C DUL M/S2 Time derivative of liquid velocity
TP/PP/C EVR Erosional velocity ratio
TP/PP/C FRRG KG/M3-S Gas wall drift friction factor
TP/PP/C FRRH KG/M3-S Oil wall drift friction factor

409
Boundary Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C FRRW KG/M3-S Water wall drift friction factor
TP/PP/C GASMFRBOUN - Gas mass fraction at boundary
TP/PP/C GD KG/S Droplet mass flow
TP/PP/C GDHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in droplet field
TP/PP/C GDWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water in droplet field
TP/PP/C GG KG/S Gas mass flow
TP/PP/C GL KG/S Liquid bulk mass flow
TP/PP/C GLHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in film
TP/PP/C GLRST SM3/SM3 Gas/liquid ratio at standard conditions
TP/PP/C GLT KG/S Total liquid mass flow
TP/PP/C GLTHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil
TP/PP/C GLTWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water excluding vapour
TP/PP/C GLWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water in film
TP/PP/C GLWV KG/S Mass flow rate of water vapour
TP/PP/C GLWVT KG/S Total mass flow rate of water including Vapour
TP/PP/C GORST SM3/SM3 Gas/oil ratio at standard conditions
TP/PP/C GT KG/S Total mass flow
TP/PP/C HOLHLNS - No-slip oil volume fraction
TP/PP/C HOLNS - No-slip liquid volume fraction
TP/PP/C HOLWTNS - No-slip water volume fraction
TP/PP/C HTOT W Total Enthalpy flow rate
TP/PP/C ID Flow regime: 1=Stratified, 2=Annular, 3=Slug, 4=Bubble.
Oil/water flowregime indicator for slug bubble: 0=Stratified
TP/PP/C IDWHBUB smooth, 1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1= not
applicable.
Oil/water flowregime indicator for separated flow:
TP/PP/C IDWHSEP 0=Stratified smooth, 1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1=
not applicable.
Oil/water flowregime indicator for slug: 0=Stratified smooth,
TP/PP/C IDWHSLU
1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1= not applicable.
TP/PP/C INHIBMFRBOUN - Inhibitor mass fraction in water at boundary
TP/PP/C MDHLCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of oil droplets
TP/PP/C MDHLSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of oil droplets
TP/PP/C MDWTCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of water droplets
TP/PP/C MDWTSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of water droplets
TP/PP/C MGCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of gas
TP/PP/C MGSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of gas
TP/PP/C MLHLCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of oil in film
TP/PP/C MLHLSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of oil in film
TP/PP/C MLWTCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of water in film

410
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C MLWTSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of water in film
TP/PP/C PSID KG/M3-S Deposition rate
TP/PP/C PSIE KG/M3-S Entrainment rate
TP/PP/C QD M3/S Droplet volume flow
TP/PP/C QDHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil droplets
TP/PP/C QDWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water droplets
TP/PP/C QG M3/S Gas volume flow
TP/PP/C QGST SM3/S Gas volume flow at standard conditions
TP/PP/C QL M3/S Liquid bulk volume flow
TP/PP/C QLHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil film
TP/PP/C QLST SM3/S Liquid volume flow at standard conditions
TP/PP/C QLT M3/S Total liquid volume flow
TP/PP/C QLTHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil
TP/PP/C QLTWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water
TP/PP/C QLWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water film
TP/PP/C QOST SM3/S Oil volume flow at standard conditions
TP/PP/C QT M3/S Total volume flow
TP/PP/C QWST SM3/S Water volume flow at standard conditions
TP/PP/C REGIMETYPE Slug-trac regime: 0=Free, 1=LiquidSlug, 2=SlugBubble
TP/PP/C SHRHL 1/s Oil film - shear strain rate
TP/PP/C SHRWT 1/s Water film - shear strain rate
TP/PP/C SLAG KG/M3-S Gas friction coefficient
TP/PP/C SLAI KG/M3-S Interfacial friction coefficient
TP/PP/C SLAIGHL KG/M3-S Gas/oil film interfacial friction factor
TP/PP/C SLAIHLWT KG/M3-S Oil film/water film interfacial friction factor
TP/PP/C SLAIWTG KG/M3-S Water film/gas interfacial friction factor
TP/PP/C SLAL KG/M3-S Liquid friction coefficient
TP/PP/C SLALHL KG/M3-S Oil film wall friction factor
TP/PP/C SLALWT KG/M3-S Water film wall friction factor
TP/PP/C SLGH KG/M3-S Oil wall friction due to gas
TP/PP/C SLGW KG/M3-S Water wall friction due to gas
TP/PP/C SLHG KG/M3-S Gas wall friction due to oil
TP/PP/C SLWG KG/M3-S Gas wall friction due to water
TP/PP/C STDROG KG/M3 Standard gas density
TP/PP/C STDROHL KG/M3 Standard oil density
TP/PP/C STDROWT KG/M3 Standard water density
TP/PP/C TAUWG PA Gas - max. wall shear stress
TP/PP/C TAUWHL PA Oil film - max. wall shear stress
TP/PP/C TAUWWT PA Water film - max. wall shear stress
TP/PP/C TINHIBMFRBOUN - Inhibitor mass fraction in water+vapour at boundary

411
Boundary Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C TWATMFRBOUN - Total water mass fraction at boundary
TP/PP/C UD M/S Droplet velocity
TP/PP/C UDHL M/S Oil droplet velocity
TP/PP/C UDO M/S Relative velocity droplets
TP/PP/C UDWT M/S Water droplet velocity
TP/PP/C UG M/S Gas velocity
TP/PP/C UHLCONT M/S Oil continuous velocity
TP/PP/C UL M/S Average liquid film velocity
TP/PP/C ULHL M/S Oil film velocity
TP/PP/C ULWT M/S Water film velocity
TP/PP/C UO M/S Relative velocity
TP/PP/C USD M/S Superficial velocity total liquid droplets
TP/PP/C USDHL M/S Superficial oil droplet velocity
TP/PP/C USDWT M/S Superficial water droplet velocity
TP/PP/C USG M/S Superficial velocity gas
TP/PP/C USL M/S Superficial velocity total liquid film
TP/PP/C USLHL M/S Superficial oil film velocity
TP/PP/C USLT M/S Superficial velocity liquid (USL+USD)
TP/PP/C USLTHL M/S Superficial velocity oil
TP/PP/C USLTWT M/S Superficial velocity water
TP/PP/C USLWT M/S Superficial water film velocity
TP/PP/C USTOT M/S Total volume flux
TP/PP/C UWTCONT M/S Water continuous velocity
TP/PP/C WATMFRBOUN - Water mass fraction at boundary
TP/PP/C WCST - Water cut at standard conditions
TP/PP/C WD KG/S-M2 Droplet mass flux
TP/PP/C WDHL KG/S-M2 Mass flux of oil in droplet field
TP/PP/C WDWT KG/S-M2 Mass flux of water in droplet field
TP/PP/C WG KG/S-M2 Gas mass flux
TP/PP/C WL KG/S-M2 Liquid mass flux
TP/PP/C WLHL KG/S-M2 Mass flux of oil in film
TP/PP/C WLWT KG/S-M2 Mass flux of water in film
TP/PP/C WTOT KG/S-M2 Total mass flux

412
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Branch Variables

Use as Name Units Definition

Branch Variables
TP/C/GTP DPABR PA Additional pressure drop
TP/C/GTP DPBR PA Total pressure drop
TP/C/GTP DPFBR PA Frictional pressure drop
TP/C/GTP DPGBR PA Gravitational pressure drop
TP/C/GTP DTBR C Total temperature drop (inlet minus outlet) in branch
TP/C/GTP GASC M3 Gas content in branch
TP/C/GTP GASCFR - Gas volume fraction in branch
TP/C/GTP GASCST SM3 Gas content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP/C/GTP GASIN KG Accumulated gas flow inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP GASMASS KG Gas mass in branch
TP/C/GTP GASOUT KG Accumulated gas flow outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP LIQBC M3 Liquid bulk content in branch
TP/C/GTP LIQC M3 Total liquid content in branch
TP/C/GTP LIQCFR - Liquid volume fraction in branch
TP/C/GTP LIQDC M3 Liquid droplet content in branch
TP/C/GTP LIQIN KG Accumulated liquid flow inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP LIQMASS KG Total liquid mass in branch
TP/C/GTP LIQOUT KG Accumulated liquid flow outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP MASOUT KG Accumulated mass flow outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP MASSIN KG Accumulated mass flow inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP MAXPTBR PA Maximum pressure in branch since start
TP/C/GTP MAXPTBRCT PA Maximum pressure in branch at current time
Distance from branch inlet where maximum pressure since start
TP/C/GTP MAXPTPOS M
occurs
TP/C/GTP MAXTMBR C Maximum temperature in branch since start
TP/C/GTP MAXTMBRCT C Maximum temperature in branch at current time
Distance from branch inlet where maximum temperature since
TP/C/GTP MAXTMPOS M
start occurs
Maximum difference between section and hydrate pressure
TP/C/GTP MDPHYD PA
since last write
Distance where section and hydrate pressure differs most since
TP/C/GTP MDPPOS M
last write
Maximum difference between hydrate and section temp since
TP/C/GTP MDTHYD C
last write
Distance where section and hydrate temperature differs most
TP/C/GTP MDTPOS M
since last write
TP/C/GTP MEANPTBRCT PA Mean pressure in branch at current time
TP/C/GTP MEANTMBRCT C Mean temperature in branch at current time
TP/C/GTP MINPTBR PA Minimum pressure in branch since start

413
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Branch Variables
TP/C/GTP MINPTBRCT PA Minimum pressure in branch at current time
Distance from branch inlet where minimum pressure since start
TP/C/GTP MINPTPOS M
occurs
TP/C/GTP MINTMBR C Minimum temperature in branch since start
TP/C/GTP MINTMBRCT C Minimum temperature in branch at current time
Distance from branch inlet where minimum temperature since
TP/C/GTP MINTMPOS M
start occurs
TP/C/GTP OILBC M3 Oil film content in branch
TP/C/GTP OILC M3 Total oil content in branch
TP/C/GTP OILCFR - Oil volume fraction in branch
TP/C/GTP OILCST SM3 Total oil content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP/C/GTP OILDC M3 Oil droplet content in branch
TP/C/GTP OILIN KG Accumulated oil flow inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP OILMASS KG Total oil mass in branch
TP/C/GTP OILOUT KG Accumulated oil flow outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RGASIN KG Accumulated gas flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RGASOUT KG Accumulated gas flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RLIQIN KG Accumulated liquid flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RLIQOUT KG Accumulated liquid flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RMASIN KG Accumulated mass flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RMASOUT KG Accumulated mass flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP ROILIN KG Accumulated oil flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP ROILOUT KG Accumulated oil flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RWATIN KG Accumulated water flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RWATOUT KG Accumulated water flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP/C/GTP RWINHIBTOT - Total mass fraction in water phase in branch for inhibitor
TP/C/GTP WATBC M3 Water film content in branch
TP/C/GTP WATC M3 Total water content in branch
TP/C/GTP WATCFR - Water volume fraction in branch
TP/C/GTP WATCST SM3 Total water content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP/C/GTP WATDC M3 Water droplet content in branch
TP/C/GTP WATIN KG Accumulated water flow inlet boundary
TP/C/GTP WATMASS KG Total water mass in branch
TP/C/GTP WATOUT KG Accumulated water flow outlet boundary

414
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Bundle Variables
Bundle variables can only be used for a SOLIDBUNDLE, a FLUIDBUNDLE or an ANNULUS.
Use as Name Units Definition
Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C LINEGT KG/S Total mass flow of line

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C HHIN W/M2-C Bundles: line inner wall heat transfer coefficient
TP/PP/C HHOUT W/M2-C Bundles: line outer wall heat transfer coefficient
TP/PP/C QMO W/M Bundles: line heat flux
TP/PP/C TBUN C Bundles: line temperature
TP/PP/C ULINE M/S Line fluid velocity
TP/PP/C UVALUE W/M2-C Bundles: line overall heat transfer coefficient

Check valve Variables

Use as Name Units Definition
Check valve Variables
TP/C/GTP CHECK Check valve position: 0=open 1=closed

415
 Compositional Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compositional Variables
Compositional variables can only be used when compositional mass equations are used. This means
when the COMPOSITIONAL key in the OPTIONS keyword is either ON, MEG, MEOH, ETOH,
BLACKOIL or STEAMWATER-HC

When compositional variables can be used:

1. GLTWTLEAK is the same variable as CGWLEAK

2. GLTWTSOUR is the same variable as CGWSOUR
3. GLTWTWELL is the same variable as CGWWELL

GLTWTLEAK, GLTWTSOUR, GLTWTWELL are only available when using inhibitor tracking (MEG,
MEOH or ETOH)

Use as Name Units Definition

Branch Variables
TP/GTP CMTOT KG Total mass in branch

Boundary Variables
TP/PP CGDH KG/S Component mass rate in oil droplets
TP/PP CGDW KG/S Component mass rate in water droplets
TP/PP CGG KG/S Component mass rate in gas phase
TP/PP CGHT KG/S Component mass rate in oil phase
TP/PP CGLH KG/S Component mass rate in oil film
TP/PP CGLW KG/S Component mass rate in water film
TP/PP CGWT KG/S Component mass rate in water phase
TP/PP PTG Pa Partial pressure in gas phase

Volume Variables
TP/PP CGPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to gas phase
TP/PP CHPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to oil phase
TP/PP CMG KG/M3 Mass in gas phase
TP/PP CMHD KG/M3 Mass in oil droplets
TP/PP CMHL KG/M3 Mass in oil film
TP/PP CMWD KG/M3 Mass in water droplets
TP/PP CMWL KG/M3 Mass in water film
TP/PP CWPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to water phase
TP/PP DMGE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in gas phase
TP/PP DMHE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in oil phase
TP/PP DMWE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in water phase

416
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP MWGAS KG/KMOL Mole weight of gas phase
TP/PP MWOIL KG/KMOL Mole weight of oil phase
TP/PP MWWAT KG/KMOL Mole weight of water phase
TP/PP XG - Mole fraction of gas phase
TP/PP XGE - Equilibrium mole weight in gas phase
TP/PP XGM - Mass fraction in gas phase
TP/PP XGME - Equilibrium mole weight of gas phase
TP/PP XH - Mole fraction of oil phase
TP/PP XHE - Equilibrium mole weight of gas phase
TP/PP XHM - Mass fraction in oil phase
TP/PP XHME - Equilibrium mass fraction in oil phase
TP/PP XW - Mole fraction in water phase
TP/PP XWE - Equilibrium mole fraction in water phase
TP/PP XWM - Mass fraction in water phase
TP/PP XWME - Equilibrium mass fraction in water phase
TP/PP Z - Total molar composition
TP/PP ZM - Total mass composition

Leak Variables
TP/GTP CGGLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in gas phase
TP/GTP CGHLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in oil phase
TP/GTP CGTLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in all phases
TP/GTP CGWLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in water phase
TP/GTP GLTWTLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in water phase
TP/GTP XGLEAK - Leak mole fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XGMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XHLEAK - Leak mole fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XHMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XWLEAK - Leak mole fraction in water phase
TP/GTP XWMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in water phase
TP/GTP ZLEAK - Leak mole fraction in all phases
TP/GTP ZMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in all phases

Separator Variables
ACCUMULATED EMERGENCY DRAIN LIQUID MASS
SEP CAEDLM KG
FLOW
SEP CAEDOM KG ACCUMULATED EMERGENCY DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
ACCUMULATED EMERGENCY DRAIN WATER MASS
SEP CAEDWM KG
FLOW
SEP CAGOGM KG ACCUMULATED GAS OUTLET GAS MASS FLOW

417
Compositional Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Separator Variables
SEP CAGOLM KG ACCUMULATED GAS OUTLET LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CAGOOM KG ACCUMULATED GAS OUTLET OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CAGOTM KG ACCUMULATED GAS OUTLET TOTAL MASS FLOW
SEP CAGOWM KG ACCUMULATED GAS OUTLET WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CAODLM KG ACCUMULATED OIL DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CAODOM KG ACCUMULATED OIL DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CAODWM KG ACCUMULATED OIL DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CATDGM KG ACCUMULATED TOTAL DRAIN GAS MASS FLOW
SEP CATDLM KG ACCUMULATED TOTAL DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CATDOM KG ACCUMULATED TOTAL DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CATDTM KG ACCUMULATED TOTAL DRAIN TOTAL MASS FLOW
SEP CATDWM KG ACCUMULATED TOTAL DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CAWDLM KG ACCUMULATED WATER DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CAWDOM KG ACCUMULATED WATER DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CAWDWM KG ACCUMULATED WATER DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CEDLMF KG/S EMERGENCY DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CEDOMF KG/S EMERGENCY DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CEDWMF KG/S EMERGENCY DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CGOGMF KG/S GAS OUTLET GAS MASS FLOW
SEP CGOLMF KG/S GAS OUTLET TOTAL LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CGOOMF KG/S GAS OUTLET OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CGOTMF KG/S GAS OUTLET TOTAL MASS FLOW
SEP CGOWMF KG/S GAS OUTLET WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CODLMF KG/S OIL DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CODOMF KG/S OIL DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CODWMF KG/S OIL DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CTDGMF KG/S TOTAL DRAIN GAS MASS FLOW
SEP CTDLMF KG/S TOTAL DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CTDOMF KG/S TOTAL DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CTDTMF KG/S TOTAL DRAIN TOTAL MASS FLOW
SEP CTDWMF KG/S TOTAL DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW
SEP CWDLMF KG/S WATER DRAIN LIQUID MASS FLOW
SEP CWDOMF KG/S WATER DRAIN OIL MASS FLOW
SEP CWDWMF KG/S WATER DRAIN WATER MASS FLOW

Well Variables
TP/GTP CGGWELL KG/S Well mass rate in gas phase
TP/GTP CGHWELL KG/S Well mass rate in oil phase
TP/GTP CGTWELL KG/S Well mass rate in all phases
TP/GTP CGWWELL KG/S Well mass rate in water phase

418
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Well Variables
TP/GTP GLTWTWELL KG/S Well mass rate in water phase
TP/GTP XGMWELL - Well mass fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XGWELL - Well mole fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XHMWELL - Well mass fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XHWELL - Well mole fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XWMWELL - Well mass fraction in water phase
TP/GTP XWWELL - Well mole fraction in water phase
TP/GTP ZMWELL - Well mass fraction in all phases
TP/GTP ZWELL - Well mole fraction in all phases

Source Variables
TP/GTP CGGSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in gas phase
TP/GTP CGHSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in oil phase
TP/GTP CGTSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in all phases
TP/GTP CGWSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in water phase
TP/GTP GLTWTSOUR Source mass rate in water phase
TP/GTP XGMSOUR - Source mass fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XGSOUR - Source mole fraction in gas phase
TP/GTP XHMSOUR - Source mass fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XHSOUR - Source mole fraction in oil phase
TP/GTP XWMSOUR - Source mass fraction in water phase
TP/GTP XWSOUR - Source mole fraction in water phase
TP/GTP ZMSOUR - Source mass fraction in all phases
TP/GTP ZSOUR - Source mole fraction in all phases

419
 Compositional slugtracking Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compositional slugtracking Variables

Compositional Slugtracking variables can only be used when compositional mass equations are used.
This means when the COMPOSITIONAL key in the OPTIONS keyword is either ON, MEG, MEOH,
ETOH, BLACKOIL or STEAMWATER-HC. In addition to this the SLUIGTRACKING keyword has to have
been given.
Use as Name Units Definition
Slug Variables
TP CMGFSB KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase ahead of slug front
TP CMGFSL KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase behind slug front
TP CMGTSB KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase behind slug tail
TP CMGTSL KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase ahead of slug tail
TP CMHDFSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets ahead of slug front
TP CMHDFSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets behind slug front
TP CMHDTSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets behind slug tail
TP CMHDTSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets ahead of slug tail
TP CMHLFSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil film ahead of slug front
TP CMHLFSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil film behind slug front
TP CMHLTSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil film behind slug tail
TP CMHLTSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil film ahead of slug tail
TP CMWDFSB KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets ahead of slug front
TP CMWDFSL KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets behind slug front
TP CMWDTSB KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets behind slug tail
TP CMWDTSL KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets ahead of slug tail
TP CMWLFSB KG/M3 Component mass in water film ahead of slug front
TP CMWLFSL KG/M3 Component mass in water film behind slug front
TP CMWLTSB KG/M3 Component mass in water film behind slug tail
TP CMWLTSL KG/M3 Component mass in water film ahead of slug tail

420
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Compressor Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Compressor Variables
TP/C/GTP DHRCOO W Compressor recycle heat exchanger Enthalpy
TP/C/GTP GCOMP KG/S Compressor mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GREC KG/S Compressor recycle mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP HCOMP W Compressor enthalpy
TP/C/GTP HREC W Compressor recycle enthalpy
TP/C/GTP QGSURGE M3/S Corrected compressor surge flow
TP/C/GTP RPM RPM Compressor speed

Controller Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Controller Variables
GTP/C ACTIVATED Controller activate signal
GTP/C CONTR Controller output
GTP/C ERRVAR Controller error signal
GTP/C INTGVAR Controller integral signal
GTP/C MEASVAR Controller measured variable
Controller mode: 1=Automatic, 2=Manual, 3=External signal,
GTP/C MODE
4=External setpoint, 5=Freeze
GTP/C PMCAS Moving averaged of primary controller variable
GTP/C RATELIMITED Controller rate limited signal
GTP/C SATURATED Controller saturated signal
GTP/C SETPOINT Setpoint of extended cascade controller
GTP/C SETPVAR Controller setpoint variable

421
 Corrosion Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Corrosion Variables
Corrosion variables can only be used when the CORROSION keyword is given.

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C COBICARB Bicarbonate concentration (Molar)
TP/PP/C CONDRATE KG/S-M2 Conden.rate in pipe upper half
TP/PP/C CORR1 MM/Y Corrosion rate
TP/PP/C CORR2 MM/Y Corrosion rate
TP/PP/C CORR3 MM/Y Corrosion rate
TP/PP/C CORRW1 MM/Y Corr. rate, full water wet.
TP/PP/C CORRW2 MM/Y Corr. rate, full water wet.
TP/PP/C CORRW3 MM/Y Corr. rate, full water wet.
TP/PP/C GLYCOL Glycol concentration
TP/PP/C INHIB Inhibitor efficiency
TP/PP/C IONIC Ionic strength concentration (Molar)
TP/PP/C PCO2 PA Partial pressure of CO2
TP/PP/C PH1 pH for model 1
TP/PP/C PH2 pH for model 2
TP/PP/C PH3 pH for model 3
TP/PP/C SOLFE Saturated iron concentration in PPM

422
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Drilling Variables
Drilling variables can only be used when DRILLING=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/ KG/M
DRLFROGSTD Flowing standard gas density
C 3
TP/PP/
GDOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in droplet
C
TP/PP/
GDPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in droplet
C
TP/PP/
GDPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in droplet
C
TP/PP/
GDWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in droplet
C
TP/PP/
GGGMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of gas-based mud
C
TP/PP/
GGOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in gas phase
C
TP/PP/
GGPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in gas phase
C
TP/PP/
GGPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in gas phase
C
TP/PP/
GGWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in gas phase
C
TP/PP/
GLOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in film
C
TP/PP/
GLPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in film
C
TP/PP/
GLPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in film
C
TP/PP/
GLTPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in film and droplets
C
TP/PP/
GLTPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hydrocarbons in film and droplets
C
TP/PP/
GLWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in film
C
TP/PP/
GTOMUD KG/S Total mass flow rate of oil-based mud
C
TP/PP/
GTPH2O KG/S Total mass flow rate of produced water
C
TP/PP/
GTPHC KG/S Total mass flow rate of produced hc
C
TP/PP/
GTWMUD KG/S Total mass flow rate of water-based mud
C

423
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Volume Variables
TP/PP/ KG/M
MDOMUD Specific mass of oil-based mud in droplet
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MDPH2O Specific mass of produced water in droplet
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MDPHC Specific mass of produced hc in droplet
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MDWMUD Specific mass of water-based mud in droplet
C 3
TP/PP/
MFAMUD - Mass fraction of all muds in total mass
C
TP/PP/
MFGMUD - Mass fraction of gas-based mud in total mass
C
TP/PP/
MFOMUD - Mass fraction of oil-based mud in total mass
C
TP/PP/
MFPH2O - Mass fraction of produced water in total mass
C
TP/PP/ KG/M
MFPHC Mass fraction of produced hc in total mass
C 3
TP/PP/
MFWMUD - Mass fraction of water-based mud in total mass
C
TP/PP/ KG/M
MGGMUD Specific mass of gas-based mud
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MGOMUD Specific mass of oil-based mud in gas phase
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MGPH2O Specific mass of produced water in gas phase
C 3
TP/PP/ KG/M
MGPHC Specific mass of produced hc in gas phase
C 3
Use as Name Units Definition
Volume Variables
TP/PP/C MGWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud in gas phase
TP/PP/C MLOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud in film
TP/PP/C MLPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water in film
TP/PP/C MLPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc in film
TP/PP/C MLWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud in film
TP/PP/C MTAMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of all muds
TP/PP/C MTOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud
TP/PP/C MTPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water
TP/PP/C MTPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc
TP/PP/C MTWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud

424
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Global Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Global Variables

TP/C/GTP ABSMASSERR KG Absolute mass error

GTP/GO HT S Time step
GTP/GO HTCRIT The current criterion used to limit the time step
TP/C/GTP HTCRITSEC Section causing time step limitation
Lag (drift) factor compared to reference clock
GTP/GO LAGFACT
expressed in number of timesteps.
Lag indicator for detecting simulation is lagging
compared to a reference clock. Goes to 1 when output
GTP/GO LAGIND
variable LAGFACT > INTEGRATION.MAXLAGFACT,
else it remains at zero.
GTP/GO NINTGR Number of time steps
GTP/GO REDEL - Relative changes of energy from start
GTP/GO REERR - Accumulated energy balance error
GTP/GO RELGT J Total amount of energy
TP/C/GTP RELMASSERR Relative mass error
GTP/GO RETOT J Total amount of energy time integrated
GTP/GO RETOT0 J Initial total amount of energy
GTP/GO RMDEL - Relative changes of mass from start
GTP/GO RMERR - Accumulated mass balance error
GTP/GO RMLGT KG Total amount of mass
GTP/GO RMOUT KG Cumulative mass release pipeline exit
GTP/GO RMTOT KG Total amount of mass time integrated
GTP/GO RMTOT0 KG Initial total amount of mass
GTP/GO SIMTIME Simulated time in true time
GTP/GO SPEED Simulation speed relative to real-time speed
GTP/GO TIME S Simulated time
GTP/GO VOLGBL - Global max volume error since last write

425
 Heat exchanger Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Heat exchanger Variables

Use as Name Units Definition
Heat exchanger Variables
TP/C/GTP DHCOOL W Heat exchanger enthalpy

426
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Hydrate kinetics Variables

Hydrate Kinetics variables can only be used when the HYDRATEKINETICS keyword is given.

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C BEHYD - Hydrate volume fraction
TP/PP/C CPHYD J/KG-C Specific heat of hydrate phase
KG/M3-
TP/PP/C GASRATE Hydrate gas consumption rate
S
TP/PP/C HHYD J/KG Hydrate enthalpy
TP/PP/C HYDFRAC - Hydrate volume fraction in slurry
TP/PP/C HYDMASS KG/M3 Specific hydrate mass
TP/PP/C HYDPT PA Hydrate formation pressure
TP/PP/C HYDTM C Hydrate formation temperature
TP/PP/C HYKPLIST CSMHYK parameter
NPARTICL
TP/PP/C Number of hydrate monomer particles
E
KG/M3-
TP/PP/C PSIHYD Hydrate formation rate per unit volume
S
TP/PP/C SAREA 1/M Hydrate formation area per per unit volume
TP/PP/C VISRATIO - Hydrate slurry viscosity ratio

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C GLHYD KG/S Hydrate mass flow
SRATEHY
TP/PP/C 1/S Shear rate used for hydrate kinetic model
D
TP/PP/C UHYD M/S Hydrate slurry velocity
KG/S-
TP/PP/C WLHYD Hydrate mass flux
M2

Branch Variables
TP/C/GT
MASSHYD KG Hydrate mass in branch
P
TP/C/GT Current maximum difference between section and hydrate
MDPHYDC PA
P pressure
TP/C/GT Current distance where section and hydrate pressure differs
MDPPOSC M
P most
TP/C/GT Current maximum difference between hydrate and section
MDTHYDC C
P temperature
TP/C/GT Current distance where section and hydrate temperature differs
MDTPOSC M
P most
TP/C/GT
VOLHYD M3 Hydrate volume in branch
P

427
 Pig Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Pig Variables
All the variables that are available for Slug tracking can be used with Pig. However, not all of the
variables are relevant. The pig variables with their equivalent slugtracking variables are listed below.

Pig variable Equivalent slugtracking variable

ALGL ALTSB
ALGR ALTSL
HOLHLL BEHLTSB + GAHLTSB
HOLHLR BEHLTSL
HOLWTL BEWTTSB + GAWTTSB
HOLWTR BEWTTSL
UPIG UST
ZPIG ZTSL

When the key TRACKSLUG=ON, the PIG may be without slug, be a slug tail (pig to the left of the slug)
or be a slug front (pig to the right of the slug)

TRENDDATA PIG=PIG-1, VARIABLE=UST (same as UPIG)

TRENDATA PIG=PIG-1, VARIABLE= BEHLTSB

This should be used with caution. If the pig is a slug tail, BEHLTSB represents the holdup to the left of
the pig. If the pig is a slug front, BEHLTSB represents the holdup to the right of the pig.

TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTION=5, VARIABLE=HOLEXP

This works the same way as for slugtracking.

Use as Name Units Definition

Pig Variables
TP/C/GTP ALGL - Void behind pig
TP/C/GTP ALGR - Void ahead pig
TP/C/GTP GAL - Droplet fraction behind pig
TP/C/GTP GAR - Droplet fraction ahead pig
TP/C/GTP HOLHLL - Oil holdup behind pig
TP/C/GTP HOLHLR - Oil holdup ahead pig
TP/C/GTP HOLWTL - Water holdup behind pig
TP/C/GTP HOLWTR - Water holdup ahead pig
Flow regime behind pig (only valid without
TP/C/GTP IDL -
TRACKSLUG)
Flow regime ahead pig (only valid without
TP/C/GTP IDR -
TRACKSLUG)
TP/C/GTP LIQCDOWN M3 Liquid content between plug and trap position
TP/C/GTP LIQCUP M3 Liquid content between launch position and plug
TP/C/GTP PIGM KG Pig mass
TP/C/GTP PIGSTA Pig status: 0=Not pigging, 2=Pigging
TP/C/GTP REMDIST M Remaining distance for pig
TP/C/GTP REMTIME_AVRG S Averaged remaining travel time for pig
TP/C/GTP RPIG Pig leakage factor
TP/C/GTP UPIG M/S Pig velocity

428
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Pig Variables
TP/C/GTP UPIG_AVRG M/S Averaged velocity for pig
TP/C/GTP ZPIG M Pig position in branch
TP/C/GTP ZZPIG M Pig total distance travelled

Pump Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Pump Variables
TP/C/GTP PUBYGG KG/S Gas mass flow through bypass line
TP/C/GTP PUBYGL KG/S Liquid mass flow through bypass line
TP/C/GTP PUBYGT KG/S Total mass flow through bypass line
TP/C/GTP PUMPDP PA Pressure difference between pump outlet and inlet
TP/C/GTP PUMPGG KG/S Gas mass flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPGL KG/S Liquid mass flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPGT KG/S Total mass flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPHEAT W Heat added to fluid in pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPHP W Hydraulic horsepower
TP/C/GTP PUMPQB M3/S Pump back flow (volume)
TP/C/GTP PUMPQG M3/S Gas volume flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPQL M3/S Liquid volume flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPQT M3/S Total volume flow through the pump
TP/C/GTP PUMPSPEED RPM Pump speed
TP/C/GTP PUMPTH NM Pump hydraulic torque
TP/C/GTP PUMPTT W Total pump power
TP/C/GTP PUREGG KG/S Recycle gas mass flow
TP/C/GTP PUREGL KG/S Recycle liquid mass flow
TP/C/GTP PUREGT KG/S Total recycle mass flow
TP/C/GTP PUREGW KG/S Recycle water mass flow

429
 Separator Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Separator Variables
QGSTxD, QLSTxD, QOSTxD and QWSTxD (x = E, D, O and W) are given at standard conditions (60
o
F, 1 atm). A single stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass
transfer between the phases from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not
dehydrated unless WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass
fractions and densities from the fluid property file to perform the conversion. It should be noted that for
simulations using PVT tables (not CompTrack), the variables for each drain is not accurate since the
flashing is performed using the PVT tables for the total composition.

Note: These variables are CPU demanding for Compositional Tracking simulations since a flash must
be performed for each section and time they are plotted, and should be used with care.

In addition to the SEPARATOR variables are many VOLUME variables available for the separator

Use as Name Units Definition

Separator Variables
SEP ACMDGS KG Separator: accumulated gas mass flow gas outlet
SEP ACMDHL KG Separator: accumulated total oil mass drain
SEP ACMDWT KG Separator: accumulated total water mass drain
SEP ACMGDGS KG Separator: accumulated gas mass flow gas outlet
SEP ACMODHL KG Separator: accumulated oil mass flow oil drain
SEP ACMODWT KG Separator: accumulated water mass flow oil drain
SEP ACMWDHL KG Separator: accumulated oil mass flow water drain
ACMWDW
SEP KG Separator: accumulated water mass flow water drain
T
SEP ACVDGS M3 Separator: accumulated gas volume flow gas outlet
SEP ACVDHL M3 Separator: accumulated total oil volume drain
SEP ACVDWT M3 Separator: accumulated total water volume drain
SEP ACVGDGS M3 Separator: accumulated gas volume flow gas outlet
SEP ACVODHL M3 Separator: accumulated oil volume flow oil drain
SEP ACVODWT M3 Separator: accumulated water volume flow oil drain
SEP ACVWDHL M3 Separator: accumulated oil volume flow water drain
SEP ACVWDWT M3 Separator: accumulated water volume flow water drain
GGGDCON Separator gas train gas mass rate divided by standard
SEP SM3/S
VST conditions density
SEP GNGDGS KG/S Separator: gas mass flow rate gas outlet
SEP GNGDHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate gas outlet
SEP GNGDWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate gas outlet
SEP GNINDHL KG/S Separator: oil droplet mass flow rate inlet
SEP GNINDWT KG/S Separator: water droplet mass flow rate inlet
SEP GNINGS KG/S Separator: gas mass flow rate inlet
SEP GNINLHL KG/S Separator: oil film mass flow rate inlet
SEP GNINLWT KG/S Separator: water film mass flow rate inlet
SEP GNODHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate oil drain
SEP GNODWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate oil drain

430
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Separator Variables
SEP GNWDHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate water drain
SEP GNWDWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate water drain
SEP GTDGS KG/S Separator: total gas mass flow gas outlet
SEP GTDHL KG/S Separator: total oil mass drain rate
SEP GTDWT KG/S Separator: total water mass drain rate
SEP LIQLV M Separator liquid level
SEP OILLV M Separator oil level
PTBOTTUM
SEP PA Pressure at liquid outlets
N
SEP PTSEP PA Separator pressure
SEP QGSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train gas volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QGSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train gas volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QGSTWD SM3/S Separator water train gas volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QLSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QLSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QLSTWD SM3/S Separator water train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QNGD M3/S Separator: flow rate at gas outlet
SEP QNOD M3/S Separator: oil drain flow rate
SEP QNWD M3/S Separator: water drain flow rate
SEP QOSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train oil volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QOSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train oil volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QOSTWD SM3/S Separator water train oil volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QTDGS M3/S Separator: total gas volume flow gas outlet
SEP QTDHL M3/S Separator: total oil volume drain rate
SEP QTDWT M3/S Separator: total water volume drain rate
SEP QWSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train water volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QWSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train water volume flow at standard conditions
SEP QWSTWD SM3/S Separator water train water volume flow at standard conditions
SEP SEPEFF - Separator efficiency
SEP TMSEP C Separator temperature
SEP WATLV M Separator water level

431
 SlugTracking Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SlugTracking Variables
There are four main groups of slug tracking variables:

1. Global variables:

NSLUG, SLUPRO

2. Variables for plotting properties of a specific unique slug:

ALFSB, ALFSL, ALTSB, ALTSL, BEFSB, BEFSL, BETSB, BETSL, BEHLFSB, BEHLFSL,
BEHLTSB, BEHLTSL, BEWTFSB, BEWTFSL, BEWTTSB, BEWTTSL, GAFSB, GAFSL,
GATSB, GATSL, GAHLFSB, GAHLFSL, GAHLTSB, GAHLTSL, GAWTFSB, GAWTFSL,
GAWTTSB, GAWTTSL, DPSB, DPSBF, DPSL, DPSLF, DPSLG, JSLT, JSLF, LSL, LSB,
PTJF, PTJT, SLUQT, SLUQF, SLTYPT, SLTYPF, UGFSB, UGFSL, UGTSB, UGTSL,
ULFSB, ULFSL, ULTSB, ULTSL, USF, UST, ZTSL, ZFSL, ULHLFSB, ULHLFSL,
ULHLTSB, ULHLTSL, ULWTFSB, ULWTFSL, ULWTTSB, ULWTTSL

These variables show the development of unique slugs as they pass through the pipeline.

3. Variables for plotting properties of slugs passing at a specified section boundary:

SIDEXP, USTEXP, USFEXP, LSLEXP, LSBEXP, QTEXP, QFEXP, ZSTEXP, ZSFEXP

These variables are nonzero only when the specified integer pipeline position is within a
liquid slug.

Note: A table containing slug statistics will be written to the .out file for positions where
LSLEXP has been defined in TREND, see Chapter 2.3.1.1.

4. Modified "standard" OLGA variables accounting for the effects of the slug tracking option at a
specified section boundary:

ALEXP, BEEXP, BEHLEXP, BEWTEXP, GAEXP, GAHLEXP, GAWTEXP, HOLEXP,

HOLHLEXP, HOLWTEXP, UGEXP, ULEXP, ULHLEXP, ULWTEXP, UDEXP, UDHLEXP,
UDWTEXP

JT JF
JT JF

LSB LSL
ZTSL
ZFSL

Fig. 1 Definition sketch of position and length plot variables for the slug tracking option

432
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

ALTSL ALFSL
JT JF
JT JF

ALTSB ALFSB

Fig. 2 Definition sketch of void plot variables for the slug tracking option

UST USF
JT JF
JT JF

UGTSB UGTSL UGFSL UGFSB

ULTSB ULTSL ULFSL ULFSB

Fig. 3 Definition sketch of velocity plot variables for the slug tracking option

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C ALEXP - Void fraction in slug (no slug: AL)
TP/PP/C BEEXP - Liquid film fraction in slug (no slug: BE)
TP/PP/C BEHLEXP - Oil film fraction in slug (no slug: BEHL)
TP/PP/C BEWTEXP - Water film fraction in slug (no slug: BEWT)
TP/PP/C GAEXP - Liquid droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GA)
TP/PP/C GAHLEXP - Oil droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GAHL)
TP/PP/C GAWTEXP - Water droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GAWT)
TP/PP/C HOLEXP - Liquid holdup in slug (no slug: HOL)
TP/PP/C HOLHLEXP - Oil holdup in slug (no slug: HOLHL)
TP/PP/C HOLWTEXP - Water holdup in slug (no slug: HOLWT)
TP/PP/C LSBEXP M Bubble length (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C LSLEXP M Slug length (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C QFEXP M/S Volume flux through slug front (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C QTEXP M/S Volume flux through slug tail (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C SIDEXP Slug identification (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C SLTYPFEXP Type of slug front
TP/PP/C SLTYPTEXP Type of slug tail
TP/PP/C UDEXP M/S Droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UD)
TP/PP/C UDHLEXP M/S Oil droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UDHL)
TP/PP/C UDWTEXP M/S Water droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UDWT)

433
SlugTracking Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C UGEXP M/S Gas velocity in slug (no slug: UG)
TP/PP/C ULEXP M/S Liquid velocity in slug (no slug: UL)
TP/PP/C ULHLEXP M/S Oil film velocity in slug (no slug: ULHL)
TP/PP/C ULWTEXP M/S Water film velocity in slug (no slug: ULWT)
TP/PP/C USFEXP M/S Slug front velocity (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C USTEXP M/S Slug tail velocity (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C ZSFEXP M Slug front position (no slug: 0)
TP/PP/C ZSTEXP M Slug tail position (no slug: 0)

Slug Variables
TP ALFSB - Void fraction ahead of slug front
TP ALFSL - Void fraction behind slug front
TP ALTSB - Void fraction behind slug tail
TP ALTSL - Void fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BEFSB - Liquid film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEFSL - Liquid film fraction behind slug front
TP BEHLFSB - Oil film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEHLFSL - Oil film fraction behind slug front
TP BEHLTSB - Oil film fraction behind slug tail
TP BEHLTSL - Oil film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BETSB - Liquid film fraction behind slug tail
TP BETSL - Liquid film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BEWTFSB - Water film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEWTFSL - Water film fraction behind slug front
TP BEWTTSB - Water film fraction behind slug tail
TP BEWTTSL - Water film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP DPSB PA/M Total pressure gradient in slug bubble
TP DPSBF PA/M Frictional pressure gradient in slug bubble
TP DPSL PA/M Total pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP DPSLF PA/M Frictional pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP DPSLG PA/M Gravitational pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP GAFSB - Droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAFSL - Droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAHLFSB - Oil droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAHLFSL - Oil droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAHLTSB - Oil droplet fraction behind slug tail
TP GAHLTSL - Oil droplet fraction ahead slug tail
TP GATSB - Droplet fraction behind slug tail
TP GATSL - Droplet fraction ahead slug tail

434
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Slug Variables
TP GAWTFSB - Water droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAWTFSL - Water droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAWTTSB - Water droplet fraction behind slug tail
TP GAWTTSL - Water droplet fraction ahead slug tail
TP HOLFSB - Liquid holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLFSL - Liquid holdup behind slug front
TP HOLHLFSB - Oil holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLHLFSL - Oil holdup behind slug front
TP HOLHLTSB - Oil holdup behind slug tail
TP HOlHLTSL - Oil holdup ahead of slug tail
TP HOLTSB - Liquid holdup behind slug tail
TP HOlTSL - Liquid holdup ahead of slug tail
TP HOLWTFSB - Water holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLWTFSL - Water holdup behind slug front
TP HOLWTTSB - Water holdup behind slug tail
TP HOlWTTSL - Water holdup ahead of slug tail
TP JSLF Section number of slug front
TP JSLT Section number of slug tail
TP LSB M Slug bubble length
TP LSL M Slug length
TP PTJF PA Pressure at slug front
TP PTJT PA Pressure at slug tail
TP SID Slug id
TP SLTYPF Type of slug front
TP SLTYPT Type of slug tail
TP SLUQF M/S Volume flux throgh slug front
TP SLUQT M/S Volume flux throgh slug tail
TP UDFSB M/S Droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDFSL M/S Droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDHLFSB M/S Oil droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDHLFSL M/S Oil droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDHLTSB M/S Oil droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDHLTSL M/S Oil droplet velocity ahead of slug tail
TP UDTSB M/S Droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDTSL M/S Droplet velocity ahead of slug tail
TP UDWTFSB M/S Water droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDWTFSL M/S Water droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDWTTSB M/S Water droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDWTTSL M/S Water droplet velocity ahead of slug tail

435
SlugTracking Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Slug Variables
TP UGFSB M/S Gas velocity ahead of slug front
TP UGFSL M/S Gas velocity behind slug front
TP UGTSB M/S Gas velocity behind slug tail
TP UGTSL M/S Gas velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULFSB M/S Liquid velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULFSL M/S Liquid velocity behind slug front
TP ULHLFSB M/S Oil velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULHLFSL M/S Oil velocity behind slug front
TP ULHLTSB M/S Oil velocity behind slug tail
TP ULHLTSL M/S Oil velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULTSB M/S Liquid velocity behind slug tail
TP ULTSL M/S Liquid velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULWTFSB M/S Water velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULWTFSL M/S Water velocity behind slug front
TP ULWTTSB M/S Water velocity behind slug tail
TP ULWTTSL M/S Water velocity ahead of slug tail
TP USF M/S Slug front velocity
TP UST M/S Slug tail velocity
TP ZFSL M Slug front position
TP ZTSL M Slug tail position

Global Variables
GTP/GO NSLUG Total number of slugs in the pipeline
GTP/GO SLUPRO Number of slugs initiated

436
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Source Variables
QGSTSOUR, QLSTSOUR, QOSTSOUR and QWSTSOUR are given at standard conditions (60 oF, 1
atm). A single stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass transfer
between the phases from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not dehydrated
unless WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and
densities from the fluid property file to perform the conversion.

Note: These variables are CPU demanding for Compositional Tracking simulations since a flash must
be performed for each section and time they are plotted, and should be used with care.

PTSOUR is the pressure specified in a pressure driven source. If the pressure is not given as input to
the source this variable will return the pressure of the section where the source is located.

Use as Name Units Definition

Source Variables
TP/C/GTP DGGSDP kg/s-Pa Gas mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP/C/GTP DGLTHLSDP kg/s-Pa Oil mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP/C/GTP DGLTWTSDP kg/s-Pa Water mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP/C/GTP DPDGGS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. gas mass flow
TP/C/GTP DPDGLTHLS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. oil mass flow
TP/C/GTP DPDGLTWTS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. water mass flow
TP/C/GTP GGSOUR KG/S Source gas mass rate
TP/C/GTP GLHLMA KG/S Source oil mass rate
TP/C/GTP GLSOUR KG/S Source liquid mass rate
TP/C/GTP GLWTMA KG/S Source water mass rate
TP/C/GTP GTSOUR KG/S Source mass rate
TP/C/GTP HSOURC W Source enthalpy
TP/C/GTP PTSOUR PA Valve-source pressure
Source gas volume flow at standard
TP/C/GTP QGSTSOUR SM3/S
conditions
Source liquid volume flow at standard
TP/C/GTP QLSTSOUR SM3/S
conditions
Source oil volume flow at standard
TP/C/GTP QOSTSOUR SM3/S
conditions
Source water volume flow at standard
TP/C/GTP QWSTSOUR SM3/S
conditions
TP/C/GTP TMSOUR C Valve-source temperature
TP/C/GTP TSOUR C Source temperature
TP/C/GTP USGSOU M/S Source superf. gas velocity

437
 SteamAndSingle Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

SteamAndSingle Variables
Steam and single component variables can only be used when COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC
or COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE in the OPTIONS keyword.

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C PSAT PA Saturation pressure at fluid temperature
TP/PP/C PVAP PA Partial pressure of vapor
TP/PP/C TSAT C Saturation temperature at system pressure
TP/PP/C TSV C Vapor temperature

438
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

TracerTracking Variables
Tracer tracking variables can only be used when TRACERTRACKING=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.
Use as Name Units Definition
TracerFeed Variables
TP/PP/C CONCTOTTRACEROIL - Conc. wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer feed
CONCTOTTRACERWATE
TP/PP/C - Conc. wrt. water carrier phase of tracer feed
R
TP/PP/C GTOTTRACER KG/S Total mass flow rate of tracer feed
TP/PP/C MTOTTRACER KG Mass of tracer feed
TP/PP/C RESTIMED S Droplet residence time of tracer feed
TP/PP/C RESTIMEL S Film residence time of tracer feed
TP/PP/C RESTIMET S Residence time of tracer feed
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMDTOTTRACER Specific droplet mass of tracer feed
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLTOTTRACER Specific film mass of tracer feed
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMTOTTRACER Specific mass of tracer feed
3
TP/PP/C TOTAGETRACER S Average age of tracer feed
TP/PP/C XTOTTRACEROIL - Mass fraction wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer feed
Mass fraction wrt. water carrier phase of tracer
TP/PP/C XTOTTRACERWATER -
feed

FeedAge Variables
TP/PP/C AGEDTRACER S Droplet age of tracer age group
TP/PP/C AGEFTRACER S Film age of tracer age group
TP/PP/C AGETRACER S Age of tracer age group
TP/PP/C CONCTRACEROIL - Conc.wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer age group
TP/PP/C CONCTRACERWATER - Conc. wrt. water carrier phase of tracer age group
Mass flow rate of oil in droplet field of tracer age
TP/PP/C GDHLTRACER KG/S
group
TP/PP/C GDTRACER KG/S Droplet mass flow of tracer age group
Mass flow rate of water in droplet field of tracer
TP/PP/C GDWTTRACER KG/S
age group
TP/PP/C GGTRACER KG/S Gas mass flow of tracer age group
TP/PP/C GLHLTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in film of tracer age group
TP/PP/C GLTHLTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of oil of tracer age group
TP/PP/C GLTRACER KG/S Liquid bulk mass flow of tracer age group
TP/PP/C GLTTRACER KG/S Total liquid mass flow of tracer age group
Mass flow rate of water excluding vapour of tracer
TP/PP/C GLTWTTRACER KG/S
age group

439
TracerTracking Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

FeedAge Variables
TP/PP/C GLWTTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of water in film of tracer age group
TP/PP/C GTTRACER KG/S Total mass flow rate of tracer for tracer age group
TP/PP/C MDTRACER KG Droplet mass of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MGTRACER KG Mass of gas of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MLHLTRACER KG Mass of oil in film of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MLTHLTRACER KG Mass of oil of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MLTRACER KG Film mass of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MLTTRACER KG Total liquid mass of tracer age group
TP/PP/C MLTWTTRACER KG Mass of water in film of tracer age group
Mass of water excluding vapour of tracer age
TP/PP/C MLWTTRACER KG
group
TP/PP/C MTRACER KG Mass of tracer age group
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMDTRACER Specific droplet mass of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMGTRACER Specific mass of gas of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLHLTRACER Specific mass of oil in film of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLTHLTRACER Specific mass oil of of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLTRACER Specific film mass of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLTTRACER Specific total liquid mass of tracer age group
3
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMLTWTTRACER Specific mass of water in film of tracer age group
3
KG/M Specific mass of water excluding vapour of tracer
TP/PP/C SMLWTTRACER
3 age group
KG/M
TP/PP/C SMTRACER Specific mass of tracer age group
3
Mass fraction wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer age
TP/PP/C XTRACEROIL -
group
Mass fraction wrt. water carrier phase of tracer
TP/PP/C XTRACERWATER -
age group

Source Variables
TP/GTP GSTRACER KG/S Tracer source mass flow rate

440
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Valve Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Valve Variables
TP/C/GTP ARCH M2 Choke area
TP/C/GTP CV Valve CV (0 for chokes)
TP/C/GTP GCRIT KG/S Critical mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GVALVE KG/S Valve mass flow
TP/C/GTP ICRIT Valve critical flow: 0=subcrit, 1=crit
TP/C/GTP PVALVE PA Valve pressure
TP/C/GTP TTHRC C Critical temperature at throat
TP/C/GTP TVALVE C Valve temperature
TP/C/GTP UCRIT M/S Critical velocity at throat
TP/C/GTP UVALVE M/S Valve velocity
TP/C/GTP VALSCC Valve sub-critical coefficient
TP/C/GTP VALVAR M2 Valve flow area
TP/C/GTP VALVDP PA Subcritical pressure drop across valve
TP/C/GTP VALVOP Relative valve opening
TP/C/GTP WCRIT KG/S-M2 Critical mass flux at throat

441
 Volume Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Volume Variables
SSP gives an average speed of sound in fluid. However, it is only calculated if SOUND_CFL = ON in
keyword DTCONTROL. Else, the value is 0.

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables

TP/PP/C ACCDPZA PA Integrated additional pressure drop along branch

TP/PP/C ACCDPZF PA Integrated frictional pressure drop along branch
TP/PP/C ACCDPZG PA Integrated gravitational pressure drop along branch
TP/PP/C ACCLIQBR M3 Accumulated liquid volume along branch
TP/PP/C ACCOILBR M3 Accumulated oil volume along branch
TP/PP/C ACCWATBR M3 Accumulated water volume along branch
TP/PP/C/N/SEP AL - Void (gas volume fraction)
TP/PP/C ANGLE Pipe angle
TP/PP/C/N/SEP BE - Liquid film volume fraction
TP/PP/C/N/SEP BEHL - Oil film volume fraction
TP/PP/C BEHLCONT - Volume fraction of oil in continuous layer.
TP/PP/C BEHLDISP - Volume fraction of oil dispersed in water.
TP/PP/C/N/SEP BEWT - Water film volume fraction
TP/PP/C BEWTCONT - Volume fraction of water in continuous layer.
TP/PP/C BEWTDISP - Volume fraction of water dispersed in oil.
TP/PP/C CPG J/KG-C Specific heat of gas phase
TP/PP/C CPHL J/KG-C Specific heat of oil phase
TP/PP/C CPWT J/KG-C Specific heat of water phase
TP/PP/C CVOL Volume error control factor
TP/PP/C DIAM M Pipe diameter
TP/PP/C DPHYD PA Difference between section and hydrate pressure
TP/PP/C DPZ PA/M Space derivative of pressure
TP/PP/C DRGP KG/M-N Pressure derivative of gas density
TP/PP/C DRHLDP S2/M2 Pressure derivative of oil density
TP/PP/C DRWTDP S2/M2 Pressure derivative of water density
Difference between hydrate and section
TP/PP/C DTHYD C
temperature
TP/PP/C DTM C/S Time derivative of temperature
TP/PP/C ESTRESTIMEW S Residence time of water
TP/PP/C/N/SEP GA - Liquid droplet volume fraction
TP/PP/C/N/SEP GAHL - Oil droplet volume fraction
Gas mass fraction relative to the mass from all
TP/PP/C GASMFR -
phases
TP/PP/C/N/SEP GAWT - Water droplet volume fraction
TP/PP/C HDIAM M Hydraulic diameter

442
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C HG J/KG Enthalpy gas
TP/PP/C HL J/KG Enthalpy liquid
TP/PP/C/N/SEP HOL - Holdup (liquid volume fraction)
TP/PP/C HOLHL - Oil volume fraction
TP/PP/C HOLWT - Water volume fraction
TP/PP/C HTK W/M2-C Heat transfer coefficient of inner wall
TP/PP/C HTKO W/M2-C Ambient heat transfer coefficient
TP/PP/C IDIAM M Inner diameter
TP/PP/C INCL DEGREE Inclination from horizontal
TP/PP/C INHIBMFR - Inhibitor mass fraction in water
TP/PP/C KAPPA 1/Pa Compressibility of fluid
TP/PP/C KAPPAWALL 1/Pa Compressibility of pipe wall
TP/PP/C MACH - Mach number
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MD KG/M3 Specific mass droplet
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MDHL KG/M3 Specific mass of oil droplets
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MDWT KG/M3 Specific mass of water droplets
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MG KG/M3 Specific mass gas
TP/PP/C MHLCONT KG/M3 Specific oil continuous mass
TP/PP/C MHLDISP KG/M3 Specific oil dispersed in water mass
TP/PP/C/N/SEP ML KG/M3 Specific mass liquid
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MLHL KG/M3 Specific mass of oil in film
TP/PP/C MLT KG/M3 Total liquid mass
TP/PP/C MLTHL KG/M3 Specific mass oil
TP/PP/C MLTWT KG/M3 Specific mass water
TP/PP/C/N/SEP MLWT KG/M3 Specific mass of water in film
TP/PP/C MWTCONT KG/M3 Specific water continuous mass
TP/PP/C MWTDISP KG/M3 Specific water dispersed in oil mass
Oil mass fraction relative to the mass from all
TP/PP/C OILMFR -
phases
TP/PP/C PSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to gas phase
TP/PP/C PSIHL KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to oil phase
TP/PP/C PSIWT KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to water phase
TP/PP/C/N/SEP PT PA Pressure
TP/PP/C PTMAX PA Maximum pressure
TP/PP/C PTMIN PA Minimum pressure
TP/PP/C Q2 W/M2-C Overall heat transfer coefficient
TP/PP/C QM W/M Heat loss per unit length from pipe wall to fluid
TP/PP/C RELLENGTH M Distance from start of flowpath/branch to section
TP/PP/C ROG KG/M3 Density of gas
TP/PP/C ROHL KG/M3 Oil density

443
Volume Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
TP/PP/C ROL KG/M3 Density of liquid
TP/PP/C ROWT KG/M3 Water density
Gas mass fraction relative to hydrocarbon liquid
TP/PP/C RS -
and gas mass; (MG/(MG+MLTHL))from PVT table
TP/PP/C RSW - Mass fraction of water vapour in gas
TP/PP/C SECLENGTH M Section length
TP/PP/C SEG J/KG-K Gas entropy
TP/PP/C SEL J/KG-K Liquid entropy
TP/PP/C SIG N/M Surface tension
TP/PP/C SSP M/S Speed of sound in fluid
TP/PP/C TCONG W/M-K Thermal conductivity of gas phase
TP/PP/C TCONHL W/M-K Thermal conductivity of oil phase
TP/PP/C TCONWT W/M-K Thermal conductivity of water phase
TP/PP/C TINHIBMFR - Total inhibitor mass fraction in water+ vapor
TP/PP/C/N/SEP TM C Fluid temperature
TP/PP/C TMMAX C Maximum Fluid temperature
TP/PP/C TMMIN C Minimum Fluid temperature
TP/PP/C TU C Ambient temperature
Temperature in center of gravity of wall (-100 C for
TP/PP/C TW C
non-existing layers)
TP/PP/C TWATMFR - Total water mass fraction
TP/PP/C TWS C Inner wall surface temperature
TP/PP/C TWSO C Outer wall surface temperature
TP/PP/C UHLDISP M/S Oil dispersed in water velocity
TP/PP/C UWTDISP M/S Water dispersed in oil velocity
TP/PP/C VISG N-S/M2 Gas viscosity
TP/PP/C VISHL N-S/M2 Oil viscosity including wax/meg/mud effects
TP/PP/C VISHLEFF N-S/M2 Effective oil viscosity including dispersion effects
TP/PP/C VISHLTAB N-S/M2 Oil viscosity from fluid tables
TP/PP/C VISL N-S/M2 Liquid viscosity (no water-slip)
TP/PP/C VISWT N-S/M2 Water viscosity including wax/meg/mud effects
Effective water viscosity including dispersion
TP/PP/C VISWTEFF N-S/M2
effects
TP/PP/C VISWTTAB N-S/M2 Water viscosity from fluid tables
TP/PP/C/N/SEP VOL - Volume error
TP/PP/C VOLCHANGE - Relative change in volume
TP/PP/C WACBEWA - Volume fraction of free water to total liquid film
TP/PP/C WACWA - Volume fraction of free water to total water in film
TP/PP/C WALLROUGH M Pipe wall roughness

444
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Volume Variables
Water mass fraction relative to the mass from all
TP/PP/C WATMFR -
phases
TP/PP/C WC - Water cut (In-situ)
TP/PP/C WCWALL - Water cut near wall

445
 Waxdeposition Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Waxdeposition Variables
Wax deposition variables can only be used when WAXDEPOSITION=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.

Use as Name Units Definition

Branch Variables
TP/C/GTP MLTWLBR KG Mass of dissolved wax in branch
TP/C/GTP MLTWSBR KG Mass of suspended wax in branch
TP/C/GTP MTWXBR KG Total mass of wax in branch
TP/C/GTP WAXMASBR KG Wax deposit mass in branch
TP/C/GTP WAXVOLBR M3 Wax deposit volume in branch
Boundary Variables
TP/PP/C ACCGLTWL KG Accumulated dissolved wax mass flow
TP/PP/C ACCGLTWS KG Accumulated suspended wax mass flow
TP/PP/C GWXDIP KG/S Mass flow rate of wax dispersed in oil
TP/PP/C GWXDIS KG/S Mass flow rate of wax dissolved in oil
Volume Variables
TP/PP/C BEWX - Volume fraction of wax dispersed in oil film
TP/PP/C DXWX M Thickness of wax layer deposited at wall
TP/PP/C GAWX - Volume fraction of wax dispersed in oil droplet field
TP/PP/C LEWIS Lewis number
TP/PP/C MWXDIP KG/M3 Mass of wax dispersed in oil
TP/PP/C MWXDIS KG/M3 Mass of wax dissolved in oil
TP/PP/C MWXWAL KG/M3 Specific wax mass at wall
TP/PP/C SCHMIDT Schmidt number
TP/PP/C TWSWX C Inner wall surface temperature adjusted for wax layer
TP/PP/C WAX_TCOND W/M-K Thermal conductivity of wax film, porosity included
TP/PP/C WAXAP C Wax appearance temperature
TP/PP/C WAXPOROSITY - Wax porosity (oil volume fraction in wax film)
TP/PP/C WXAVDC M2/S Molar average wax diffusion coefficient
TP/PP/C WXCDCDR 1/M Concentration gradient of dissolved wax near wall
TP/PP/C WXCDIFFC M2/S Wax component diffusion coefficient
TP/PP/C WXCMCDB Molar concentration of dissolved wax components in bulk
TP/PP/C WXCMCDW Molar concentration of dissolved wax near wall
TP/PP/C WXDIFFC M2/S Apparent wax diffusion coefficient
TP/PP/C WXDR M Laminar boundary layer thickness
TP/PP/C WXMPREC KG/S Wax mass precipitation rate
TP/PP/C WXMTRW KG/S Net wax mass transport rate to wall (diffusi+ shear)
TP/PP/C WXMTRWD KG/S Wax mass transport rate to wall due to diffusion
TP/PP/C WXMTRWS KG/S Wax mass transport rate to wall due to shear

446
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Use as Name Units Definition

Pig Variables
TP/C/GTP ACCPWXM KG Accumulated wax mass removed from wall by pig
TP/C/GTP ACCPWXV M3 Accumulated wax volume removed from wall by pig
TP/C/GTP PIGWXBRF N Pig-wax breaking force
TP/C/GTP PIGWXPFF N Pig-wax plug friction force
TP/C/GTP PIGWXPLASTV N-S/M2 Pig-wax plug plastic viscosity
TP/C/GTP PIGWXPLEN M Pig-wax plug friction length
TP/C/GTP PIGWXYIELDS PA Pig-wax plug yield stress

447
 Well Variables OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Well Variables
QGSTWELL, QLSTWELL, QOSTWELL and QWSTWELL are given at standard conditions. A single stage
flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the
gas mass fractions and densities from the fluid property file to perform the conversion. The gas is not
dehydrated unless WATERFLASH = OFF.

Note: The standard gas density can be given in the well input as ROGST, but this is not used when
calculating QGSTWELL. This means that there will be a difference between the given QGSTWELL and
the standard gas flowrate given by the well equations, since ROGST is used to convert to gas mass rate
and the value in the fluid property file is used to convert back to QGSTWELL (correspondingly for ROLST
and QOSTWELL/QLSTWELL).

Note: These variables are CPU demanding for Compositional Tracking simulations since a flash must
be performed for each section and time they are plotted, and should be used with care.

Use as Name Units Definition

Well Variables
TP/C/GTP GASFRT M Well source gas cone front
TP/C/GTP GGSWST KG/S Well source steady-state gas mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GGWELL KG/S Well source gas mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GHLWST KG/S Well source steady-state oil mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GLHLWE KG/S Well source oil mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GLTWST KG/S Well source steady-state liquid mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GLWELL KG/S Well source liquid mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GLWTWE KG/S Well source water mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GTWELL KG/S Well source mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP GWTWST KG/S Well source steady-state water mass flow rate
TP/C/GTP HWELL W Well source enthalpy
TP/C/GTP OILFRT M Well source oil cone front
TP/C/GTP QGSTWELL SM3/S Well gas volume flow at standard conditions
TP/C/GTP QLSTWELL SM3/S Well liquid volume flow at standard conditions
TP/C/GTP QOSTWELL SM3/S Well oil volume flow at standard conditions
TP/C/GTP QWSTWELL SM3/S Well water volume flow at standard conditions
TP/C/GTP WATFRT M Well source water cone front

448
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Appendix B

List of Units and

Conversion Factors

449
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

1/rpm
s 0.016667
1/ANGULAR_VELOCITY M
h 60
d 1440
1/m3/s
1/ft3/s 35.3107
1/m3/h 3600
1/FLOWRATE 1/ft3/h 127119
1/bbl/d 543396
1/m3/d 86400
1/bbl/M 377.358
1/m
1/ft 3.28084
1/cm 100
1/LENGTH 1/in 39.3701
1/MILES 0.000621371
1/km 0.001
1/mm 1000
1/Pa
1/atm 9.87167e-06
1/bar 1e-05
1/PRESSURE_DIFFERENCE 1/psi 0.000145033
1/KP/cm2 1.01972e-05
1/kPa 0.001
1/kgf/cm2 1.01972e-05
1/Sm3/s
1/MSm3/s 1e-06
1/Sm3/d 86400
1/STDFLOWRATE 1/MSm3/d 0.0864
1/scf/d 3.05e+06
1/MMscf/d 3.05
1/scf/s 0.0283
m/s2
ft/s2 0.3048
ACCELERATION
cm/s2 0.01
in/s2 0.0254

450
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

DEGREE
ANGLE
rad 57.2958
rad/s2
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION
R/s2 6.2832
rpm
ANGULAR_VELOCITY rad/s 9.549
1/s 60
m2
ft2 0.0929
AREA
cm2 0.0001
in2 0.0006451
Sm3/Sm3
STB/SCF 5.61458
CGR
SCF/SCF
STB/MMSCF 5.61458e-06
CORROSION_RATE mm/y
kg/m3
lb/ft3 16.02
DENSITY
g/cm3 1000
lb/in3 27680
kg/m-N
DENSITY/PRESSURE
s2/m2
kg/m3-K
DENSITY/TEMPERATURE
kg/m3-C
DENSITY/TIME kg/m3-s
m2/s
DIFFUSION_COEFFICIENT
cm2/s 0.0001
N-s/m2
lb/ft-h 0.0004134
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY
CP 0.001
kg/m-h 0.0002778
J
ENTHALPY Btu 1055
cal 4.187
J/kg
ENTHALPY/MASS Btu/lb 2326
cal/kg 4.187

451
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

J/mol
ENTHALPY/MOL Btu/lbmol 2.326
cal/mol 4.187
J/mol-K
ENTHALPY/MOL-TEMP
Btu/lbmol-R 4.187
J/m3
ENTHALPY/VOLUME Btu/ft3 37260
cal/m3 4.187
J/K
ENTROPY Btu/R 1899
cal/K 4.187
J/kg-K
Btu/lb-R 4187
ENTROPY/MASS
cal/kg-K 4.187
J/kg-C
J/mol-K
ENTROPY/MOL Btu/lbmol-R 4187
cal/mol-K 4.187
J/m3-K
ENTROPY/VOLUME Btu/ft3-R 37260
cal/m3-K 4.187
N
dyn 1e-05
FORCE
kgf 9.819
lbf 4.4482
-
FRACTION
% 0.01
1/s
1/M 0.016667
FREQUENCY
1/h 0.000277778
Hz
FRICTION_FACTOR Ns/m

452
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

Sm3/s
Sm3/h 0.00027778
Sm3/d 1.1574e-05
scf/d 3.2774e-07
MMscf/d 0.32774
GAS_STDFLOWRATE STB/d 1.8401e-06
STB/M 0.002651
scf/s 0.0283169
scf/h 7.8667e-06
MSm3/d 11.574
Mscf/d 0.000327778
m3
ft3 0.02832
cm3 1e-06
GAS_VOLUME
L 0.001
USgal 0.003786
bbl 0.158987
m3/s
ft3/s 0.02832
m3/h 0.00027778
GAS_VOLUME/TIME ft3/h 7.8667e-06
bbl/d 1.841e-06
m3/d 1.1574e-05
bbl/m 0.002651
Sm3/Sm3
SCF/STB 0.17811
GOR
SCF/SCF
MMSCF/STB 178110
W/m
HEAT_TRANS./LENGTH Btu/s-ft 3461
kW/m 1000
W/m2
kW/m2 1000
HEATFLUX W/cm2 10000
Btu/ft2-s 11360
Btu/in2-s 1.635e+06
m2/s
CST 1e-06
KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY
FT2/HR 2.5806e-05
in2/s 0.00064516

453
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

m
ft 0.3048
cm 0.01
LENGTH in 0.0254
MILES 1609.34
km 1000
mm 0.001
Sm3/s
Sm3/h 0.00027778
Sm3/d 1.1574e-05
scf/d 3.2774e-07
MMscf/d 0.32774
LIQ_STDFLOWRATE STB/d 1.8401e-06
STB/M 0.002651
scf/s 0.0283169
scf/h 7.8667e-06
MSm3/d 11.574
Mscf/d 0.000327778
m3
ft3 0.02832
cm3 1e-06
LIQ_VOLUME
L 0.001
USgal 0.003786
bbl 0.158987
m3/s
ft3/s 0.02832
m3/h 0.00027778
LIQ_VOLUME/TIME ft3/h 7.8667e-06
bbl/d 1.841e-06
m3/d 1.1574e-05
bbl/m 0.002651
LOGARITHMIC_FRICTION_FACTOR N/m2
kg
lb 0.4536
MASS g 0.001
oz 0.02835
t 1000

454
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

kg/m2
g/m2 0.001
g/cm2 10
MASS/AREA
kg/ft2 10.7639
g/ft2 0.010764
g/in2 1.55
kg/s
lb/s 0.4536
MASS/TIME
kg/h 0.00027778
lb/h 0.000126
kg/s-m2
kg/s-cm2 10000
MASS/TIME-AREA lb/s-m2 0.4536
kg/h-m2 0.00027778
lb/h-m2 0.000126
kg/s-Pa
MASS/TIME-PRESSURE
lb/s-psi 6.5788e-05
mol
MOL lbmol 453.6
kmol 1000
mol/kg
MOL/MASS lbmol/lb 1000
mol/g 1000
mol/m3
lbmol/ft3 16020
MOL/VOLUME
mol/cm3 1e+06
mol/L 1000
kmol/s
MOLAR_RATE lbmol/s 0.4536
mol/s 0.001
mol/m4
MOLCONC/METER lbmol/ft4 52550
mol/cm4 1e+08
MOLDEN/TEMPERATURE mol/m3-K
kg/kmol
lb/lbmol
MOLECULAR_WEIGHT
kg/mol 1000
g/mol

455
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

mD
PERMEABILITY
D 1000
W
hp 745.7
POWER
Btu/h 0.2931
kW 1000
W/m
hp/m 745.7
POWER/LENGHT
Btu/h*m 0.2931
kW/m 1000
k 1000
M 1e+06
POWERS_OF_TEN
G 1e+09
T 1e+12
Pa
bara 100000
psia 6895
atm 101300
bar 100000
PRESSURE
KP/cm2 98066.5
kPa 1000
psig 6895
barg 100000
kgf/cm2 98066.5
Pa/m
PRESSURE/DISTANCE
psi/ft 22621
Pa/s
bar/s 100000
PRESSURE/TIME
psi/s 6895
atm/s 101300
Pa
bara 100000
psia 6895
atm 101300
bar 100000
PRESSURE_DIFFERENCE
KP/cm2 98066.5
kPa 1000
psig 6895
barg 100000
kgf/cm2 98066.5

456
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

Pa-s/kg
PRESSURE-TIME/MASS
psi-s/lb 15200.3
QUADRATIC_FRICTION_FACTOR Ns2/m2
s
M 0.01667
RATE_PER_UNIT_TIME
h 0.0002778
d 1.157e-05
SPGR
RELATIVE_DENSITY
API 131.5
RESVOLUME/STDVOLUME Rm3/Sm3
m3/R
SPECIFIC_CAPACITY
ft3/R 0.02832
J/kg-C
J/kg-K
SPECIFIC_HEAT
Btu/lbm-R 4186.8
Btu/lbm-F 4186.8
Sm3
SCF 0.02832
Scm3 1e-06
SL 0.001
STANDARD_VOLUME
Sgal 0.003786
MMscf 28316.8
Mscf 28.3168
Sbbl 0.158987
STD_DENSITY kg/Sm3
Sm3/s/Pa
Sm3/d/bar 1.1574e-10
STDFLOWRATE/PRESSURE
scf/d/psi 4.7533e-11
STB/d/psi 2.6687e-10
N/m
SURFACE_TENSION DYNE/cm 0.001
mN/m 1e-06
C
R 0.555556
TEMPERATURE
K
F 0.555556

457
 OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

C/s
TEMPERATURE/TIME R/s 0.5556
K/s
C
R 0.555556
TEMPERATURE_DIFFERENCE
K
F 0.555556
W/m2-C
W/m2-K
THERMAL_CONDUCTANCE
Btu/ft2-h-F 5.678
cal/m2-h-C 0.001163
W/m-K
W/m-C
THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY
Btu/ft-h-R 1.731
cal/m-h-K 0.001163
1/C
1/R 1.8
THERMAL_EXPANSION
1/K
1/F 1.8
s
M 60
TIME h 3600
d 86400
1/rpm 60
Nm
TORQUE
ft-lb 1.35582
m/s
ft/s 0.3048
VELOCITY m/h 0.0002778
ft/h 8.467e-05
MILES/h 0.447
m3/kg
ft3/lb 0.06243
VOLUME/MASS
cm3/g 0.001
in3/lb 3.613e-05

458
OLGA 6.3 USER MANUAL

Quantity Unit name Conversion to the first unit, multiply by

m3/mol
ft3/lbmol 6.243e-05
VOLUME/MOL
cm3/mol 1e-06
L/mol 0.001
m3/R
VOLUME/REVOLUTION
ft3/R 0.02832
m3
ft3 0.02832
cm3 1e-06
WAX_VOLUME
L 0.001
USgal 0.003786
bbl 0.158987

459
www.sptgroup.com

A product by